OF THE 
 
 U N I VERS ITY 
 Of ILLINOIS 
 
 491.5a 
 
 R19 3 
 
rm 
 ' . .A •; 
 
 Return this book on or before the 
 Latest Date stamped below. 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ♦ 
 
 ♦ 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 ♦ 
 
 
 
 
 
 “S 
 
 
\ 
 
 A GRAMMAR 
 
 OF THE 
 
 PUKHTO, PUSHTO, 
 
 OR 
 
 LANGUAGE OF THE AFGHANS; 
 
 IN WHICH 
 
 THE RULES ARE ILLUSTRATED BY EXAMPLES FROM THE BEST 
 WRITERS, BOTH POETICAL AND PROSE ; 
 
 TOGETHER WITH 
 
 TRANSLATIONS FROM THE ARTICLES OF WAR, &c. 
 
 AND REMARKS OH THE 
 
 LANGUAGE, LITERATURE, AND DESCENT 
 
 OF THE 
 
 AFGHAN TEIBES. 
 
 By LIEUTENANT H. G. RAVERTY, 
 
 THIRD REGIMENT, BOMBAY N. I., ASSISTANT COMMISSIONER, MULTAN, 
 
 . A ^ 
 
 9 9 
 
 u af i^jL. ^ 
 
 Persian scholars place the finger of amazement in their mouths. 
 
 When Hamid composeth in the Pukhto tongue.” 
 
 Abd-ul-Hamid . 
 
 CALCUTTA : 
 
 PRINTED BY J. THOMAS, AT THE BAPTIST MISSION TRESS, 
 
 1855. 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
0 
 
 
 
 TO THE MOST NOBLE 
 
 JAMES ANDREW, MARQUIS OF DALII0US1E, K, T, 
 
 fiKobernors General of EriBia, 
 
 &c. &c. &c. 
 
 THIS GRAMMAR OR THE PUSHTO LANGUAGE 
 
 VI 
 
 <3 
 
 A 
 
 3^ 
 
 >- 
 
 TPi 
 
 is, 
 
 WITH THE GREATEST RESPECT, 
 
 DEDICATED BY 
 
 HIS LORDSHIP’S MOST OBEDIENT, HUMBLE SERVANT, 
 
 H. G. RAVERTY, Lieut. 
 
 3d Regiment , Bombay N. I. 
 
 
 1 200328 
 

 Digitized by the Internet Archive 
 in 2016 
 
 https://archive.org/details/grammarofpukhtop01rave 
 
NAMES OP SUBSCRIBERS 
 
 The Government of India, through J. Lawrence, Esq. C. S., Chief Commis- 
 sioner for the Panjab, 
 
 Lieut.-Governor N. W. Provinces, Agra, 
 
 His Excellency General Sir W. M. Gomm, K. C. B., Commander-in-Chief in 
 India, 
 
 R. Montgomery, Esq., Judicial Commissioner for the Panjab, 
 
 D. W. McLeod, Esq., Financial Commissioner for the Panjab, . , . . 
 
 Lieut.-Colonel R. Napier, Chief Engineer, Panjab, . . . . 
 
 UMBALLA. 
 
 G. Barnes, Esq., C. S., Commissioner, Cis-Sutlej States, 
 F. Cooper, Esq., C. S., Asst. Commissioner, 
 
 A. Leiven, Esq., C. S., Asst. Commissioner, 
 
 F. C. Vaughan, Esq., Extra Asst. Commissioner, 
 
 Rev. J. M. Jamieson, for American Mission, 
 
 FEROZEPORE. 
 
 Arthur Brandretli, Esq., C. S , Asst. Commissioner, . . 
 Lieut. P. F. DeQuincey, H. M., /Oth Foot, 
 
 Lieut. J. G. Gowan, 18th N. I., 
 
 Ensign G. D. Crawford, 18th N. I., 
 
 LAHORE. 
 
 C. Raikes, Esq., C. S., Commr. and Superintendent, . . 
 G. D. Westropp, Esq., Extra Asst. Commissioner, 
 
 W. Penn, Esq., Extra Asst. Commissioner, 
 
 MOOLTAN. 
 
 Major G. W. Hamilton, Commr. and Superintendent, 
 Capt. B. M. Loveday, Asst. Commissioner, 
 
 H. B. Henderson, Esq., C. S., Deputy Commissioner, 
 J. W. McNabb, Esq., C. S., Asst. Commissioner, 
 
 T. H. Kavanagh, Esq., Extra Assistant, . . 
 
11 
 
 NAMES OF SUBSCRIBERS. 
 
 Copies 
 
 Lieut. Thos. Nicholl, Adjutant of Artillery, . . . . . . 1 
 
 Lieut. F. E. Dickens, Artillery, . , . . , . . . 1 
 
 R. H. Irvine, Esq., M. D., Staff Surgeon, . . . . . . 1 
 
 Major A. Cunningham, Bengal Engineers, . . . . . . 1 
 
 Captain W. Gordon, Brigade Major, . . . . . . . . 1 
 
 Captain G. W. McBamet, Cantonement Magistrate, . . . . . . 1 
 
 Lieut. D. Newall, Horse Artillery, . . . . . . . . 1 
 
 Lieut. F. B. Norman, 14th N. I., . . . . . . . . 1 
 
 H. S. Batson, Esq., Surgeon, 14th N. I., . . . . . . 1 
 
 Henry Tytler, Esq., Asst. Surgeon, 55th N. I., .. .. . . 1 
 
 Ensign E. H. Woodcock, 55th N. I., . ; . . . . . . 1 
 
 W. W. Wright, Esq., Deputy Collector, Kuhror, , . . . . . 1 
 
 Thompson, Esq., Extra Asst. Commissioner, . . . . . . 1 
 
 A. Gardner, Esq., . . . . . . . . . . 1 
 
 Lieut. Hon’ble C. E. Hobart, Asst. Commissioner, .. .. 1 
 
 P. O’Brien, Esq., Canal Dept. 
 
 KANGHUR. 
 
 Captain F. E. Voyle, Deputy Commissioner, . . . . . . 1 
 
 Lieut. W, McNeile, Asst. Commissioner, . . . . . . 1 
 
 MITTUNKOTE. 
 
 Captain G. W. Bristow, Asst. Commissioner, . . , , . . 1 
 
 W. C. Wood, Esq., Extra Asst. Commissioner, . . . . . . 1 
 
 ASNEE. 
 
 Lieut. G. Maister, Artillery, . . . . . . . . . . 1 
 
 Captain H. Bruce, 5th Panjab Cavalry, . . . . . . 1 
 
 LEIA. 
 
 Major D. Ross, Commr. and Superintendent, . . . . . . 1 
 
 DERAH ISMAiEL KHAN. 
 
 Major J. Nicholson, Deputy Commissioner, . . . . . . I 
 
 BUNNOO. 
 
 Captain J. L. Vaughan, 5th Panjab I. .. •• 1 
 
 Lieut. J. B. Lind, Adjutant 5th Panjab I. . . . . . . 1 
 
 GOOZARIA. 
 
 Major F. C. Marsden, Deputy Commissioner, . . . . . . I 
 
 Fendall Thompson, Esq., C. S., Deputy Commissioner, . . . . I 
 
 W. McMahon, Esq., Extra Assistant, . . . , . , • • I 
 
NAMES OF SUBSCRIBERS. 
 
 JHUNG. 
 
 H. Monckton, Esq., C. S., Deputy Commissioner, 
 Lieut. W. E. Davis, Asst. Commissioner, 
 
 S. Stroyan, Esq., Extra Assistant, . . . . 
 
 WUZEERABAD. 
 
 Lieut. D. Reid, H. M.’s 61st Regiment, 
 
 Captain W. Bushe, 24th N. I. Major of Brigade, 
 
 SEALKOTE. 
 
 Captain J. Chambers, 21st N. I., 
 
 Lieut. E. Simeon, Artillery, 
 
 Ensign Jas. C. P. Baillie, 30th L. I., 
 
 JULLUNDER. 
 
 M. P. Edgeworth, Esq., C. S., Commr. and Superintendent, 
 Captain E. P. Gordon, H. M.’s 75th Regiment, 
 
 Johnstone, Esq., Post Master, 
 
 Captain G. S., 
 
 Lieut. J. B. Smyly, 29th N. I., 
 
 Lieut. F. A. Dickens, 31st N. I., 
 
 JHELUM. 
 
 Captain J. P. Caulfield, 3rd Regt. N. I., 
 
 Captain A. Mayer, 58th Regt. N. I., . . 
 
 Lieut. G. J. Dairy mple Hay, 18th Irr. Cavalry, 
 Lieut. Charles Pollard, Engineers, 
 
 R. Simpson, Esq., C. S., Deputy Commissioner, 
 G. Ricketts, Esq., C. S., Asst. Commissioner, 
 
 GOOJRANWALLAH. 
 Major J. Clarke, Deputy Commissioner, . . 
 
 Lieut. N. W. Elphinstone, Asst. Commissioner, 
 
 RAWUL PINDEE. 
 
 Edward Thornton, Esq., C. S., Commissioner, 
 
 W. J. R. Carnac, Esq., C. S , Deputy Commissioner, 
 Lieut. J. E. Cracroft, Asst. Commissioner, 
 
 R. Jenkins, Esq., C. S., Asst. Commissioner, 
 
 O. Wood, Esq., Extra Assistant, 
 
 Lieut. Alex. Taylor, Engineers, 
 
 Lieut. W. J. Ward, 51st N. I., 
 
 Lieut. H. W. Norman, Dy. Asst. Adjutant General, . . 
 Lieut. J. Prichard, 15th Regt. N. I., 
 
IV 
 
 NAMES OF SUBSCRIBERS. 
 
 KOHAT. 
 
 Captain G. O. Jacob, Comclt. 4th P. Cavalry, 
 
 Lieut. J. F. Stafford, 3rd Panjab I., 
 
 Brigadier N. Chamberlain, Panjab Irr. Force, 
 
 Captain H. B. Henderson, Coming. 3rd Panjab Infantry, 
 
 Chaldecott, Esq., Asst. Surgeon, 
 
 Major J. Coke, Deputy Commissioner, 
 
 GORDASPOOR. 
 
 Jas. E. Prinsep, Esq., C. S., Deputy Commissioner, .. 
 Lieut. Dyas, Engineers, 
 
 Lieut. Crofton, ditto, 
 
 L^eut. Home, ditto, 
 
 Lieut. Smith, ditto, . . . . . . 
 
 Lieut. Lloyd, ditto, . . . . . , 
 
 Mr. J. F. Baness, . . 
 
 Mr. C. E. Webb, .. 
 
 SINDH SA'GUR DOA'B. 
 Lieut. Alex. Cadell, Engineers, 
 
 Lieut. A. Bayley, ditto, . . . 
 
 RECHNAB DOA'B. 
 Lieut. W. A. Crommelin, Engineers, 
 
 Lieut. Wm. Hamilton, Artillery, (Peshawer,) 
 
 Lieut. R. S. Colls, H. M.’s 32nd Foot, (Nohshaira,) 
 Lieut. A. W. Garnett, Engineers, 
 
 Lieut. G. H. Basevi, ditto, (Kohat,) 
 
 Lieut. A. Gillespie, ditto, 
 
 Lieut. W. S. Oliphant, ditto, 
 
 Mr. C. J. Luckstedt, Ex. Eng. Office, Nowrungabad, 
 Baboo Mir Akbur Ali, Office of Director of Canals in the 
 
 BAREILLY. 
 
 Captain Gravenor Kirby, Artillery, 
 
 CAWNPOOR. 
 
 Captain R. S. Ewart, 30th Regt. N. T. Staff, 
 
 Lieut. A. R. Fuller, Artillery, 
 
 Lieut. W. J. Gray, ditto, 
 
 Lieut. J. S. Gibb, ditto, 
 
 Lieut. C. Hunter, ditto, 
 
 Lieut.-Colonel Lennox, Commanding 38tli N. L. I. 
 Lieut. W. H. Hawes, 63rd Regt. N. I. 
 
NAMES OF SUBSCRIBERS. 
 
 V 
 
 Copies 
 
 GWALIOR. 
 
 Major Vincent Eyre, Artillery, . . . . . • • • 1 
 
 Lieut. A. G. Forsyth, Gwalior Contingent, . . . . . . 1 
 
 Lieut. J. I. Murray, Brigade Major and Paymaster, . . . . . . 1 
 
 PESHAWER. 
 
 Captain F. Wale, Major of Brigade, 
 
 Lieut. A. Barker, 66th Goorkas, 
 
 Lieut. Chas. M. C. Cotton, 10th Lt. Cavalry, 
 
 Rev. J. Sharkey, Chaplain, 
 
 HAZARAH. 
 
 Captain J. Becher, Deputy Commissioner, 
 
 Lieut. W. F. Leicester, 3rd Seikh Infantry, 
 
 Lieut. T. A. Willson, A. C. Engineer, 
 
 Lieut. F. J. Davies, Engineer,. . 
 
 CALCUTTA. 
 
 Lieut. Lees, for College of Fort William, . . . . . . . . 10-6 
 
 A. Grote, Esq. Beng. Civil Service, . . . . . . . . 1 
 
 Dr. Sprenger, . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 
 
 H. V. Bayley, Esq. Beng. Civil Service, . . . . . . . . 1 
 
 G. G. Morris, Esq- ditto ditto, . . . . . . . . . . 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 l 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 BOMBAY PRESIDENCY. 
 
 The Government of Bombay, 
 
 Lieut-General Lord Fredrick Fitzclarence, G. C. B. Commander-in-Chief, (the late,) 
 Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, 
 
 Major S. Parr, Fort Adjutant,.. 
 
 Major C. R. Hogg, 1st Bombay Fusiliers, 
 
 Captain E. L. Russell, 12th N. I. 
 
 Lieut. R. Mallaby, 13th Regt. N. I. 
 
 Ensign T. J. Holland, 13th N. I. 
 
 Lieut. J. Miles, 16th Regt. N. I. 
 
 50 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 AHMEDABAD. 
 
 Colonel F. Stalker, C. B. 
 
 Lieut. F. Conybeare, Artillery, 
 
 E. W. Ravenscroft, Esq., C. S. 
 
 J. W. Hadow, Esq., C. S. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 ASCERGUR. 
 
 Lieut. A Phelps, 11th Regt. N. I. 
 
 1 
 
VI 
 
 NAMES OF SUBSCRIBERS. 
 
 BELGAUM. 
 
 General Wilson, Commanding Southern Division, 
 Lieut. -Colon el D. M. Scobie, 29tli N. I. . . 
 
 Lieut. W. H. Blowers, 29th N. I. 
 
 Ensign R. Bateman, H. M/s 64th Foot, . . 
 
 Copies 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 JACOBABAD— UPPER SINDH. 
 Major John Jacob, C. B., Commanding Sindh Horse, 
 
 5 
 
 MALLIEGAUM, 
 
 Lieut. -Colonel A. Shepheard, 22nd N. I. . . 
 
 Lieut. M. Baumgartner, H. M/s 83rd Foot, 
 
 Lieut. P. A. Elphinstone, 18th Regt. N. I. 
 
 A. St. J. Richardson, Esq., C. S. 
 
 RAJKOTE. 
 
 Captain B. R. Powell, 26th N. I. Brigade Major, 
 Lieut. L. W. Seymour, 2nd Regt. Lt. Cavalry, 
 Lieut. C. F. Boddam, Bo. Engineers, 
 
 Lieut. G. Napier, Artillery, 
 
 BARODAH. 
 
 Lieut. -Colonel J. E. G. Morris, Commanding, 
 Assistant Surgeon J. P. Stratton, . ♦ 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 SHOLAPOOR. 
 
 Subedar Major Bahadoor, Ismaael Beg, 3rd Regt. N. I. . . « . 1 
 
 Lieut. W. Bannerman, 3rd Regt. N. I. . • . . « * . . 1 
 
 Ensign H. M. B. Sandwith, 3rd Regt. N. I. . . . . . . 1 
 
 Ensign Forbes, 3rd Regt. N. I. . . . . . . . . 1 
 
 Lieut. James Tighe, 8th Madras Cavalry, .. .. 1 
 
 SHIKARPOOR 
 
 Brigadier W. Smee, Commanding Upper Sindh, .. .. .. 1 
 
 Captain L. S. Hough, Commanding 2nd Beloochees, . « , . . . 2 
 
 Ensign J. Gordon, 2nd Belooch Battn. . . . . . . . . I 
 
 Lieut. G. Hossack, Artillery, . . . , . . . . 1 
 
 Lieut. G. D. Eales, 29th Regt. N. I., 2nd Beloochees, .. 1 
 
 NASSICK. 
 
 W. J. Turquand, Esq., C. S. .. 
 
 Lieut. Alexander Bell, 3rd Regt. N. I. 
 
 Lieut. J. S. Trevor, Engineers, 
 
 Rev. W. Price, Missionary, . . 
 
 Rev. C. C. Merge, Missionary, 
 
 l 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
NAMES OF SUBSCRIBERS. vii 
 
 Copies 
 
 KURRACHEE. 
 
 Rev. E. Trumpp, Missionary, . . . . . . . . . . 1 
 
 HYDERABAD. 
 
 Major R. Farquhar, Commanding 1st Belooch Battn. .. .. .. 1 
 
 Lieut. H. Beville, 2nd in Command, ditto ditto, .. .. .. 1 
 
 Lieut. E. C. Naylor, Lieut, of Police, . . . . . . . . 1 
 
 INDIAN NAVY. 
 
 Captain R. Ethersey, I. N. Commanding Indus Flotilla, . . . . 1 
 
 Commander H. H. Hewett, “ Falkland,” . . . . . . . . 1 
 
 Rev. A. Burn, . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 
 
 Midshipman Wm. Hartley, “ Ajzdaha,” .. .. .. .. 1 
 
 Mr. James McKenzie, I. N. .. .. .. .. .. 1 
 
 Mr. H. Linsted, I. N. .. .. .. .. 1 
 
 Moonshee Oomar Daraj, . . . . . . . • . . 1 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 In offering this Grammar of the Pushto to the Orientalist 
 and the Student, as well as to those who may take an interest 
 in the hardy, warlike, and independent race, who speak the 
 Afghan language, I deem it necessary to state, that the idea of 
 the following pages originated in my being under the necessity 
 of making a Grammar for my own convenience, during the 
 years 1849 and 1850, when stationed at Pesh’awer with my 
 Regiment, which formed part of the Bombay Division of 
 the Army of the Panjab in the late campaign. 
 
 Having a deal of leisure time on my hands, and imagin- 
 ing that by studying the peculiar and little known language of 
 the Afghans, an Officer might be considered in some measure 
 qualified for employment where the Pushto is spoken, I deter- 
 mined to try to acquire some knowledge of this dialect, the 
 mastery of which had never been attempted, except by the 
 late Major Leech of the Bombay Engineers, and (as I have 
 since found) Professor Bernhard Dorn of St. Petersburgh. 
 
 Unable to obtain or discover anything like a guide to the 
 grammatical rules of the language, a matter to which the 
 Afghans of the present day appear to have paid no atten- 
 tion, I commenced my studies with the poems of Mulla Abd- 
 ur-Rahman. I did not find them very difficult, or even so 
 much so as I had expected ; for I had the advantage — if such 
 there be in knowing Oriental languages — of possessing some 
 proficiency in Persian, and some acquaintance with Arabic 
 
VI 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 and other tongues.* Still there were difficulties to contend 
 with ; and I was obliged to make a sort of outline Grammar, 
 which was filled in as I advanced, and examples compared 
 and selected. 
 
 I had fortunately at the outset secured the services of an 
 Afghan of Hashtnuggur in the Doaba of Pesh’awer — a Molawi 
 of the Muhammadzo’e tribe — a man well acquainted with his 
 mother-tongue, and a first rate Arabic scholar, and who was for 
 some time Lieut. It. F. Burton’s teacher. I had also in my 
 service a clever Mirza, — a native of Kandahar, who is also well 
 acquainted with the Pushto dialect, having been horn and bred 
 in the Western capital. 
 
 In 1850, I was obliged to leave Pesh’awer with my Kegi- 
 ment for the Dekkan, but my teachers accompanied me, and have 
 remained in my service ever since. Although some portion 
 of my time was taken up in preparing for the ordeal of the 
 Presidency Examinations as Interpreter in Murathi and Guze- 
 rathi, I continued to persevere in my Pushto studies ; and by 
 Midsummer, 1852, 1 had prepared a somewhat copious Grammar 
 of the language. 
 
 This humble effort I had the honour of submitting to the 
 Most Noble the Governor General in July, 1852; and by His 
 Lordship’s command, it was sent to the late Panjab Board of 
 Administration for that body’s opinion as to its publication. 
 From thence I believe it reached the late .Commissioner of 
 Pesh’awer (by the Board’s order) to be reported on by “ com- 
 petent Judges.” 
 
 I was not aware that Pushto had been made the subject 
 of general study at Pesh’awer, nor that any parties, with the 
 
 * By the Orders of the Government of India, I was awarded the sum of 1,000 
 Rupees, by the Governor in Council of Bombay, for proficiency in the TJrdu, Per- 
 sian, Murathi, and Guzerathi languages ; in all four of which I have passed the 
 Presidency Examination as Interpreter on four different occasions — somewhat 
 superior I flatter myself to any “ Higher Standard.” During twelve years’ service, 
 I have devoted ten to the study of the above, and to the Arabic, Pushto, Sindi, 
 Panjabi, and Multaui languages. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 Vll 
 
 exception of tliose I have referred to in a former paragraph — 
 one of whom died some ten years since, and the other — a resi- 
 dent in the Russian capital, had ever turned their attention to 
 the Afghan language. What opinion the “ Judges” arrived at, 
 I have not yet discovered. 
 
 The only copy which I had made was forwarded about 
 the same time to the Government of Bombay, and laid before the 
 Hon’ble the Court of Directors. Nine months afterwards I 
 received a letter stating that the Hon’ble Court had been 
 pleased to direct that my Grammar should be printed at Bom- 
 bay at the public expense, provided no other work of a similar 
 nature might have been already undertaken by the Supreme 
 Government. 
 
 It appeared that an Officer of the Bengal Army some time 
 previously, had offered to prepare a Grammar of the Pushto 
 language, and had obtained a promise to the effect that it should 
 be printed at the expense of Government. In January, 1853 
 we chanced to be at the same station, at which time the Officer 
 I refer to first became aware that I had been in the field before 
 him ; and therefore he lost no time in submitting his work to 
 the Lahore Authorities. For the reasons above stated his work 
 was printed and has been before the public for some months 
 and consequently the instructions of the Hon’ble Court as re- 
 garded my MS. could not be carried out. 
 
 Blessed however with some patience, and a good stock 
 of perseverance and industry, I was not to be disheartened 
 at this, neither at the loss of the labour of a couple of 
 years — in truth I rather rejoice now, for it has made me go 
 deeper into Pushto, than I might otherwise have done; and “he 
 who entertains the hope of winning a decisive battle, will not 
 mind the loss of a few skirmishes in order to arrive at the end 
 he aimed at.” I again went to work with greater industry 
 than before ; and during the six years which I have devoted to 
 the study of the language of the Afghans, the materials have 
 
 * A Grammar of the Pooshtoo Language — 8vo. — 104 Pages — Price Live Rupees, 
 Calcutta, 1854. 
 
Vlll 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 naturally accumulated, and have now assumed a somewhat 
 bulky volume. Whether these six years have been spent pro- 
 fitably or not, remains to be seen. I have at least gained the 
 satisfaction of having, I trust, rescued from oblivion, and shed 
 some light on the language of a manly race, “ the literary exer- 
 tions of whose authors, and some of whose odes, would stand 
 the severest criticisim of European judges.”* 
 
 A short time since, two gentlemen connected with the 
 Asiatic Society of Bengal, offered in the most handsome manner, 
 to undertake the publication of this Grammar ; and one of them 
 (whose disinterested liberality I can never forget) volunteered to 
 stand any loss that might be sustained, rather than the work 
 should remain unpublished. The patronage of the Government 
 of India, of the North-West Provinces, and of Bombay, who 
 have subscribed for a number of copies ; as well as the great 
 support, as the list of subscribers will show, of the Officers of 
 the United Service and others, will however, preclude the pos- 
 sibility of any loss in a pecuniary point of view. 
 
 The work professes to be a Grammar of the language of 
 the children of Afghana — whether Eastern or Western — whether 
 Saraban, Gharghasht, or Karlanrri — Bar Pukhtun or Ear 
 Pukktun — Panjpa’o or Ziruk ; and not confined to the “ Pooshtoo 
 of the Trans-Indus Territories under British Buie,” but 
 wherever the Pushto may be the medium of communica- 
 tion. 
 
 I have endeavoured to lay down the clearest, and at the 
 same time, most simple rules, the whole of which I have illus- 
 trated by carefully selected examples from the works of the most 
 elegant, as well as the most standard authors, both poetical and 
 prose, the greater number of whose works are seldom to be met 
 with at the present day. I have adduced nothing but what lias 
 been proved by the extracts given, avoiding examples made up 
 for the occasion, not wishing to make the work a mere cate- 
 gory of provincialisms. Nothing has been advanced but what 
 
 * Professor Dorn. 
 
PREFACE, 
 
 IX 
 
 has been accounted for and explained, as well as tested and 
 supported by the “ dictum ,” not only of a “ Mulla,” but of 
 every writer in the Pushto language. 
 
 The Introduction contains some remarks on the origin 
 and affinity of the Afghanian to the dead languages of Asia, and 
 the Hebrew origin of the children of Abd-ur-Rashid, Batan ; 
 together with remarks on the literature of the Afghans, and 
 other matter never before published. 
 
 In the Appendix will be found a specimen translation of 
 the Articles of War for the Native Army ; and a few difficult 
 and idiomatical stories, intended to show the capabilities of the 
 language, and the mode of construction. 
 
 The character used is that peculiar to the language — the 
 Naskh character of the Arabic ; and the types for the extra letters 
 exclusively Pushto, have been cut expressly for this volume. 
 
 The particular parts of speech or matters referred to in 
 the various examples in the following pages, are printed in small 
 capitals in the English, and its corresponding Pushto word or 
 words with a line over them. It was intended to have had 
 these words printed in red ink, which although an easy matter 
 to an European, is an insuperable difficulty to an Indian Press. 
 
 I must crave the patience of my readers with respect to 
 the long list of corrections, and I fear I shall scarcely be 
 credited, when I state that each sheet has been revised no less 
 than three times, and which has been the principal cause of the 
 great delay in the publication of the work. 
 
 I propose giving a Persian translation of this Grammar, 
 for the convenience of natives who may wish to acquire a know- 
 ledge of Pushto, should a sufficient number of subscribers be 
 forthcoming. 
 
 The opportunity for the renewal of friendly intercourse 
 with the Afghans, as advocated in the Introduction page 41, 
 has happened sooner than expected ; and appears to have been 
 cordially embraced. It cannot fail to be highly advantageous 
 to both nations. 
 
 Multan , 31st March , 1855, 
 
 H. G. R. 
 

 
 ■ 
 
 r . . 
 ' I 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 | ' - ; ' 
 
 
 
 .. - . 
 
 ■ C 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' * ' 
 
 . 
 
 ) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
INTRODUCTION 
 
 " I am not willing that any language should be totally extinguished ; the similitude 
 and derivation of languages afford the most indubitable proof of the traduction of 
 nations, and the genealogy of mankind ; they add often physical certainty to historical 
 evidence of ancient migrations, and the revolutions of ages which left no written mo- 
 numents behind them.” 
 
 Dr. Johnson. 
 
 In all investigations into the manners and customs of mankind, which 
 must ever be an interesting enquiry, language has a strong claim to our 
 attention and study. It will he found, in various ways, such an uner- 
 ring guide, that we may term it the barometer of a people’s civilization 
 or barbarity ; whilst on the other hand the derivation and affinity of 
 different tongues, afford an indisputable proof of the origin and 
 genealogy of the various families of the human race. It also adds a 
 physical certainty to historical evidence, and at the same time, no autho- 
 rity can so indubitably determine the peculiar habits and pursuits of a 
 people, as the manner in which their thoughts and ideas are articulated 
 and expressed ; for want of copiousness, or poverty of a language, as 
 it may be termed, generally indicates an uncivilized state — ignorance 
 and superstition. 
 
 By oral means alone can a dialect be formed or extended, but its sub- 
 sequent cultivation must depend on writing and literature ; and know- 
 ledge, on which civilization, and refinement — in fact, on which every 
 thing that tends to raise mankind above the level of the brute depends, 
 must naturally be confined within exceedingly narrow limits, until a 
 written language has diffused it throughout all classes of mankind. 
 
 b 
 
2 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Before venturing to offer an opinion as to the origin of the Pushto 
 language, it will be necessary to make a few observations respecting the 
 topography, as it may be termed, of the ancient languages of Asia, more 
 particularly those from which we may naturally suppose the Pushto or 
 Afghanian language to have sprung ; still all researches into high anti- 
 quity are more or less involved in darkness and perplexity, and every 
 argumentative enquiry, however ingenious, must at last rest on the un- 
 certain basis c? conjecture and fancy. 
 
 According to the accounts of Herodotus and other ancient writers, we 
 find, as is the case even at the present day, that in certain countries of 
 no great extent, a variety of languages, totally distinct from each other 
 was used; whilst on the other hand again, the same language, with 
 slight variations in its dialects, was spoken throughout regions of very 
 great extent. The first remarks are applicable to nearly all mountainous 
 districts, inhabited like Afghanistan by various tribes, for the most part 
 independent of each other. 
 
 Throughout the boundless steppes of the Asiatic continent were spread 
 the more prevalent languages. The limits of the various dialects also, 
 were the same stupendous ranges of mountains, and the same noble and 
 mighty rivers, which formed the boundaries of the different territories. 
 Between the Attak or Indus, the iEman or Oxus, and the banks of the 
 Dajlah or Tigris, one language appears to have predominated, a second 
 between the Tigris to the Halys or Kizil Irmak, and a third betwixt the 
 latter river to the iEgean sea. 
 
 To commence with the language which appears to have been most 
 widely prevalent in ancient times, we find that from the Caucasian* 
 
 * That is to say, what is at present known as the Caucasian range, not the Koh-i- 
 Kaf of the ancient Arabian authors. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 3 
 
 range of mountains on the north, to the Red sea on the south, and from 
 the banks of the Euphrates on the east to the Halys on the west, one 
 mighty tongue was spoken, which with some slight variations, retained 
 a primitive and distinct character known as the Semitic, and of which 
 the Arabic, Assyrian, Chaldaic, Cappadocian, Hebrew, Sarmatian, and 
 Phoenician were merely dialects.* 
 
 From the Tigris eastward, as far possibly as the mountain range which 
 forms the western barrier of the Indus, and from the Oxus to the Indian 
 sea, another great language prevailed — the various dialects of which, both 
 in elements and construction, as also in vocabulary and phraseology, were 
 so totally distinct, as to preclude the possibility of their being of the 
 same family as the Semitic. One peculiar feature of the ancient dia- 
 lects of Persia is, that every vowel, whether short or long, has a dis- 
 tinct character. We are indebted to the labours of several eminent 
 scholars in Zend literature for many important facts on this subject, 
 particularly in the Zend Avesta — the sacred volume of the Parsis or 
 Guebres, two English translations of which are about to be given to the 
 world — one by a European Orientalist, the other by an Asiatic, and a 
 disciple of Sapetman Zoroaster. From these researches we find, that 
 three different languages were spoken in Iranf — the Zend, in which the 
 sacred books of their religion were written ; the Pehlavi ; and the an 
 cient Persian, or Parsi. The date from which the Zend ceased to be the 
 medium of conversation is unknown, but as early as the reign of Bahman, 
 the Pehlavi was considered rude, and on this account held in distaste at 
 
 * Heeren. 
 
 f The eastern name for Persia. 
 
 % 
 
 b 2 
 
4 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 the court of that ruler •* and in the reign of Bahram Gur,f in the 5th 
 century of our era, was proscribed by edict, and soon after fell into total 
 disuse. After this event the Farsi became the idiom of Persia. It was 
 divided into two dialects — the Deri, or court language, and the Parsi, 
 which was spoken by the people at large. The Shah Nameh of Fer- 
 dousi is almost entirely written in the former tongue. 
 
 If we compare these dialects with the modern Persian, divested of the 
 Arabic and Turkish, which, during a period of several centuries, has 
 crept into it, we shall find them differing essentially in several respects ; 
 but at the same time, in phraseology and construction, bearing such a 
 striking similarity, as to prove almost indubitably, that the dialects 
 themselves, as also the people who spoke them, must have sprung from 
 one and the same original stock. 
 
 It is a striking fact that no convulsions of Government, no efforts of 
 literature, can so alter a language as to destroy every atom of similarity 
 between the speech of the present day, and that of most ancient and 
 remote origin. Nothing but the total extirpation of the aborigines of a 
 country appears capable of accomplishing so singular and wonderful a 
 change. For a striking instance of this we have merely to look to the 
 present dialects of the peninsula of India, or, for a still more conclusive 
 proof, to the modern European languages, amidst the polish and refine- 
 ment of Latin and Greek. 
 
 * According to the Ferang Jehangiri, Bahman also called Ardishir, was son of 
 Isfandiar, son of Kashtasib, son of Lohrasib. Some say he was so called for his up- 
 rightness and justice ; others, that it was from his precociousness as a child ; and 
 others, that it was on account of the length of his arms, which were so long that his 
 hands reached his knees. There are no less than thirteen meanings given to this 
 word in the work I have quoted : he died A. D. 240. 
 
 t lie ascended the throne A. D. 420, and reigned twenty years. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 5 
 
 It appears, therefore, that the principal languages of the Asiatic con- 
 tinent, that is to say, what was considered Asia by the ancients, were 
 the Semitic, and the Iranian or Persian,* which latter was spoken as far 
 as the western bank of the Indus, beyond which the Sanskrit and Prakrit 
 commenced.t 
 
 In ancient times as in the present day, the greatest diversity of language 
 appears to have prevailed in mountain tracts, generally inhabited by a 
 number of independent tribes, who may either have been aborigines of 
 those mountains, or strangers compelled to seek in them refuge from 
 more powerful neighbours, or greater security from invasion and subjec- 
 tion to a sovereign’s yoke. In the absence of facilities for communica- 
 tion with foreigners, their languages have been less liable to be mixed up 
 with other tongues, and from the more numerous tribes again separating 
 into smaller tribes, a variety of dialects was naturally formed, which in 
 many points differed from each other. 
 
 The ancient languages of Persia, suggest other important facts not to 
 be passed over without notice, and which also bring us to the point to 
 which these straggling and imperfect remarks are intended to lead — that 
 not merely in the modern Persian territory do we find languages which 
 still exist, mixed up with others, and only preserved from oblivion by a 
 
 * Heeren. 
 
 t “ With regard to the affinity of the language from Bactria to the Persian Gulf, 
 it would of course follow, that the country being that of the ancient Persians, the 
 Persian language would be spoken in it, varied as to dialect, but radically the same. 
 If the language of Persia was Zend, this would have been in use throughout Ariana ; 
 and its strong affinity to Sanskrit would justify the extension of Strabo’s remarks 
 even to the Indians of the Paropamisus and the west bank of the Indus. With all 
 the other divisions of Ariana there is no difficulty, even if the Persian of ancient did 
 not materially differ from that of modern times ; for Persian is still the language of 
 the inhabitants of the towns of Afghanistan and Tarkistan — Kabul and Bokhara.” 
 Ariana Antiqua, pp. 122, 123. 
 
6 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 few written remains ; but that in the present day there is also a language 
 spoken immediately west of the Indus, which is totally different in 
 phraseology and construction from any modern tongue, and in all pro- 
 bability derived from the Zend, Pehlavi, and the Hebrew. The language 
 to which I refer is the Pukhto, Pushto, or Afghanian. 
 
 Languages can alone be fashioned and extended by oral use, though 
 by writing and literature, their subsequent cultivation can be effected ; 
 and it is therefore certain that the dead languages of the Asiatic conti- 
 nent must at one time have been generally spoken,* from the fact, that 
 several living languages are evidently derived from them.f The cause 
 of their ceasing to be the medium of communication may have arisen 
 in various ways — the intercourse with foreigners brought thither by com- 
 mercial pursuits, subjugation to the yoke of others, and such like cir- 
 cumstances, so affect a language as to produce various new dialects, which, 
 as proved by our own mother-tongue, are capable of undergoing still 
 further transformation. 
 
 There has perhaps never been a greater diversity of opinion, respecting 
 the descent of any one people, than that of the Afghans. Ferishtahf 
 traces their origin to the Copts, whilst most oriental writers are of opi- 
 nion that they are of Jewish family. According to Klaproth, Gatterrcr 
 considers the Afghans to be a Georgian race, and their language Georgian 
 also. The Armenians hold the Afghans to be descended from them- 
 selves; and Krusinsky, Reineggs, and several other European historians, 
 notwithstanding the want of proof to support such an opinion, appear 
 
 * I have lately heard of a seal having been found near Pind Dadun Khan, in 
 the Panjab, bearing an inscription in the arrow-headed character. 
 
 t Heeren. 
 
 X Tarikh-i-Ferishta. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 7 
 
 convinced of it. Major Keppel* (now Earl of Albemarle) states that 
 the people of Shirwan, and the adjoining countries, consider the Afghans 
 are descended from them. St. Martinf in his account of the Armenian 
 Arghowans, is of opinion, that the Afghans cannot be identified with 
 them. Other authors have declared them to be descendants of the 
 Indu- Scythians, the Medians, the Soghdians, Turks, Tartars, and 
 Monghols.J 
 
 The Afghans themselves persist in their descent from the Jews, and 
 their traditions on the subject trace their ancestry to Saul, king of 
 Israel. § 
 
 The best account I have met with on the subject, has lately fallen 
 into my hands quite unexpectedly. It is contained in a history of the 
 house of Saddo or Suddozo’e tribe of the Afghans. The work itself is 
 written in 8vo. 640 pages of 1 7 lines to a page, and entitled, Tazkirat- 
 ul-Muluk. It is very rare, and I imagine there is not a copy to be found 
 east of the Indus, even if it has ever been heard of before by Europeans. 
 Two-thirds of the entire work are occupied in the detail of events which 
 have happened since the death of Ahmed Shah, Abdali. The commence- 
 ment alone is sufficient for my present purpose ; on some future occa- 
 sion I may give a translation of that part which terminates with the 
 death of the founder of the Durani monarchy. I may also add, that 
 the work is written in Pushto. The account is as follows. 
 
 “The chief object of the author in writing this august work, was the 
 compilation of a history of the ancestors of the tribe of Saddo, known 
 
 * Personal Narrative of travels, Vol. II. page 194. 
 
 f Memoires sur Armenie, Vol. I. page 213 to 226. 
 
 X See Tarikh-ul-Yamini of Otbi, Matlaa-us-Salatin, and Jami-ul-Tawarikh. 
 
 § See Sir G. Rose’s Afghans, the Ten Tribes, and the Kings of the East, &c. 
 lately published. 
 
8 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 as the Suddozo’es, who, after the family of the last of the Prophets, (on 
 whom be the blessing of the Almighty) are the greatest and best, as well 
 as the most generous and open-hearted of the children of Adam. 
 
 “ All traditions and histories agree, as to their exalted descent from 
 the Ban-i-Israel, of whom their great ancestor is Malik Talut (Saul) 
 of the tribe of Israel, who afterwards became the ruler of that people. 
 From Malik Talut is descended Afghan, one of the greatest of God’s 
 creatures, and who in the reign of Sulhnan, was, by that monarch, made 
 sovereign of the Jins and Diws. 
 
 “ From Malik Afghan, Abd-ur-Rashid bin Kaisallaik, who was a 
 contemporary of the prophet of God, and one of his most honoured 
 associates, is a lineal descendant. He is the ancestor of the Sarbands, 
 who are considered the first of the Afghan tribes, as also of the twelve 
 astanas or families who were formerly considered as hereditary devotees.* 
 
 “ His Highness Saddo chief of the Afghans, being the fruit of the tree 
 of that garden, and a blossom of that rose tree, this account of his 
 ancestry has been compiled, to the end, that their fame may be known 
 to posterity. 
 
 “ What can we inherit but fame beyond the limits of the tomb.” 
 
 “ The following histories and authorities have been consulted in the 
 
 composition of the work, viz.; — Tarikh-i-Salatin-i-Sureah ; Tabakat-i- 
 Akbiri; Asen-i-Akbiri ; Mirat-ul-Afghanah, which work was written 
 by Khan Jehan, Ludhi, in the reign of the Emperor Jehangir ; 
 
 * Both Mr. Elphinstone, (Kabul, Vol. 1st, page 252) and Professor Dorn 
 (Neamut Ullah, Part II. page 40) have fallen into error respecting this fourth grand 
 division of the Afghans, called by them respectively the Betnee, and Botni, Baitm, 
 or Batini. is not the name of a trihe, but is derived from the Arabic ^Fb 
 
 batin which means, hidden, or knowing the hidden or concealed , hence the Almighty is 
 often termed. (^Fbfi — Al Batin. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 9 
 
 T&rikh-i-Shahan-i-Safawiah, Irani ; Shah Jehan Nameh ; Tarikh 
 Alamgiri; Furukh Seori; Tarikh-i-Mahommed Shahi; Nadir Nameh; 
 Tarikh Ahmed Shahi ; Rassalah Akbar, Khadkah ; and other information 
 has been collected from the narratives of trustworthy persons. I have 
 entitled the work, Tazkirat-ul-Muhik, of the ancestry of the tribe of 
 Saddo, the chief of the Afghans. It consists of one mukaddamah (pre- 
 face), two asals (originals), and one khatimah (epilogue).”* 
 
 Mukaddamah. 
 
 On the Forefathers of Saddo, Chief of the Afghan people. 
 
 The great ancestor of this tribe is Malik Talut (Saul) who is mention- 
 ed in the Koran and other works, as descended from Binyamin, 
 bin Yakub, bin Issak, bin Ibrahim (may the blessing of the Almighty 
 rest on them and on their house). Talut was celebrated amongst 
 his countrymen for his wisdom, knowledge, and mightiness in war ; 
 and the All-wise Creator of the Universe, made him king over 
 Israel, and commanded him to bring to perdition the infidel Jalut, 
 the enemy of his people. f 
 
 * The contents of the whole work are ; — Mukaddamah. On the forefathers of 
 Saddo, chief of the Afghans. First Asal. On the subject of those of the tribe who 
 have ever dwelt in Afghanistan. This Asal is divided into two Farace or Parts. 1st. 
 Respecting that branch who have ruled over the whole tribe. 2nd. On the other 
 members of the tribe, who still dwell in their native country. Second Asal. On that 
 branch of the clan who left their country and took up their abode at Multan. This 
 is in five Farace or parts. 1st. On the Khan Modud Khail. 2nd. The history of the 
 Bahadur Khail. 3rd. Account of the Kamran Khail. 4th. Account of the Zsefaran 
 Khail. 5th. The Khwajah Khizar Khail, who are generally known as the Sultan 
 Khail, Khodkah. Khatimah. Account of the remaining branches of the Khwajah 
 Khizar Khail, the descendants of Shah Dur-i-Duran, and their dispersion into various 
 parts of India, and the Panjab. 
 
 t “ And their prophet answered and said unto them, Verily God hath set Talat king 
 over you, and hath enlightened his mind, and strengthened his arm : they answered, 
 
 c 
 
10 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 “ At this time Mehtar Daoud, who dwelt in the district situated 
 between the territories of the rival princes, went and joined the 
 army of his countrymen,* who were hard pressed by the superior 
 army of Jalut.f The king on this account issued a proclamation 
 to the effect, that whoever would go forth to fight with Jalut 
 (Goliath) and kill him, should receive the hand of the king^s daughter 
 in marriage, and be declared heir to the throne. 
 
 “ When Talut went out to meet J alut, his troops being seized with a 
 sudden panic, fled from the field with the exception of 313 persons, who 
 by the will of God, took courage and remained with their king.J It was 
 
 How shall he reign over us, seeing that we are more worthy of the kingdom than he, 
 neither is he possessed of great riches? Samuel said. Verily God hath chosen him 
 before you, and hath caused him to increase in knowledge and stature.” A1 Koran. 
 Chap. II. 
 
 “ Now there was a man of Benjamin, whose name was Kish, the son of Abiel, the 
 son of Zeror, the son of Bechorath, the son of Aphiah, a Benjamite, a mighty man 
 of power. 
 
 “ And he had a son, whose name was Saul, a choice young man, and a goodly : and 
 there was not amongst the children of Israel a goodlier person than he : from the 
 shoulders and upwards he was higher than any of the people. 1st Samuel, Chap. ix. 
 verses 1, 2. 
 
 “ So Saul took the kingdom over Israel, and fought against all his enemies on every 
 side, against Moab, and against the children of Ammon, and against Edom, and against 
 the kings of Zobah, and against the Philistines : and whithersoever he turned himself, 
 he vexed them. 
 
 “ And he gathered an host and smote the Amalekites, and delivered Israel out of the 
 hands of them that spoiled them.” 1st Samuel, Chap. xiv. verses 4/, 48. 
 
 * “ Wherefore Saul sent messengers unto Jesse, and said. Send me David thy son, 
 which is with the sheep. 
 
 “ And Jesse took an ass laden with bread, and a bottle of wine, and a kid, and sent 
 them by David his sen unto Saul.” 1st Samuel, Chap. xvi. verses 19 and 20. 
 
 t “ Now Saul, and they and all the men of Israel, were in the valley of Elah fighting 
 with the Philistines. 
 
 “ And David rose up early in the morning, and left the sheep with a keeper, and took, 
 and went, as Jesse had commanded him ; and he came to the trench, as the host was 
 going forth to the fight, and shouted for the battle.” 1st Samuel, Chap. xvii. verses 
 19, 20. 
 
 + “ And Talut said unto his soldiers, Verily God will prove you by the river, for he 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 11 
 
 at this time that Daoud killed the infidel Jalut in single fight, after which 
 the small but brave band which had stood its ground, fought with such 
 determined courage, that the enemy were entirely defeated and put to 
 the rout.* 
 
 “ After this action on the part of Mehtar Daoud, it became incumbent 
 on king Talut to fulfil the terms of the covenant which he had made, 
 and accordingly he gave his daughter to Daoud in marriage, and a patent 
 of succession to the throne. 
 
 “ During the life-time of king Talut, Daoud served him faithfully, and 
 at his death succeeded him. Armiah (Jeremiah) and Birkiya, TaluCs 
 sons, were raised to the highest honors, became the captains of his armies, 
 and continued in his service during their life-time. 
 
 “ In the common course of events, Daoud himself set out on that 
 journey from which no traveller returneth, and was succeeded by his son 
 Suliman. He appointed Afghana the son of Armiah, to the command of 
 his armies, and the government of the Jins and Diws ;f whilst Asif, the 
 son of Talut’s son Birkiya, was made his principal minister. 
 
 that drinketh thereof shall not be on my side (but he shall be on my side who shall 
 not taste thereof) except he who drinketh a draught of the water out of his hand. 
 And they drank thereof, except a few of them. And when they had passed over the 
 river, he and those who believed with him, said. We have no strength this day against 
 Jalut and his host. But they who considered that they should meet God at the re- 
 surrection, said. How often hath a small army by the will of God, defeated a greater 
 one, and discomfited it, for God is with those who patiently persevere. And when they 
 went forth to battle against Jalut and his forces, they said. Oh Lord, pour on us 
 patience, confirm our feet, and help us against this unbelieving people. Therefore they 
 discomfited them by the Almighty will, and Daoud slew Jalut.” A1 Koran. Chap. II. 
 
 * “ And the men of Israel and of Judah arose, and shouted, and pursued the 
 Philistines, until they came to the valley, and to the gates of Ekron. And the 
 wounded of the Philistines fell down by the way to Shaaraim, even unto Gath, and 
 unto Ekron. 
 
 And the children of Israel returned from chasing after the Philistines, and they 
 spoiled their tents.” 1st Samuel, Chap. xvii. verses 52, 53. 
 
 t “ This statement will not appear so fabulous if we compare it with Samuel 2d, 
 
 C 2 
 
12 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 “ One day king Suliman seated on his throne and accompanied by his 
 minister was journeying through the air,* when they passed the district 
 of Rudah, in which is situated the lofty mountain of Kaseghar, which 
 lies between PesVawer and Kandahar, and Kabul and Multan. It is 
 near the town of Daraban and west of the Sindhu (Indus) river. 
 
 “ Pleased with the spot, and the salubrity of the climate, the wisest of 
 men directed his minister to form a seat out of a stone which was at 
 hand. This being almost immediately done, Suliman sat in it for some 
 time and enjoyed the beauty of the landscape which lay spread out at 
 his feet. The mountain is known at present as the Takht or (Throne) 
 of Suliman.t A portion of the throne still remains, to which the people 
 of the surrounding districts, are in the habit of making pilgrimages. 
 
 “ The mountain tract of Kaseghar, and the district of Rudah, were 
 assigned in feudal tenure to Afghan a. 
 
 Chap. xxi. verses 15 to 22, for Diw, and Jin, mean — a giant as well as a demon or 
 genii— diw. A devil, a demon, genius, giant, spirit, ghost, hobgoblin. The Diws 
 or Dives, Jins, Genii, or giants of eastern mytholgy, are a race of malignant beings.” 
 See also in Richardson. 
 
 * “ No name is more famous among Muhammedans than that of Solomon. Ac- 
 cording to their belief, he succeeded David his father when only 12 years old ; at which 
 age the Almighty placed under his command, all mankind, the beasts of the earth and 
 the fowls of the air, the elements, and the genii. His throne was magnificent beyond 
 description. The birds were his constant attendants, screening him like a canopy from 
 the inclemencies of the weather, whilst the winds bore him whithersoever he wished 
 to go. Every age and every nation have had their fooleries, and even many of the 
 received opinions of modern times will not bear the touchstone of Truth. The sorcery 
 laws of our country are a far more authentic disgrace to human nature, than all the 
 wild, yet pleasing fables of the East.” See Richardson. 
 
 t “ In the southern part of the Wuzeeree country, where this range is passed through 
 bv the river Gomul, it is low in both senses, and forms the lofty mountain of Cussay 
 Ghar, of which the Takht of Suliman, or Solomon’s Throne is the highest peak.” 
 Account of the kingdom of Cabul, vol. 1st, page 164. 
 
 “ I was told that on the top there was a holy stone or rock, the seat of a Musalman 
 Fakir, whose name it bears; but I venture to doubt the story.” Vigne’s Ghuzni, 
 Cabul, &c. Page 61. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 13 
 
 The original meaning of the word Afghana is fighan — a Persian word, 
 which means c complaint ,’ ‘ lamentation,’ because he was a cause of la- 
 mentation to the devil, jms, and mankind. From the constant use of the 
 word, the vowel point (— ) Jcasrah was dropped, after which the other 
 letters could not be sounded without the aid of a vowel, and alif-i-wasl 
 was placed before the gh, and thus made Afghana. 
 
 “ Malik Afghan having taken possession of his new territory, (to use 
 the expressive words of the author) 1 irrigated the land of that moun- 
 tainous country with the water of the sword, and planted in the hearts 
 of its inhabitants, the seeds of his own faith. He fixed his residence at 
 a place named Push or Pash, situated in the mountains ; and from the 
 name of this place, the people have derived the name of Pushtun, and 
 their language Pushto. Some traditions state that the Afghans acquired 
 their language from the Diws ; and others, that it is the original dialect 
 of the aboriginal inhabitants of Kaseghar, and that the Afghans were in 
 the habit of carrying off the wives and daughters of those Infidels, and 
 intermarrying with them,* thereby learning from them the Pushto 
 language, and in course of time forgetting their own Ibrahami tongue.”f 
 Again to use the words of the author, “ Malik Afghan having purified 
 the face of the mistress of that country from the filth of the wicked 
 infidels by the pure water of the sword ; and having given unto her the 
 rouge of beneficence, and decked her out in the bridal garments of 
 religion and the ornaments of Islam, bestowed her in the marriage of 
 possession to one of his sons ; after which he returned to the court of 
 king Suliman, at Bait-ul-Mukaddas,J where at length he died at a very 
 
 * See the Kullasat-ul-Ansab. * 
 
 t Ibrahami means the Hebrew language. 
 
 X * M f ' ° 
 
 X cujj The Sanctified or Holy Temple — the Arabic name for Jerusalem. 
 
14 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 advanced age. His descendants from generation to generation, and from 
 tribe to tribe, continued to dwell round about the mountain of Kaseghar 
 and to rule over it, and were at constant war with the Infidels, as the 
 neighbouring people were termed. 
 
 “ At length, during the chieftainship of Abd-ur-Rashid bin Kais al Laik, 
 an event happened which was the cause of shaking the world to its very 
 foundations* — the joyful tidings of the last and greatest of the Prophets, 
 resounded both in Arab and in Ajam, and Abd-ur-Rashid became desirous 
 of making a pilgrimage to Mekka for the purpose of seeing him : — 
 
 ‘ Love ariseth not alone from seeing the object ; 
 
 This wealth is often acquired by mere conversation.’ 
 
 “ In company with several of his kinsmen and friends, he set out for the 
 Hedjaz ; and having arrived at Mekka, performed his pilgrimage according 
 to the rites and tenets of the religion of his forefathers, Israel, Issak, and 
 Ibrahim.f He now set out for Medina, and on the road fell in with the 
 celebrated Khalid-ibn-Walid, f The Sword of God/ — to whom he explain- 
 ed the object of his journey. They travelled towards Medina in company, 
 and on his arrival there, Abdur-Rashid became a convert to Islam. In 
 the numerous struggles of that period, he became couspicuous for his 
 intrepid bravery, which made the Prophet bestow on him the surname of 
 
 (jta or % (batan or pat an) which in Arabic means the mast of a 
 
 * Allowance will of course be made for religious prejudice. 
 
 t “ The temple of Mecca was a place of worship, and in singular veneration with 
 the Arabs from great antiquity, and many centuries before Muhammad. Though it was 
 most probably dedicated at first to an idolatrous use, yet the Muhammadans are gener- 
 ally persuaded that the Caaba is almost coeval with the world ; for they say that Adam, 
 after his expulsion from paradise, begged of God that he might erect a building like 
 that he had seen there, called Bait-al-Mamur, or the frequented house and al-Dorah, 
 towards which he might direct his prayers and which he might compass, as the angels 
 do the celestial one.” Sale’s Introduction to the Koran, page 83. 
 
 + This word I cannot find in either Kamus, Burhan Katafe, or Richardson. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 15 
 
 vessel, without which it cannot sail, neither can the ship of war sail along 
 without the mast of battle. 
 
 “ Abd-ur-Bashid having acquired great renown, at length obtained his 
 dismissal, and was allowed by the Prophet to return to his native land ; 
 but was at the same time enjoined to publish and diffuse the doctrines 
 of Islamism amongst his countrymen. He departed from Medina, and 
 in due course reached his home in safety, after which he converted his 
 family and tribe to the new faith, and taught them the Koran. He made 
 war on the infidels with greater zeal than ever, and was celebrated for his 
 piety. At length finding his end approaching, he called his family and 
 tribe around him, and enjoined them to keep their hearts fixed on the 
 only true religion, and their feet firm in the path of Islam ; to show 
 friendship and obedience to the followers of Muhammad ; and to make 
 war on the infidels, and convert them to the only true faith. After taking 
 an affectionate leave of all, ‘ the swallow of his soul having escaped from 
 the wintry cage of this world, took its flight towards the summer man- 
 sions of eternal bliss/ 
 
 “ He was blessed with three sons. — Sari, Ghari, and Tabri. The first 
 known as Sarban or Sarband, succeeded his father in the chieftainship, 
 and gave name to one of the two great divisions of the Afghans called 
 Sarbans. The second also called Gharghasht, gave name to the Ghar- 
 ghashts. The descendants of these three sons constitute the whole of the 
 different Afghan clans, with their numerous branches and ramifications. 
 
 “ The tribes which are included in the Sarban division, are ; — Abdali, 
 Tarin, Barech, Mabanah, Gharshin, Shiram, Babarf, Kansi, Jamand, 
 Katam, Kaliani, Tarkam, Khalil, Mhomand, Daoudzo’e,* and Yusufzo’e, 
 * Zo’e in Pushto means, son — zai is a corruption of the word. 
 
16 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 The twelve Astdnahs or families who are considered sacred by the other 
 Afghans, from their progenitors having been devotees, are also included 
 amongst the Sarbans. The Abdali, Tarin, Babari, Jamand and Yusufzo’e 
 tribes have each one family, the Khalil three, and the Mhomands four. 
 
 “ The different branches of the Gharghaslit division or offspring of Ghari, 
 are; — the Suram, Jailam, Drukzo’e, Afridi, Chakani, Janki or Jangi, 
 Kerani, Babi, and Mashwam tribes. 
 
 “ The third son, Tabri, is the progenitor of the Ghalzo’e, Ludhi, Niazi, 
 Lohani, Sorbani, and Klakpur clans, the whole of whom are styled 
 Tabrins. It is said there was an illicit connexion between one of the 
 daughters of Tabri, and Mast Ali Ghori,* and after a short time the 
 fruits of this amour becoming apparent, the father, to make the best of 
 a bad matter, gave her to him in marriage. Three sons were the offspring 
 of this marriage — Ghalzo’ef of whom she was pregnant before the nuptial 
 knot was tied, — Ludhi, and Sarwani. 
 
 “ The tribes above mentioned are the whole of those who are of pure 
 Afghan descent — the offshoots of the three sons of Abd-ur- Rashid, Patan. 
 He was buried at Kasegliar, and succeeded by his eldest son Sari, who 
 was constantly at war with the Kafirs or Infidels. He had two sons — 
 Sharkabun, and Kharshabun. The Sarbans are the descendants of the 
 former, and the Yusufzo’es, Mhomands, Khalils and other tribes inhabit- 
 ing the plain of Pesh’awer, are the children of the latter. 
 
 “ On the death of Sari, Sharkabun his son was acknowledged chief of the 
 Afghanah. He was celebrated for his piety and wisdom. In his wars 
 
 * The ancestor of the Ghorian Sultans who conquered Ghazni, in 1152. 
 
 t lU ghal in Pushto means a thief, and )j zo'e a son, hence Ghalzo'e — the 
 
 son of a thief; ^1 j zde is a mere corruption of the word. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 17 
 
 with the infidels, he not only acquired great wealth, but also increased 
 his territory, and brought many of the neighbouring tribes under his 
 authority. During his chieftainship Kandahar and Kabul were conquered 
 by Hujaj bin Yusuf, Sakafi, who was governor of Khorasan for the 
 Khalifah Abd-ul-Malik bin Mirwan who reigned from 692 to 698 A. D. 
 This event greatly increased the authority of Sharkabun, and established 
 his power more firmly than before. 
 
 “ He is said to have been succeeded by Abdal his son. Some accounts 
 mention that he was the son of Sharkabun, and others that he was his 
 grandson, but neither of these accounts can be correct, as there is a space 
 of nearly three hundred years between them ; Sharkabun being a cotem- 
 porary of Hujaj bin Yusuf, Sakafi, before referred to, whilst Malik Abdal 
 lived in the reign of Mahmud bin Sabuktagm, who succeeded his father 
 to the throne of Ghazni, in the year of the Hijrah 387. This great 
 hiatus between the reigns of these two chiefs may be accounted for in 
 the following manner. It often happens, that the names of those chiefs 
 who have been celebrated for their wisdom, bravery, piety, or numerous 
 progeny, have been alone handed down to posterity, and those of me- 
 diocrity set aside and forgotten. There is an instance of this with regard 
 to Hasham* and Abd-ul-Shams, who were both sons of Abd-ul-Manaf. 
 The descendants of the former are still styled Ban-i- Hasham, whilst those 
 of the latter are known as the Ban-i-Omeyah, from Omeyah the cele- 
 brated son of Abd-ul-Shams, and thus the father’s name has been dropped 
 altogether. In the same manner, Malik Abdal having acquired a great 
 name for his bravery, equity, and generosity, and surpassed many of his 
 predecessors in grandeur and dignity, his] name has been handed down 
 
 * The great-grandfather of Muhammad. 
 
 d 
 
18 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 to us, whilst the very remembrance of those of little or no celebrity, is 
 now altogether lost in oblivion. This is the great cause of the confusion 
 which often tabes place in the genealogical histories of different tribes 
 and people, and hence the reason why Malik Abdal has been called the 
 son or grandson of Sharkabun. 
 
 “ Malik Abdal thus became chief of the Afglianah — Sarbans, Ghar- 
 gliashts, and Tabrms. During his reign the people began to pay atten- 
 tion to agriculture, and the lands about Ivaseghar were brought under 
 cultivation. Abdal, who was famed for his bravery, followed in the path 
 of his ancestors by making war on the people of the surrounding parts, 
 in the plundering of whose property his followers acquired great wealth. 
 A number of the infidels who dwelt in the vicinity of the Kaseghar dis- 
 trict, was also at this time converted to the Muhammadan faith. At 
 length the Afghans having no infidels to plunder, and insufficient land 
 to yield them a subsistence, began to take service under the Ghazniwid 
 Sultans, from whom they obtained the district of Bagram, now known as 
 Pesha/wer, as a feudal fief * Of the countries to the north, such as Suwat, 
 
 * The account contained in the (Gardens of Friendship) by Mahabbat 
 
 Khan, differs in some respects from the preceding narration. He says, “ up to the time 
 of the Prophet of Islam, the descendants of Afghanah dwelt in the Salman mountains, 
 at which period Kais was their chief. He subsequently went to Arabia to do homage 
 to Muhammad, taking with him eleven persons of his tribe, who with himself became 
 converts to the new faith. 
 
 “ He returned to his native land, but in the following year he again returned to 
 Arabia with seventy of his tribe, and joined the followers of Muhammad a short time 
 previous to his attack on Mekka, in which affair, and the subsequent operations, Kais 
 behaved so well, that the title of Abd-ur-Rasliid was conferred on him, and he soon 
 after returned to his home. 
 
 “ After the death of Muhammad, Kais Abd-ur-Raslfid, with a number of his people 
 followed the two succeeding Khalifs in their wars ; and when the Khalif Osman de- 
 termined on the conquest of Khorasan, he requested Kais to obey the orders of Abd- 
 ullah bin jEamir bin Karez, who had been appointed to head the expedition. This 
 chief had been directed to settle the Afghan tribe with their families, after the conquest 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 19 
 
 and Bajawer, which were in the hands of the Kafirs, they got possession 
 by force of arms. They also obtained grants of land at Ghazni and 
 Kabul, from Sultan Mahmud and his successors ; and by degrees began 
 to emigrate from the neighbourhood of Kaseghar, and settled in those 
 places they considered best suited to themselves. Up to the time of 
 Malik Abdal, the whole of the tribes considered and obeyed him as their 
 
 of that province, between it and Hindustan, that they might become a barrier against 
 invasion from the latter country. Kais assisted in the conquest of Khorasan, after 
 which, the tract of country lying between Hirat and Kandahar was bestowed on him 
 and his tribe, subject to the governor of the province. 
 
 “ At the period of the struggles between the Omeyahs and Abbasis, which ended in 
 favour of the latter, the Government of Khorasan was administered by Hujaj bin Yusuf, 
 Sakafi, who sent an expedition into Hindustan, under his nephew Kasim bin Muham- 
 mad bin Yusuf, Sakafi, who was accompanied by a strong body of Afghans. They 
 advanced through the district of Roh,* and at length reached Multan, after annexing 
 the former district, which was made over to the Afghan tribes, with directions to keep 
 under the refractory Hindus. From the occupation of Roh by the Afghans they ob- 
 tained the name of Rohillas. 
 
 “ Sabuktagin the founder of the Ghuzniwid dynasty, and father of the great Mah- 
 mud, entertained a number of Afghans in his army. When that ruler died, Is- 
 mteil his son by the daughter of Alta’kin, the owner of Sabuktagin — for the latter was 
 originally a slave — succeeded his father ; but Mahmud, another son by the daughter 
 of the chief of Zabulistan (Kabul) opposed him in the succession, and a civil war 
 ensued between them. The Afghans who were dependent in some measure on that 
 chief, joined his son-in-law Mahmud, who defeated Ismaeil, and confined him in 
 a fortress. 
 
 “ In gratitude for this effectual aid on the part of the Afghanah, Mahmud gave 
 his sister in marriage to Sa’ho the chief of the tribe, by whom he had three sons — Salar, 
 Mas’seud, and Ghazi, who are buried at Baraj. 
 
 ‘‘When Sultan Mahmud set out on his expedition agaiust Samnath in Guzerat, 
 he took with him a body of Afghans. Several times during the siege of that strong- 
 hold, fortune seemed to incline against the Muhammadan arms ; but at length the 
 Afghans were brought to the front, who having fastened the skirts of their garments 
 together, attacked the Hindus with such fury that the latter were entirely defeated, 
 but not until the victors as well as the vanquished had sustained immense loss. In 
 reward for this important service, the ‘ Breaker of Idols,’ bestowed on each of the 
 Afghans the Turk! title of Khan : their former title of Malik was derived from Malik 
 Talut” — Ri’az-i-Mahabbat. 
 
 * The Beluchis ar.d other inhabitants of the Derail Ghdzi Khan, and those of the southern part 
 ot the Derail Ismaeil Khan districts, speak of the mountain range immediately west ot the Indus 
 to the southern boundary of Afghanistan, by this name. 
 
20 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 head and chief ; but now each tribe and village began to choose their own 
 governors, and ceased to pay that respect and obedience to his authority, 
 which they formerly did ; in fact they fell headlong into the slough of 
 arrogance and presumption. 
 
 “ Abdal was succeeded by his son Malik Kajar. This prince — a second 
 Nimrod — was passionately fond of the sports of the field, in which he 
 spent the best part of his days and nights. He was blessed with four 
 sons — iEsau, Nur, Khokai, and Makou, the first of whom, a God-fearing 
 and just personage, succeeded him in the chieftainship : the others gave 
 name respectively to the Nurzo’e, Khokari and Makou tribes. 
 
 “ The remainder of the Abdalis, and other clans, which had up to the 
 present period continued to dwell in the Kaseghar district near the 
 Takht-i-Suliman, finding it too small to support so many families, began, 
 in the hot season, to migrate with their fiocks, to the neighbourhood of 
 Kandahar, returning again to their old haunts at Kaseghar in the 
 winter. 
 
 “ Malik JEsau had three sons — Zirak, Is’hak, and All. At his death he 
 bequeathed the turban of authority to Zirak, his sword to Is’hak, and 
 his carpet for prayer to All. From these two latter, the Is’hakzo’e, and 
 Alizo’e branch of the Abdalis are descended ; and from them is also de- 
 scended the only one of the twelve astandhs, or families who are devoted 
 to the priesthood, as already referred to. 
 
 “ Zirak, who was a wise and able chief, governed his tribe with energy 
 and ability. He completely rooted out the crimes of impiety, adultery, 
 and dishonesty, which appear to have been but too prevalent at the 
 period in question. 
 
 The five tribes which have been already mentioned as the Abdali clan, 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 21 
 
 viz. ; Is’hakzo’e, Alizo’e, Nirzo’e, Khwagam, and Makou, are known as 
 the Panjpa’o branch. 
 
 “ My own opinion is that. Malik Abdal was a eotemporary of Sultan 
 Mahmud, Ghazniwid, and Malik Zirak of Shah Rukh Mirza, — son of Amir 
 Timur, Gurgani — between whose reigns there is a period of some three 
 centuries. As has been already noticed, the names of the most* cele- 
 brated chieftains can alone have been preserved by their countrymen, 
 whilst those of less fame have sunk into oblivion. 
 
 “ The district of Rudah and Kasegliar, ,as before stated, not being of 
 sufficient extent to support the great number of people, to which the 
 Afghans had by this time increased, Malik Zirak was induced to send an 
 agent to Shah Rukh Mirza,* at Hirat, for the purpose of soliciting a 
 grant of the districts round Kandahar. This request was favourably 
 listened to by the Shah, and Zirak in consequence gave directions to the 
 Abdali, Barech, Tarm, Jamad, Ghalzo’e, Kakur, Kasi, Babur, and other 
 tribes — who were more numerous than the extent of their lands could 
 support — to proceed to Kandahar and settle on the lands granted by the 
 Shah in that district. To each tribe a portion of land was given, in 
 proportion to the number of families of which it consisted, and for which 
 ground they had to pay a small tax to the Governor of the province. 
 
 “ Zirak had three sons — Popul, Barak, and Alako, from whom have 
 sprung the Populzo’es Barakzo’es and Alakozo’es. At his death Popul 
 succeeded him in the chieftainship of the whole Afghanah people. Being 
 a sagacious and intelligent chief, and endowed with the tact of govern- 
 ment, he kept the whole of the tribes under subjection and obedience. 
 They also were generally well satisfied with his government, but at the 
 * The accomplished son of the great Timur. 
 
22 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 same time, those who showed any opposition to his authority, were pun- 
 ished by the Kandahar Governors, and this tended still more to keep all 
 under proper restraint. 
 
 “ Popul had also three sons — Habib, Badu, and Aiyub. The two for- 
 mer were by one mother, and the latter by another wife. Some also say 
 that Aiyub was the son of the first wife by a former husband. 
 
 “ Badu was the ancestor of the Baduzo'es, and Aiyub of the Aiyubzo’es. 
 At length Popul suddenly finding his end approaching, sent for his chil- 
 dren ; and after giving them much good advice, and exhorting them to 
 follow in the footsteps of their ancestors, departed this life, leaving the 
 chieftainship of the tribes in the hands of his eldest son Habib. 
 
 “ The children of Afghana who had now become a numerous people, and 
 had, up to this time, paid obedience to the authority of their chief, began 
 to show symptoms of restlessness, and dislike to the yoke of Habib's 
 supremacy. At length they commenced quarrelling amongst themselves, 
 and the khails or clans of every village having declared themselves inde- 
 pendent, set about nominating their own chiefs. All was uproar aud 
 confusion ; the rich tyrannized over the poor, and the strong plundered 
 the property of the weak ; might was right ; and villainy, impiety, and 
 depravity, reigned supreme. 
 
 “ Malik Habib endeavoured for a long time to stem this torrent of 
 rebellion, and regain his lost authority over the people, but without suc- 
 cess ; and at length not one tribe remained on his side. The Tarins, 
 Barechis, Ghalzo’es, Kakurs, Shirams, and others, each set up one of 
 their own tribe as pretenders to the chieftainship ; raised the standard of 
 revolt; and commenced a civil war. The life of Habib was spent in civil 
 contentions, which were entirely without avail, lie had three sons — 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 23 
 
 Bami, Ismseil, and Hasan, from the two last of whom are descended the 
 clans of Ismseilzo’e, and Hasanzo’e. 
 
 “ Barm, who was of a mild disposition and possessed of many excellent 
 qualities, succeeded his father as nominal head of the Afghans. Sultan 
 Bahlol Ludhi, and his son Sikunder — emperors of Hindustan — were on 
 friendly terms with him, and sent him from time to time various costly 
 presents. This produced great envy in the hearts of the pretenders to 
 the chieftainship, and they despatched agents with presents to these 
 potentates. Their agents without being admitted to an audience even, 
 were dismissed with the answer, that the Sultans neither knew of, nor 
 recognized any other head of the Afghans than Malik Bami. He had 
 four sons — Salih, All, Zaiyl, and Warukah. They were fathers of large 
 families, and their memory has been perpetuated in the separate clans 
 bearing their respective names. 
 
 “ Bami died at an advanced age, and the shadow of chieftainship which 
 now alone remained, descended to his eldest son Salih, who became head 
 of the Habibzo’e tribe, which consisted of the three smaller ones of Ali, 
 Zaiyl, and Warukah, just mentioned, who acknowledged and supported 
 his authority. He was a man of great piety and generosity ; and his 
 threshold was never clear from the crowds of poor, nor his table from the 
 numerous guests. In his lifetime Shir Shah, and Salim Shah, who were 
 of the Shorkhail branch of the Afghans, sat on the throne of Delhi ; and 
 the friendship which had sprung up between his father and the Ludhia 
 Emperors, was renewed and kept up with the former princes also. At 
 length the vicissitudes of fortune wrested the sovereignty from the grasp 
 of the Ludhis, and placed it in the hand of the Moghal ; but when Shir 
 Shah in the year 9ol of the Hijerah,* sallied forth to regain the throne 
 
24 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 of his ancestors, the Afghans assisted him with a powerful force of their 
 countrymen, and Hindustan was regained. When the agents of Malik 
 Salih presented his letter of congratulation to Shir Shah, the Emperor 
 observed to his ministers and court, that Malik Salih was not only his 
 own chieftain, but that his forefathers, from the time of Malik Afghan, 
 were the chiefs of his forefathers also; and that the family of Malik Salih 
 had no equal in rank amongst the whole of the Afghan tribes. Shir Shah 
 after thus acknowledging Salih as his head and chief, and treating his 
 agents with great distinction, dismissed them with numerous presents for 
 their master. 
 
 “ At length in the reign of Shah Tamasib, Sufawi, in the year of the 
 Hijerah 965, on the night of Monday the 17th of the month ZuTlhjjah ; 
 the bright orb of Saddo rose from the eastern horizon of the black goat's 
 hair tent of Malik Salih, and diffused his refulgent beams on the surround- 
 ing world." 
 
 With the birth of Saddo, the ancestor of the great Ahmed Shah, Ab- 
 dali, the Introduction to the Tazkirat-ul-Muluk closes. 
 
 Sir John Malcolm's words on the origin of the Afghans are — “ Al- 
 though the right of the Afghans to this proud descent is very doubtful, 
 it is evident from their personal appearance, and many of their usages, 
 that they are a distinct race from the Persians, Tartars, and Indians, and 
 this alone seems to give credibility to a statement which is contradicted 
 by so many strong facts, and of which no direct proof has been 
 produced." 
 
 Sir William Jones was of opinion that the Afghans are the Paropa- 
 misadre* of the ancients, but this is very improbable, for it is proved by 
 
 * See Quintus Curtius’s Life of Alexander. Book 7* 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 25 
 
 the statements of many authorities, besides that of the work from which 
 I have given an extract, that the Afghans are not the aborigines of the 
 country they at present inhabit, but have gradually advanced from the 
 west of Asia ; and it is not improbable, but that during the lapse of ages, 
 they might have been forced from various causes, to emigrate from the 
 districts in the vicinity of Jerusalem, as stated in the tradition I have 
 quoted. The Seah-Posh Kafirs are in all probability the Paropamisadse 
 of the writers of antiquity, respecting whom, on some future occasion, 
 I hope to offer some remarks. 
 
 According to the Makhzan Afghani, after Feridun’s victory over 
 Zohak, the latter was subjected to such acts of tyranny, that his chil- 
 dren fled for safety to the mountain tract of Ghor, which at that time 
 was only inhabited by a few scattered tribes of the Israelites, Afghans, 
 and others. If Jewish families could, at that period, have been inhabi- 
 tants of Ghor, it is equally possible that the Afghans themselves might 
 have come originally from the Holy Land.* 
 
 The mountain districts of Afghanistan heard not the “ Allah Akbar” 
 of the conquering Arabs, until the fourth or fifth century of the Hijerah, 
 by which time the sun of their power had commenced to wane. Up to 
 this time even, we find that the Kafirs or Infidels inhabited the mountain 
 
 * In the reign of Saosduchinus king of Babylon, called in scripture Nabucho- 
 donosor the First (A. M. 3335. Ant. J. C. 669) the prophet Tobit, who was still alive 
 and dwelt among other captives at Nineveh, a short time before his death, foretold to 
 his children the sudden destruction of the city, of which at that time there was not 
 the least appearance. He advised them to quit the city before its ruin came on, and 
 to depart as soon as they had buried him and his wife. The Jews, at this time being 
 captives, to follow the advice of Tobit, would have had in the first place to have 
 escaped from Nineveh by stealth ; and having accomplished this much, where could 
 they hope to find a more secure retreat, than towards the east, and in the direction of 
 the mountainous tracts now inhabited by the Afghan tribes? See Tobit c. XIV, 
 v. 5—13. 
 
 e 
 
26 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 districts of Ghor, and continued to dwell there up to the thirteenth 
 century of our era, when Marco Polo visited those regions.* * * § 
 
 The Yusufzo’e tribes, who now hold the whole of the districts to the 
 north of the Lundy Sind, or Kabul river, t were even in the time of 
 Baber but new comers, and in this, his statement agrees with the account 
 in the Tazkirat-ul-Muluk. In another place Baber mentions the people 
 of Bajawer, as “ rebels to the followers of Islam, and besides their rebel- 
 lion and hostility, they followed the custom and usages of Infidels, while 
 even the name of Islam was extirpated from among them.^J From 
 this it appears that the people of the country had been converted to 
 Muhammadanism, and relapsed again to idolatry, but were not Af- 
 ghans^ 
 
 Nowab Allah Yar Khan, son of the Nowab Hafiz Rahmat Khan,|| in 
 the preface to a lexicographical work of which he is the author, states, 
 that “ there are two divisions of the Afghans, whose language also differs 
 in many respects, so that the words used by some tribes are not known 
 to, or understood by, others. They are termed Pushtun and Pukhtun 
 and they speak the Pushto and Pukhto^f respectively. The former is the 
 western dialect, having some affinity to the Persian ; and the latter the 
 eastern, containing many Sanskrit and Hindi words. The people who 
 
 * Travels of Marco Polo ; Marsden’s Translation. Book I. Chap. 22. pp. 122. 
 
 t Lundy Sind, in Pushto signifies the “ Little river,” in contradistinction to the 
 Aba Sind, or “Father of rivers.” as the Indus is termed. 
 
 X Buber’s Memoirs, page 248. 
 
 § “ Although Bajour, Sewad, Peshour, and Haslinagar, originally belonged to Ka- 
 bul, yet at the present time some of these districts have been desolated, and others of 
 them entirely occupied by the tribes of Afghans, so that they can no longer be properly 
 regarded as provinces.” Ibid, page 141. 
 
 || The author of the Khullasat-ul-Ansab. 
 
 Merely in substituting sh for kh, z for g, etc. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 27 
 
 dwell about Kabul, and Kandahar, ShoraVak, and Pisinn, are designated 
 Bar Pushtun, or upper Afghans from y above ; and those occupying the 
 district of Roh, which is near Hind (India) are called Lar Pukhtun or 
 lower Afghans from ^ below .” 
 
 He describes Roh — about which has been, and still continues to be, 
 great diversity of opinion — as “ bounded on the east by Suwat and 
 Kashmir, west by the Helmund river, north by Kashkar or Chitral and 
 Kafiristan, and south by the river or sea of Bukker, called in Persian Nil- 
 ab, (The Blue Water) and Nikaow or Aba- Sin, (The Father of Rivers) 
 by the Afghans.” 
 
 The author of the Ferang-i-Jehangiri gives a somewhat similar account 
 of it ; “ Roh,” he says, “ is the name of a range of lofty mountains, in 
 length extending from Suwat and Bajour, to Siwni, which is in the district 
 of Bukker in Sind ; and from Hasan Abdal (in the Sind Sagur Doaba, 
 of the Panjab) to Kandahar in breadth ; and in this highland range the 
 latter city is situated.” 
 
 I have been told by Afghans in the vicinity of I^esh’awer, and other 
 places, that their ancestors first came from a district named Ghwari 
 Marghab, which they said lies to the westward of Khorasan. This is, 
 however, a mistake ; a small village bearing this name, and the place 
 referred to by them, is situated about mid-way between Kandahar, 
 ShoraVak, and Girishk, which is one of the old seats of the Afghan 
 tribes who now occupy the Pesh’awer valley. Ghor, supposed to have 
 been the original district of the Afghana, lies much to the north. It 
 was from this latter place that the Gliorian tribe issued in the year 1152 
 A. D. when they overturned the throne of the Ghazmwid Sultans. 
 
 The diversity of opinion regarding the origin of the Afghana, is not 
 
28 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 greater than that respecting their language, of which, at the time I write, 
 with the exception of a small brochure by the late Major R. Leech of 
 the Bombay Army, no grammar exists.* It is to be hoped that the 
 present work, together with a dictionary in preparation, will enable 
 the learned both of Europe and India, to give a better, and more decided 
 opinion than heretofore on the affinity of the Afghan language to those 
 of ancient Asia. 
 
 Sir William Jones’s opinion was, that the Pushto or Pukhto language 
 has a manifest resemblance to the Chaldaic, but Professor Klaproth 
 vehemently denies this, and states, that nothing whatever is known re- 
 garding this dialect ;f that neither in words or grammatical structure, is 
 there the slightest resemblance between Pushto and any Semitic language, 
 and that it is unquestionably a branch of the great Indu-dermanic 
 division of languages. 
 
 Professor Dorn of St. Petersburgh — who some few years since pub- 
 lished a work on the Pushto language! — in the preface to his transla- 
 tion of Ne’amnt Ullah, gives as his opinion, that the Pushto language 
 bears not the slightest resemblance to the Hebrew, or Chaldaic, either 
 in its grammar or vocabulary, § and he imagines the Afghans may belong 
 
 * Since writing the above, Captain Vaughan of the Bengal Army has published a 
 Grammar. 
 
 t It is to be hoped the Professor will change his opinion now, as regards the latter 
 part of this sentence. 
 
 ! “ A Chrestomathy of the Pushtu Language, with a Glossary.” St. Petersburg 
 1847. The work consists of extracts from a few of the best known Pushto authors, 
 amongst which the odes of Mulla Abd-ur-Ralnnan predominate. The text appears 
 to have been printed from a recent and incorrect MS. and consequently is full of 
 errors. In the Glossary, the meanings of many of the Pushto words are merely 
 guessed at, and are very wide of the mark. 
 
 § If w e are to take the Glossary of Prof. D. as a specimen of the vocabulary of the 
 Pushto, I should say the language bears more than a strong resemblance to Hebrew, 
 Chaldaic, and other Semitic dialects, seeing that this Glossary contains ninety per 
 cent, of pure Arabic words. See pages 388, 389 and 390 — in which there is not one 
 Pushto word; with two or three exceptions, they are all Arabic. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 29 
 
 to the great Indu-Teutonic family of nations, and are aborigines of the 
 country they at present inhabit. This latter opinion, however, is proved 
 to be an erroneous one, from the writings of various authors, and many 
 well authenticated facts. 
 
 The Baptist Missionaries of Serampur again, consider the Pushto and 
 the Beluch* languages, to form the connecting link, between those of 
 Sanskrit, and those of Hebrew origin. f M. Adelung, in his Mithridates 
 vol. 1st, page 225, considers Pushto an original and peculiar dialect, but 
 at the same time acknowledges his acquaintance with it to be very slight. 
 
 Mr. Elphinstone, in his work on Kabul, Yol. 1st, page 302, with refer- 
 ence to the Afghanian language, considers that its origin cannot be 
 easily discovered. He remarks, “ a large portion of the words that 
 compose it, as also most of the verbs and particles belong to an unknown 
 root, and in this portion are included most of those words, which from 
 the early necessity for designating the objects they represent, must have 
 formed parts of the original language; yet some of this very class 
 belong to the Zend and Pehlavi, such as the terms for father and mother, 
 sister and brother.” He also further states, that out of two hundred 
 and eighteen Pushto words, not one had the smallest appearance of being 
 deducible from any of the Semitic languages ; but that a resemblance 
 (five out of one hundred and ten words) can be traced between it and 
 the Kurdish, considered to be an Indu- Germanic tongue. 
 
 One of the most decided proofs against the erroneous idea that the 
 Afghans are the aborigines of the territory they at present inhabit, and 
 that the Pushto is the original dialect of those countries, consists in the 
 
 * The Beluchki is a mixture of Persian, Sindlii, Hindi, and Sanskrit, with some 
 original words. 
 
 f They also notice the numerous pure Hebrew roots to be found in Pushto. 
 
30 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 facts brought to light in the decyphering of the Bactrian, and Indii- 
 Scythian coins. M. Lassen in his interesting and erudite work* on this 
 subject, very truly observes ; “ I indeed know that some have pretended 
 to recognize the Afghans in eastern Kabul, even as early as Alexander’s 
 time ; not so Mr. Elphinstone,f who rather proves their immigration 
 into Kabul at a much later period. This conjecture has originated with 
 Professor Wilken,J who thinks he recognizes the Afghans in the Assa- 
 kanes. If these were indeed Afghans, the Afghan language would have 
 been spoken throughout Kabul, and the language of the coins must be 
 the source of the Pushto. Without observing, that neither ancient 
 authorities nor modern Afghan history§ admit or requires this supposi- 
 tion, the correct assertion of the learned academician himself, that the 
 Afghans belonged to the Medo-Persic tribe, is at variance with it ; the 
 Assakaness inhabited a country, where even in the 7th century A. D. an 
 Indian language was spoken.” 
 
 As the learned Professor urges— if the Afghans were the aborigines 
 of the countries they at present inhabit, the Afghanian language must, 
 as a matter of coarse, have been generally spoken. Had such been 
 the case, the language on the coins must have been the source of the 
 Pushto, but no similarity whatever exists between them. 
 
 The Afghans, although subdivided into numerous tribes, are undoubt- 
 edly one race, and speak one original language. Had they been the 
 aborigines of the country at present known as Afghanistan, we must 
 
 * Points in the history of the Greek and Indd-Scythian Kings in Bactria, Kabul, 
 and India. Page 1 16. 
 
 ■j* Account of Kabul. Vol. II. pp. 10, 33, 44, 50 and 56. 
 
 + Abhandlg. dcr Berlin Acad. 1818-19, p. 261. 
 
 § Baber does not mention any thing about Afghans at Kabul, when he took that 
 city. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 31 
 
 have heard something of them from ancient writers, for we find that 
 even in the time of Herodotus, Darius had sent an exploring expedition 
 under Scylax of Caryanda and others as far as the Indus.* * * § That the 
 whole of the regions west of J elalabad, or even as far west as Kabul, were 
 peopled by a Hindu race, most ancient writers agree to, as also that they 
 were of different tribes, and spoke different languages. Herodotus says 
 — “ There are many nations of Indians, and they do not speak the same 
 language as each other; some of them areNomades, and others not.”f 
 
 Again the father of History observes. “ There are other Indians 
 bordering on the city of Caspatyrus and the country of Pactyica, settled 
 northwards of the other Indians, whose mode of life resembles that of 
 the Bactrians. ,; i The country here referred to — the same as Scylax 
 and his companions started from on their voyage down the river — is the 
 present district of Paklili, north of Attak. The Indians are in all pro- 
 bability the ancestors of the race who still occupy that district; the 
 Suwatees ; and the people of Astor and Gilgit. 
 
 It is therefore evident that the Afghans have immigrated into their 
 present territories from the westward ;§ and that the aborigines — the Seah 
 
 * “ A great part of Asia was explored under the direction of Darius. He, being desir- 
 ous to know where the Indus, which is the second river that produces crocodiles, 
 discharged itself into the sea, sent in ships both others on whom he could rely to 
 make a true report, and also Scylax of Caryanda. They accordingly, setting out from 
 the city of Caspatyrus and the country of Pactyica, sailed down the river towards the 
 east and sunrise to the sea.” Melpomene IV. 44. 
 
 f Thalia, III. 98. 
 
 x Thalia, III. 102. 
 
 § The empire of the Great Cyrus extended, according to the best authorities, from 
 the iEgean to the Indus, and from the Euxine and Caspian to Ethiopia and the Ara- 
 bian sea. As it was customary to transport a whole tribe, and sometimes gven a whole 
 nation from one country to another, and as the Jews were ever a stiff-necked race, is 
 it not possible, that the Great King may have transported some of the most troublesome 
 amongst them to the thinly-peopled provinces of the east, where they would be too 
 
32 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Posh Kafirs, or Black-clad Pagans ; the Suwatees ; and the people inhabit- 
 ing the hills to the north-east of Suwat, on the one side, and possibly 
 the Beluchis and Jatts on the other — have been forced by the gradual 
 advance of this powerful race, to move to the north-east and ^outh-west 
 respectively. 
 
 I formerly entertained an idea that some affinity might exist between 
 Pushto and the language of that strange people, the Gypsies, but subse- 
 quent enquiries have convinced me to the contrary ; and I find that no 
 trace of similarity exists between them. This may also be seen by refer- 
 ence to a comparative table of languages which I shall shortly publish. 
 
 Whether the Afghanian language be a dialect of the Semitic, of Zend 
 
 far away from their native land and captive countrymen to give trouble in future ? Or, 
 as I have remarked in another place, is it not probable, as well as possible, that those 
 of the Jews who could effect their escape, might have fled eastward, preferring a wan- 
 dering life in a mountainous country, with independence, to the grinding tyranny of 
 Cyrus’s successors and their Satraps ? In fact there was no other direction to which 
 they could have fled, except towards the north, inhabited by the Scythians who would 
 have massacred, or at least made slaves of them or sold them as such ; or eastward, 
 which being mountainous and but thinly peopled, was likely to afford them a permanent 
 and secure retreat. According to Ni’amut Ullali, Zoliak’s children, to escape the exter- 
 minating vengeance of Feridun, fled for refuge to the Kohistan of Ghor, and settled 
 there ; and at his time, its only inhabitants w r ere some scattered tribes of the Israelites, 
 Afghans, and others. 
 
 There are a number of Jews to be found in the south-west parts of India, and in the 
 Bombay Army there are a great number. Where did they come from ? and when did 
 they come ? 
 
 Again in the 5th year of Darius (A. M. 3488; Ant. J. C. 516.) Babylon revolted 
 and could not be reduced until after a siege of twenty months. It is therefore proba- 
 ble that the Jew's of whom a considerable number remained at Babylon, went out of 
 the city before the siege w as formed, as the prophets Isaiah and Jeremiah had exhorted 
 them long before, and Zachariah very lately in the following terms : “ Thou daughter 
 of Zion, that dw'ellest w'ith the daughter of Babylon, flee from the country and save 
 thyself.” Isaiah, XLVIII. 20. Jeremiah L. 8. LI. 6, 9 — 45. Zachariah II. 
 
 It also appears that Ochus son of Artaxerxes Mnemon, carried a number of Jewish 
 captives into Egypt, and many others into Hyrcania, where he settled them on the 
 coast of the Caspian (A. M. 3653, Ant. J. C. 351 ;) might not some have been sent 
 eastw ard also ? See Solin. C. 35, Euseb. in Chron. etc. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 33 
 
 or Pehlavi origin, or of the Indian stock, I will leave for others better 
 qualified to decide. Before entering into any investigation on the sub- 
 ject, it must be borne in mind, that “ no efforts of the learned, can 
 ever so far alter a language, as to deface every line of resemblance 
 between the speech of the present day and that of even the remotest 
 ancestry : nothing but the absolute extirpation of the aboriginal natives 
 can apparently accomplish so singular a revolution.”* As an instance 
 of this, we have merely to examine the present language of Persia, and 
 the different dialects of the continent of India; or for a still more 
 convincing proof, to look into the Gothic and Celtic original of the 
 modern European languages, amidst the polish and refinement of the 
 Greek and Latin. 
 
 Before bringing these rambling remarks to a close, I must notice a 
 few of the most striking peculiarities of the Pushto language, which 
 will, in some measure, serve as a guide in investigations as to its origin 
 and affinity to the other dialects of the Asiatic continent. It will 
 however be well, first to point out the best and most effectual method of 
 ascertaining the real affinity of oriental languages. 
 
 Baron William Humbolt, in an essay on this highly important subject 
 remarks ; “ I confess that I am extremely averse to the system which 
 proceeds on the supposition that we can judge of the affinity of lan- 
 guages merely by a certain number of ideas expressed in the different lan- 
 guages which we wish to compare. I beg you will not suppose, however, 
 that I am insensible to the value and utility of the comparisons : on the 
 contrary when they are well executed, I appreciate all their importance ; 
 but I can never deem them sufficient to answer the end for which they 
 
 * Richardson’s Dissertation. 
 
 / 
 
34 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 have been undertaken ; they certainly form part of the data to he taken 
 into account in deciding on the affinity of languages,, but we should 
 never be guided by them alone, if we wish to arrive at a solid, complete 
 and certain conclusion. If we would make ourselves acquainted with 
 the relation between two languages, we ought to possess a thorough and 
 profound knowledge of each of them. This is the principle dictated 
 alike by common sense and by that precision acquired by the habit of 
 scientific research. 
 
 “ I do not mean to say, that, if we are unable to attain a profound 
 knowledge of each idiom, we should on this account entirely suspend our 
 judgment : I only insist on it that we should not prescribe to ourselves 
 arbitrary limits, and imagine that we are forming our judgment on a 
 firm basis, while in reality it is insufficient. 
 
 “ But further, I am convinced that it is only by an accurate exami- 
 nation of the grammar of languages, that we can pronounce a decisive 
 judgment on their true affinities. 
 
 “ If two languages, such for instance as the Sanskrit and the Greek, 
 exhibit grammatical forms which are identical in arrangement, and have 
 a close analogy in their sounds, we have an incontestible proof that these 
 two languages belong to the same family. 
 
 “ The difference between the real affinity of languages, which presumes 
 affiliation as it were among the nations who speak them, and that degree 
 of relation which is purely historical, and only indicates temporary and 
 accidental connexions among nations, is, in my opinion, of the greatest 
 importance. Now it appears to me impossible ever to ascertain that 
 difference merely by the examination of words ; especially, if we exa- 
 mine but a small number of them. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 35 
 
 “But whatever opinion may be entertained with respect to this 
 manner of considering the difference of languages, it appears to me at 
 all events demonstrated : First, that all research into the affinity of lan- 
 guages, which does not enter quite as much into the examination of the 
 grammatical system as into that of words, is faulty and imperfect ; and, 
 Secondly, that the proofs of the real affinity of languages, that is to 
 say, the question whether two languages belong to the same family, 
 ought to be principally deduced from that alone ; since the identity of 
 words only proves a resemblance such as may be purely historical and 
 accidental.” 
 
 There are nine letters of the Arabic alphabet which never occur in 
 pure Afghanian words, — Js? and 9; and 
 therefore the language really contains but twenty-nine letters, including 
 five peculiar ones, to which, after a careful comparison of six hundred al- 
 phabets, I find that there is no similarity as to form or sound, either in 
 Arabic, Zend, or Sanskrit ; but characters similar in sound are contained 
 in most of the Semitic, and some Tartarian dialects. The Pushto letters 
 with the corresponding ones in the languages referred to are as follow. 
 
 £ ts or tz, pronounced tse or tze , has an equivalent in the Chaldaic 
 £ ts, Hebrew ^ tsode, Samaritan 'fii- tsade , Syriac ^ tsode , Ethiopic 
 and Amharic A tza, Armenian £ * tsa, Palmyren ^ ts, Phoenician 
 X* or Y' ts, Punic ^ ts, Kufic ts, Georgian g ts, Mongolish 
 ts, Mandchu tsa, Thibetan d, ts, Albanian % - ^ ts, Corean 
 -~jf^ts, and the Japanic ^ t se • 
 
 £ dz or ds, pronounced dze or dse, similar to the Hebrew 1 dsain, 
 Aramaic | ds, Palmyren I ds, Phoenician ds, Kufic ds, Syriac 
 r j- r V dzain, the Assyrian cuniform dz or ds, Armenian & 
 
36 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 dza, Greek £ zeta, Georgian ^ ds, Mongolish 3 - «C ds, an( l Korean 
 X * ~t\ ds, Mandchu -~J ds, Japanic dz. 
 
 X urray, for which with perhaps the harsh q « rh of the Armenian, 
 there is no equivalent in any of the known dialects of the old world. 
 Some persons, and among them Major Leech, have considered the San- 
 skrit lingual ^ as similar in sound ; but it is merely necessary to hear it 
 
 pronounced by an Afghan mountaineer to convince any one of the total 
 difference, indeed, it is almost impossible to give a proper idea of its 
 sound in writing. Kufic 3 r, is like it in form. 
 
 khin bears some similarity to the - •=» k’ch of the Chaldaic, and 
 with this exception, no sound like it is to be found amongst the letters 
 of the six hundred alphabets before referred to.* 
 
 or ^ urrun, is a combination of the sound of urray and 
 nun, the latter nasal. It is quite impossible to acquire the real pronun- 
 ciation except from an Afghan mouth when using the word a ) 3 b hdnrra, 
 the eye-lash, or if j- ^ kdnrre, stone. The Q run of the Sindian lan- 
 guage is something like it. 
 
 Pushtg also, like the Semitic dialects, of which family I am inclined 
 to consider it, has the fh with a strong aspiration, to which sound the 
 Persians have an unconquerable antipathy ; indeed their mouths seem 
 to be so formed as to be unable to utter it. Like the Jews and Egyp- 
 tians, as well as the Arabs, the Afghans uniformly give the hard sounds, 
 fh, d’h, ds, dtz, dz, etc., to those characters which the Persians have 
 ever softened to z and s. The pronunciation too, is somewhat difficult 
 
 * See Die Schriftzeichen des gesammten Erdkreises. Vienna. 1851, also, Alphabete 
 orientalisclier und occidental isclier Spraclien zura Gebrauch fur Schriftsetzer und 
 Correctoren. Leipzig, 1850. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 37 
 
 on account of the use of several gutturals, and the combinations of 
 such letters as ^ etc., which are difficult to enunciate. 
 
 In harshness of pronunciation, and in the declensions of its nouns, 
 it bears great resemblance to the Zend and Pehlavi ; and like the former 
 language, can be, and often is written in old works, on which alone we 
 can place dependence, by distinct letters in the body of each word, 
 instead of introducing the short vowels. Of the affinity of the Zend 
 and Sanskrit at present there is no doubt ; but the Pehlavi appears to 
 have a greater affinity to the Arabic, and to differ little from the present 
 language of Persia.* 
 
 In Arabic and Persian it is impossible to sound a consonant which 
 may be the first letter of a word, without the aid of a vowel, whilst in 
 Pushto there are numbers of words beginning with a consonant imme- 
 diately followed by another ; as, shpah, night, rwadz , day, ilc 
 
 ghla, theft, && khkatah, below. 
 
 The vowels and consonants used in Pushto have the same powers as 
 those of the Arabic, Hebrew, and other Semitic dialects. Like them it 
 has two genders — the masculine and feminine ; but the former have a 
 dual form, which is wanting in the latter. In this respect the Afghani - 
 an also differs from the Zend and the Sanskrit, but agrees with the 
 Pehlavi, from which the modern Persian is derived. In common with 
 the Hebrew, Arabic and Persian, it has the peculiar separable and in- 
 separable pronouns, the latter being invariably attached to some preced- 
 ing word, whether a noun, verb, or particle. When attached to nouns 
 
 * Sir William Jones has stated, that “ having compared a Pehlavi translation of the 
 inscription in the Gulistan on the diadem of Cyrus, and from the Pazend words in the 
 Ferang-i Jehangiri, he became convinced that the Pehlavi is a dialect of the Chaldaic.” 
 — Asiatic Res. 
 
38 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 they signify possession or propriety ; and with intransitive verbs in the 
 course of conjugation, are used in the place of personal pronouns ; and 
 with transitives point out the objective case.* This is also a peculiar 
 feature of the Sindian language, which has several letters in common 
 w ith Pushto, besides its own peculiar ones. The inflexions of the Afgha- 
 nian verbs too are formed according to the Arabic and Hebrew system, 
 with two original tenses only — the mazi or past, and the muzarce or aorist, 
 the past participle being used in the construction of the compound tenses, 
 with the aid of the auxiliary, to be. Another peculiarity is, that the in- 
 transitive verbs agree in gender with the nominative, whilst the transi- 
 tives are governed both in gender and number by the objective case. 
 In many respects the Pushto syntax agrees with that of the Hebrew ; 
 and I have no doubt but that much greater affinity will be found to exist 
 between them, if compared by any one well versed in the latter language. 
 
 The Pushto language is spoken with considerable variation in ortho- 
 graphy and pronunciation, from the valley of Pishm south of Kanda- 
 har, to Kafiristan on the north ; and from the banks of the Helmand 
 on the west, to the Attok, Sindhu, or Indus on the east — throughout 
 the Sama or plain of the Yusufzo’es ; the mountainous districts of Baja- 
 wer, Panjkorat Suwat, and Bunir, to Astor on the borders of Little 
 Thibet — an immense tract of country, equal in extent to the entire 
 Spanish peninsula. 
 
 The numerous convulsions to which the country of the children of 
 Afghana has been subjected for the last seventy or eighty years, have 
 necessarily affected their language also; hence the great variation 
 
 * See Hebrew Grammar by Prof. Lee, p. 80, Art. 153, p. 260, Art. 220. 
 London. 1827. 
 
 f Ivor is the Pushto for house, and Panj the Persian for five. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 39 
 
 observable in the orthography and mode of writing of modern Pushto 
 works. On this account, no dependence whatever can be placed on any 
 manuscript of later date than the reign of the founder of the Duram 
 empire — Ahmed Shah, Abdali, (one of their poetical authors) for it is 
 almost impossible to find two copies of one author, unless written by 
 one person, agreeing on these essential points. I have in my possession 
 a rare prose work, which was written in the reign of the Emperor 
 Aurengzeb, which I picked up in a most out-of-way place, — a pawn shop 
 at Bombay. The mode of writing and orthography in it, I have gene- 
 ally adopted, together with that of the Maklizan Afghani, throughout 
 the following pages. 
 
 The assistance which I have derived from a knowledge of the dialects 
 of the neighbouring territories, to six of which I have devoted many 
 years, has been very great, indeed more than I can well express. It has 
 enabled me to trace words of Arabic, Persian, Turki, Sanskrit, and 
 Hindi origin, greatly garbled in orthography, and vitiated in pronuncia- 
 tion, which a person unacquainted with them in any way, would in all 
 probability set down as pure Pushto. 
 
 As an example of this, I will mention one instance alone. M. Klap- 
 roth in his apparent eagerness for classing the Beluch language, which 
 is a mixture of Persian, Sindhi, Panjabi, Hindi and Sanskrit, amongst 
 the Indu-Germanic family of tongues, commits an error, from, I fancy, 
 ignorance of the Persian language. He gives the following table :* 
 
 Beluch. 
 
 German. 
 
 Latin. 
 
 Greek. 
 
 English. 
 
 Shash 
 II apt 
 
 Sechs 
 
 Sex 
 
 Septem 
 
 Ilepta 
 
 Six 
 
 Seven 
 
 * I am indebted for this to Thornton’s Gazetteer. 
 
40 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Now the Persian for six is sfiash, and seven is haft , which 
 
 two words, to all appearance, have a greater affinity to the Belucli words 
 here mentioned, than to either German, Latin, Greek, or English; in 
 fact they are precisely the same words, for ^—5 is used for and pro- 
 nounced c—J indiscriminately, and would be written exactly the same in 
 both languages. If we consider that Behichistan is merely separated 
 from the Persian province of Kirman by a range of mountains, the simi- 
 larity is naturally accounted for, without leaving Asia for that purpose, 
 as the learned Professor appears to have done — “ Ea sub oculis posita 
 negligimus : proximorum incur iosi, longinqua sectamur” 
 
 I think it will be generally allowed, that at the present time, a know- 
 ledge of the language of Afghanistan is a desideratum, holding as we 
 do the Deraj at, Bunnu Tak, Kohat, Pesh’awer, and the Sama, or Plain 
 of the Yusufzo’es, throughout which districts, with the exception of 
 Derail Gliazi Khan, nine-tenths of the people speak no other dialect. 
 By being acquainted with this language, an officer can communicate 
 personally with the people of the country, and give ear to their com- 
 plaints without the aid ofMoonshees and others as Interpreters. In 
 respect to Police Officers, they can thereby communicate their secret 
 orders direct, without fear of betrayal by a third party. Doubtless 
 much discontent and heart-burning is enkindled in the minds of the 
 Afghans, who are by nature a proud, fiery, and independent race, from 
 having to come into contact at all with natives of Hindustan, whom they 
 hold in supreme contempt, and their former triumphs over whom at 
 Paniput and other places, they do not appear to have forgotten. 
 
 We have also in Sindh and the Panjab, seven local infantry corps, 
 which contain at least a proportion of one half Afghans or Rohillas, 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 41 
 
 whose native tongue is Pushto, and many of whom understand Hindustani 
 but imperfectly from the lips of a qualified Interpreter. A translation 
 of the articles of War can be easily made, of which a specimen will be 
 found in the appendix to the Grammar. At Courts Martial a colloquial 
 knowledge is indespensible. 
 
 Another still more pressing reason why we should persevere in the 
 acquirement of a knowledge of the Afghaman language, is, the fact, that 
 for the last sixty years the “ Bear of the North” — whose icy breath freezes 
 and nips in the bud the tender germs of civilization and political freedom, 
 ■ — has been advancing with slow, but sure and steady steps, into the very 
 heart of Asia ; and has, for years past employed, and even at the present 
 moment, employs his Armenian spies, not only at Kabul and in Turlus- 
 tan, but at Ladakh and in Kashmir also. The Russians too appear to 
 have paid considerable attention, and to have made great progress in the 
 study of Pushto, if we may judge from the work published some time 
 since by Professor Dorn of St. Petersburg, who has been the first to pro- 
 duce a work in the language. 
 
 The age of Dost Muhammad Khan is now so great, that in all proba- 
 bility a year or two more must terminate the earthly career of that 
 extraordinary man. His death will be the signal for the commencement 
 of civil dissensions, and doubtless many astonishing changes will take 
 place in Afghanistan. Opportunities may offer themselves for the 
 renewal of friendly intercourse between the two nations, which should 
 not be allowed to pass ; and let trade and commerce be encouraged by 
 all and every legitimate means. This effected, there is not much fear 
 of the semi-barbarian Russians establishing themselves in Afghanistan ; 
 although should they even succeed in debouching from the Khaiber Pass 
 
 y 
 
42 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 on tlie plain of Jamrud, there is not much doubt, hut that they will 
 merely add other heaps to the hones which have already whitened on 
 that scene of numerous conflicts. 
 
 The object of Russia, however, does not appear to he Afghanistan 
 ’alone,* for twelve years hack we have heard of their having established 
 
 * “ One of the principal objects, he (Prince Gortschakof, Governor- General of 
 Siberia) had in view, was the organization of a Russian settlement through the Kir- 
 ghis Steppes, in the direct line to Thibet. The distance,*as the crow flips, from Omsk 
 to the frontier of Thibet is twelve hundred versts : through a part of this desert the 
 natives are on friendly terms with the Russians. So soon therefore, as a permanent set- 
 tlement is established through the whole distance, immense advantages will be gained to 
 Russian commerce. At this moment this object is accomplished in nine hundred versts, or 
 three quarters of the way. A line of Cossacks is permanently formed, provided with 
 guns, ammunition, and all the necessaries for a fixed residence, which may be liable 
 to hostile incursions from time to time. The Kirghis, however, stand in such awe of 
 the Cossacks, and the benefits they derive from trading with Russia are such, that 
 the caravans now go as securely the whole nine hundred versts, as in any part of the 
 empire. Every summer sees some fresh point gained j and there is no doubt, that in 
 a few years, the Russian dominion will only end where that of Thibet begins. They 
 were for some time, stopped by a district more desert and inhospitable than the rest, 
 which was supposed to reach to the Thibetan frontier ; but it has been discovered by 
 a Cossack, who was three years prisoner in the country, that it only extends about 
 ninety versts, and he described the other side of it as being fertile, well watered, and 
 altogether different from the other Steppes. There will, therefore probably be no 
 further obstacle to their progress, and a glance at the map will show that they are much 
 nearer to our Indian frontier here, than by any other road they can take. 
 
 “ Once established as far as the boundary of Thibet, the Russians will have no 
 great difficulty in obtaining a footing in it, and a transit for their merchandize to India 
 would be a matter of course. 
 
 “ There is at Omsk a military school where five hundred boys are educated, who are 
 to become soldiers, most of them being soldier’s children, some few Kirghis, and the 
 sous of exiles. The establishment is admirably conducted : we went over it several 
 times, and nothing could exceed the regularity and order which prevailed. There is 
 another military school for Cossacks only, and the boys are destined for a different 
 career in some respects from the others. We may safely defy any country in the world 
 to produce an establishment in any way superior to this ; our only doubt is, if it is 
 not too good for those who are brought up in it, considering what their future destina- 
 tion is likely to be. The boys are taught drawing, algebra, languages, history, and 
 fortification, the first class who were all under seventeen years of age, studied princi- 
 pally the Oriental languages, and are intended for interpreters and agents in the East. 
 We were told by General Schramm, who has the superintendence of the school, that 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 43 
 
 a line of Cossack posts, provided with guns, and all the munitions of 
 war, on nine of the twelve hundred versts of desert, which separates the 
 city of Omsk, the capital of Western Siberia from the Thibetan frontier. 
 
 Unlike most Eastern nations, the Afghans appear to regard women in 
 a great measure on an equality with themselves in this world at least ; 
 and the latter generally receive some sort of education. 
 
 Some of the Afghan females of the higher class, are famous for their 
 knowledge of Pushto which they read and write. The daughter of the 
 late Dalil Khan, Arbab, or chief of Toru, # near Pesh’awer, is celebrated 
 for her learning, and general proficiency in the Afghan language. 
 Pesh’awer, some fifty or sixty years since, was one of the principal seats 
 of Muhammadan learning, and by many was considered a more learned 
 city than even Bokhara itself. 
 
 The custom is for boys and girls of from five to twelve years of age 
 to go to the same school. After learning the letters they immediately 
 commence reading the Koran in Arabic, but of course without under- 
 standing it. On its completion they begin to read some Pushto work 
 usually a commentary on the Koran, or an explanation of the rites and 
 ceremonies of their faith, such as may be found in the work entitled 
 Rushid-ul-By’&n, or some such religious subject. After the twelfth year. 
 
 most of those who composed the first class understood Mongolish, Arabic, and Persian, 
 and have also native youths to teach them the patois of the Nomandic tribes. 
 
 “We cannot however, wonder, when these pains are taken in the wilds of Siberia to 
 educate boys for the services they are to perform as men, that Russian diplomatic 
 agents should be so superior to our own, and the habit of thinking such a preparation 
 must have created, cannot fail to give them great advantages as negociators and gene- 
 ral agents.” “ Recollections of Siberia in the years 1840 and 1841,” by C. H. Cottrell, 
 Esq., London : J. W. Parker. 
 
 * Toru, or Tolu, is a town or cluster of villages in the Yusufzo’e country, about 
 eleven miles north of Nohshaira, and containing about 5000 inhabitants. 
 
 9 2 
 
44 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 the girls either attend a dame’s school, or, if their parents can afford it, 
 are taught at home. Sometimes boys under twelve years of age, go to 
 a dame’s school with grown up girls of fifteen and upwards ; but this 
 custom is only prevalent at a distance from towns, as in most large 
 places there are separate schools for males and females. The scholars 
 either pay a small sum monthly to their teacher, or make him a present 
 after having completed the perusal of the Koran, according to the posi- 
 tion and means of their parents. Amongst some tribes a portion of land 
 is allotted to the Mulla or Priest, who also acts as village school-master. 
 
 The Afghan language, taking all things into consideration, is by no 
 means poor in literature. There are numerous poets, of whom Abd- 
 ur-Rahman who flourished in Aurengzeb’s time, is perhaps, the best 
 known and most generally esteemed. He was a Mulla or Priest, and his 
 writings, which are of a religious character, are collected in the form of 
 a Dewan — a certain number of odes ending with each letter of the 
 alphabet, from a to y. The Dewan is the form in which most of the 
 poetical works are arranged. 
 
 The next most popular poet is Khushhal Khan who was chief of the 
 powerful clan of Khattak in the time of the Emperor Aurengzeb, and 
 passed his life in struggling against the oppressive pow er of that mon- 
 arch. The following verse from a poem written during his confinement 
 in the fortress of Gwalior by the Emperor, is characteristic of the man. 
 
 Cheer up then heart ! I have by me, 
 
 A healing halm for every throe — 
 
 That Khushhal Khan’s an Afghan true, 
 
 Aurengzeb’s mortal foe.* 
 
 Khushhal was also author of a History of the Afghans, which work 
 * I regret that want of space will not allow me to give the poem entire. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 45 
 
 is now very rarely obtainable ; and of a translation of Pilpay’s Fables (the 
 Anwari Soheli of the Persian) entitled iE’yar Danish, or the “ Touch- 
 stone of Wisdom,” examples from which will be found in the Grammar. 
 He also wrote a small volume on the forms of prayer, and other religious 
 matters. 
 
 The poems of Ahmed Shah, Abdali, the great founder of the Durani 
 monarchy, and conqueror of the Murathi host at Paniput, are principally 
 in an amorous and metaphysical strain, and contain a number of diffi- 
 cult Arabic words. His poetry is highly esteemed, perhaps more so, 
 than its merit demands. 
 
 The next author to be noticed is Mulla Abd-ul- Hamid who flourished 
 in the time of Timur the son and successor of Ahmed Shah. His odes 
 which are mostly of an amorous or moral tendency contain many fine 
 sentiments. He is the Shaik Saadi of the Pushto, and I must say, that 
 I prefer his poems to any of the others. The numerous extracts which 
 I have drawn from his works as examples in the Grammar, will give a 
 pretty good idea of his style. They are entitled, Dur-wo-Marjan 
 — Pearls and Corals. 
 
 Futtih Khan, Yusufzo’e,* surnamed Mirza, the next poet in point of 
 popularity was a Sufi, and his works are a mass of mysticisms. He 
 served in the wars of Aurengzeb in Guzerat and the Dekkan in 1686 
 and the following years.t 
 
 Kasim All Khan of the notorious tribe of Afridi, is the author of a 
 Dewan, but his odes also bear the stamp of mysticism. He was born 
 
 * Some say he was of the family of Bazid (Bajizid) Ansari, the founder of the 
 Roshnmn sect, called Pir Tarek or Saint of Darkness, by Akhund Darweza. 
 
 t I have in my possession the copy of his works which belonged to the Ilon’ble 
 Mr. Elphinstone, containing that gentleman’s name in his own writing. 
 
46 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 at Furakabad in India, in the time of Nowab Muzaffar Jung, and 
 according to the account given of himself in one of his odes, he was 
 acquainted with Afghani, Arabic, Tdrki, Persian, Hindi and a little 
 English. He has devoted one entire ode to the abuse of the English, just 
 arrived in India, whom he calls “a nation of shop-keepers, who in 
 Hindustan have turned into soldiers.” 
 
 The romantic and interesting poems of Saif-ul-Muluk and Badri 
 Jamal, by Gulam Muhammad, and Bahrain Gur, by Fy’az, must not be 
 overlooked. The authors, who are but little known, are said to have 
 flourished in the seventeenth century, which appears to have produced 
 most of the Pushto authors. 
 
 The other poetical works most generally known are, The Tale of Sul- 
 tan Jumjumah, by Emam-ud-Dm; Mseraj Nameh, by Gulam Muhammad; 
 Kashid-ul-By^an, by Akhund Bashid; Mukhammas of Abd-ul-Kadir ; 
 Majmuseat-i-Kandahari ; and some others of less note. 
 
 The prose writings are numerous ; but with the exception of the 
 romantic story of Adam Khan and Durkham mentioned by Mr. Elphin- 
 stone in his “ Account of Kabul,” and a few others, they are mostly on 
 divinity. The principal are, the Fawabd-ush-Sharrflgea, written by 
 Akhund Kasim in 1560; Makhzan Afghani, by the celebrated Akhund 
 Darwezah* who lies buried at Peslflawer ; the works of Babu Jan, said 
 to have been a converted Seah Posh Kaffir who again relapsed ; the 
 Jung Nameh containing the history of Hasan and Husain, by Gulam 
 
 * Professor Dorn in his Chrestomathy states, that Akhund Darwezah was the first 
 author who composed in the Afghan language ; but he neither states how he has arrived 
 at this conclusion, nor his authority, for such a statement. In the same manner he 
 considers Khushhal Khan to be the author of Adam Khan and Durkhani, but neither 
 the one or the other is actually known. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 47 
 
 Muhammad; Nur Nameh, by Jan Muhammad ; Gulistan-i-Rabmat, by 
 Nowab Muhammad Mustajib Khan in 1800 ; Tafzir — a translation from 
 the Koran; Hazar Masa’il; Hiyat-ul-Mummin ; Akhir Nameb ; and 
 several others. 
 
 Besides the original Afghan writings, there are also numerous trans- 
 lations from Arabic and Persian authors, both poetical and prose. 
 Amongst those which have come under my own observation are, the 
 Gulistan of Saadi, translated by Amir Muhammad, Ansari ; Yusuf and 
 Zulikha of Jami, by Abd-ul-Kadir ; Majnun and Laila of Jami, by Bai 
 Khan of Bunir; the Kasidah Surf am; and the Kasidah Bardah, by 
 Akhiind Darwezah.* 
 
 There are two valuable lexicographical works, — the Rf az-ul-Mahabbat 
 (Gardens of Friendship) by the Nowab Hafiz Mahabbat Khan, compiled 
 at the request of Sir George Barlow in 1805-6. It is an extensive work 
 of about 700 pages small folio, but is chiefly devoted to the conjugation 
 of the Afghan verbs, which are exceedingly difficult from their irregu- 
 larity. The author however was a native of Hindustan, and many 
 peculiarities regarding the verbs and tenses, have been omitted. The 
 
 * The so-called translation of the Old and New Testaments made by the Seram- 
 pore Missionaries in 1818, bears a very slight resemblance to the sacred writings ; in 
 fact it is quite ridiculous and quite painful to read. I will merely give one specimen, 
 the well known verse from the Sermon on the mount — “ Judge not , that ye be not 
 judged” The Pushto is in the following terms : — 
 
 “ Do not justice unto any one, lest justice shall be done unto you ! ! ! ! ! !” Is this 
 Christian doctrine? verily, if the Infidels are to judge of our religion from such 
 translations as this, it is not to be wondered at that they should scoff at, hold our faith 
 in ridicule, and call us Kafirs or Blasphemers. It is quite evident that in making 
 this translation the English has been merely transposed for the Pushto without the 
 slightest consideration as to difference of idiom, style, and arrangement of the lan- 
 guages. I trust the other translations of the Scriptures are better than the Pushto 
 
 one. 
 
48 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 vocabulary is valuable. The other work, entitled iEajaTb-ul-Lughat, 
 (Curiosities of Language) was written about the year 1808, by Nowab 
 Allah Yar Khan of the Barech tribe, who was also a native of India. The 
 work contains 640 pages of 17 lines to a page. 
 
 Kasim All Afridi, in one of his odes, besides the authors already men- 
 tioned, gives the names of several others — Dowlat, said to have been a 
 Hindu, Meher All, Sikunder, Ashraf, Arzani, Mukhlis, Karim Khan, 
 Kazim Khan, surnamed Shaidah, Allah Dad, Karim Dad, Fazil, Latarr, 
 and Meher Shah, but they are little known. 
 
 There is a host of ballad writers, and some of their compositions sung 
 by the wandering minstrels are very spirited, and put me in mind of 
 those of our own land. During my residence at PeslTawer I had several 
 of them written out. The following is a specimen of one which I have 
 attempted to turn into English ballad style, retaining in some measure 
 the metre of the original. The translation is almost literal. 
 
 The Fight at Nohshaira. 
 
 The battle of Nohshaira was fought in 1823, between the Afghans 
 under Sirdar Muhammad Azim Khan, Barakzo'e, brother of Dost Mu- 
 hammad Khan, and the Seiks under Bunjit Singh, in which Abbas Khan 
 Kliattak was slain, besides a host of Y’usufzo'es. 
 
 In misery and grief I’m plung'd. 
 
 By ruthless Fate’s decree ; 
 
 Alas ! that from its cruel laws. 
 
 There’s no escape for me. 
 
 What shall I say of Abbas Khan, 
 
 That Khattak chief so bold ; 
 
 At his sad fate I’m sorely griev’d 
 And that by me ’tis told. 
 
INDEX TO CONTENTS 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 The Pushto Alphabet with the names of the letters. 
 
 Changes of letters, and difference of pronunciation by some Afghan tribes, 
 The vowels and other orthographical marks. 
 
 9 '- 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 The different Parts of Speech, . 
 
 No Article in Pushto, it being inherent in the noun or expressed by a 
 numeral adjective, .... 
 
 The Nouns, and their divisions. 
 
 Numbers of Nouns, and formation of the various Cases, 
 
 The Genitive Case with examples, 
 
 The Dative, „ „ . . . 
 
 The d*li or Actor, the or Attribute, and the or Object, ex 
 
 plained and illustrated, ..... 
 
 The Accusative Case with examples, .... 
 
 The Vocative, „ „ . 
 
 The Ablative and Locative „ „ 
 
 The Agent or Actor, . . . , , 
 
 The Genders of Nouns, ...... 
 
 The Declensions of Nouns, ..... 
 
 The nine Declensions with their variations, .... 
 
 Page 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 ib. 
 
 9 
 
 ib. 
 
 10 
 
 ib. 
 
 11 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 18 
 
 19 
 ib. 
 
 20 
 
Xll 
 
 INDEX TO CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 Page 
 
 The Adjective or Noun of quality, . . . . .28 
 
 Must always precede the noun, . . . . . . 29 
 
 Three forms — Nominative, Oblique, and Vocative, with examples, . ib. 
 
 Some undeclinable — examples, . . . . . . ib. 
 
 Nouns used instead of Adjectives to qualify other nouns — examples, . 31 
 
 Adjectives sometimes used alone, the noun being understood — examples, . 32 
 
 Declined in the same manner as nouns, .... ib. 
 
 The Ordinal Numbers explained and illustrated, . . . . 33 
 
 The Adjunct of Similitude or ojy*., • . . .34 
 
 ✓ * 
 
 Adverbs also used in construction to denote similarity, . ib. 
 
 The Comparative and Superlative degrees — examples, . . .36 
 
 The or Noun of Diminution, . . . . . 39 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 The different classes of Pronouns in Pushto, . . . .40 
 
 The personal Pronouns with their declensions and examples, . . . ib- 
 
 The Personal Pronoun also used as the Remote Demonstrative, . . 45 
 
 The Proximate Demonstrative Pronouns 1^ ii, , . . . 46 
 
 First Letter of lost by elision — examples, . . . .48 
 
 The Reflective or Reciprocal Pronoun <J^, . . . . . ib. 
 
 The Interrogative Pronouns (also used as an Indefinite) and or 51 
 
 ^ used as an Interrogative as well as an Indefinite Pronoun, . . . 53 
 
 The Indefinite Pronouns, . . . . . .54 
 
 Some pronouns admitting of composition — examples, . . . . 55 
 
 The Relative and co-Relative explained, . . . . .56 
 
 Another form of Pronouns etc. used with Transitive Verbs, with 
 
 declension and examples, . . . . . . 57 
 
 The second form, or pronominal dative affixes, . . • .59 
 
 The affixed Personal Pronouns with declension and examples, . . . 61 
 
 Three forms of prepositions used as Demonstrative Pronouns, with examples, 63 
 
INDEX TO CONTENTS. 
 
 XIII 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 Page 
 
 Verbs, ...... 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 64 
 
 The different kinds of Verbs, 
 
 • 
 
 
 ib. 
 
 The Active Voice — how formed, 
 
 • 
 
 
 65 
 
 Derivative Verbs, .... 
 
 • 
 
 
 66 
 
 Compound Verbs, ..... 
 
 * 
 
 
 67 
 
 Intensitives, ..... 
 
 • 
 
 
 ib. 
 
 Passive Verbs, ..... 
 
 • 
 
 
 ib. 
 
 The Imperfect Auxiliary, to be , with analysis, conjugation and examples. 
 
 
 68 
 
 y 
 
 The Auxiliary or Substantive Infinitive to be, or exist , with analysis, 
 
 conjugation, and examples, ..... 
 
 74 
 
 Analysis and Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verbs and 
 
 ^ A 
 
 to be, or 
 
 become, 
 
 used in forming the Passive Voice, 
 
 . 
 
 
 78 
 
 The thirteen classes of Intransitive Infinitives explained. 
 
 . 
 
 
 91 
 
 The twenty-four classes of Transitive Infinitives explained. 
 
 • 
 
 
 96 
 
 The the Present or Imperfect Participle, 
 
 . 
 
 
 103 
 
 The (Jj**-' 0 l the Past or Perfect Participle, 
 
 y 
 
 . 
 
 
 109 
 
 The clfb the Active Participle, Agent, or Noun of Action, 
 
 • 
 
 
 115 
 
 The oSbJ or Noun of Fitness, 
 
 . 
 
 
 117 
 
 The Tenses, ...... 
 
 . 
 
 
 118 
 
 Conjugation of a verb on the Arabic and Hebrew model. 
 
 
 
 119 
 
 Intransitive Verbs, . . . . . 
 
 . 
 
 
 121 
 
 The Past Tense — analysis and examples, 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 ib. 
 
 The Imperfect Tense, „ . 
 
 . 
 
 
 133 
 
 The Compound Past Tenses, „ . 
 
 . 
 
 
 140 
 
 The Perfect Tense, „ .... 
 
 . 
 
 
 141 
 
 The Pluperfect Tense, „ ... 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 145 
 
 The Doubtful Past Tense, „ . 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 148 
 
 The Past Conditional Tense, „ . 
 
 . 
 
 • 
 
 150 
 
 The Present Tense, „ . • 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 153 
 
 The Aorist, „ .... 
 
 • o 
 
 o 
 
 159 
 
XIV INDEX TO CONTENTS. 
 
 The 1st Future or Precative Tense, „ 
 
 
 
 Page 
 
 163 
 
 The 2nd Future Tense, ,, 
 
 . 
 
 . . 
 
 165 
 
 The Imperative Mood, ,, 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 167 
 
 Transitive Verbs, 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 168 
 
 The Past Tense — ten classes, ,, 
 
 . 
 
 • 
 
 170 
 
 The Imperfect Tense — six classes, ,, 
 
 
 • 
 
 184 
 
 The Perfect Tense — two classes, „ 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 188 
 
 The Pluperfect Tense, ,, ... 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 190 
 
 The Doubtful Past Tense, ,, 
 
 
 
 192 
 
 Past Conditional Tense, „ 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 193 
 
 The Present Tense with twelve methods of formation. 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 194 
 
 The Aorist Tense — four forms, 
 
 . 
 
 
 200 
 
 1st Future or Precative Tense — three forms, 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 204 
 
 2nd Future Tense — four forms. 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 207 
 
 The Imperative Mood, 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 211 
 
 The Potential Mood with analysis and examples. 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 214 
 
 The Present Tense, .... 
 
 • 
 
 . 
 
 215 
 
 The Past Tense, . , . . 
 
 . 
 
 
 216 
 
 The Future Tense, .... 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 ib. 
 
 The Passive Voice — first form, with examples. 
 
 • 
 
 . 
 
 21 7 
 
 Second form of the Passive Voice formed from the Imperfect Tenses 
 
 of Verbs, 
 
 
 with examples, .... 
 
 • 
 
 9 • 
 
 219 
 
 Conjugation of the Imperfect and Irregular Infinitive 
 
 to come, 
 
 according 
 
 
 to the European model. 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 223 
 
 Ditto ditto to yo, ... 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 229 
 
 Ditto ditto Irregular Intransitive to ascend, 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 237 
 
 Ditto ditto 3 , to fall, 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 245 
 
 s S .A 
 
 Ditto ditto Regular Intransitive to run, according 
 
 to the Hebrew and 
 
 
 Arabic model, .... 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 254 
 
 The Imperfect Transitive Verb jy to do, used as an auxiliary, with all its 
 moods and tenses according to the European model, 
 
 257 
 
INDEX TO CONTENTS. 
 
 The Regular Transitive Verb to do, used as an auxiliary, with all its 
 moods and tenses — European model, . . . . 
 
 The Transitive Infinitive to throw, .... 
 
 Ditto ditto Infinitive Jjfij to bring, . . . . 
 
 p'* 
 
 The Transitive Infinitive to fill, formed from an Adjective by the addi- 
 
 y 
 
 tion of Jj — Arabic and Hebrew model, .... 
 The Casual Verb Jjjgtf to cause to fig — Arabic and Hebrew model. 
 
 The Negative and Prohibitive forms of the different Infinitives with examples 
 of each, . . . . . .311 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 The Separate Particles, 
 
 Adverbs and their derivations. 
 
 Conjunctions, .... 
 Prepositions and Postpositions, with examples. 
 Interjections — example, . . , 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 The Composition and Derivation of words. 
 
 Derivation of Nouns, .... 
 
 Abstract Nouns, . . . , 
 
 Nouns of Intensity, .... 
 
 Derivation of Adjectives, 
 
 Adjectives of Intensity, etc., 
 
 Patronymical Adjectives, 
 
 Adjectives formed from the Past Participles of verbs, . 
 The uses of the Hasil, or Ism-i-Masdar, and Ism-i-Iidleah, 
 The Past Tepses used as Nouns in some instances. 
 
 Nouns from the Imperatives of verbs, . 
 
XVI 
 
 INDEX TO CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 The Cardinal Numbers, with the names and Arabic figures. 
 The Ordinal Numbers, . 
 
 The Numerals of Fractions, 
 
 The Days of the Weeks and names of the Months, 
 
 The Seasons, ..... 
 
 The Cardinal Points, ..... 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 On the Syntax — the arrangement of words in a Sentence, 
 Syntax of the Noun, .... 
 
 Ditto of the Adjective, .... 
 
 Ditto of the Pronouns, 
 
 Ditto of the Verbs, .... 
 
 Words of similar sound used together, 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Specimen translation from the Articles of War I. 
 
 Stories in the Pushto character with the English II. 
 
 Page 
 
 . . 351 
 
 . 355 
 
 ib. 
 
 . 356 
 
 . . 357 
 
 . ib. 
 
 . 358 
 
 . 359 
 
 . 361 
 
 . 362 
 
 . . 368 
 
 . 373 
 
 i. 
 
 . v. 
 
A 
 
 GRAMMAR 
 
 OP THE 
 
 PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 t( In languages which have both a written, and a spoken form, the usages of the 
 former rather than the latter are held to determine the rules of grammar. The 
 written is always more perfect than the spoken form of a language. The latter 
 exhibits actual usage ; but the former exhibits also national and reputable usage.” 
 
 J. M. M’Culloch, D. D, 
 
 CfjajJter 3L 
 
 THE ALPHABET. 
 
 1. The Pushto or Afghaman language is written in the naskh 
 character of Arabic, which is of the same general use amongst the 
 Arabs, as the Roman in Europe.* It succeeded the Kufik in which 
 the Koran was first written, and is considered to have had a common 
 origin with the Hebrew and Chaldaik, from the Semitic. t 
 
 2. It was invented in the third century of the Ilijerah by Ibn Mold ah, 
 who was successively wuzir or minister to the Khalifs, A1 Moktadir, 
 A1 Kaliir, and A1 Radi, who occupied the throne of Baghdad about three 
 
 * The Sindian language is also written in the naskh, 
 t See Introduction, page 6. 
 
 B 
 
2 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 hundred years after the Prophet — from the year 908 to 940 of our era ; 
 and was subsequently altered and improved by Nazim and Tograi, who 
 were respectively ministers to the Khalifs, ,Jelal-ud-Dm and Masud. 
 It was brought to great perfection by All Ibn Bowab, who flourished in 
 the following century, and other celebrated caligraphists, amongst whom 
 was Yakut-al Mostasimi, the Secrotary of A1 Mostasim, the eighth of the 
 Abbasidis, with whom the glory of his family and nation expired.* 
 
 3. The original Pushto alphabet, before the introduction of Arabic 
 words into the language, consisted of twenty-nine different sounds only, 
 as may be seen by comparison with old manuscripts ; but at present the 
 Afghans also use the twenty-eight Arabian letters, with the addition of 
 the extra four — q J and ^-J^-adopted by the Persians, altogether 
 making a total of forty characters, the whole of which are consonants. 
 
 4. Several letters assume different shapes according to their position 
 at the commencement, middle, or end of a word; the names, order, and 
 figures of which may be seen in the following table. 
 
 * gibbon, vol. II., p. 335. 
 
Pushto Letters. 
 
 PUSHTO LANGUAGE, 
 
 I 
 
 U) 
 
 p 
 
 p 
 
 CO 
 
 p p p 
 
 03 
 
 3 
 
 & 
 
 03 
 
 2. 
 
 bJO 
 
 P 
 
 O 
 
 OX 
 
 pC 3 
 
 j 
 
 «*H 
 
 O 
 
 ,p 
 
 *o 
 
 p 4 
 
 03 
 
 •5 
 
 bC 
 
 .s 
 
 4-H 
 
 pH 
 
 03 
 
 > 
 
 03 
 
 Ph 
 
 P 
 
 ^3 
 
 03 
 
 Ph 
 
 CO 
 
 ?H 
 
 O 
 
 £ 
 
 -<2 
 
 CO 
 
 JO 
 
 O 
 
 Co' 
 
 •4o 
 
 M 
 
 £ 
 
 S 
 
 *8 
 
 M 
 
 pH 
 
 o 
 
 co 
 
 03 
 
 •8* 
 
 S 
 
 *"s 
 
 .s 
 
 <2 
 
 03 
 
 S 
 
 03 
 
 £ 
 
 co 
 
 P 2 
 
 P 
 
 P 
 
 T 5 
 
 03 
 
 O. 
 
 CO 
 
 o 3 
 
 Tb 
 
 § 
 
 Ph 
 
 ■4-1 
 
 m 
 
 03 
 
 rP 
 
 C3 
 
 H-» 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 m 
 
 c3 
 
 3 
 
 44 
 
 "3 
 
 o 
 
 Ih ; 
 
 OS 
 
 03 
 
 co 
 
 < 
 
 03 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 T3 
 
 PS 
 
 co 
 
 ><2 
 
 co 
 
 n 
 
 !>* 
 
 P 2 
 
 CO 
 
 O 
 
 c 3 
 
 £ 
 
 \c 3 
 
 oT 
 
 rP 
 
 P 4 
 
 r P nj. 
 
 =3 >w>'\ t % VV 2 ,?% 
 
 **» I ■•'p •* 
 
 •:J A- 4* 4 
 
 •m> 
 
 -f 
 
 *$ 
 
 « tH M* «:• H -H -5 -5> •<! 
 
 - 3- 3- 9 j> 9 W © M -w O ^ -o 
 
 Ki 
 
 * 7 * 
 
Pushto Letters. 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF TH£ 
 
 cS 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 
 •«> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pC 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 
 
 TS 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 r=2 
 
 co 
 
 CD 
 
 S-t 
 
 P-i 
 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 -4-3 
 
 o3 
 
 S3 
 
 
 r— f 
 
 fcJO 
 
 eS 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 02 
 
 *Q 
 
 c3 
 
 02 
 
 03 
 
 & 
 
 g 
 
 
 w 
 
 JH 
 
 02 
 
 5h 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 <c 
 
 44> 
 
 [to 
 
 S3 
 
 rS 
 
 
 CD 
 
 oT 
 
 
 
 -4-3 
 
 CO 
 
 CD 
 
 £* 
 
 
 -4-3 
 
 o 
 
 £ 
 
 '"o2 
 
 Tb 
 
 rQ 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 ?-4 
 
 S3 
 
 CO 
 
 ccS 
 
 «D 
 
 «0 
 
 !>S 
 
 «o 
 
 S3 
 
 Ph 
 
 o 
 
 -4-3 
 
 © 
 
 co 
 
 Co 
 
 rS3 
 
 CO 
 
 To 
 
 -m 
 
 *S 
 
 TS 
 
 S3 
 
 o 
 
 34 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 *4^ 
 
 ci 
 
 o 
 
 
 Es 
 
 .3 
 
 <D 
 
 Co 
 
 # g 
 
 -3 
 
 .3 
 
 PQ 
 
 02 
 
 u 
 
 r& 
 
 .2 
 
 ** 
 
 20 
 
 # S3 
 
 20 
 
 IS 
 
 o 
 
 Co 
 
 CO 
 
 -3 
 
 T/0 
 
 co 
 
 < 
 
 co 
 
 <1 
 
 / 
 
 < 
 
 co 
 
 <1 
 
 CO 
 
 <1 
 
 CO 
 
 <1 
 
 CO 
 
 <1 
 
 CO 
 
 <1 
 
 r a 
 
 o 
 
 c3 
 
 H 
 
 9 
 
 -4-a 
 
 -4-3 
 
 S3 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 N 
 
 a 
 
 \i— * 
 
 r^3 
 
 S3 
 
 H3 
 
 03 
 
 £ 
 
 $ 5'5*V5 
 
 in <i 
 
 f> w - 
 
 S= 
 
 3 
 
 **\ «<| 3 .; 5 «V <* 
 
 -T \* 
 
 *v -Q 
 
 o 
 
 feH 
 
 ^ ^ •*> * : H ^ ^ 
 
 \ 
 
 1 JJ ^1 
 
 H3 
 
 CD 
 
 -M 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 S3 
 
 S3 
 
 C 
 
 <D 
 
 S3 
 
 & 
 
 *> ^ <u «-> 
 
 "=V 
 
 b 'b - b b 'b ^ 00 
 
 W 
 
 i? 
 
 also i, o, u, by change of vowel points. 
 
Pushto Letters. 
 
 
 PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 c3 
 
 p 
 
 o 
 
 s^. 
 
 0 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 13 
 
 j3 
 
 Si 
 
 02 
 
 13 
 
 U 
 
 r* 
 
 I 
 
 give. 
 
 rP 
 
 Hjd 
 
 ^5 
 
 6 
 
 -+j 
 
 o 
 
 -4-J 
 
 <u 
 
 o 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 •+j 
 
 too 
 
 .9 
 
 r d 
 
 S-i 
 
 o 
 
 U) 
 
 fl 
 
 P 
 
 r-> 
 
 -M 
 
 P 
 
 o 
 
 .3 
 
 m 
 
 < 
 
 As in 
 
 P 
 
 02 
 
 P 
 
 P 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 u 
 
 p 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 <1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 r §; 
 
 <+H 
 
 cd 
 
 
 bio 
 
 r— 1 
 
 m. 
 
 fl 
 
 rrn. 
 
 cT 
 
 K P 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 H3 
 
 <0J 
 
 -+-> 
 
 c3 
 
 *Ph 
 
 02 
 
 c3 
 
 - P* 
 
 -4-> 
 
 m 
 
 13 
 
 «+h 
 
 o 
 
 u 
 
 o 
 
 pd 
 
 -M 
 
 o 
 
 < 
 
 o 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 > 
 
 &J0 
 
 .9 
 
 ^3 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 <1 
 
 o 
 
 p 
 
 ts rP 
 
 o 
 
 •tl 
 
 \ <t 
 
 ■3 
 
 ^ 1 ^ ^y§ -3 Vi ** 
 
 V. ^ 
 
 vll 
 
 **P ^ J 
 
 "S 
 
 •« .OC :oc \A 
 
 vJl 
 
 
 4 *< •*$ <VC <* 
 
 (XJ 
 
 '0 ^ \) 
 
 ~D v_ ■*) D> 
 
 *> *> 
 «« 
 
 *0 
 
 fe: 
 
6 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 5. It is a matter of some difficulty to establish exact rules for the pro- 
 nunciation of a language like the Afghaman, spoken by so many different 
 tribes, several of whom are widely separated, and have little or no 
 intercourse with each other. In such cases the ear will be found a 
 sure, and at the same time, easy guide, together, with the knowledge of 
 the powers of the Arabian letters, with which the student is supposed 
 to be already acquainted. 
 
 6. The eastern Afghans, viz. : — the tribes of PeslPawer, the Yusufzo’es 
 of the Sama or Plain, of Suwat, Panjkora, and Bumr, use the letter £ 
 or instead of ( m J»> and change j into kt/T In the same manner the 
 western Afghans invariably substitute (J* for ^ or and J for 
 The Damanis, and Ghalzo’es, change £ into The Khaiberis 
 also change these letters in such a manner, that at first it is difficult to 
 understand them. 
 
 The Vowels — hark&t. 
 
 7. There are three vowels in Pushto, as in Arabic, and Persian; 
 
 viz. ( — — ) v>J zabar , or fat’ ha, ( ) zer or kasrahr 
 
 and ( ) pesh or zammah. 
 
 8. The consonants \,j, are often found in old manuscript 
 
 works, used instead of these vowel points ; and in this respect, bears a 
 striking resemblance to the Zend and Sanskrit, which express all the 
 long and short vowels by distinct marks. This will be more fully 
 explained in another place. 
 
 9. The vowels if not followed by the letters I, j, , represent the 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 7 
 
 ✓ 9 
 
 short vowels a, i, u, respectively ; thus < j ba, ^ hi, and <, ? bu ; but 
 
 * 
 
 the consonant must invariably begin the syllable. 
 
 10. Should the vowels be followed by I , respectively, then 
 the syllable is long, as b ba, ^ bi,y> bu ; and these three letters I , ^ , Lf 
 are then called quiescent and homogeneous with their preceding 
 vowels. 
 
 * 
 
 11. When ( ) zabar is followed by^J or the syllable then 
 
 * 
 
 becomes a diphthong ; as^> bau or bow, ^ bai. 
 
 12. There are some cases in Persian in which } followed by ^ or 
 having the vowel fat’ ha or zabar , and succeeded by I is very slightly, 
 
 if at all, sounded. Thus (sleep) is pronounced kh’db not khwdb, 
 
 and (a table) kh’an not khwan . It must however be borne in 
 
 mind, that it is quite the contrary in Pushto, and all the letters must 
 
 be sounded, for example ; — khwari, humility khwdkhe, 
 
 a wife’s mother. 
 
 ✓ ' ✓ 
 
 13. 0 or A , or jazm or jazmah, placed over a consonant 
 
 shows, that the letter is quiescent and the syllable ends there ; as »J 
 
 A ✓ A + ^ 
 
 par’har, a wound, tsar-man, leather. 
 
 14. , or maddah or madd is another form of I falifj, and 
 
 placed over a letter prolongs the sound ; as I as, a horse I agh - 
 zay, a thorn, and I dkhkh, alas ! 
 
 15. ^ tashdid signifies that the consonant must be doubled, 
 
 but this remark has a reference more to Arabic words used in Pushto 
 than Pushto itself; thus, V tawalla, friendly. 
 
 16. ip j wasl serves to connect Arabic words, in which the Ara- 
 
 bian article <JI is lost in the pronunciation, if the letters be either 
 
8 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 * — 0 , J> J, (j», LT, \jf>, \jP, (J or as for example 
 *'>* - s . . ^ 
 
 (J^yl (JU Ml dr rasulu — “ The Prophet said.” kul-il hakka 
 
 — " speak the truth.’* 
 
 17. 9 , hamzah is another form of alif, as P or f a, \ 9 or 9 i, 
 9 
 
 I or ^ u. The Persians call it softened hamzah. 
 
 18. As the Pushto writings, particularly those on Theology and the 
 like, contain a number of Arabic words, it is as well to mention the 
 
 O r> , 
 
 tanwivij signifying nunnation. It is formed by doubling the ter- 
 minating vowel, and expressed by double zabar , zer, and pesh , — * , ^ * 
 
 
 when they take the sound of an, in, and un, respectively ; as 
 
 9, 9 r>. 
 
 marartu rajulin — “ I went 
 
 ra’etu rajulan — “I beheld a man,” ^ 
 to a man,” f ^ ja’ani rajulun-^-“ A man came to me. J 
 
 
 € 1) a p t e r II. 
 
 THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 Kalimah . 
 
 19. The Afghanian language like the Arabic model on which it is 
 based, contains but three parts of speech — the +*» | ism or noun, the 
 Jicel or verb, and the ^ harf or particle. Those who have 
 studied the Persian language, and are in some measure acquainted with 
 
PUSIITO LANGUAGE. 
 
 9 
 
 the Arabic terms of grammar, will require no explanation of the above ; 
 but as it may tend to puzzle Europeans unacquainted with the rules of 
 the Arabian Grammarians, I shall subdivide these three parts of speech 
 into those with which they are more familiar. 
 
 20. The Pushto language contains no article ; it is supposed to be 
 inherent in the noun, or is expressed by the indefinite numeral * $ yow , 
 or the demonstrative pronouns. For example ; 
 
 buys eM s ij 
 
 ♦» 
 
 “ The heart is an ignorant thing ; of ignorance have dread” Ahmed 
 Shah, Abdalx. 
 
 NOUN. 
 
 | — ism. 
 
 21. A noun denotes simply the name of an object, as ^ sarre, 
 a man, kor, a house. 
 
 22. The term I ism includes nouns substantive, nouns adjective, 
 numeral nouns, pronouns, and the past, and present participles ; but for 
 the reasons before stated, I have generally adopted the divisions and 
 terms of grammar most convenient to Europeans, and therefore the pro- 
 nouns will be treated of separately, and the participles with the verbs. 
 
 23. Nouns may be divided into substantive and adjective. The 
 former are either primitive, or derivative. 
 
 24. A primitive noun is that which proceeds from no other word in 
 
 the language, as ; halak , a boy, jinai, a girl, ^ I as, a 
 
 horse, £ kar, husbandry, badah, a bribe, widr , jealousy. 
 
 25. Derivative nouns are those which spring from other nouns, or 
 from verbs, as ; tidrahj blackness, beltun , separation, * 
 
 c 
 
ID 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 wama 
 
 inn, speech, 
 
 khegarrah, goodness, ranrra, brightness, 
 sjj zarrah su’e, sympathy. 
 
 26. Nouns are of two numbers or acedad, as in Persian, — 
 
 wahid or singular, and jamcea, or plural ; and of two genders or 
 
 ^jLuaa. jins an } viz. ; — muzakkar or masculine, and L * muan - 
 
 nas or feminine, the whole of which will be explained in their proper 
 places. 
 
 27. There are seven sblyd icerabat or cases; — The nominative or 
 
 XcU halat-i-famli ; the genitive, or eJU* hdlat-i- 
 
 *' 9 . \ I s 
 
 izdfat; the dative or (J j*** halat-i-mafaceul ; the accusative 
 
 or oJtcw halat-i-mafaceul beh ; the vocative or t 
 
 hdlat-i-nidd ; the ablative, or hdlat-i-jarri ; and the J. £ (j 
 
 fdail or actor ; or as it may be termed, — the instrumental case. 
 
 28. To form the various cases besides the nominative, several particles 
 
 called 
 
 state. 
 
 j,- yjj* 
 
 huruf-i-jarr are used with the nouns in the inflected 
 
 29. ao or ^ da* the particle governing the genitive case, must 
 always precede the noun, as will be seen from the following examples : — 
 
 liJ *}J ^ i 0 
 
 \ ^ ^ f $ * s 
 
 ^ 0 
 
 t( The heart lamenteth at the depredations of thy beauty , 
 
 Like as the heart of the nightingale bewailetli when the autumn is 
 come” — Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 (3^ ^ ^ ^ uf r ' v3^ jj *j 
 
 * Also o amongst the Khattaks and a few other tribes. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 11 
 
 “ Be not captivated by the friendship of the people of the world ! 
 This shameless, faithless, immodest world” — Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 “ Thou who seekest in the parterre after the rose of friendship, 
 Be aware of the stump of the thorn tree of separation !” — Abd-ur- Rahman. 
 
 30. The particle is not subject to any change in prose more than in 
 verse, as will be seen from the following extract. Akhund Kasim says : — 
 
 “ To make enquiry after the sick is also the law of the Prophet, and 
 a regulation of the true orthodox faith ; (and) whosoever enquireth after 
 the sick, enter eih into the mercy of the Almighty — Fawa’id-ush-Sharri’sea. 
 
 31. In this manner I shall continue to give quotations from the 
 various Afghan authors as I proceed ; such examples will not only serve 
 in some measure, as specimens of the style, and be more easily retained 
 in the memory than simple prose, but also be a proof that the Pushto 
 has a regular grammatical system, although the ignorant in general 
 conversation may not pay much attention to the rules ; and, that there 
 are many other works than the “ Rashid-ul-Bif an.” 
 
 — 
 
 32. There are four particles governing the dative case, — ta or tah ; 
 watah, — the^ of which is sometimes placed before the noun, and the 
 
 fj after it ; lara or larah ; and J la or lah. The latter is less often 
 
 used in poetry, as a particle similar in form governs the ablative, but the 
 meaning is unmistakable, as will be seen from the examples I shall give. 
 
12 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ Every cypress that raiseth its head to the sky, 
 
 The sky turneth upside down to the ground, as itself is inverted — 
 Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 
 “He who ever scrutinizes the faults of others , 
 
 Why did the Almighty make him ignorant of his own? — Abd-ur- 
 Rahman. 
 
 i_ri> ii J ** 
 
 - ^ * 1 
 
 “ The greatness and dignity of the great becometh not a particle less, 
 Should they at any time say to a child, ‘ Come here? ” — Ahmed Shah. 
 
 “ They who are in love with the world, are the greatest of all fools ; 
 Like the baby they show great eagerness for the flaming fire ” Abd-ur- 
 Rahman. 
 
 ^ 3)1*5 3jj ^j!^! jy *j£> c>aA o u 
 
 “ Since it was my good fortune to conquer Hind, 
 
 I now go to Iran both with banner and drum.” — Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 The following prose examples are from the Fawahd-ush-Shuri’seat, in 
 which the various particles of the dative may be seen. 
 
 ^ ^ ) *5* izjtjt J) d 0 Ijf) 
 
 s s s ' s y * * 
 
 d>f d Lfi; »Jji J; 
 
 e.' l dj u (J?- yj ,0 > Lff Jj Jt cjf £ 
 
 * s s 
 
 ufaf i>j J , ^ £ ])* J-y- w* y. 
 
 “ Fourth — alms also should be given to the slave who wishes to manu- 
 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 13 
 
 mit himself, that he may repay his proprietor, and by means of it release 
 his neck from the yoke. The fifth is the debtor. Alms should also be given 
 to the debtor, that by its assistance he may pay off his debts. The sixth 
 are Pilgrims , Champions or Soldiers of the Faith, and Devotees. Alms 
 should also be given to these, that by means of it they may perform their 
 pilgrimage, fight for the faith, and carry out the object of their vows.” 
 
 33. The particles of the dative case are often used to denote for, for 
 the sake of, etc., and must be used or translated accordingly. Thus ; — 
 
 “ If the breast of the partridge is for the falcon, 
 
 For the spider is the breast of the fly.” — Abd-ur-Fahman. 
 
 eb" ^ ° fb u* Lf^ 
 
 “ The anguish of love hath no such injurious effect , 
 
 That the afflicted one desireth a remedy for it.” Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 34. According to the Arabic system, on which most, if not all, Mu- 
 hammadan languages are based, the noun has but two variations from 
 the nominative, terming the latter faceil or actor, — the cJUl 
 
 y * 
 
 izafat or attribute, and the vnafaceul or acted upon, in which the 
 
 dative, accusative, and ablative cases are included. Pushto has another 
 
 9 ' ' 
 
 or second form, as it may be termed, of the or dative, similar to 
 
 the objective case of our own language, in which the particles 
 etc. are not expressed, but are understood. For example ; 
 
 * r * ft 
 
 *lj 0 L/ 1 1 J** ° r t/'l tVj <3 
 
 “ Omar strikes Zeid*s horse.” Here Omar as the or actor is in 
 the nominative case ; Zeid’s as expressing the relation of the ownership 
 is in the t | _«» attribute or genitive ; and horse being the name of 
 
14 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 the object acted upon is in the i »» or second form of the 
 
 dative. In the above sentence, the actor must be placed at the com- 
 mencement, or in other words, the noun or pronoun at the commence- 
 ment of the sentence is the actor . For instance, if we merely change 
 the noun Omar for horse , and vice versa, the signification is, “ Zeid’s 
 horse strikes Omar ” or exactly contrary. As all verbs in the language 
 agree with the object in the past tenses in gender and number, the 
 object can be easily distinguished; but this second form is one of 
 the difficulties of Pushto, and only to be got over by practice in the lan- 
 guage. Examples of this case are contained in the following couplets : 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 I* 
 
 
 
 M > « . i A, /l ^ ' t 
 
 “ The prince of prudence and reason , sinketh his own life, 
 
 When he entertaineth a desire towards the taxes of the country of love” 
 — Hamid. 
 
 p p ( " A ^ A 
 
 $ ||>a. 3; li aUA <*) U <sS vfi) 
 
 “ All the injustice and oppression of the world is acceptable tome. 
 If God separateth me not from the object of my love” — Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 “ Eyebrows like bows , eyelashes like arrows , — 
 
 Thou pierceth the lover in the heart” — Ahmed Shah. 
 
 35. The next case is the accusative,* which remains the same as the 
 
 nominative, or assumes the dative form, as dikit U 
 “ I gave him a book” Mirza says ; — 
 
 * I suspect that this case was formerly inflected, for in old books, nouns may be 
 
 '9 
 
 found in this case inflected, as; — ft. “on a certain ,” or “on one day.” 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 15 
 
 9 S 9 m ' 
 
 pi ** ji 6 j \J' pib ** > 
 
 “ I give thee much good advice, but I am not acting on it myself” 
 Futtih Khan, Mirza. 
 
 " 9 ' i 9 . ' - 9 \ i . 
 
 a; jj+oXa O dJ ^ J d) Jdbl U ^ 
 
 “ If I speak to the unworthy the words of the good } 
 
 I Hamid shall become like Mansur ,* on the stake” — Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 ^ <*J pi p^ 
 
 r \ 9 • ' " ,9 
 
 fjp- f jb b (3" c 
 
 “ With heart dried up } I sit all day long in the moisture of my tears ; 
 In my own cell , love showed to me both ocean and land.” — Abd-ur- 
 
 Rahman . 
 
 36. The vocative case is denoted by the Arabic sign ai, some- 
 times pronounced ay , together with^! ao and^ oo ; but the latter signs 
 are rarely used in writing, and are peculiar to Afghaman. The vocative 
 sign when used, must precede the noun, which, with but few exceptions 
 takes ^ zabar after the final letter, and sometimes adds I or 5 as will 
 be seen from the examples, and the declensions of nouns. f 
 
 x 9 -kZ" ' ' .x*' - 9 9 x ’ ■ • ■ 
 
 o itJj LhJ ^IaI; c 
 
 rf Oh ! Rahman, first learn the song of the nightingales ) 
 
 Then commence to praise the rosy-bodied ” 
 
 * Al Mansur the Sufi was put to death for making use of the words & (j| “lam 
 God.” The Mullas, his executioners, acknowledged that he was a pious man, but having 
 said that which was contrary to the doctrine of the orthodox faith of Muhammad, 
 they had no other remedy than to put him to death. 
 
 t It should be borne in mind that there is little or no difference made in Pushto 
 
 9 ' 
 
 between — ~ | and 5, and between and L£. For example 
 
 ) etc. the whole of which are in the vocative case. 
 
16 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ Ahmed Shah, thou preachest a sermon to others, 
 
 Why not, Oh monitor ! caution thy own soul?” 
 
 37. Sometimes the noun takes the final x I or 8 without being 
 preceded by any sign of the vocative, as ; — 
 
 ✓ / , 
 
 t Ji 
 
 “ Ravisher of hearts ! Oh, unmerciful one ! At least thou shouldst 
 give one glance — Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 38. The ablative case is governed by the particles <*) l ah, or J 
 
 lah nah ; the <*) preceding, and the M following the noun. The noun in 
 
 this case, in some instances takes or after the final letter, which 
 
 ✓ 
 
 will he seen on reference to the declensions. The other particles used 
 in this case are^ tar and 0 da. The latter form is not common except 
 in the conversation of the lower classes, who do not appear to make 
 much, if any, difference between it and the j of the genitive. The fol- 
 lowing are examples of the ablative case. 
 
 “ In the garden from the branch of the same tree, is produced both 
 thorns and roses too .” — Abd-ur- Rahman. 
 
 s # p *9 
 
 tA •‘U.U 6 fj 
 
 ft jtf jt) ** 
 
 “ Mention not the name of absence, Oh Khushhal Khan ! 
 
 Through separation my very bones are broken 11 * pieces ”* — Khushhal 
 Khan, Khattak. 
 
 * Literally — I am in pieces in my bones. 
 
'PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 17 
 
 9 * 9 m y 
 
 Cyfi jm.) y L $JrLSy 
 
 s ’ x 
 
 v JU5 *ij *> jyy Lf^ v 
 
 “He cutteth away the branch from beneath his own feet, who nurtur- 
 
 eth in his heart malice towards his friends” — Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 * 
 
 39. Examples of the ablative c> da, are contained in the following 
 couplets : as previously stated, it is not often to be met with in the 
 writings of ancient Pushto authors. 
 
 <J | J <*£ dljK* 0 dS dJ j J J* U <*) 
 
 “ I will consider the monitor the real cause of it, 
 
 Should I suffer any injury from patience and long-suffering ” Khush- 
 hal Khattak. 
 
 y p * ■* •* s y a </ / 
 
 20 J U O ! 
 
 “Ahmed Shah is pleased with his mistress , 
 
 Therefore he now singeth her praises” 
 
 40. The locative, which I shall include in this case, merely substi- 
 
 tutes other particles in place of i)> <*3 <*J, and^>. They are or ? 
 
 which precedes the noun, and has various significations, such as, in, on, 
 with, through , by means of, etc; and or * Which 
 
 usually follow a noun preceded by and signify in or within. Other par- 
 tides are also used in this case, such as ^ & etc. ; the whole 
 
 of which will be found in their proper places. Examples : — 
 
 A • / , ' t \ 
 
 py* p •H <J? 0 y. 
 
 CJ " jjL 4j ^ d 
 
 * The whole of the above words are pronounced ke. 
 
18 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ One man becometh merry and gay at the afflictions of another . — 
 Through the weeping of the dew, the rose smileth and blooms ” 
 Bahram Gur. 
 
 y ♦* 
 
 “ Thou travellest on the road of truth ; 
 
 Why then standest thou in doubt ?” Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 y . ' ' 
 
 4j !o 4^ 
 
 ' »♦ ** 
 
 “ is swcA deliciousness in the ripeness of thy lips, 
 
 That it is impossible to find such sweetness even in the date grove” 
 Adam Khan and Durkham. 
 
 jsP to <3 ^ o UXT ^J<3 ^Ia. 4 v to toL 
 
 “ What? will my understanding remain in its proper place, Oh be- 
 loved one ! 
 
 When thou appliest to m,y heart the viper of separation ?” Abd-ul- 
 Hamid. 
 
 41. The whole of the particles governing the different cases just 
 described, remain unchanged both before masculine and feminine nouns, 
 and in the singular and plural number. 
 
 42. Before transitive verbs, in all past tenses of the active voice, the 
 noun denoting the or agent, takes the oblique form both singular 
 
 and plural, if capable of inflection. Thu 8 LSJ** a man becomes LPJ** 
 and a woman When the noun is uninflected, the agent 
 
 remains the same as the nominative. The following are examples : — 
 al&j j djsr? the man struck the woman ; j 
 
 woman struck the man. All Khan says : — 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 19 
 
 9 p , 
 
 $ ^}|j a; j; ^ - J3^ ^ * “t 
 
 “ Since the dishevelled state of the roses became manifest unto it, 
 
 The bud placed its head on its knee, and smileth not.” Abd-ur-Rah- 
 man. 
 
 \sf (-jUT o ^Uj 
 
 j|t) J*0w <3 c/jii. J 
 
 “ Cruel fate hath roasted the heart of Rahman : 
 
 Of its state no one hath conception.” Abd-ur- Rahman. 
 
 43. There are two genders in Pushto, y muzakkar or masculine, 
 and l* muannas or feminine ; and they affect the terminations of 
 nouns, adjectives, and verbs. 
 
 44. The gender of nouns can generally be discriminated from the 
 termination, as will be seen in the explanations to the different declen- 
 sions. 
 
 45. The gender of some nouns is distinguishable from the sex of 
 those to whom they are applicable ; as jo* a husband, aAJ jiU a wife . 
 In other instances they are expressed by words totally different from 
 each other, as ; a father, jy# a mother, a brother, jy^. a 
 sister. 
 
 46. Feminine nouns are formed from masculine by the addition of 
 
 A 
 
 a, changing into and inserting ^ before the final letter, as 
 
 * 9. ** y. 9 a 9 
 
 a male camel, a female camel, a male kid, a 
 
 female kid, a male guest, <*a«L/o a female guest. 
 
 47. Pushto nouns have nine declensions, distinguished according to 
 
 the various methods of inflection, and the formation of the nominative 
 
 plural. Several declensions have two or more varieties. 
 d 2 
 
20 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 1st Declension. 
 
 48. This comprehends all nouns which inflect the oblique cases of 
 the singular and nominative plural. It has two varieties. 
 
 49. The first variety consists of nouns ending in ^ which take 
 * in the vocative, the whole of which are masculine, as ; — ^ jm a man , 
 
 a lion, & slave , etc. 
 
 50. The oblique plural of all nouns in this language, with the excep- 
 tion of those of the 9th declension, is formed by the addition of^ or 
 
 ^ ; and therefore requires no further explanation. 
 
 y 
 
 51. The masculine noun LfJ** a man is thus declined. 
 
 Sing. man * Plur. 
 
 y 
 
 Nom. LSJ** a man. men ‘ 
 
 Gen. ^ °f a man. ° °f men. 
 
 y y y 
 
 Dat. J LpJ** to a man. <*) - xj - <0 jj#* to men. 
 
 y 
 
 Acc. a man , or to a man. iSf* men , or to men. 
 
 p 9 ( 
 
 Yoc. ffr ) or Lf ' °h ' man. , jj** j or oh ! men. 
 
 tJ ^ or >X* ^ ) 
 
 r from men. 
 
 43 d) J 
 
 y 
 
 Act. by « man. by men. 
 
 52. The second variety embraces nouns which take "~y" in all the 
 oblique cases of the singular, and the vocative also, as ; — j 
 
 a road, J-a. a maiden, and a needle. They are all feminine, 
 
 and generally inanimate. 
 
 S. a road. P. 
 
 Nom. a road. J ^ roads. 
 
 Gen. O of a road. j£ O of roads. 
 
 Abl 
 
 M •* 
 
 | » . 
 
 man. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 21 
 
 Dat. to a road . -4) jV to roads. 
 
 Acc. « roa^, or to « roac?. roads, or to roads . 
 
 Voe. jV ^ or , roa( }' M • or (^1 o/^ / roads. 
 
 Jv <u " 
 
 Abl. 
 
 from a road. 
 
 hi *> 
 
 from roads. 
 
 by roads. 
 
 or jV a) 
 
 aj 
 
 Act. jV « road. j 
 
 ✓ 
 
 53. There are one or two exceptions to this rule, as for example 
 ✓ ✓ 
 
 a sparrow, which is masculine, and animate. 
 
 2nd Declension. 
 
 54. The nouns of this class are distinguished by not inflecting the 
 singular oblique ; take — in the vocative ; and add two letters to form the 
 nominative plural. They are of two varieties, and are all masculine.* 
 
 o' 9 
 
 55. The first variety are those which take in the nominative 
 
 plural ; as, — a father, U-l a horse, the wrist , or 
 
 a tooth. 
 
 S. a father. P. 
 
 Nom. a fat her. CUy^v fathers. 
 
 obi. sh * of a father, etc. tfpj ^ of fathers, etc. 
 
 9 99 
 
 Voc. p or (^! oh ! father. ^pj ^ ) or L^l oh ! fathers. 
 
 Act. by a father. by fathers. 
 
 56. The second variety consists of those nouns which insert two let- 
 ters before the final letter ; as, — <**4'° a guest, djj* a cowherd. 
 
 S. 4*4* a guest. P. 
 
 Nom. 4*4* a guest. <ol*4* guests. 
 
 Obi. 4*4* ^ of a guest , etc. ^1*4* ^ of guests, etc. 
 
 * J* a man is an exception, as it is masculine and retains the — 
 
22 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Yoc. A*!" 0 j or oA / guest. J U4* ) or Lf I oh ! guests. 
 
 Act. <** 4 * by a guest. y { *Lo by guests. 
 
 57. * I a sigh , which is feminine, takes the above masculine form of 
 the plural; but it is a Persian, not an Afghaman word. 
 
 3rd Declension. 
 
 58. This comprises all nouns ending in 8 which is changed into ^ 
 in the oblique singular, vocative, and nominative plural, as; — <&? 
 
 a woman , a sling, 8*>aJ a bow. 
 
 They are all feminine. 
 
 S. Aar? a woman. P. 
 
 Nom. a woman. 
 
 ^ 11 
 
 ^arr women. 
 
 Obi. 0 of a woman , etc. 
 
 * 0 
 
 Yoc. J or oh! woman. 
 
 ** " 
 
 t> of women, etc. 
 
 *' * 1 
 
 jsr? } or oh ! women. 
 
 Act. by a woman. 
 
 •* 
 
 ✓ • 
 
 jsr? by women. 
 
 59. There is another variety which may be included in this declen- 
 
 A . A 
 
 sion ending in which becomes ^ in the plural, as ; — ^ s ~ 
 
 **/ 
 
 tress. This form is rare. 
 
 S. 
 
 
 distress. 
 
 Norn, 
 
 P. 
 
 distresses. 
 
 Obi. 0 of distress, etc. ^ of distresses etc. 
 
 A 4 9 A 9 
 
 Voc. ) or L^l oh! distress. ; or oh ! distresses. 
 
 Act. by distress. 
 
 by distil 
 
 esses. 
 
 4 th Declension. 
 
 60. In this declension are contained nouns which take -1- in the 
 
PtJSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 23 
 
 oblique, and vocative singular, and the nominative plural. They are of 
 two varieties, and generally masculine. 
 
 61. The first variety merely add the _I_ as;— a thief, a com- 
 panion. 
 
 S. a thief P* 
 
 ' T? 
 
 Nom. Ji a thief. J-= thieves. 
 
 Obi. 6 of a thief, etc. 
 
 Yoc. j or °h •' thief. 
 
 Act. by a thief. 
 
 9 * 
 
 t> of thieves, etc . 
 
 ^ or oh ! thieves. 
 ijx by thieves. 
 
 62. The second variety consists of such nouns as *^yi prayer, 
 or )y> a hyena, a porcupine, which change the^ or of the 
 
 nominative into I in the oblique and vocative singular, and in the nomi- 
 native plural. 
 
 • • 
 
 S. prayer. P. 
 
 Nom. ^y^ prayer. 
 
 Obi. 
 
 Yoc. 
 
 a 
 
 3 U3 6 of prayer, etc. 
 
 prayers. 
 
 US of prayers, etc. 
 
 } or oh l prayer. ^U3 ^ or oh ! prayers. 
 
 Act. ^ U3 by prayer. 
 
 9 . 
 
 iS U3 by prayers. 
 
 c 
 
 §th Declension. 
 
 63. The nouns of this declension are not subject to inflection except 
 in the vocative singular, which, if masculine, take and if feminine - r - 
 They may be divided into four classes — those which take <j!>(j^or, (jU 
 in the nominative plural, and those whose plurals are irregular. The 
 nouns embraced in this declension are mostly names of human beings, 
 or animals ; and contain a number of exotic words which have crept 
 into Pushto from the languages spoken in the countries bordering on 
 
24 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THI? 
 
 Afghanistan : they are both masculine and feminine, but the former 
 predominate. 
 
 64. The first variety are nouns which take in the nominative plu- 
 
 9 m • 9 \ -i 
 
 ral, as; — CL>p a mulberry , I a camel, cm elephant. 
 
 % 9 
 
 S. u-;' a camel. P. 
 
 p 
 
 Nom. \y*j\ a camel. camels. 
 
 Obi. <■* of a camel, etc. 0 of camels, etc. 
 
 '99 9 . 9 9 
 
 Voc. ub' j or oh! camel. ) or {£) oh ! camels. 
 
 * 9 ** 9 \ * 9 \ 
 
 Act. u-;i by a camel. U by camels. 
 
 65. Nouns of the second variety take <jl^in the nominative plural, — 
 
 p s p 
 
 as ; — j.5]<>a/o a churning stick, a weaver, a crow, a bear. 
 
 9 . «" 
 
 S. a churning stick. P. 
 
 9 t y 9, y 
 
 Nom. a churning stick . churning sticks. 
 
 9. / ' 9 9 % y y 
 
 Obi. ^!6 a/o J of a churning stick, etc. ^©^6a* J of churning sticks, etc. 
 Voc. j or^l ohlchurning stick.y*y\&A#jo\xg\oh! churning sticks. 
 
 Act. j.^(>a/o by a churning stick. by churning sticks. 
 
 66. The third variety contains nouns which take in the nomina- 
 
 p 
 
 tive plural, as ; — a priest, ^ g* cl quadruped. 
 
 S. ^ a priest. P. 
 
 Nom. a priest. priests. 
 
 p y 9.9 
 
 Obi. ^L© o of a priest, etc. ^ of priests, etc. 
 
 9 9 9 9 9 
 
 Voc. !>U j or Lpl oh ! priest. <jb^U ) or L£l oh ! priests. 
 
 9 9 9 
 
 Act. 5lo by a priest. ^jb^U by priests. 
 
 67. The fourth variety are nouns whose plurals are irregular, as ; — 
 
 * 9 
 
 a mother, « son, J})) « brother, and jy* a rider. 
 
PtlSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 25 
 
 S. a 
 
 mother. P. 
 
 Nom. jy> a mother. 
 
 ^aa/o mothers. 
 
 Obi. <3 of a mother , etc. 
 
 9 ' 
 
 o>aa^ o of mothers, etc. 
 
 9 
 
 9 ' 9 
 
 Yoc. ) or (^! oh ! mother 
 
 3 or ' oh l mother 
 
 Act. jy* by a mother. 
 
 t>AA>o fry mothers f 
 
 s. Ur- 
 
 a son. P. 
 
 Nom. a son. 
 
 J * 
 
 sons. 
 
 A X 
 
 Obi. ^ of a son , etc. 
 
 ^La. o of sons, etc. 
 
 
 
 V oc. J or 1 oh ! son. 
 
 j or oh ! sons. 
 
 Act. by a son . 
 
 by sons. 
 
 6th Declension. 
 
 68. This contains nouns which remain unchanged in all cases, but 
 the oblique plural, which as before stated at page 20, never varies in 
 Pushto. Thev are of five different classes. 
 
 9/ 
 
 69. The first variety embraces all nouns terminating in *, and 
 
 which, in direct contrariety to those of the 3rd declension, are all mas- 
 culine; for example, — grass , and or hair. 
 
 S. grass. P. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Ail; grass- 
 
 du\j grasses. 
 
 Obi. 
 
 du J, S of grass, etc. 
 
 o of grasses, etc. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 9 
 
 j or \^\ oh! grass. 
 
 9 
 
 y>\) j 0V ^ 9 rClSSeS ’ 
 
 Act. 
 
 ‘Vl? by grass. 
 
 by grasses. 
 
 70. 
 
 The second variety are 
 
 those which terminate in 1 and 
 
 feminine ; as, — a cow, a crutch , the waist. 
 
 E 
 
26 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 S. \j2 a COW. P. 
 
 Nom. \y a cow . 
 
 \y cows. 
 
 Obi. jjZ j of a cow, etc. 
 
 jjj& J of cows, etc. 
 
 Yoc. | J. . or oh! cow . 
 
 J ♦♦ 
 
 j\yi j or oh ! cows. 
 
 Act. by a cow . 
 
 by cows. 
 
 71. The third variety end in 
 girl, A a slap, A a bee. 
 
 S^v 
 
 •* •* 
 
 A 
 
 and are all feminine ; as,- 
 
 •* 
 
 A 
 
 S. 
 
 A * 
 
 aaa, a girl. P. 
 
 ✓ 
 
 Nom. a girl. 
 
 girls. 
 
 Obl. o of a girl, etc. 
 
 jX s a. 0 °f9 irls > etc - 
 
 Voc. A , or oh •' 9 irl - 
 
 yyjo. j or oh ! girls. 
 
 Act. b V a 9 irl - 
 
 ^ " ' 
 
 jXfA. by girls. 
 
 72. Nouns terminating in — are the fourth variety ; as, — yh an 
 
 ✓ ✓ -j • 
 
 eyelash, food, tar. They may also be written with 5. See 
 
 note at page 15. 
 
 S. 
 
 Nom. jLj an eyelash. 
 
 2 
 
 j(j an eyelash. 
 
 P. 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 (j eyelashes. 
 
 Obi. y\j £ of an eyelash, etc. y\j o of eyelashes, etc. 
 
 Yoc. j ° r ^ ( oh! eyelash. j\j j or oh ! eyelashes. 
 
 Act. Jtj by an eyelash. 
 
 Jb by eyelashes. 
 
 x 
 
 73. The fifth variety embraces all nouns terminating in any other 
 consonant than those mentioned for the three first varieties ; as, — 
 a turnip, jy a wild grape, J&yx* a steer. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 27 
 
 S. 
 
 
 a steer. 
 
 P. 
 
 Nom. a steer 
 
 steers - 
 
 Obl. ^ °f° steer > etc - ^ °f steers > etc - 
 
 Voc. J&J** j or 0,1 ! steer - J&j±* *} or Lfl 0,1 '■ steers - 
 
 Act. ♦Aj % s vJ by a steer. 
 
 h v steers - 
 
 7th Declension. 
 
 74. This declension comprehends nouns which take in the oblique 
 
 and vocative singular, and ^ in the nominative plural. With the ex- 
 ception of being capable of inflection, and being names of inanimate 
 objects, the nouns of this differ but slightly from the 2nd declension, 
 which see. They are all masculine ; as, — a mountain , a yoke for 
 
 oxen, j I an obstacle , and I the forelock. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 S. 
 
 a mountain. 
 
 f 
 
 a mountain . 
 
 j 
 
 / ^ 
 
 /r'u? 
 
 Obl. o of a mountain, etc. 
 
 lyjjc mountains. 
 ? s> 
 
 l 
 
 z d of mountains, etc. 
 
 Voc. ^ l or / ^.1 oh ! mountain. \ or / ^| oh ! mountains . 
 
 Act. 
 
 ^ by a mountain. 
 
 by mountains. 
 
 8 th Declension. 
 
 75. The nouns of this declension are extremely rare. They termi- 
 
 A 
 
 nate in ^ and are not inflected in the singular, but take ^ in the 
 
 a swaddling band. 
 
 S. a swa ddti n g band. P. 
 
 swaddling bands. 
 
 Obl. 
 
 nominative plural ; as,— 
 
 Nom.^j*** a swaddling band. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Act. 
 
 d °f a swaddling band, fyc. j of swaddling bands, fyc. 
 
 " $ 
 
 or^j oh ! swaddling band. *?• *, *° r ig \ oh! swaddling bands . 
 
 JyrF'KS 
 
 \ Jy 
 
 by a swaddling band. 
 e 2 
 
 jy 
 
 by swaddling bands. 
 
28 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 9th Declension. 
 
 76. There are a few words in Pushto, which neither change in the 
 
 singular oblique, nor in the nominative or oblique plural, or vocative, 
 which I have included in this declension. They are rather uncom- 
 mon; thus , — a ringlety j b ^ jealousy , cheek. There 
 
 are many foreign words included ?n this form. 
 
 s - jealousy. P. 
 
 Nom, j{) j jealousy. jbj jealousies. 
 
 s " ' 
 
 Ob], jb j o of jealousy, etc. ,bj 0 of jealousies, etc. 
 s> ' s 
 
 Yoc. jv } or oh l jealousy, j or i^\ oh ! jealousies. 
 
 Act. jb j by jealousy. ^b^ by jealousies. 
 
 77. No absolute system can be given to determine the gender of 
 every noun in this language, but attention to the rules laid down in 
 the preceding examples, will be found a guide on all ordinary occasions. 
 
 Chapter HI. 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 78. The Adjective called the 
 
 ism-i-sifat. 
 
 
 ism-i-sifat, or noun of quality 
 
 denotes some property or attribute of the noun ; as, jy (tor) black ; 
 
 i* "" \ 
 
 (spin) white , 4 ^ (khahj good ; Jfv (nakar) bad ; (luwar) 
 tall; (mandare) short. Example: — 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 29 
 
 u There is no such weak intoxication in the wine of love , 
 
 As becometh quenched by the sourness of admonitions Yusuf and 
 Zulikha. 
 
 79. The adjective must in all cases precede the noun ; as, — 
 
 t( If on a marriage day a person dresseth himself in red coloured 
 clothes, if that dress be of cotton which was originally red, then the 
 wearing of such garments is right and lawful.” FawaTd-ush- 
 Sharriseah. 
 
 80. The adjective admits of but three forms — the nominative, ob- 
 lique and vocative, in the same manner as the noun, although it has 
 also seven cases. The actor is the same as the oblique, and the remain- 
 der are made up by the addition of the different particles. 
 
 81. Some adjectives are undeclinable,* and are not subject to change 
 for number ; with this exception, they assume the same terminations in 
 gender, number, and case, as the nouns they qualify. The following are 
 examples of the masculine singular and feminine plural. 
 
 “ Like as by applying fire, one setteth dry grass in a blaze, 
 So doeth love to devotion, and to piety ” Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 * Except in the oblique plural which is always inflected. See Nouns. 
 
30 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 <V [<X b ^.4 ^ 
 
 “ Those eyes, whether they be narcissuses or almonds , 
 
 Became sharp sivords for slaughtering me” Abd-ur- Rahman. 
 The following is the mode of declension. 
 
 
 jxjx an 
 
 elder brother. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 JXJX T» 
 
 an elder brother. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 jx > x j u 
 
 & of an elder brother . 
 
 Dat. 
 
 di /XXX 
 
 to an elder brother. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 jxjx r* 
 
 an elder brother. 
 
 Yoc. 
 
 )XXX x u 
 
 p 
 
 ) or L^' °h‘ e ^ er brother . 
 
 Obi. 
 
 f or JXJX 
 
 1 <« jxjx jr* 
 
 > from an elder brother . 
 
 «>j 
 
 Act. 
 
 yy;/* 0 
 
 % an elder brother. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 
 elder brothers. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ^ ^ - 
 
 Jxjx j-* 
 
 ^ of elder brothers. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 . . M 9.9 ' 9 ' 
 
 d) zj d) ^ 
 
 to elder brothers . 
 
 Acc. 
 
 '.9 ' S ' 
 
 Jxjx j^° 
 
 e/efer brothers. 
 
 Yoc. 
 
 9.9 ' 9 ' 
 
 Jxjx r* 
 
 i or oA / elder brothers . 
 
 H 
 
 
 9 / ' 9 ' 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 
 ( or JXJX y* 
 
 *0 , 
 
 Abl. 
 
 v from elder brothers . 
 
 
 t " Jxjx y* 
 
 a); 
 
 Act. 
 
 Jxjx y* 
 
 elder brothers. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 31 
 
 82. Before feminine nouns they take s, as will be perceived from 
 the following couplet. 
 
 jb a : sj ay ao^l &1& 
 
 “ Ahmed Shah ! adversity is a black calamity ; 
 
 Mind ! in misfortune be a faithful friend” Ahmed Shah, 'Abdali. 
 Declension of an adjective governed by a feminine noun : — 
 
 A)j) « grown up girl. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 J.L *)J a grown up girl. 
 
 Obi. 
 
 y) 0 °f> t°> e ^ c -> a grown up girl. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 } or <s\ ' 9 rown U P 9 ir ^' 
 
 y m 
 
 Act. 
 
 \J,L h a grown up girl. 
 
 *♦ 
 
 
 Blur. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 jL grownup girls. 
 
 / «• 
 
 Obi. 
 
 p y y 
 
 j of grown up girls, etc. 
 
 Yoc. 
 
 y J • or ^\ °h • grown up girls. 
 
 ^ ^ ♦♦ 
 
 Act. 
 
 p ^ 
 
 jj) by grown up girls 
 
 Sometimes 
 
 a noun is used instead of an adjective 
 
 another noun ; thus, — 
 
 ♦♦ /* ^ 
 
 “ That tooth by means of which iron-like pulse was masticated, 
 God alone knoweth what acids have blunted it” Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
32 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ^ a k ar ^ ^ one ^ h ear t- 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Obi. 
 
 Yoc. 
 
 Act. 
 
 a hard heart. 
 
 xjj ^ O °f a hard heart, etc. 
 
 $ 
 
 ^ or ^1 °h •' hard heart . 
 sjJ ^^5 ^ by a hard heart. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 j \f hard hearts. 
 
 'jji l> °f hard hearts, etc. 
 
 *Jjjj jj \f j or i^\ oh ! hard hearts, 
 jjitf by hard hearts. 
 
 84. Adjectives may be, and often are, used alone, the substantive 
 being understood ; thus, 
 
 u 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Obi. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Act. 
 
 y*» a*.uJ U <{&<>**> 
 
 “ Hamid hath neither foot nor breath : he is the friend of the fair. 
 Behold the candle, foot bound, and head severed !” Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 - 0 
 
 ^ jit o uJJj 
 
 8}!^ af a$^ VfJjL* 
 
 “ The locks of the beloved are the desired object of every one, 
 
 Whether old or young, whether great or small.” Rahman. 
 
 85. Adjectives are declined in the same manner as substantives, as 
 
 mentioned at Para. 80. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 33 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Mas. and Fem., ^ . a_i stout> thick. 
 S. 
 
 s y 
 
 <*-£fi - L^fi stout or thick . 
 
 Obi. 
 
 
 y y 
 
 - (y^A j o/ s/ow/, efc. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 
 ' ' ? . 
 
 • J or Lpl o/i / s/ow/, etc . 
 
 Act. 
 
 y 
 
 KJp k 
 
 - Ljj^fi s/o«^, etc. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 L ^ 
 
 P. 
 
 - ^jl-JJ.fi thick. 
 
 Obi. 
 
 ♦♦ 
 
 ✓ / 
 
 - (jl-JJ.fi 0 of stout, etc. 
 
 Yoc. 
 
 
 - (jv.-JJ.fi j or L£l o/i / sfow/, etc. 
 
 Act. 
 
 
 - (j^-J^fi % s£oz^, etc. 
 
 86. The 
 
 ordinal numbers LpU*>| (ism&’i-aaddd) 
 
 clinable, and subject to the same changes by inflection as other ad- 
 
 jectives; thus, J.1 the first time ; the second year; 
 
 ♦> ® 
 
 S.L /0 the third month ; the fourth house ; 
 
 
 d6 J=r? <d from the fifth woman , etc. Examples : — 
 
 «• •* 
 
 L?y ^ jy \_f,y ^ 
 
 e/U. C/U. •» *x) ^ 
 
 “ The sun’s rays penetrate not through the roof of the covered build- 
 ing : 
 
 The heart rent and torn by one grief is good.” Abd-ul-Hanrid. 
 
 y I yy s j *f ^ ^y>x *>*■ y y t> ^k [ y ^ j**»} 
 
 ♦« * «• 
 
 ^ Aj [jfj 
 
 a M 
 
 f 
 
 fU* 
 
 V 
 
34 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ The Prophet of God hath said — I am overjoyed on account of three 
 things ; first, that I am an Arab ; second, that the Koran is in Arabic ; 
 and third, that the language of Heaven will be the Arabian .” EawaTd- 
 ush-Sharriaeah. 
 
 87. The adjunct of similitude is also subject to change to agree 
 with its governing noun, in gender, number, and case, as will be seen 
 
 from the following examples ; I Jjf a blackish horse ; 
 
 I cl whitish mare ; LSj* <*■* Lw <*; U.1 a good man like me ; 
 O a rompish girl. Examples: — 
 
 ' ' V ' 9 / ^ 
 
 pt A* uH ^ ^ * 
 
 ' X 49 ** 
 
 “ Her mouth is like unto a rose-bud , 
 
 Therefore I am enamoured of its rosy colour.” Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 |oj L£t-> | JfA * ^ ^ o 
 
 ** x 
 
 “ Like the grief of separation which raineth on me, 
 
 Hath any one ever seen such fire as this, or not ?” Abd-ur- Rahman. 
 
 j *} ill 
 
 /O | t> ^iiiw | 
 
 “ Thou becometh so changed, from slight hunger, 
 
 That thou seizest a beetle in thy avidity instead of a sloe.*” 
 
 88. Tnere are several words used in Pushto to denote similarity, but 
 
 they are adverbs, and not declinable, viz. ; <>*£, <3jfc3, and 
 
 ✓ 
 
 (which generally go together, and may be translated — as, so, such, 
 •• / 
 
 etc.) and but the latter is rare. Examples: — - 
 
 a* 
 
 * The sloe, and blackberry grow in the Khaiber mountains, and in the hills north 
 
 of Pesha’war. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 35 
 
 A] y f K s* H ^ A ~ 
 
 o •• * 
 
 - * ,. . >■ , . * 
 
 ^ u 1 ^ *i j** J 
 
 / 
 
 c< They who like Majnun through love lose their reputation, 
 
 Their names become renowned throughout the world” Abd-ul*> Hamid. 
 
 " 'V *v 
 
 “ When the eye beholdeth thy rosy cheek, 
 
 The mirror like the narcissus becometh filled with amazement” Yusuf 
 
 and Zulikha. 
 
 A c^d° jk 0 u? 1^3 H 
 
 'jt 
 
 (< By lamentation and weeping I obtained a sight of my beloved : 
 
 Like the dew I am united to the queen of flowers” Abd-ul -Hamid. 
 
 Ji"<d 
 
 >/>- 
 
 y 
 
 f / An *> s j yj°* o }^ 4 j 
 
 aHJL 
 
 L 
 
 JU 
 
 yS A 
 
 * 40> - i Cf 
 
 “ 77«e sorrows of absence reduced me to such extremity, 
 
 As when a demon sitteth with one as a guest” Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 y*» <V ' eCJ 
 
 ,k l 
 
 9 . 
 
 b^ y J 
 
 a ■.a i v^Cj 
 
 “ As so is falsehood pleasant to the world. 
 
 Like poison so it spitteth out truth” Abd-ul-Harmd. 
 
 i AJJ) jau^A, ^s :' 0 &** ^ lJ* ' ^ 
 
 d.3j J*. aJ by a; ($" Jj 
 
 u There is no rose of such a beautiful colour as thy cheek ; 
 
 F 2 
 
36 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 The rose shineth with one colour, — thou art resplendent with a hundred ” 
 Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 89. The j (ismd’i-tafsU wo mubdligha ) 
 
 comparative and superlative degrees, are not expressed by any 
 peculiar form of adjective ; the superiority of one thing over 
 another being expressed by the addition of various particles and 
 adjectives. 
 
 90. The positive is made comparative by the particles y , <0 d), 
 
 etc. used with the object to which comparison is made ; and such words 
 as much , cubj more, great, and many others; thus, y^ 
 
 very good ; very large ; y£ very small ; very 
 
 white. Examples : — 
 
 
 
 9 ' 
 
 AUJ 
 
 ' . y ^ A ^ ^ s’ 
 
 a * 0 y) 
 
 “ Look for excellence from the good, Ahmed Shah ! 
 Evil consider lighter than a feather ” 
 
 jr y 
 
 “ Bahrain said unto Shamas, go you to her, 
 
 SarddsVa too with her hand-maidens around her. 
 
 All should dress themselves in royal robes, 
 
 And with them Ruh Afza, more lovely than the rose” Bahrain Gur. 
 
 91. A mere repetition of the positive is commonly used to form the 
 comparative ; thus, — 
 
 eC 
 
 
 ^ji* dijir 
 
 dj d*. 
 v y 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 37 
 
 “ He who murmureth at that which hath happened, 
 
 Talketh great nonsense : he beateth the froth bubbles on the water ” 
 
 Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 92 . In forming the superlative, such words as all, boundary , 
 or over, above, are used in addition to the particles em- 
 ployed to express the comparative; as, <*J aid this is 
 
 the biggest of all ; or, this is the greatest ; Cdbj d^ <*) beyond bounds ; 
 • . s> „ — . ^ 
 
 KS& aJ ^ this man is the cleverest of all . 
 
 Examples : — 
 
 ' . * s * ss* » 9 ' ' 
 
 pi ^ ^ ^ 
 
 . *• ♦♦ 
 
 “ Thy oppression, oh ! beloved one, hath exceeded all bounds : 
 
 The waves of my tears are ever rolling from the ocean of my heart ” 
 
 Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 LsJ Lf^ ^ c iUy<> J \y dJ cy ^ 
 
 LfVl ) 1 " e>4/° jy j L 
 
 X / ** 
 
 Ua 
 
 a;u 
 
 V 
 
 “ The Huma on this account enjoy eth the greatest rank of all birds, 
 That it consumeth bones , and injureth not the feathered race. ,} Trans- 
 lation of the Gulistan. 
 
 yiik fjJ j] ^ d dJ aj yl^ Jy aj 
 
 jldly d a; ^d j IA3 ^ a} 
 
 U ^ ^ a) <^d 
 
 u Ita /o all appearances is the most excellent of created things, and 
 the dog the most vile ; 
 
38 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Yet with the concurrence of the ivise, a grateful dog is far superior to 
 the man without gratitude ” Gulistan. 
 
 takes (—1 ) or g with nouns feminine, and may be declined as 
 
 follows : 
 
 Sing, and Plu. , or all. 
 
 dp> Jp, dp alL 
 dp’ ^_Jp’ dp 0 °f aU - 
 
 9 ' 9 
 
 <^Jp’ dpi or ^ dp, dp 
 
 “ y / •• >to all, 
 
 *jb> *■' J> dp, sjp, dpi or 5 j J . *>dp r 
 
 dp’ *)j> dp alL 
 
 * dp Jp, dp J or dp’ Jjl dp ^ fr ° m alL 
 
 ^ H / *« 
 
 dP’ Jp> dP by alL 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Act. 
 
 93. The ^**>1 (ism-i-tasghir) used to lessen the importance 
 
 of a word, or to convey contempt, is affixed to the noun. There are, 
 several of these particles, as they may be termed, in general use ; viz. 
 
 Lf}, ^ Lfj;, and the letters '^and U? 
 
 — *♦ «*• 
 
 thus: — L cl small goglet ; a little girl; a. small 
 
 s * •• 
 
 market ; a mean felloiv ; (here the particle is inserted before 
 
 the final letter,) ^ a young cock ; a small pond ; dLJp.fi 
 
 or i*jCc? a mouse , (literally a small rat) Lf^^4. ; a coward , (literally a 
 small hero) and an illiterate priest. Examples : — 
 
 ■** d * 4 f Pip p- 
 
 <*’ j_j ^ P p P 0 ‘-r 
 
 sU J<lL Lf^*> J) — — pj— ~ ~ ^ \jsr 
 
 “ I once saw a mean scoundrel of a fellow , who was speaking ill of a 
 man of rank and respectability. 1 said to him — oh! muster } if thou art 
 
 ♦ 9 . - < \ * 
 
 *S^ j\pL. <U d) J J VO 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE, 
 
 39 
 
 unlucky, what fault is that of a more fortunate man. }) Translation of 
 the Gulistan. 
 
 10 Sfj 1 ? * yJiXi 
 
 s' s' ^ / *» / 
 
 jA J*i} J 5 Jl* *j ^ 
 
 “ The child gambleth not in this manner with stones and shards, 
 
 Like I stake on thee both my religion and my faith.' 31 Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 94. The particle of diminution affixed to a noun is also used to express 
 endearment, as will be seen from the following extract. 
 
 99 ' 
 
 i*p ° J 1 ^ 
 
 fb «j *>. jyS 
 
 J*- y LfJ c v&j] " ^ * c#- 0 ,J 
 
 ^ 9 . / 9 ' A 
 
 O* > **'- * £y 0>" * 
 
 “ 7b me is not death neither is it life — from the state of my own 
 existence I behold the dead — through love I am become dry — from anguish 
 I am consumed. Oh dear brother Miru ! I must see Durkham ” Tale 
 of Adam Khan and Durkham. 
 
 . ' 9 ' . 
 
 dhj |t> so! j 
 
 y ^ y ^ 
 
 cULA j}j j\J Xj &lwOb 
 
 ^ s? <**»ob 
 
 s b LpJ LZs*j ^ lo 
 
 When the prince spoke these words, the king and his family wept a 
 
 great deal . The king said, oh my dear boy ! what time is this that thou 
 hast made this declaration ?” Saif-ul-Muluk and Badri Jamal. 
 
40 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Chapter 1ST. 
 
 THE PRONOUN. 
 
 jut* zamir . 
 
 95. The Pushto pronouns are of five different classes — the personal, 
 demonstrative, reflective or reciprocal, interrogative, and indefinite. 
 
 96. The language contains no peculiar form of relative and co-rela- 
 tive pronouns, but other pronouns are used instead ; the explanations of 
 which, as also examples will be found in their proper places. 
 
 97. As the pronouns in declension admit of considerable changes, 
 they require to be exhibited separately. 
 
 98. The personal pronouns, or aLaiu* zamd’ir-i-munfasilah, 
 
 are; sj, <0 and which are declined in the following page. 
 
 99. The 1st person is termed plfc* (mutakallimj , the 2nd wikis' 0 
 
 (mukhatab) or (Jitizir), and the 3rd (ghayib). 
 
 100. As it would far exceed the intended limits of the present work 
 to give separate examples of each pronoun, both in the singular and plu- 
 ral number, I shall content myself by giving a specimen, either inflected 
 or otherwise, as occasion may require ; the whole of the changes for 
 person and case, gender and number, can be seen at a glance from the 
 following declensions. 
 
 101. The first personal pronoun sj is not subject to any change for 
 gender, and is thus declined : — 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 41 
 
 person I . 
 
 S. P. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 
 «j 1 
 
 
 
 s> 
 
 to* 
 
 or toC'y we ' 
 
 Gen. 
 
 
 1^ mine, of me. 
 
 
 or eAU. our, of us. 
 
 
 
 \ fi u 
 
 
 i), 
 
 1 " * 
 
 y, 
 
 or 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 4 *), 
 
 di Uj 
 
 j 
 
 Yto me. 
 
 A 
 
 »jl u jiyj 
 
 or j 
 
 yto US. 
 
 
 d), <v 
 
 
 
 &), di 
 
 ; j 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 *), Sj) 
 
 
 
 Acc. 
 
 
 L me - 
 
 
 9 
 
 to* 
 
 or us. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '.toe «J or 
 
 tSC’ito <01 
 
 
 Abl. <0 
 
 U dt) or 
 
 U di from me. 
 
 jj# dd-du 
 
 yfrom us. 
 
 totoly <n)J 
 
 Act. 
 
 
 bo by me. 
 
 
 * 9 
 
 to* 
 
 or toSjy by us. 
 
 The following are examples of the pronouns. 
 
 “ I seek assistance from thee — OA Got/ / grant unto me thy grace. 
 
 If with my lot thou grantest me thy grace , thou wilt redeem me from, 
 the flames” Makhzan Afghani. 
 
 102. The uninflected form of this pronoun is sometimes used for the 
 dative : the following is an example : — 
 
 ^y. sj. e>!^ *> to dJJ 
 
 “ The care and anguish which I suffer on account of my beloved , hath 
 reduced me to skin and bone, 
 
 Like as the tree in the autumn without leaves.” Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 G 
 
42 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 LfjA C^"»0 da. Lf° Jy Jii *? J&, '"' 
 
 ' ' #f >- ' ^ 
 
 (*) dA 
 
 2 ^ p s A 9 9 
 
 jt ^ ^ m 
 
 <e Give you information to our spiritual guide which is Pir Saleh, that 
 he should assist us, and if he does not do this, we are tired and disgusted 
 with his discipleship 33 Adam Khan and Durkham. 
 
 % ' ' ' ' ' , c ? 
 
 <UJs> Ski l J ^ 
 
 S’ S H ♦ ♦ 
 
 <u *yZi | J aj aj aJ aaL 
 
 a; i^Alo a^» j a^. ^kS* 
 
 *• 41 ** 
 
 A; _jv jy J; " r )u ^ l/^ 0 A ).r Jb 4 * )> c*~ A * ^ 
 
 i 5 >*jO j ^ Ji v3 k 0 *f ^ ir° ^ ^ 
 
 “ In the Shcebah it is thus stated — A party of people in Paradise will 
 thus say to another party in Hell — f Through your instruction and 
 exhortations we have entered into Heaven. By what evil destiny was it 
 that you entered into Hell?’ These will thus answer them. ‘We gave 
 good counsel to the world, but did not act up to it ourselves. We inter- 
 dicted others from evil, but we did not abstain from it ourselves. 3 33 
 Fawa/id-ush-Sharrfsea. 
 
 The above quotation contains examples of several pronouns, which is 
 the reason of my giving it at length. 
 
 103. 2nd person & Thou . 
 
 P. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 aJ thou. 
 
 or ye, or you. 
 
 * LfJjU> or fef*/ as it is also written, is the eastern or Peshawiri form of the first 
 person plural, and ^yo the Western dialect. I have already explained at page 6 
 that some tribes change the letters ^ for and viJ^for j and vice versa. The 
 
 Peshawiri pronunciation is evidently the purer Pushto. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 43 
 
 Gen. b* 0 or L, thine, of thee f 
 
 * 
 
 L or J 
 
 <*)> *j)> fi U 
 
 
 Dat. or bj 
 
 | >to thee. or <*), 2^), <0 
 
 
 
 of you. 
 
 to you. 
 
 — 9 
 
 (J thee , or to thee. V ou > or to V ou • 
 
 Voc. b oh ! thou. Lpl oh ! you , 
 
 Acc. 
 
 Abl. i U or b <d from thee. ■ 
 Act. 
 
 or y»\> 
 
 fi dJ J 
 
 from you. 
 
 
 U by thee. by you. 
 
 jj is ip fl |o ) i> a ip fjfyj ^)je\ lsI 
 
 ^JL x> 
 
 «v 
 
 “ Oh Arab ! I fear thou wilt not arrive at Mekka, for the road that 
 thou followest leadeth to Turkistdn.” Translation of the Gulistan. 
 
 104. In old writings, the dative particle is often written with an extra 
 
 •• 
 
 J thus *3 } } of which the following is an example.* 
 
 p , - — ■ 1 " ■ s 
 
 <Xa. <C y) <U ^ ^ ^ p y <U j b ^ ^ 2^ 
 
 “ Every morning and evening I offer up a prayer for thee : 
 Wherefore treatest thou me with contempt .” Rahman. 
 
 ffi) il ip J.Jj 
 
 “ You should make enquiry of the nightingale, 
 
 What sayest thou to the rose ? Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 * This form of the dative is also used with nouns ; and it may also be translated— 
 ,/or , for the sake of, etc. See Chap. II. 
 
44 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 105. 3rd person cUA He, she, it. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nora. * - - - * 
 
 Gen. 
 
 he, she, it. 
 ' * 
 
 . t> or J 
 
 or they. 
 
 S' S' 
 
 V of him, her,fyc. t3 or O *Mrs, 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 2 ^), or dt*i> cUjfc 
 
 <U or j 
 
 <kJ-> <£) or 
 
 s 
 
 <V *k& } - 
 
 )>to him, fyc. s ** ^ 
 
 J ^ or ^ or dd;&jJ 
 
 J> 
 
 Acc. 
 
 a) »Jj> jj J 
 
 <**A him, fyc. 
 
 jJ 
 
 
 /^ew. 
 
 <i) or dJ^j dd or {jpjkib } jx!b <jJ^ 
 
 Abl. . , . . " (from him, fyc. % s p Vfrom them . 
 
 & **■& <w, <*' A*& J <x) {jpjkb,ykbj 
 
 , , * s s 
 
 Aet. or by him, her, fyc. or by them. 
 
 Jj} *jl y} & ° f^i j 3 [}*> ^ 
 
 s s\ ~y~ ' A 
 
 <*** ° j 3 
 
 “ Before the time of the Prophet, this (woman) was married to JEtik 
 bin JEamir, and she had a daughter by him : her name was Hindah. 
 Fawa’id-ush- Sharri’sea. 
 
 106. The feminine form of this pronoun of which the example just 
 given is a specimen, is very often written with a ^ instead of ( — ^ ), 
 
 thus : — 
 
 ^ *x) * v *k yj yj *?jS » jo 
 
 ' ** s • / ^ / /> 
 
 ^ •* *, ^ *' 
 
 “ The mother of the Faithful said thus to her. ‘ Always remember 
 
 death ; by means of it meekness and gentleness of heart is produced .’ The 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 45 
 
 counsel of Lady Ayishah took effect on that woman , and she acted up to 
 it” Fawahd-ush-Sharrfsea. 
 
 tkity dd&i} sL j\ O O cCJU (UA 
 
 S S t\ f f ' 
 
 Xjw XS~o y*i Jyi O ^ L*0 ^ | ^JS.aC ^_Cj d-*^ 
 
 " ^ *✓ 
 
 “ After that he sat down beneath the couch , and did not draw his 
 
 breath until such time as they had consummated their pleasure , and the 
 black flag of night became inverted” iEyar Danish. 
 
 107. The singular nominative of this pronoun is also sometimes used 
 for the plural ; as, 
 
 l **- a a »» <kk&> J d) ^ 
 
 \i?.£ 4f>A j ^ 
 
 “ The Prophet said thus unto him — they are my vicars who act up to 
 the rules and institutions of my orthodox faith.” Fawa/id-ush-Sharri’sea. 
 
 108. This pronoun is also used as the remote demonstrative or 
 ^*>1 (ism-i-isharah) and is declined in a similar manner, except 
 
 that the nominative singular remains unchanged for the plural, as will 
 
 he seen from the following examples. 
 
 ^ s> m . 
 
 »* ^ ^ 
 tji:' 0 
 
 Whatever kind of seed thou sowest, that wilt thou reap : 
 
 Every tree beareth each its own peculiar fruit.” Abd-ur- Rahman. 
 
 IjPJ M J^v 
 
 ♦* 
 
 \f U <*j j b jL£. 
 
 No one in the whole course of his lifetime will have experienced 
 Those sorrows which my beloved every hour inflicts upon me. Abd- 
 
 ur- Rahman. 
 
46 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 109. The proximate demonstrative pronouns, which are of five dif- 
 ferent forms for the singular, and two for the plural, are declined as 
 follows. 
 
 ✓ 
 
 SJ or ^t), 1^, 4^t) This (persons or things ). 
 
 H Z' 
 
 S. P. 
 
 ^ 9 
 
 Nom. St), L^t), It), 4cc) this. (^t) or these . 
 
 ** /* 1 
 
 Gen. 8t>^ 4 cc), 4cj o of this. ^ or t) of these. 
 
 aJ, or ^cO 
 
 Wo /to. 4J , <0 jc j ^ > /o /toe. 
 
 4 J, SjJ, 4 ) > J 
 
 4)^ Sjb 4) 4 cJj acJ 
 
 Dat.J, 4) «3, It) 
 
 4), iji, a) t)^, |t)^, 4 cj^ 
 
 . * *' 
 
 Acc. 8 t>, t), |t)^ 4c c) act) /to, or to this. LS^t) or these , e/c. 
 
 >/ro?ra /toe. 
 
 4) 4cj 4 ) or 4c0 4 ) 
 
 9 ' 
 
 ^^t) 4 J or ^ct) aj 
 
 4) |t) 4 J or It) 4 J or 
 
 >/rom /to. 4 J or 4) ^cJ aj 
 
 etc. 4) t) aJ or t) 4 J 
 ^ ^ j 
 
 . ^ 
 a) ^0 
 
 Act. &t), ^t), t), acj, acj Z>?/ /to. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 9 %' 
 
 or by these. 
 
 ^t) j^lc) 4A J aAy ^^lc 
 
 
 ^ ^)Lo^t) a aw t)^t) ^*A 4^. ^<t) J^)1t) 4c»3 
 
 ff The remedy of sickness is a bitter bitter medicine : 
 
 This is a physic which becometh not only the disease , but also its cure.” 
 Abd-ur- Rahman. 
 
 j*° y ) y^ H yrjl * J j 
 
 y ' w ' ^ . yy y~ ^ 
 
 Keep thy cheek ever moist with the waters of thy tears ; 
 
 In these waters can be seen the face of the gem” Abd-ul- Hamid, 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 47 
 
 p y & y s 
 
 ^♦jUJL*' 0 LfJ^ <u ^ykl$4M 4:1) I <>ac 
 
 / ^ 
 
 a# u>!/^ 
 
 “ They 5a?/ /W /^ese women are roses, and every person smelleth a 
 rose. This is the sect of Abd-ullah Shamaklu. Outwardly they are 
 Musslemans, hut inwardly are infidels. Makhzan Afghani. 
 
 p 2 
 
 ^ jy* *} ^ ^ d) . Jy* 
 
 ur* j 
 
 Destiny will ensanguine this red flower in thy blood, 
 
 Which itself hath placed in thy turban .” Kushhal Khan, Khattak. 
 
 «| w 
 
 f / ^ 
 
 4J *£ L> J \f J j \ 
 
 cyk* 4>jb ^)U J; 
 
 cc Alas brave youth ! there is no road of escape for me : 
 
 The employment of this life of mine is in the house of grief. 
 
 This (demon) merely looks at me — in other respects I am safe ; 
 But the world entertaineth suspicions against me.” Bahrain Gur. 
 fT J Jj* A** t> {^fiS jOJ ^ 
 
 *j“ % b j f ^ky *? ls; ^ 
 
 A . k|h " > 
 
 y» ^ Jki c> j j 
 
 itCxL c> 
 
 
 J 
 
 “ W/iat noise and confusion was there in the army of Bhizad ! 
 It was about midnight that a tumult and cries for help arose . 
 
48 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Mount , said the prince, to the summit of the fortress. 
 
 What calamity has happened that up to this time no battle has ensued.” 
 Bahram Gur. 
 
 y U3|<3 
 
 9 .9 „ > * ~ A 
 
 a 2 i*W'° ** J jb 
 
 “ There was a mighty king who ruled over the country of Rum ; 
 
 He was amiable and humane , and his dwelling was the home of sages. 
 This great prince was possessed of countless worldly wealth , 
 
 But he ever pined with grief and regret , for he was childless.” 
 Bahram Gur. 
 
 110. The first letter of the demonstrative is sometimes lost by 
 elision, thus : — 
 
 The nightingale became lost in the imagination of humanity : 
 
 I am that rose which roameth about in the spring time of love. Ahmed 
 Shah, Abdali. 
 
 5 "> 9 ' 
 
 111. The reflective or reciprocal pronoun ( zamir-i - 
 
 mushtarak J is applicable to all three persons. It is placed before 
 
 the verb in the sentence, and must refer to the agent or nominative case 
 either expressed or understood, whatever it may be. The changes to 
 which it is subject for gender and by inflection, will be seen in the fol- 
 lowing declension. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 49 
 
 Masc. and Fem. AL or jjX M V sel L thyself, my own, etc. 
 
 X V 
 
 S. P. 
 
 .9 l 9 » \ 9 * I 9 . 
 
 Nom. or myself, self or 0'^ ourselves, etc . 
 
 9 ' - 9 ' ** \ 9 * ' 
 
 Gen. .JLk <■> or <■> of myself, etc. of ourselves, etc. 
 
 ^ } to myself, f , / to ourselves, 
 
 or 
 
 Dat. . m .9 
 
 to myself, 
 
 r . , i 
 
 h \ 
 
 dj; 8 j; ii ^ 
 
 etc. 
 
 L J 
 
 etc. 
 
 p p .9' .9 * 
 
 Acc. or myself, etc. or ourselves, etc. 
 
 9 9 
 
 Abl. or lJ>aA dJ 
 
 v w v 
 
 43 <*3 ^ or 
 
 dt3 dJ or ^ 
 
 from our- 
 selves, etc. 
 
 from my- 
 self, etc. 
 
 Act. or by myself, etc. by ourselves , etc. 
 
 «• 
 
 112. The following are examples of this pronoun. 
 
 | <3 jJ t> M 
 
 CLf)jsr ^ J ^4^ 
 
 ft *” jaA oj ; ^ *2 
 
 dU 8^13 Jsa 3 |c> dO 
 
 “In the year one thousand and forty this circumstance I relate, 
 
 When the people of the Dakhan and Gujerat saw such tyranny and 
 oppression. 
 
 In the whole of my lifetime, since I became capable of distinguishing 
 good from evil ; 
 
 I never beheld after this fashion massacre with stones.” Futtih Khan, 
 Mirza. 
 
 The inflected form of the feminine may be written or 
 
 ^ ♦« 
 
 P$ <d ^ /* |k> 
 
 * See article on the nouns. — Note f to Page 15. 
 
 a 
 
50 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ( ■‘f Lf J ^ £*> lM- d jy A 
 
 The just claim which a wife has over her husband is this, that he 
 should show proper love and affection towards his wife y s brothers, her 
 mother and father, Fawaid-ush-Sharrfsea. 
 
 M b ji j j ** j) *** ^ cri 
 
 ** X *v 
 
 ** JJ lS Lf j jjj** H Lf> 
 
 ' * ' .' , 
 
 “ Afterwards Durkham said to him, I have a request to make ; pray 
 give ear to it. Adam Khan answered, Whatever the command may be 
 I agree to it with all my heart* She then related to him her own 
 sorrows in the following manner ” Adam Khan and Durkham. 
 
 113. When no agent is expressed, this pronoun denotes individuality 
 and reciprocity, or may refer to either of the three persons, which is only 
 discoverable by something that has preceded it, or comes after ; as in 
 
 the sentence, (^0 1^* 
 
 *£«JLaa» <*) 0^1^ b ¥ <V jjJ j 
 
 ff 0 L^5 i jJ) ^ /** 
 
 s 41 
 
 “ Whoever maketh a prostration before a tomb, or wisheth for any thing 
 from the defunct ; and he consider eth the fulfilment of his wish to have 
 been accomplished by means of the deceased, there is danger of blas- 
 phemy” Fawaid-ush-Sharri’aea. 
 
 C f la. [X\ J " ^ t? ^ 
 
 “ Concerning this my own hard fate, 
 
 To whom shall I tell my sorroivs ? from whom seek redress ?” Layla 
 and Majnun. 
 
 * Literally “ on ray eyes.” 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 51 
 
 114. The interrogative pronouns (asma’e-i-istifahm) 
 
 are pf, and f or i-tf?’ 
 
 Vi/Jl is applied to persons and rarely to inanimate objects. It is 
 used both for the singular and plural, and masculine and feminine. It 
 
 is thus declined. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Act. 
 
 Who ? which ? what ? 
 
 e/Jl who ? which ? what ? 
 
 ^ ^ °f whom ? which ? what ? 
 
 or 
 
 dJ, &J, dJ [*. j or dd; s>J, dJ U 
 J ;, ujUj 
 
 >to whom ? which ? what ? 
 
 <U Lw dJ 
 
 V 
 
 whom ? which? what? 
 or dJ from whom ? which ? what ? 
 
 L* by whom ? which ? what ? 
 Examples. 
 
 ijpd dll <J iZfjl d) dLx d)\j d) \j 
 
 ^0 jjjJ SjaaA c> jislA dU |t> 
 
 “ Tell me who art thou ? and what is thy name ? 
 
 That this love of thine affects thy mind so much” Bahram Gur. 
 
 ** ^d ^ d*. ^ 
 
 «* + *• 
 
 “ The whole of my lifetime has passed in this vain hope, 
 
 That thou wouldst ask me, who art thou ? and what ? Yusuf and 
 Zulikha. 
 
 115. This pronoun is also in common use as an indefinite, and is for 
 the most part applied to persons, but in some instances to things also. 
 Examples of its use with respect to persons are contained in the follow- 
 ing extracts. 
 
52 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 dbj u»l <*£-*** *«<? " W 
 
 (( 
 
 If any one taketh courage in acting with uprightness , 
 
 He will follow after it with affection and love ” Makhzan Afghani. 
 
 eat victuals out of platters, and drink water from bowls” Adam Khan 
 and Durkhani. 
 
 116. The following couplet contains an example of its use with refer- 
 ence to tilings. 
 
 u There is one element of water, and one element of earth ; 
 
 And some fruits are bitter, and some pleasant and sweet” Futtih 
 Khan, Mirza. 
 
 117. The interrogative pronouns ^ and ^ are also singular and 
 plural, hut they take the addition of s for the feminine gender, and may 
 he thus declined. ' 
 
 " Some persons have said that the Yusuf zais are a great people — they 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ^ & or ~ fff ^ of what ? 
 
 Dat, 
 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 53 
 
 ~ or \j?ff ~ {ff by what? 
 Examples. 
 
 “ W hat wedding — what betrothal is there in the world ? 
 
 That cruel fate at last turnetli not into wailing and lamentation ” Abd- 
 ur-Rahman. 
 
 “ W hat hour is it that the heart palpitates and beats ? 
 
 It will be that hour , when the shadow of beloved faces falls on the 
 heart ? 3 Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 118 . The pronoun £ is used both in an interrogative as well as in 
 an indefinite sense : its conjugation is as follows. 
 
 Masc. and Fem., Sing, and Plu. What? or, a , an, any, etc . 
 Nom. ^ what ? — a, an any , some , etc, 
 
 Gen. C> of what? — of a , an, any, some, etc, 
 
 <U or <0, <0 
 
 Eat. ^ > to what ? — to a, an, any, some, etc . 
 
 ^ } or J 
 
 Acc. what ? — a, an, any, some, etc, 
 
 Abl. Aa d) or <*£ <*J from what ?—from a, an, any, etc. 
 
 Act, 
 
 A 
 
 by what ? — by a, an, any, some, etc. 
 
54 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Examples. 
 
 yit L ?2 Ky * )y° ^ *5* J 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 “ The party had reduced Pir Saleh to great extremity, saying — W hat 
 art thou doing ? — it is now time ! we are tired of waiting ! Adam Khan, 
 and Durkham. 
 
 aJL. j aj a^. 
 
 jj zdjf\ {j?y di it 
 
 cc Since goodness all at once escaped from the hand of the world, 
 
 Why may not it be stained with evil and depravity ? Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 Example of the Indefinite ^4^° y* J ( ism-i-mubham ) . 
 
 ls£j J 3 I 4a- U <*j dS 
 
 Lsj aU s) I J U 
 
 “ If there was any chance of thy admonition taking effect on me, 
 
 Thou oh monitor l wouldst then have given me advice .” Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 119. yt } ^jtt } ^3, or ^53 is another form of the indefinite. 
 
 s 
 
 It is applicable to things both animate and inanimate ; is not subject to 
 any change in termination for gender ; and is both singular and plural. 
 It is declined as follows, 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 eP, ^ Some, any, a few, etc. 
 
 ** " ^ ^ 
 
 or .^a. some, any, a few, etc. 
 
 ' ' ^ s' 
 
 • A 
 
 tip or ^a. J of some , any, a few, etc . 
 
 A *J > A ’ * » (i)4 
 
 Dat. J, Sj), aii ^53, ^ j 
 
 >- /o some, qny x a few ; e/c. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 55 
 
 Acc. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Act. 
 
 v^> 
 
 • * * . A A 
 
 ^-*0, * 
 
 . A 
 
 £ some, any, a few, etc. 
 
 from some, any, a few, etc. 
 
 " t/f 
 
 jo ; yjo, ii, % some, <ray, a few, etc. 
 - ' - ^ 
 
 Examples. 
 
 ^ ^ ^ &k& j if ^ ^ 
 
 *4> at* O y=*Q 0 of; a; a ^ a^S^af a*. ^sij Lf> 
 
 ' S s’ s- ''s S S * 
 
 Lf/^y^ ** 
 
 “ If a person abuseth him who may bear the name of Muhammad, or 
 Ahmad-abul-Kasim, some say that it is not blasphemy. Others again 
 state, that at the time of giving abuse, if his thoughts be directed towards 
 the Prophet, he is a blasphemer .” Eawa’id-ush- Sham’ sea. 
 
 S , p rn , ' x 
 
 Lf/i-y <» f J 
 
 J-l J-i tf 0 Jj* )y* (JJ 1 ^ 
 
 J.^ Sjs> (J^l <*J fOl jl 
 
 t t ^ aLoiqU j o 
 
 « «• s- s’ s’ 
 
 “ The decree of destiny reacheth every one — 
 
 From all eternity the horseman is mounted, and the footman on foot ; 
 And man himself originally is of one race and origin, 
 
 Yet some rule empires, and some beg from door to door.” Euttih 
 Khan, Mirza. 
 
 120. Several pronouns admit of composition ; thus, Cl/pL jit who - 
 
 A A A ' C 
 
 ever, or whatever, a^.j& whatever, y.f every one,j*<oJ which one, etc. 
 They are subject to the same rules of inflection, and change in termina- 
 tion for gender, as the pronouns from which they are derived : is 
 
 declined in the following manner. 
 
56 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Sing, and Plu. or Which one ? Masc. and Fern. 
 
 ✓ x,x ^ A 
 
 or which one ? 
 
 
 or ytf$ of which one ? 
 
 >to which one? 
 
 Acc. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Act. 
 
 one ? 
 
 <J <$* ) or <*); 8^, & L °r J*** 
 
 Dat. a) ), *J > " J or J, »j) ^ 
 
 s^«*f or y}£ which 
 
 45 l'r*) or L£j>: £ <0 from which one ? 
 
 or which one ? 
 
 a v " \ 
 
 Examples of and v — 
 
 ^ <**■ " J) \jf- ^ J 1 : -5 b *! (*! U "* 
 
 (3t*" 4^. StJ A* ^ jb wjl) 
 
 « '* ' *' ** 
 
 If J ^ i! ^ J? ] ) 
 
 “ He quickly called the learned man to his house, and upbraided him, 
 saying — ‘ Why turnest thou thy back on my daughter ? she is at all times 
 a seeker after knowledge : since thou teachest her companions, which one 
 of them is superior to her ?’ ” Adam Khan, and Durkham. 
 
 *> <S* ^ ^ *? iJ^ L 
 
 . ' 44 
 
 u Since she fear eth not that God, who is the God of all, 
 
 By the assistance of what Deity shall I divert my friend from the 
 keepers Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 p A 
 
 121. The only relative pronoun ^***1 (ism-i-mawsul) which 
 
 the Pushto language contains is which must not be confounded with 
 the interrogative already explained, there being no connexion between 
 
 * This particle lias a great similarity to the Persian ^ 
 
UUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 57 
 
 y a * , 
 
 them. The co-relative <J \y*y*> L r*jj i£ *’ (jawab-i-mawsul) is supplied by 
 the demonstrative pronouns as will be seen in the examples. 
 
 122. may either precede or follow after its substantive : the fol- 
 lowing are examples. 
 
 l fjji ^ «» tf;ij 
 
 *2*') j xsb ^ 
 
 * 
 
 <( They who have been well anointed with the ashes of humility , 
 
 The mirror o/their hearts becometh clear and bright.” Abd-ui-Haimd. 
 
 * . - » * 9 T 
 
 Jrt* H 
 
 ♦♦ 
 
 u Patience and continence should flee from her on all fours. 
 
 When she iaketh between her finger and thumb the arrows of her eye- 
 dashes.” Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 ^ 9 
 
 vt“* 5 oW ^ i Jt *f 
 
 ** *♦ 
 
 “ With one kiss merely , how shall I be contented ? 
 
 Since good fortune from the world, is only to be obtained by degrees.” 
 Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 123. In addition to the regular form of the personal pronouns already 
 explained and illustrated, there are three other forms of pronouns which 
 require a lengthened explanation. 
 
 The first form is used with all past tenses of the active voice, as 
 is also the actor or instrumental case of the personal pronouns, to denote 
 the agent in a sentence, and have no meaning separate from the verbs. 
 With any other than active or transitive verbs they point out the object, 
 or the possessive case, and have but these two inflections from the nomi- 
 
 i 
 
58 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 native. They are not affected by gender, and may be prefixed or insert- 
 ed : they are as follows. 
 
 s> 
 
 1st person * or I, mine , to me, we, ours, to us. 
 
 * 
 
 2nd „ or 6 thou, thine, to thee. you, yours, to you, 
 
 y y 
 
 3rd „ he, she, it, his, hers, etc. ^ them, theirs, to them. 
 
 124. In the following examples, the first shows the actor, and the 
 second the inflected form respectively. 
 
 <*) J d) \j ^ CUto 
 
 X ** 
 
 *y »Lj> j si* 
 
 •• 
 
 “ I broke a hundred vows, yet did not abandon love, 
 
 Therefore I placed no more faith on vows.” Abd-ur- Rahman. 
 
 J)j> V ^ ^ 
 
 A jA s lj H o ^1 
 
 • ♦ • ** 
 
 <e I was a rose when there were no equals to me. 
 
 But now I become a thorn in the heart of friendship.” Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 yQ J js' 0 & O <*a 
 
 jb\ * jf H f WJ, 
 
 “ When thou didst give the colour of wine to thy lips, 
 
 Thou didst set all on fire the houses of the wine-drinkers.” Futtih 
 Khan, Mirza, 
 
 ✓ 9 
 
 CV ^ I o |J aj 
 
 “ Since it saw the reflection of thy beauty in its own heart , 
 
 On this account also my soul like the mirror is filled with amazement” 
 
 Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 59 
 
 *i d? 1 
 
 ee Durkhani went to him , and having taken his hand led him in. She 
 first sat down on the bed, and then seated Adam Khan on the floor. ” 
 Adam Khan, and Durkhani. 
 
 “ Whatever secrets we mentioned to each other, 
 
 There were no words spoken but those of love ” Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 “ It is stated in the Tafsir Husaini, that the devil is your great enemy, 
 oh ! true believers ; and will deceive you in manifold ways ” Fawa’id- 
 ush-Sharrfsea. 
 
 “ Our Prophet has said — f There are many persons who to all outward 
 appearances say their prayers, but their hearts are remiss .* ” FawaTd- 
 ush-Sharri’sea. 
 
 125. These affixes and prefixes being one of the difficulties of Pushto, 
 required examples of each person as above given, and will be necessary 
 for those which follow. 
 
 126. The second form of pronoun, or pronominal dative prefix, as it 
 may be termed, is alone used to point out the object in a sentence. It 
 is used with all verbs, but like the preceding has no independent mean- 
 ing, and is not subject to change in termination for gender : it is both 
 singular and plural. 
 
60 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF TfTE 
 
 1st person *) \j or jj, A) \j) | j to me, or to us. 
 
 2nd » or *J j '*, to thee, or to you. 
 
 3rd „ J or )j, <V JJ,JJ to him, her, it, or to them* 
 
 Examples. 
 
 <jU \j [4 Cfi/jjA-Uk) ^ .r 
 
 *V 
 
 cy._y^ L?J$ & ^*JU tpjUi 
 
 te If I close my eye ever so little, she says unto me, — 
 
 6 When really in love , 'people neither slumber nor sleep ’ ” Abd-ul-Hamida 
 
 Hj) I l^cv, 
 
 ^(>j y£> soo cu jj duly dulolS ^1 
 
 u Truth is bitter, but falsehood is sweet : 
 
 It is marvellous, oh fool ! that evil is pleasant to thee.” Ahmed 
 Shah, Abdali. 
 
 j)** jj CLy<L j jj f 44 ^ 
 
 /j/ S " JJ 
 
 “ Adam Khan ascended the ladder, swung himself off by the rope 
 
 towards him, and Miru who was standing near (to him), received him 
 
 on his shoulders and lowered him down ” Adam Khan and Eurkham. 
 
 * 
 
 127. These particles, particularly \j and Jj are also used in the for- 
 
 '9 '9 
 
 mation of verbs, thus ; — \j to me, and to carry, becomes \) 
 to bring ; and jj to him, and (Jjy to do, etc. — )) to give, 
 
 128. These same forms undergo other changes in writing and con- 
 versation, but particularly in the latter. The cause appears to be merely 
 greater facility in enunciation. Thus for \j they use Sj JV,d)o or 
 
 ij) 0 for <0 j6 } and y and y J for y jj. The following are 
 examples. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 61 
 
 ^ l^J Ifik. d9 
 
 /■ /„ ( 9 * 
 
 Ky** j) (fi if ^_<>|(>gL cO <$«> ^|„^lJa/0 Um> 
 
 “ Giue unto me fm account of thy circumstances on paper, 
 
 And if God so wilts it, thy wishes will be fulfilled” Bahrain Gur. 
 
 V 1 ^ <Ji iff j; V 
 
 H 
 
 “ the angel of death cometh unto thee. 
 
 Thou wilt give up thy soul without pain” Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 J/ )> ff* yj jy*> 
 
 * 
 
 ^ » 
 
 ir* 
 
 ** 
 
 “ Faghfur gave unto her numerous gems and precious stones : 
 
 Forty hundred handmaids filled the country with the bloom of their 
 beauty.” Bahram Gur. 
 
 129 . The affixed personal pronouns* y U *5 ( zamaHr-i-mutas - 
 
 silah) are used in forming the tenses of intransitive and substantive 
 verbs, and with the exception of the six past tenses, for those of verbs 
 transitive also. They are inseparable from the verbs, and have no inde- 
 pendent signification. The regular personal pronouns may also be pre- 
 fixed to the verbs with which they are used, but are not absolutely 
 required, and not generally adopted. On reference to the conjugations, 
 the manner in which these affixes are used with the different tenses and 
 persons will be seen at a glance : they are as follow. 
 
 * There is great similarity between these pronouns and those of the Arabic and Per- 
 sian languages. In Sindhi also there is scarcely a sentence spoken, in which they are 
 not used with verbs, nouns, and prepositions. 
 
62 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 1st person f I. } we. 
 
 A 
 
 2nd „ thou. ye or you. 
 
 ** »♦ 
 
 3rd „ ^ he, she , it, and also — they . 
 
 M / 
 
 The ^ of the 3rd person is not used in any of the past tenses of 
 intransitive or auxiliary verbs. The following are examples. 
 
 Jr- jk ub p>.> 
 
 ' . " ' . , 9 
 
 «iU o ^ o ^ rs |i> JU 
 
 “ I see all departing, no one whatever is to remain behind — 
 
 On this road are journeying both young and old.” Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 ju U ds U jla , dJ 
 
 “ If thou fallest from the precipice of love, thou wilt lose thy teeth , 
 
 Oh thou who gnashest thy teeth at me by way of admonition .” Abd- 
 ur-Rahman. 
 
 ° jy ^ 
 
 A) 
 
 “ For him whom the black demon of love strikes, 
 
 There is no health or cure from the charms or incantations of the 
 
 * 
 
 world.” Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 * r \ | A . 
 
 jjf jU* *» ^ J uj *J 
 
 ci5 jb j sj ^ j j b 
 
 
 “ 7F7iew / awe? my beloved together , ma&e a computation of our sorrows ; 
 She is astonished with her lover, and I am filled with amazement at 
 mine.” Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 ji^u > a jj yz j** y ii 5j-> jjj* J jy 
 
 A 9 ~ * S’ 
 
 ) v u r- *? 4 fr 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 63 
 
 “ On this Mir Mami set out in company with those horsemen ; and 
 when he had gone a short distance , he said to them — make you haste that 
 you may reach the force quickly” Adam Khan, and Durkham. 
 
 .. .. 
 
 “ When will they who taste of the wine-coloured lips of the fair, 
 
 Set their hearts on the juice of the grape?” Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 130. There are three prepositions used in Pushto requiring explana- 
 tion here, which are used as demonstrative pronouns. They are y and 
 y which add a zer ( ~~yj, and 15 or <*5 which prefixes in the oblique 
 cases. They are used both for things animate and inanimate, are both 
 singular and plural, and are not subject to any change for gender : the 
 following are examples. 
 
 
 <0 
 
 {jpy $o y {jPy d 3 ^ y H 
 
 JO a yfi cJji £ 
 
 “ On every sensible adult believer to fast is a divine command and a 
 duty. Like the repayment of a debt it is necessary and incumbent on him. 
 If any one repudiates fasting, the whole of his acts are entirely vain, and 
 he will become an infidel.” FawaTd-ush-Sharrfsea. 
 
 ^ • | * i r S A .. .If 
 
 so y ^ po ^*o! lo d^. y j u 
 
 “ Gul Nazai said, This is that same Adam Khan from whom Durkham 
 has been carried off.” Adam Khan and Durkham. 
 
 r' «" . 9 A 9 * 
 
 d*. d£> yy I j o <uloj aj 
 
 — 9 
 
 ! *<jy ff o JiUJi 
 
 / / 
 
 “ Listen oh true believers — In our day the calamities produced by the 
 
64 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 tongue are manifold, since blasphemous words are uttered from it. j 
 Makhzan Afghani. 
 
 
 <*; j) 
 
 V * 
 
 <0 \j Lj ;!*| dc. c3 ^jLa. 
 
 “ OA / bird of the dawn, learn thou love from the moth ; 
 
 That consumed one’s life went, but no sound escaped from him.” Abd- 
 ul- Hamid. 
 
 * y y s 9^ * '9 _ 
 
 n > *■ \J> h /' ° iir / *> ^ *}J 
 
 ^ ^ ^ ^ 9 x x 
 
 r S UJ aj ^<J jb [ i 
 
 d) 
 
 * 
 
 c> 
 
 “ I said in my mind, when I reach the rose tree, 
 
 I will fill my skirt with roses from it, as a present for those whom I 
 love ” Gulistan. 
 
 Chapter F. 
 
 THE VERB. 
 
 o 
 
 FiceL 
 
 131. A verb is a word which affirms or asserts-; as speaks , 
 
 eats . It may also of itself constitute a sentence, and unless it 
 
 be expressed or understood, no sentence is complete. 
 
 132. Verbs are of two kinds — primitive and derivative, which may 
 
 . . *>.9 9 
 
 again be divided into six classes — the k r '\j or substantive ; 
 
 .V I ... 
 
 neuter or intransitive ; active or transitive, in which also 
 
 * * T, * 9 o 
 
 are comprised causals ; the derivative or lM ; and the passive, 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 65 
 
 133. Some verbs have both an active, and a neuter signification ; as 
 to burn. 
 
 ^ JJ> jj 
 
 y / ^ y 
 
 JJ I *> ° AJlj <D JJ 
 
 «• #> 
 
 ' J> . * 
 
 “ Then Bahrarn said, Oh sister Sarddsia ! go unto Gul Andam : 
 
 Give unto her information respecting my name. 
 
 Bay, that consumed in the fire of thy love, 
 
 Prince Bahrarn hath again returned from Rum.” Bahrain Gur. 
 
 L t) e£Lo 1 4 j ^as ' 0 
 
 s 
 
 *>y 
 
 CAy° 
 
 J ^ j^| a; Ay 
 
 “ Majnun at that time acquired the dominion of love, 
 
 When in the fire of affection he consumed all his worldly wealth.” 
 
 Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 134. The active voice may be obtained from some intransitives, by 
 
 x > 
 
 changing the (J and (JcV of the infinitive into ^Jj ; as <J c>aL to take 
 
 fyy y y y 
 
 fire, to set on fire ; t° become cool, t° ma ^ e cold ; 
 
 to revolve, (Jjjr* to make revolve ; (J to swing, doff) 
 to make swing. 
 
 Example. 
 
 Lf; yd A Lfj h *a>U' ic 0 s Ai A 
 
 y **y y p 9 
 
 “ As much as thou art able, pain not the heart of any one ; 
 
 Since there may be very many thorns in this path. 
 
 K 
 
66 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Give assistance to the poor and the indigent in their affairs ; 
 
 Since thou hast many matters in this world to be brought to conclu- 
 sion” Translation of the Gulistan. 
 
 135. The casual also termed may be formed from intransi- 
 
 9 ^ ✓ 
 
 tives and transitives by adding in place of or J & ; thus 
 
 9 " ' ' 9 + 
 
 to run, to cause to run; to laugh, (Jyc>Aix to cause to 
 
 ^ 9 
 
 s * * 9 s s 
 
 laugh ; Jii to lament, J; s ii or ) to cause to lament. Example : 
 
 * Jj> S ^ L <J " l Xb 
 
 r f \)j_ <«> !o*a. « <«44 *i 
 
 “ If thou causeth one to laugh, or causeth one to lament, thou art 
 the cause of all : 
 
 Of my own accord I do not make merry, neither do I mourn and be- 
 wail.” Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 o 
 
 136. The derivative verb, or may be formed from 
 
 nouns. 
 
 adjectives, or pronouns, either bv alone adding the sign of the infinitive ; 
 
 ' 9 m ' 9 
 
 as y understanding , to understand ; q) dry, to be- 
 
 9 ' 9 
 
 come dry, or to make drj ; or by shortening the long vowel of 
 
 the word ; as \j>j bright, djjb t° ma ke bright ; a brink or side, 
 S'' 
 
 vc to put aside: the following is an example. 
 
 L ?j) KSff ^^6 U» 
 
 s 9+9 
 
 ♦* ✓ 
 
 “ It is necessary to practise every disguise to please the beloved : 
 
 * This method of using a letter instead of a vowel point, is in accordance with the 
 orthographical system of the Zendic language. See Introduction, page 3/. 
 
I 
 
 PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 67 
 
 To gain the affections* of the fair, dependeth on art and skill ” 
 Abd-ur- Rahman. 
 
 137. Pushto also contains a sort of compound verb, which may be 
 divided into two classes — nominals and intensitives. The former are 
 formed by the mere subjoining of a verb regularly conjugated to a noun 
 
 or adjective; as, sleep, to sleep ; hunger , 
 
 ij&if to become hungry ; battle , jjr e&l to fight. These 
 
 verbs being very commonly used, need no example, there being scarcely 
 a sentence without one. 
 
 138. Intensitives are obtained by adding or prefixing to a regularly 
 conjugated verb, two adjectives or an adverb ; thus — 
 
 Lf° ji *■> t)^ 
 
 J Jjj * j)\ Jjj 
 
 “ The arrows of thy eyelashes have pierced me in the breast . 
 
 Verily they have passed right through unto my heart” Abd-ur- 
 Rahman. 
 
 “ Sometimes man may be cheerful and happy, 
 
 At times through grief troubled and distressed.” Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 139. The passive voice is formed by the addition of the different 
 
 tenses of the substantive or auxiliary verbs and to be or be- 
 
 come, to the past participle or imperfect tense of a transitive verb, which 
 are subject to the same changes in termination for gender as other verbs 
 to agree with the governing noun in the sentence. 
 
 * Literally — To make one’s own, from self, myself, fyc. 
 
 K 2 
 
68 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 The following is an example with 
 
 aj KS) ft> ftj** 1 0 
 
 “ If the rose tree is viewed without the beloved being at one’s side , 
 The eye-sight merely falleth on a place of thorns and brambles .” Abd- 
 ul- Hamid. 
 
 Example with 
 
 
 ^Xib 6 ] j* d okfj~ 
 
 “By the time the treacle is brought from Irak* 
 
 The snake-bitten person is dead.” Gulistan. 
 
 140. It will be necessary now to show the inflexions of the different 
 auxiliaries, which are the models for the variations of the persons, and 
 in forming the definite tenses of the verbs. 
 
 33 p 
 
 141 . The following auxiliary or substantive verb, called the I 
 
 *v 
 
 is ^3^5 or irregular, and has no known infinitive. It is very easy and 
 ✓ 
 
 should be carefully committed to memory. W ant of space wdll compel 
 me to content myself with a single example of each tense in the conjuga- 
 tions of the verbs, unless some peculiarity requires to be more fully 
 explained. 
 
 To be or become. — Infinitive unknown. 
 S. Present Tense. P. 
 
 sj 1 am. 
 
 <U thou art. 
 
 we are. 
 
 or J , .b 
 
 
 L/'O you are. 
 
 
 ju-Im or *0, he, she, it is 
 
 or they 
 
 are. 
 
 * The treacle of Irak is a celebrated antidote for venomous snake-bites. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 69 
 
 ft 0 Cf- X?b J** 0 
 
 " Cupbearer ! bring the boivl of wine : 
 
 I am overwhelmed in the ocean of grief ” Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 Example of the Feminine. 
 
 Xd Loo djb JtJ dS AJ 
 
 “ I will give up all honour and reputation, 
 
 Though the world itself depends on good name” Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 O 
 
 Examples of a1*> Singular and Plural. 
 
 St) ^<OLu J \y Aaau ^/O A^» 
 
 X / ** 
 
 “ Since to me love’s anguish is equal to its rapture, 
 
 If this distress of mine be lost, I shall again become wretched” Futtih 
 Khau, Mirza. 
 
 77 * ' s * ' 
 
 L£y^ 1 ^ 6 
 
 <Jy •h ^ ° 
 
 s 
 
 “ Since these crooked and left-handed revolutions are occasioned 
 by fate; 
 
 Mount Caucasus itself should not coquet about its own weight” Abd- 
 ul-Hamid. 
 
 The following form of the 2nd person plural is to be found in ancient 
 
 writings, but it is not commonly used. It, as well as is in all pro- 
 
 _ /* ✓ 
 
 bability derived from the obsolete infinitive or which is now 
 lost. 
 
 ji ji 
 
 c/y Lf J ^ A 7| cJb o J»ls 
 
70 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ You , oh faithful ! are the servants of the most High. God liveth ! 
 death affects him not ! keep firmly the tenets of your faith , oh people of 
 God!” Fawa’id-ush-ShanPsea. 
 
 o 
 
 and are sometimes used together, but the latter seems to be 
 
 ♦♦ 
 
 merely added by way of emphasis : the following is an example. 
 
 y «* 
 
 “ With the glance of her dark-grey eye she enchants and charms in this 
 manner — 
 
 There is no one eye equal to it in Hind, not another in Bengalah.” 
 Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 S. 
 
 9 
 
 1 was. 
 
 & thouwast. 
 
 9 9 + 
 
 or j he or it was 
 ixh she was. 
 
 flL* Past Tense. P. 
 
 9 9 9 
 
 or we were • 
 or y° u we re. 
 
 9 9 
 
 orjxb they (men) were. 
 
 9 9 
 
 } or jx-b they (women) were. 
 
 This tense with the prefix & is often used as the Conditional or 
 Optative tense, of which examples will be found in their proper places. 
 
 The following example shows both the masculine and feminine form 
 of this tense, and both methods of writing the third person masculine as 
 above given. 
 
 dU 
 
 j & j? 
 
 b* H 
 
 yjj 
 
 9 9 
 
 y. >>. 
 
 tk> 
 
 yji 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 71 
 
 “ There was a chief of the Yusuf zoes — a Tahmuras * in ivealth — who 
 was ycleped Td’ous Khan. There was also a daughter of this chief- 
 tain named Durkhan, and there was no equal to her in beauty ” Story 
 of Adam Khan and Durkham. 
 
 ^ to. Sj ftjzji 
 
 “ There was a learned man who WAsf proficient in all the sciences con- 
 tained in as many books as required four hundred chests to hold them” 
 EawaTd-ush-Sharrfsea. 
 
 The future tense of this auxiliary shows the very irregular and imper- 
 fect nature of many of the Afghanian verbs. The 1st and 2nd persons 
 are formed by prefixing the particle to the present, and the 3rd person 
 by prefixing it to the aorist or future indefinite, which again has no 1st 
 or 2nd persons. In the conjugations of all other verbs, the 2nd future 
 tense is formed from the aorist. 
 
 S. Future Tense. P. 
 
 ft I s ball or will be. or Jy# we shall or will be. 
 
 J 
 
 x _ 
 
 Lgj di 
 
 J d ) M thou etc. 
 
 9 I M |H 
 
 or you shall or will be. 
 
 
 du or 
 
 >he, she , it, etc. 
 
 d) orjxb 
 
 x 
 
 eri? * or ^ 
 
 they shall or will be. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Lf ^ *1 J*^ ^ ) H 
 
 { <S <S yO jjmJ yASio A di d2± 
 
 * The third Persian King of the Pishdadian dynasty, said to have been the founder 
 of Babylon, Nineveh, etc. ; and the discoverer of fire. He reigned about 830 B. C. 
 although some carry him centuries beyond. 
 
 Here notice the construction — the verb agreeing with the object. 
 
72 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ I have such confidence in the truth of my own sighs, 
 
 That after death even, I shall still be a companion of the fair” 
 Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 s ^ s s y 
 
 ijC to. 
 
 S 
 
 “Prince Bahram will certainly be present at that place, 
 
 That the breeze may bring him perfume from the door of his beloved.” 
 Bahram Gur. 
 
 ' 9 9 '' 
 
 “ In the space of thirty years there will be stability, (during this time ) 
 there will not be a man — not even an ant to eat up the grain.” Makh- 
 zan Afghani. 
 
 The aorist or future indefinite tense of this auxiliary, as previously 
 stated, has but one form — the 3rd person. It is also used in forming 
 the doubtful past tenses of other verbs, as will be seen from the different 
 conjugations. 
 
 v. 
 
 Aorist or Future Indefinite. 
 
 or he, she, it, may be. 
 
 P. 
 
 they may be. 
 
 Example. 
 
 “ As long as I may have hands, or as long as I may be possessed of 
 strength, 
 
 I will devote my life and existence to my beloved.” Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 73 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 j]joau>\ Conditional or Optative Tense. 
 
 S. 
 
 s> 
 
 to or (jpj xj I were. 
 
 . 
 
 iSj to or isn, L£5 to thou wert. 
 
 t # " 
 
 Xj to or LfJ tie, it, were. 
 
 xj to or is\y {s) &*■&> she. it, were. 
 
 — ♦♦ 
 
 P. 
 
 9 9 9 
 
 5) or Lf lj, CfJ - )y° we were. 
 
 A A 
 
 to or ?/oz« were. 
 
 ■M- or they were. 
 
 TP ^ ^ 
 
 1 • } to orjj to - jx& they were. 
 
 This tense implies continuity, and with a conditional conjunction or 
 
 adverb of wishing, expressed or understood is used as the conditional or 
 
 optative, which is its most general form. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 gyO 0 Xjij dS Xj C-jbjJ o £*> 
 
 - - — . - 
 
 <w x ^>y o (^$yb 
 
 “ The utility of the ocean would he great, were there no fear of the 
 waves. 
 
 The intimacy of the rose would he considerable were there no appre- 
 hension of the thorn.” Gulistan. 
 
 It is also frequently used after interjections as in the following 
 couplet. 
 
 + * . . , ^ 
 to \j 
 
 obi * f * ** ^ b " s-^3 ^ 
 
 L 
 
7 4 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ Alas ! that there were no such thing in the world as anxiety on 
 account of absence — 
 
 That the heart were not overwhelmed in the ocean of separation.” 
 Khushhal Khan Khattak. 
 
 The following is an example of the simple past tense with the prefixed 
 particle used in a hypothetical sense,* as referred to at page 70. 
 
 s S 
 
 Jjji ^ ^ J *t x> 
 
 “ Oh joy of thy father’s heart ! if thou wert also asleep , it would be 
 far better , than that thou hast commenced searching after the defects of 
 others” Translation of the Gulistan. 
 
 There is no imperative mood of this auxiliary, and that of 
 to remain , etc. is used for it. 
 
 142. The following as well as the preceding verb, is also used abso- 
 lutely to denote mere existence. It is like all auxiliary verbs in this 
 
 language — ^£3^ or imperfect: its conjugation is as follows. 
 
 ^ ✓ ✓ 
 
 Infinitive to be, exist , continue , etc. 
 
 I Noun of Fitness. 
 
 S ' ' S ' 
 
 Sing, and Plu. ^ or I 0 of, or for being, existing, etc. 
 
 lj.fi li ^.<*>1 Active Participle. 
 
 , S -r 9 S S,S 
 
 Sing. M. or F. or 
 
 <i '‘s'' ' 
 
 Plu. M. and F. or 
 
 * This should not be confounded with the 1st Future, which see 
 
PtJSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 70 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 S. 
 
 P. 
 
 ^Mijl xj I exist. 
 
 <U thou existeth. 
 
 or )y *we exist. 
 
 A „ 
 
 ^*»b or ye or you exist. 
 
 «• ✓ 
 
 they exist. 
 
 *» H 
 
 Example. 
 
 i x s . h ' ' ' 
 
 0 0 -"-> j 
 
 ^ ^ .* 1 •* 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 “ To this degree am I pleased with the pain and grief inflicted on me 
 by my beloved, 
 
 Like as the Salamander existeth contented in the red fire.” Abd- 
 ul- Hamid. 
 
 The following tense is mostly used in conversation with a conjunc- 
 tion, as the Conditional or Optative tense. It implies continuity, and 
 may also be understood as the simple present. 
 
 Conditional or Optative. 
 
 S. 
 
 P. 
 
 1 Xj were I existing. were we existing. 
 
 i M A \‘ 'r 
 
 ** wert thou „ were you existing. 
 
 were he, or it ,, were they ,, (M.) 
 
 &k$> were she „ or jkb were they „ (F.) 
 
 Example; — *3,2^ Lf^' 0 ^ lJ^ ^ “ Were I remain- 
 
 ing (or going to remain) here, I would repair this house.” 
 
 * It will not be necessary to give more than one form of Pronouns in future. 
 
 L 2 
 
76 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 jl&L* Future Tense. 
 
 S. 
 
 s '9 
 
 p*»y\ dy or p#»j\ j dy Zj I will exist. 
 
 9 
 
 dy or J dy dJ thou wilt exist. 
 
 9 t ' 
 
 dy or j dy dx& he, she, it will exist . 
 
 P. 
 
 y*j^ dy or ) dy Jj* we will exist. 
 
 a 9 9 .* 
 
 ^»)\ dy or 1 } dy ^»b you will exist. 
 
 9 
 
 d»> or dy they will exist. 
 
 •v j* 
 
 Example. 
 
 s' t '• S'. 
 
 dJii' e d^. j?o o i*[y> 
 
 ^y U !o dy 
 
 “ Since the goblet of wine has become the comforter of the whole 
 world , 
 
 How long shall I continue in this distress and sorrow ?” Abd-ur- 
 Rahman. 
 
 Subjunctive or Aorist Tense. 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 9 
 
 
 f-yl 
 
 or 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 or 
 
 
 9 
 
 J* 
 
 cJ 
 
 
 or 
 
 
 9 
 
 b 
 
 s 
 
 dk& 
 
 S. 
 
 I may exist, 
 thou mayest exist. 
 
 he, she, it may exist. 
 
 P. 
 
 V**» * 
 
 9 9 9 
 
 or y$ 9 J>y we may exist. 
 
 a 9 9 .* 
 
 or f H ou ma y exist, 
 
 9 9 
 
 or they may exist. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 77 
 
 Example. 
 
 ^ I- A , " , ^ 9 
 
 V- kJ*)'' (_r ij j 4 (_r iJ J* A v eU^J ,0 
 
 “ Existence dependeth on the drawing of a breath : 
 
 Therefore you should be repentant on each respiration ” Abd-ul- 
 Hamid. 
 
 j/o| Precative or 1st Future Tense . 
 
 S. 
 
 or y ij I shall exist. 
 
 9 .. 
 
 or y thou shall exist. 
 
 ♦♦ *4 
 
 1 O or ^*»jl ^ 0 he, she, it shall exist. 
 
 « «♦, x 
 
 P. 
 
 9 9 9 
 
 or j*»y\ y )y*> we shall exist . 
 
 A ^ 9 I* 
 
 ^-* 5 1 or ^ jj*»U z/om 
 
 ♦♦ «« 
 
 J or ^*j\y 0 they shall exist. 
 
 
 ft 
 
 " , £ H 
 
 o 1 \jS 
 
 ^j“9 
 
 1 % 
 
 Example. 
 
 9 ' 9 " 
 
 (^o <UA 
 
 " m 9 
 0 
 
 Jj 
 
 V r u i 
 
 v 
 
 ♦* * 
 
 “ When the priest reads with a solemn voice , the congregation being 
 silent, should remain standing. To listen to the reading of the priest 
 is necessary and correct .” Fawa/id-ush Sharfsea. 
 
 S. 
 
 y°\ Imperative Mood. 
 
 P. 
 
 9 t 
 
 <0 exist thou. exist you. 
 
 " 9 
 
 0 <UJ> let, him, her, it exist. ^ let them exist . 
 
78 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Example. 
 
 * _ ✓ / ✓ / ^ 
 
 <u>j\ dj ji) L£ $ ^s** af 
 
 *v ✓ - 
 
 “ If thy mistress treateth thee with asperity , Ahmed ! Be thou reso- 
 lute in adversity and affliction” ' Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 s s A 
 
 The verbs and t_J^ used informing the Passive voice, are con- 
 jugated as follow. The first is or imperfect, and has but three 
 
 tenses. 
 
 To be or become. 
 
 The Noun of Fitness ^ or o of or for being or becoming . 
 
 jU. Present Tense. 
 
 S. 
 
 or rS* I become, 
 or thou becometh. 
 
 or he, she , it becomes. 
 
 * s 
 
 p. 
 
 jxrr 0 , ^ we become. 
 
 or you become, 
 
 or {sj'S they become. 
 
 ExAMPLi 
 
 Ujj jj\ jb 
 
 P, 9 
 
 v • 
 
 r/ 
 
 ■A »>’ y 
 
 
 eXJ 
 
 <h*J 
 
 “ A pleasant interview is like rain, by it I become refreshed : 
 But separation like fire overtakes me.” Futteh Khan, Mirza. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 79 
 
 I Imperfect Tense. 
 
 S. 
 
 M. 
 
 p. 
 
 & 
 
 a; 
 
 or 
 
 «» 
 
 <w 
 
 or 
 
 
 a; 
 
 or 
 
 r 
 
 aj 
 
 or 
 
 
 or 
 
 w 
 
 <u 
 
 or 
 
 
 she was becoming. 
 
 P. 
 
 V or Lf^ you were becoming. 
 
 M. <u or lW they were becoming. 
 
 p 
 
 ^ f <0 or 
 
 E. 
 
 they were becoming. 
 
 9 » 
 
 j ^ 0 r j J 
 
 Examples. 
 
 dJ c> <W ^4-w,3 aj £,*$ ^<Ury Lp^“ 
 
 (( In every place there were different kinds of food being cooked , 
 
 For the guests of Sardas were a numerous crowd.” Bahrain Gur. 
 
 5 i)l» 
 
 “After that time, every Jirgah* that was in the habit of meeting, 
 Durkhani used to say to Narmai, bring me news from it.” Story of 
 Adam Khan and Durkhani. 
 
 * An assembly of the heads of the different uluses or divisions of tribes amongst the 
 Afghans, particularly the Yusufzoes. 
 
80 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 2nd Future Tense. 
 S. 
 
 or to I will become, 
 
 to or L fj'?!*' to d) thou wilt become. 
 
 \jf$ d) or L 2 J.S dj he, she , it, will become. 
 
 P. 
 
 di or d: we will become. 
 
 XS' <iu or to ^*>11 you will become. 
 
 A 
 
 or dJ jkst they will become. 
 
 Example. 
 
 . . . . S 9 ' .1 A ' P " 
 
 di '**F“ IcS^ dja dJ O 
 
 d 3 <&*> Jt3 
 
 “ The jewel of excellence he acquired from the good God. Such never 
 before fell to the lot of any one, and will never become so.”‘ Makhzan 
 Afghani. 
 
 143. The conjugation of the following verb, as well as which 
 
 precedes it, imports transition from one state to another, whilst the 
 
 auxiliary, to be, which is also a substantive verb, generally denotes mere 
 existence. 
 
 ✓ f s A 
 
 Infinitive (j To be or become. Mas. and Fern. 
 
 U The Noun of Fitness. 
 
 A f y A y 
 
 )jr d 0 of or for, being or becoming. 
 
 JAi Active Participle. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 81 
 
 M - or 1 
 
 • i 
 
 the becomer. 
 
 
 M . and F. or the hecomer s. 
 
 S’ s 
 
 P k ' 
 
 ^»m)| Passive Participle. 
 
 s 
 
 S. 
 
 M. and F. or l)j*" or ** become . 
 
 M. and F. or become. 
 
 (Jlsw Present Tense. 
 
 S. 
 
 «& I become. 
 
 & thou becometh. 
 
 P. 
 
 ih we become. 
 
 L* 
 
 L2 
 
 he, she, it becomes. 
 
 A 
 
 am you become, 
 they become . 
 
 
 Example. 
 
 S p s s yr ^ ^ 
 
 l/ j j ry ^ kS " * a > yy-y 
 
 “ Notwithstanding I endeavour to calm my heart it is not soothed ; 
 Spontaneously I become melted like wax before the fire.” Abd- 
 Rahman. 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 S. 
 
 <^A xA + 
 
 pjym or & or I was becoming, 
 or KSJ* &} or Lsp* thou wast becoming. 
 
 M 
 
 jS 
 
 ur- 
 
82 
 
 A GRAMMAR OR THE 
 
 or xJj ju or <££& 
 
 U^am or £^au &) 07 ' <£*& 
 
 he or it, was becoming, 
 she teas becoming. 
 
 P. 
 
 *' A >> A 
 
 yj** °r y or we were becoming. 
 
 A x A A A A A 
 
 o?’ or {SJ** V ou were becoming. 
 
 'A s A / 
 
 Jr or or ^ they (M.) w/ere becoming. 
 
 ' A 
 
 or & or they (P.) were becoming. 
 
 Example. 
 
 »y J *? 
 
 ^JU JU 8*1 Lfi3 ^ JU U— <J 
 
 s s ' “™ 9 ** 9 * 9 
 
 JU <&au 4J cS^» ^JAA So J/ l=j j; j)t>C 
 
 ' " ' g *> 
 
 ✓ / 7 
 
 J/ ^ 05 ^yjr ;<*» 
 
 “ When any one of the companions of the Prophet used to omit to be 
 present with the congregation for divine worship , the people condoled 
 with him for a period of seven days ; and if he used to fail to be present 
 at the first Takb'ir ( the commencement of the service ) the people condoled 
 with him for three days.” Fawa’id-ush-SharrPsea. 
 
 ^Ik-o L p as t Tense. 
 S. 
 
 ✓ y 
 
 fir 
 
 or 
 
 r* ' 
 
 rr ■? ' 
 
 ✓ 
 
 rr 
 
 >• ^ 
 
 • ^ / became. 
 
 Jr 
 
 or 
 
 r, ' 
 
 Jr o • 
 «* 
 
 
 2 
 
 - 4,-Ci ^ thou becamest. 
 
 Jr 
 
 or 
 
 ^ O’ 
 
 JO"0 • 
 
 ciXo 
 
 2 
 
 j he or it became. 
 
 X A 
 
 or 
 
 
 $^AM 
 
 - *j,m j she became . 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 83 
 
 P. 
 
 9 , 9.' % 9 9 f 9 9 
 
 y^** or yj"* } " Jy* 1 “ } we became . 
 
 or j " LfJ*" J V ou became . 
 
 ' 9 9 ' * . 9 
 
 dj"* or ^ j they (M\) became 
 
 ' ' . 9 . . * 
 
 dy" or df* J ~ _•<** - y> j they (F.) became. 
 
 S * < ' 
 
 Examples. 
 
 laA ^ ^ ^ '■*** ^ dy**' 0 
 
 — >1^ O . jb 
 
 ci^W 
 
 V 
 
 ir 
 
 cs- ^ b 
 
 “ Since I became dedicated to thy mole and ringlets, my employment 
 with the book became entirely relinquished” Abd-ul-Harmd. 
 
 . - \ * 6 I • " 9 9 ^ % ' 
 
 b ^y* } P b]P ^.csw P 
 
 9 
 
 * * y t s ' ^ ... r" * ' . ^ 
 
 ** Lfj^ *pj U>y \j?y &' <1.^ lP 
 
 “ Secondly : — -know thou that the Almighty is all-wise, and knoweth all 
 things that have happened or will happen. He is cognizant of every jot 
 and tittle, every atom and iota, for he learneth nothing new, and he 
 forgetteth nothing ” Makhzan Afghani. 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 
 S. 
 
 I have become . 
 
 V £ 
 
 thou hast become. 
 
 ( F. ) 8P or L£P LSJ** be, she, it has become. 
 
 ✓ 
 
 P. 
 
 9 
 
 jt Lgr 
 
 we have become. 
 
 l £ you have become. 
 
 L £p they have become . 
 
 ✓ + 
 m 2 
 
81 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Examples. 
 
 <>/ȣ a)o 1<JL pc. ^.J 
 
 “ ?E% has the sorrow of my heart become thus ? 
 
 Life passeth away like the wind, alas ! alas f Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 
 £j 
 
 cr- J !>i 0^ 0 
 
 
 L . j [ . . ■ £/0 (£^j 8^1 ^ 
 
 9 - 
 
 Uf-r ” 9' *S 
 
 “ The Prophet said thus unto him, One good work performed at 
 Haram* has been accounted equal to seven hundred thousand performed 
 at any other place.” Fawa^id-iish-ShanPsea. 
 
 .**c L° Pluperfect Tense. 
 
 S. 
 
 s> ' 
 
 Lfj*" I had become. 
 
 >» 
 
 thou hadst become. 
 
 ♦♦ ♦♦ ^ 
 
 ' ' s * 
 
 ( F. ) {sy* or he, she, it had become. 
 
 P. 
 
 9 ' 
 
 jy {£y*» we had become. 
 
 A * 
 
 V ou had become. 
 
 i» ♦♦ ' 
 
 -f 9 ~ ^ 
 
 ( F. ) y or jy they had become. 
 
 * * / 
 
 Example. 
 
 s 
 
 “ In retirement my love had become pleased with me, 
 
 “ But my heart palpitates through fear of the hard-hearted guardian.” 
 Ahmed Shall, Abdali. 
 
 * Haram, the sacred plain of Mecca, with the sanctuary. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 85 
 
 1,9/ Future Tense. 
 
 S. 
 
 f p ' 
 
 l+»> j or 
 * 9 
 
 ^ or thou shouldst become. 
 
 I should become. 
 
 / * 
 
 '*» 5 <■* or 0 ska he, she, it should become. 
 
 > 
 
 P. 
 
 
 ^ or we should become. 
 
 A >> A 
 
 ^5 or you should become. 
 
 i. 9 " \ 9 
 
 ) O or they should become . 
 
 Example. 
 
 ^ 1^ &***> Uw>Xaa*» ^ j**2‘*'° & 
 
 “ Should I be raised to the gibbet like Mansur, or be stoned to death; 
 It is not this, that should make me forswear thy love and affection .” 
 
 Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 9 
 
 ^J,a£aw> 2 nd Future Tense. 
 
 S. 
 
 9 . 9 
 
 j si tj or j I will become. 
 
 P 9 
 
 } Ai Ai or thou wilt become. 
 
 *♦ 
 
 p ' J p 
 
 j Ai ska or A j he, she, it /will become. 
 
 p , p 
 
 P. 
 
 9 P 
 
 j Si kf-s/o or Ai j we will become. 
 
 a p p „ A p 
 
 or Ai j you will become . 
 
 9 # P 
 
 j Si jka or Si j they will become. 
 
86 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Examples. 
 
 
 .U 
 
 
 k'a) 
 
 A 
 
 cU. 
 
 ✓ 
 
 vfXJ Lf U5 aj 
 
 ^ • *» 
 
 “ Wherefore doth the possessor of beauty boast of good looks ? 
 
 THEY will become celebrated of their own accord like the new moon .” 
 Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 :Ui> 
 
 ^ ^ <V .<V 
 
 ^ jj m rr h w 4* ^ ^ 
 
 - 
 
 “ No man will become satiated without contentment , 
 
 Even though his house be full of silver and gold” Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 9 
 
 Subjunctive or Aorist Tense. 
 
 * v 
 
 S. 
 
 ' ' 9 
 
 pw or i+Z> j I may shall, will , etc. become. 
 
 . 9 
 
 ^s* or j thou mayest, etc. become. 
 
 M *♦ 
 
 . 9 ' 
 
 or ) a*& he, she, it may, etc. become. 
 
 P. 
 
 9 . 9 
 
 yt> or yl> j we may shall, will, etc. become. 
 
 A A f 
 
 or ) you may, etc. become. 
 
 9 * 9 
 
 or j they may, etc. become. 
 
 *» •* 
 
 Examples. 
 
 d) bjj o Ui.jk'o O aT ^3 j a£ \j ^ 4 * j> bj *U jijJ 
 
 9 9 
 
 .\L* 
 
 . . . 9 ' 9 
 
 fjS JJ a; sy y\d&\j uybjA j&S |o j oy 
 
 *v 
 
 “ A cen'tain king had a difficult matter to perform. He said, if this 
 should turn out according to my wishes, I will give so many dirhams 
 to devotees and holy men.” 
 
 Translation of the Gulistan. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 87 
 
 s^J d>| j 0 
 
 •V ' * 
 
 <f The offspring of wolves will still be wolves, 
 
 Even though they may be grand and powerful in the sight of men” 
 Translation of the Gulistan. 
 
 Conditional or Optative Tense . 
 
 P. 
 
 s> 
 
 <*f If I became . ^ If we became . 
 
 <*■> If thou became . If you became. 
 
 <tx& df If he, she, it, became. dS If they became. 
 
 Example. 
 
 <& fj <*; (^plc>A. o Lfl 
 
 JAO <*j k ‘H J l t d ^ 
 
 “ JVb one, oh Rahman ! would take the name of the Almighty, 
 
 If his works became accomplished by either father or brother.” 
 Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 <L>fcyw Past Conditional Tense* 
 
 S. 
 
 M. and F. ° r L $y» *J ^ If I had become. 
 
 LSJ y» or LS}*” di dS If thou hadst become. 
 
 {£} yi> or d£ If he, she, it had become. 
 
 s 
 
 * This tense with a conditional conjunction or adverb of wishing, is similar in 
 meaning to that which follows. It has also a continuative sense as in Persian, and 
 also a potential meaning as in the example given here. 
 
88 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 P. 
 
 M. and F. L fj ^ If we had become. 
 
 ' s r r 
 
 L Sj*» <v If you had become. 
 
 9 
 
 df tf they had become . 
 
 Example. 
 
 p“ ^ *? >~fj ** J ; 1 
 
 <D 4.' j& <L*sO |j )J»}\ 
 
 i ) 
 
 “ Alas that I had not become enamoured when I fell in love ! 
 
 Now it is before me ; but whatever has happened was not of my own 
 free will.” Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 The Past Future Tense.* 
 
 S. 
 
 j <D 
 
 & 
 
 M I shall or will have become. 
 
 V 
 
 d ) thou shalt or wilt have become. 
 
 Lfj <p d*& he, she, it, shall or will have become. 
 
 P. 
 
 9 ' 
 
 we s h a U or w% tl have become. 
 
 A S 
 
 V ou shall or will have become. 
 
 «* ^ 
 
 ' . 9 
 
 di L£j“> y* they shall or ivill have become. 
 Examples. 
 
 I dj dX& o L- -. /i U ufc- 
 
 
 ,/sMi 0 ^ 
 
 
 * Also called the Doubtful Past Tense. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 89 
 
 u Perhaps my cleverness may have been the cause of his aversion 
 since the swiftness of the swift horse becometh the cause of his fatigue 
 1 iE’yar Danish. 
 
 The & of this tense is sometimes omitted as in the following example 
 
 SjA^ib ^ 2 **“ “* I 
 
 s 
 
 “ The lustre and polish of the false muhar may doubtless continue , 
 
 Until the glance of the money-changer shall not have fallen on it” 
 Abd-ur- Rahman. 
 
 j*\ Imperative Mood . 
 
 S. 
 
 9 
 
 d£> or <*•*> p become thou , 
 
 9 
 
 c> or } <3 let him , her, it become, 
 
 p. 
 
 A A 9 
 
 or } become you, 
 
 — ** 
 
 9 
 
 <3 or let them become. 
 
 Example. 
 
 j _j i_i)j o jb o Ksff - \/j Jfip & 
 
 "s' / S 
 
 “ In the blackest darkness if thou desirest light, 
 
 Become a spectator of the curls and countenance of the beloved ” 
 
 Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 9 
 
 The prefixed } of this mood, like the ^ °f the Persian imperative 
 is often omitted as redundant, as in the example above given, 
 
 N 
 
90 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ^ / s y S 
 
 Transitive and Intransitive Verbs, j 
 
 The Infinitive (masdarj. 
 
 x y 
 
 144. All infinitives in the Pushto language end in or {Jjj : 
 
 t° churn, to mix, to hear , to fill, 
 
 * A „ 
 
 Jjy to make hot, etc. 
 
 Verbs which merely take (J in forming the infinitive, are both tran- 
 sitive and intransitive; those which take J* are without exception 
 
 9 
 
 intransitives, though not very numerous ; and those ending in (U are 
 all transitives. 
 
 The infinitive of verbs is also used as thejOm* (hdsil-i-masdar) 
 
 or verbal noun, as in the following extracts. 
 
 ^ &J. uy/ jt Jf iiXJ 
 
 “ Like the rose, as much as thou concealest it, so much its perfume 
 increaseth : 
 
 In the same manner, the anguish of love from endurance, hecometh 
 overpov’ering.” Abd-ul- Hamid, 
 
 * The of some verbs are radical letters, and therefore should not be confound- 
 
 ^ x r' 
 
 ed with the of some intransitives; as for example I to hear, in which 
 
 the only is the sign of the infinitive, and its past tense, or root of the 
 
 " 9 9 
 
 £*£&) j is the past tense, w 
 
 ^ . s m . 
 
 erb. Again in to ask, in which * is the past tense, whilst 
 
 the sign of the infinitive in to Jill, is and <&£> the past tense. 
 
 Again in to break, or become broken, the past tense is dJl> CtjL®. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 91 
 
 s p s K s * s'* ^ / 
 
 <0 Lf^ ** * ■& j jl ijfejj **** ^ vJ*i? *J 
 
 (C This speech was exceedingly acceptable to the king , and that night 
 he came to his house. 3 ’ Gulistan. 
 
 s's 9 ' ' 
 
 j) jj <*J L> <*£. jb (J h X) l!^ 
 
 “In the first place , what use is it to pain the heart with love? 
 
 Again , of what advantage is it to turn BACK/rom it at a slight ob- 
 stacle ? Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 145. There are in the Pushto language no less than thirty-seven 
 classes of verbs, the whole of which vary in some way or other in the 
 formation of the different inflexions.* 
 
 Of this number thirteen are intransitive, and twenty-five transitive. 
 
 Five of the thirteen classes of intransitives are imperfect ; and of the 
 transitives nineteen classes contain perfect and imperfect verbs ; and the 
 remaining classes are entirely imperfect. 
 
 Intransitives. 
 
 Class 1st. 
 
 146. Changes the last radical letter after dropping the of the infi- 
 nitive for another letter in the present tenses and the imperative mood, 
 
 but retains it in the past tenses and the past participle ; as 
 to know ; | to fly ; to be entrapped ; to fall. 
 
 * There appear to be two eras, if I may so term it, in the Pushto language. The 
 first of words which are evidently pure Afghanian, and probably those used by the 
 Afghanah, when they first settled in their present country. The second, when Arabic, 
 
 Persian, and Sanscrit became engrafted on the original stock. This is particularly 
 
 apparent with regard to the conjugations of the verbs. 
 
 N 2 
 
92 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. Past. 
 
 
 
 
 
 S' 
 
 ' $ 
 
 V — 
 
 -5 
 
 S 
 
 £ 
 
 
 c^jji 
 
 ^b 
 
 
 , IaO 
 
 V-f * 
 
 
 
 
 
 " A 
 
 
 
 
 ' A i 
 
 c>iy 
 
 s a . 9 
 
 *i>b 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 Class 2nd. 
 
 147. Rejects the two last radical letters in the present and future 
 tenses and the imperative mood, and retains them in the past tenses and 
 past participle ; as to run, to leak or drop. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Aorist. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Past. 
 
 
 L 
 
 Jbs 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 A | A 
 
 A | A * 
 
 9 
 
 A | A 
 
 JU.U. j 
 
 till! 
 
 X A I A ^ 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 Class 3rd. 
 
 148. Rejects the sign of the infinitive and the three last radical 
 letters in the present and future tenses and imperative, but retains them 
 
 in the past tenses and past participle ; as to sit. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 Class kth. 
 
 149. Drops the last radical letter and loses the long vowel by elision, 
 in the present, future, and imperative, and retains it in the past ; as 
 
 to split. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 93 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. Past. Past Part. 
 
 ^ 9 
 
 
 
 Class 5th. 
 
 150. Changes the last radical letter for two others in the presen t, 
 future, and imperative, similar to Class 19 of transitives ; and merely 
 
 s s 
 
 rejects the <J of the infinitive for the past as to ascend. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. Past. Past Part. 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Class 6th. 
 
 151. Merely rejects the of the infinitive throughout, without 
 altering the letters ; as to die* The past participle is shortened. 
 In the Aorist and imperative the^ of this verb is changed toj. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Aorist. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 - 1 
 
 
 9 
 
 
 y 
 
 " 9 
 
 I - 
 
 Jr I 
 
 
 
 I yj 
 
 Class 7th. 
 
 r 
 
 1 
 
 1 r 
 
 152. The verbs of this class take a letter after the last radical letter 
 in the present, future, and imperative, and reject both of them in the 
 past; as Jr to burn. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Aorist. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Imperfect. Past. 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 y 
 
 
 y 
 
 9 1 S 9 
 
 j 9 
 
 i 
 
 Jj-> 
 
 i^ir 
 
 
 
 1 dw 2 
 
 
 * This, as well as many other verbs, often retains the of the infinitive in all the 
 inflexions, merely affixing, inserting, or prefixing the necessary pronouns and particles 
 to form the various tenses. The past participle may be considered an adjective. 
 
94 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Class 8th. 
 
 153. The verbs of this and the following classes of the intransitives 
 are imperfect. They change the last radical letter for another, like 
 Class 1st, in the present tense, and retain it in the imperfect and the 
 past. The auxiliary to become , is required in forming the other 
 tenses of the verb with which the shortened past participle is used ; as 
 to break , to remain , &c. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. 
 
 d<v‘U | J$lo 
 
 Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. 
 
 d>U> 
 
 cLdLo | Lo 
 
 Past. 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 cuU 
 
 Class 9th. 
 
 154. The infinitive or to run , which is a specimen 
 
 of this class of verbs, has no present, aorist, future, or imperfect tense ; 
 but the past tense and past participle are formed in the same manner as 
 those of other verbs, by merely rejecting the of the infinitive, and 
 affixing and prefixing the different pronouns and particles. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. Past. Past Part. 
 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 V 9 
 
 
 
 
 Class 10th. 
 
 ' 9 
 
 155. This class, of which to go is an example, is similar to 
 
 Class 6th, as far as it goes ; but it is just the reverse of the preceding, 
 having a present, future, and imperative, but no past tenses or past par- 
 ticiple. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. Past. Past Part. 
 
 r 9 
 
 
 *5 
 
 9 9 
 
 
 9 9 
 
 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 95 
 
 Class llth. 
 
 156. tj^ to go or depart, is another of the imperfect verbs. It has 
 merely an infinitive mood, and a past tense. By using the aorist and 
 imperfect of the auxiliary to become with its past tense, the aorist - 
 
 and imperative are formed. The other tenses are wanting. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. Past. Past Part. 
 
 $ 
 
 Class 12th. 
 
 15 7. to go, is the only verb of this class, and has only an infini- 
 
 tive, and an imperfect tense, formed by rejecting the J of the infinitive ; 
 as , or by rejecting the radical J as The pronouns \), and^j 
 
 are also used with it. It has a regular past participle. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. Past. Past Part. 
 
 Class 13 th. 
 
 158. to come, the only verb of this class, is similar to the pre- 
 
 ceding. The pure infinitive is doubtless to which the pronouns 
 referred to in the former class have been added, but without them it 
 conveys no meaning. It differs from the preceding in as much as it 
 adds \j to the imperfect of (JJ*) to form its own imperfect tense, and has 
 a regular past. In other respects it is similar. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. Past. Past Part. 
 
 The whole of these imperfect verbs use the tenses of others to supply 
 the want of their own, as will be seen from the conjugations. The latter 
 have a dash over them. 
 
96 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Transitive Verbs. 
 
 Class ls£. 
 
 159. The verbs of this class are the most numerous in the language. 
 
 They reject the of the infinitive for the present, future, and impera- 
 tive, and lengthen the first vowel from ( ) to I for the past tenses. 
 
 The past participle is regular ; as to bind, to strike , 
 
 to turn. 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 H 
 
 Class 2nd. 
 
 160. The verbs of this class are also very numerous, but are very 
 irregular. In forming the present tense and imperative mood they 
 reject the <J of the infinitive, and sometimes form the latter by affixing 
 the imperative of to do to the shortened past participle. The 
 aorist, future, and past tenses are alone formed by the aid of the short- 
 ened past participle prefixed to the same tenses of to do, respec- 
 
 y 
 
 tively. The middle vowel of the root is lengthened from ( ) to I for 
 
 the imperfect tense ; as to bury. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. Past. Past Part. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Aorist. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Past. 
 
 o 
 
 yy 
 
 y 
 
 • 'm? 
 
 y 
 
 9 
 
 >* 
 
 )lh 
 
 
 
 •v 
 
 j 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i A 
 
 r + i y y 
 
 Class 3rd. 
 
 161. Changes the two last radical letters of the root for two others 
 in the present, future, and imperative ; as for^l in to 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 97 
 
 desire ; for in | to clothe ; for in to 
 
 clip ; y^ for or 6-^ in to abandon, etc. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. Past. Past Part. 
 
 esbyi 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 {^sjayC. 
 
 
 
 
 
 *&y'z\j 
 
 
 <lL*M)yc}y 
 
 
 is 2 ^^ 
 
 ^ 9 
 
 y 
 
 
 C^^Sly 
 
 Class 4 th. 
 
 162. The verbs of this class, after dropping the (J of the infinitive, 
 reject the two last radical letters for another letter, in the present, 
 future, and imperative ; as cV for ^ in to find ; for (J in 
 
 to read, and to seize; and retain them in the past 
 
 tenses. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Aorist. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 . " • 9 
 
 9 
 
 9 9 
 
 1 9 9 
 
 . 9 
 
 . 9 9 
 
 r . 9 
 
 J&j-O 
 
 l rr 
 •» x 
 
 
 j i y c j 
 
 C»iy* 
 
 
 
 J z$ 
 
 J? 
 
 
 $ z 
 
 
 
 Jc*.) 
 
 «♦ 
 
 Class 5th. 
 
 9 
 
 163. These verbs do not take the prefixed y and form all the tenses 
 and the imperative by the mere rejection of the of the infinitive, the 
 present tenses taking the affixed, and the past the prefixed pronouns ; as 
 
 jy* to lose at play. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. 
 
 Past. 
 
 M 
 
 hi 
 
 Past Part. 
 I 
 
 Class Q>th. 
 
 164. Lengthens the first vowel from ( 
 
 j j <*b j Ailur^l j ^lLl> 
 
 ■) into I in all the inflexions 
 
 except the past participle ; as ub to speak. 
 
 o 
 
98 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. Past. Past Part. 
 
 JUJj 
 
 A>! 
 
 Class 7 th. 
 
 165. Lengthens the first syllable in all the inflexions in the same 
 
 manner as the preceding, but with this exception, that it changes ( ) 
 
 into ^ for the present and future tenses and the imperative mood, and 
 
 ( ) into I for the past ; as to call . 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 
 <Jy 
 
 
 db dtJb 
 
 JUb 
 
 Class 8th. 
 
 166. After dropping the (J of the infinitive, changes the last radical 
 letter for another in the present, future, and imperative ; as for ^ in 
 
 or to kill. The radical letter is retained in the past tenses, 
 
 and the first vowel lengthened from ( ) to I. 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. Past. 
 
 ^ O I ^ 
 
 
 ' 9 
 
 
 
 J)b j 
 
 J: 
 
 ’JJ 
 
 Class 9 th. 
 
 167. The verbs of this class are irregular as are all infinitives ending 
 
 9 
 
 in CL5 which reject the prefixed j the sign of the past tense. They 
 change the last radical letter for another in the present, future, and 
 
 / x 
 
 imperative ; as for £ in to unloose ; but retain it in the past. 
 
 9 
 
 By rejecting the prefixed ^ there is no difference between the past and 
 the imperfect in the mode of writing. See page 130 Para. 216. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. Past. Past Part. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 99 
 
 Class 10 th. 
 
 168. After dropping the sign of the infinitive, rejects the three last 
 letters of the root for another in the formation of the present, future, 
 
 and imperative, and retains them in the past tenses ; as, to dis - 
 
 * 
 
 charge. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. Past. Past Part. 
 
 9 9 
 
 J) J) ) 
 
 9 9 
 
 
 
 Class 11 th. 
 
 169. The verbs of this class reject the two last radical letters in the 
 present, and imperative, but retain them in the past and past partici- 
 
 / '> A ' r' 
 
 pie; as to ask ; to purchase ; to hear. 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 i J^y. 
 J&jjT 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Aorist. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Past. 
 
 ✓ 
 
 
 J&tf 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 " 9 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 if 
 
 J 
 
 A 
 
 "A 9 
 
 
 LfjJ 
 
 
 
 kA 
 
 
 Class 12 th. 
 
 170. Rejects the last radical letter of the root for the present, future, 
 and imperative, but retains it in the past. The middle vowel is also 
 
 lengthened from ( ) to I for the past tenses : the past participle is 
 
 ✓ ✓ 
 
 regular ; as to know. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. Past. Past Part. 
 
 d*s*i 
 
 J 
 
 * 
 
 Class 13 th. 
 
 
 171. Lengthens the first vowel from ( ) to I for the present, 
 
 future, and imperative, and uses the simple infinitive of the verb for all 
 
100 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 the inflexions of the imperfect tense, and also for the past, with the 
 
 p ' " 
 
 prefixed^ in all three persons, singular and plural ; as to laugh. 
 
 The past participle is regular. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. 
 
 
 Past. 
 
 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 Class 14 th. 
 
 172. The verbs of this class exchange the last radical letter for ano- 
 ther in the present, future, and imperative; as ^ into ) in to rub, 
 and retain it in the past. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. Past. Past Part. 
 
 
 
 
 Ur* 
 
 ' ' p 
 
 Ur*J 
 
 
 Class 15 th. 
 
 173. The verbs of this and the following classes are all imperfect. 
 
 The infinitive to place , is an example of this class. It has no 
 
 present, future, or imperative, but the imperfect tense is regularly 
 formed. It is generally used with the two following infinitives which 
 are of the same meaning and have no past tenses. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. Past. Past Part. 
 
 Class 1 6th. 
 
 174. iJj-r £ to place is a specimen of this class. It has but one 
 tense, which is used both for the imperfect and the past. i J'ibX 
 which again has no past tenses or past participle, is used with it to supply 
 the tenses which the former infinitive requires. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. Past. Past Part. 
 
 
 so 
 
 1 * 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
PUSIITO LANGUAGE. 
 
 101 
 
 Class 17 1 h. 
 
 175. to place, the example of this class, has no past tenses or 
 
 past participle, and as before mentioned, is used to supply the wants of 
 which has no present, future, or imperative. The present tense 
 is formed by merely rejecting the (J of the infinitive, and affixing the 
 necessary pronouns. The imperative is formed in the same manner, but 
 
 the past tenses are taken from an( ^ the P as t participle from 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. Past. Past Part. 
 
 Class 18 th. 
 
 (9 
 
 176. to take, or carry , which is an example, and about the only 
 
 one of this class, is merely imperfect as regards the aorist and future 
 tenses, which are taken from when required. The imperative is 
 
 formed by merely rejecting the J of the infinitive, and the present 
 by affixing the necessary pronouns. The past is formed by prefixing 
 y to the root, which is obtained probably from an infinitive nearly 
 
 obsolete. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 9 
 
 — 
 
 9 I 9 
 
 
 9 
 
 * 
 
 
 | P 
 
 py- 
 
 <ep 
 
 Class 19 th. 
 
 177. t° t a k e or bear away, and Jj-t to knead, are specimens of 
 
 this class. They change the last radical letter for two others in the 
 present tenses, and imperative mood, and retain it in the imperfect : the 
 other tenses are wanting, but the past participle is regular. 
 
102 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Aorist. Imperative. 
 
 Imperfect, 
 
 , Past. 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 dj*! 
 
 aw 
 
 
 <*jL> 
 
 M H * 
 
 9 
 
 6*aJ 
 
 
 9 
 
 Jit 
 
 
 ♦♦ ✓ 
 
 
 <U>| 
 
 
 0? 1 
 
 Class 20 th. 
 
 178. The infinitives of this class reject the J of the infinitive in the 
 present tenses and imperative mood, and lengthen the short vowel preced- 
 
 ing the last characteristic letter from ( ) to 1 for the past. The past 
 
 participle is regular. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. 
 
 Imperative. Imperfect. Past. Past Part. 
 
 
 ^y 
 
 
 & 
 
 JS 
 
 S^Aa 
 
 u ^ 
 
 Iaa.V. S 
 
 
 Class 21 st. 
 
 179. These infinitives are the most regular in the language, merely 
 
 rejecting the (J of the infinitive, and affixing the different pronouns for 
 
 the present tense, taking the root for the imperfect, and prefixing^ to it 
 ✓ ^ 
 
 for the past ; as to nourish , to graze . 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. 
 
 Past. 
 
 
 
 
 jJU 
 
 ju L 
 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 
 Class 22nd. 
 
 180. Rejects the last radical letter, and the sign of the infinitive for 
 the present and imperative, and retains it in the past. The past parti- 
 ciple is regular ; as * 0 swallow , jJa^a*> to undo , or unravel. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. 
 
 ✓ / / / ^ 
 
 jjjAi 
 
 
 Past. 
 
 9 
 
 Past Part. 
 * 
 
 Class 23rd. 
 
 181. This infinitive is used both as a transitive and intransitive. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 103 
 
 The sign of the infinitive is dropped and an extra letter taken for the 
 present tenses and imperative. The past tenses reject the extra letter, 
 and are regular in their formation. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. 
 
 Jr“ 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 cr 
 
 Past. 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 
 Class 24 th. 
 
 182. This infinitive is exceedingly irregular in the formation of the 
 different tenses. The most regular form of the present is obtained by 
 rejecting the <J and the last radical letter (of which there are but two) 
 for the masculine singular. It is also written and ^ for the third 
 person, but the radical letter lost in the third, is retained in the first and 
 second. The past tenses are also irregular and there is no change in 
 termination for gender. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Infinitive. Present. Aorist. Imperative. Imperfect. 
 
 9 
 
 j/ <-?/ j? > I 
 
 
 & 
 
 Past Part. 
 
 v/ 
 
 9 * 
 
 The Participles U^l 
 
 183. Pushto verbs admit of inflexion to form the participles, which 
 may be termed imperfect or present, and perfect or past, as they notify 
 whether the action of the verb be unfinished or complete. 
 
 These participles partake of the properties of the verb, the adjective, 
 and the noun ; and are intransitive or transitive according to the verbs 
 from which they are derived. 
 
 The participles of intransitive and transitive verbs are formed accord- 
 ing to the same rules. 
 
 184. The present or imperfect participle is formed from the infinitive 
 in six different ways. First by dropping the J of the infinitive, and 
 
104 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 * * 
 
 adding for the masculine, and <0 for the feminine ; as ^ t° * urn 
 
 away; turning away; to see , to behold; seeing ; 
 
 to run ; Uj running; to read ; or A****j} reading. 
 
 The following are examples. 
 
 ^ 4:^ ^ W 
 
 u u k ^ 
 
 - 
 
 <U | J C> Vjl/pL fif 
 
 &\jT *j)J Sl> JU \j 
 
 (j|j!3 t> juSjjh* <v 
 
 The lover is not to be separated in any way whatsoever from the be- 
 loved, 
 
 Whether his dwelling be sacked and pillaged, or filled with wealth and 
 goods period. 
 
 Though one would give him the sovereignty of this world and the next, 
 He would not accept it, for the beloved one is of great price : 
 Nevertheless he turneth not away, for turning back is the act of a 
 fool.” Kasim All, Afridi. 
 
 * p ^ y p 
 
 t Jp*)) *i J.y ^ y, tt r^ Ji 
 
 (l-G J J « ^ ^ 
 
 »• •» /- ‘ M 
 
 “Again repeating is incumbent on thee in both of the first genu- 
 flexions ; and shouldest thou repeat in the last, and neglect the first, thou 
 art not devoid of sin.” Makhzan Afghani. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 105 
 
 185. The second form is obtained by dropping the (J of the infinitive 
 and replacing it with ( ) or both for the masculine and <1 femi- 
 nine ; as to sit, o«*>b or sitting ; to wash, or 
 
 washing. 
 
 The following are examples. 
 
 ^ (jJ *> f csr* aJ if 
 
 * **S " ** 
 
 alJlj ^ <*11 aj ^ 
 
 “ Whoever hecometh present in a place of worship, for each footstep 
 both in coming and in going, twelve good actions will be written ” 
 Fawaid-ush- S h arrf sea. 
 
 ,9 9 ' 
 
 ■9 9 
 
 y y a) fjf) * tf ^ H ^ 
 
 . w A s ^ l 
 
 <**£> 0 <*Jj 
 
 “First washing the face from the top of the forehead as far down as 
 the bottom of the chin, is a precept in ablution; also washing that clear 
 space which is between the ears and the cheek, is a duty . Fawa’id-ush- 
 Sharrfaea. 
 
 ■" 9 ' 
 
 <sX)b 10 H d+ lljj* 
 
 “ Tenth knowing Muhammad is a divine command, in this manner, 
 that he is the Prophet of God, on whom we. have placed our faith.” 
 Fawa'id-ush-Sharri’sea. 
 
106 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ Thy mode of sitting, oh sweetheart , is like the perching of the 
 falcon on the mountain top” Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 186 . To form the third class, it is necessary to insert an I before the 
 final consonant of the root, which in this class is generally CU to which 
 
 ( ) or is affixed for the masculine and the feminine ; as, 
 
 to fly, <£\y\\ flying ; to change or turn round, changing 
 
 or turning round ; Jb to come out, coming out . 
 
 Examples. 
 
 9 9 
 
 “ Behold ! the fly and the bee are of one species, but their mode of 
 plying is different, for the fly will fly to filthiness and impurity, whilst 
 many seekers are satiated with the honey of the bee.” Makhzan Afghani. 
 
 ^ ^-<2 A. j 
 
 “ Let Khizr* become the gatekeeper of those gates, 
 
 Through which thy coming in and going out may be” f Abd-ul- 
 Hamid. 
 
 * •* ^ 
 
 “ My changing from thy love and affection is false indeed : 
 
 Why should not my body become dust on this road?” Abd-ur- 
 Raliman. 
 
 * The name of a prophet who according to oriental tradition, was Wuzir to Kaiko- 
 bad, king of Persia. He is said to have discovered and drank of the water of life, and 
 that in consequence he will not die until the day cf Judgment. 
 
 t and dU jj ^3 may be also translated — exit and entrance. See Chapter 7 j 
 O n the derivation of words. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 107 
 
 | J ^ &) \j {^SyO ^ ^ dU dLx \) C) 
 
 f £ dJl^AjJ dJ t^£j jJ^j 4J 
 
 " ^4/«s / o^ chief ’ when I look towards thee , death to me is an abyss , 
 and this form I precipitate into it” Adam Khan, and Durkham. 
 
 187. The fourth class is obtained by lengthening the vowel of the 
 
 first letter from (— - — ) to ! after cutting off the (J of the infinitive as 
 
 ✓ 
 
 usual, and affixing ( ) or * to the final consonant of the root ; as, 
 
 (^ 1*0 to draw forth, or eject , C^>*»b or «C*>b drawing forth, or ejecting ; 
 
 to change, alter, or turn round, 0 *>b jL* and b^U* 
 changing, altering, turning round. 
 
 Example. 
 
 “ At the time of making salutation (at prayer) turning the head to 
 the right side and the left is desirable.” FawaTd-ush-Sharri’sea. 
 
 188. The present participles of this class are obtained from intransi- 
 
 ✓ 
 
 tive infinitives, formed from adjectives by dropping the and adding 
 
 cL3; as, d&r to mix, mixing ; to fill, (jj^ filling. 
 
 They may also be obtained from pure transitives having as the sign 
 
 s'. 
 
 of the infinitive ; thus, to bind, ^ ^ binding. They can also be 
 formed from the intransitives above referred to by merely rejecting the 
 J and adding the el? ; as to fill, filling. Both forms 
 
 are rare, the former particularly so. 
 
 C/bb jfb fjj) jb j (^0 Jv * I 
 
 “ The associating (mixing) of the beloved with a rival is, 
 
 As if a person were to mix together purity and defilement.” Abd-ul- 
 
 Hamid. 
 
108 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 189. The sixth class, which consists of transitive and casual verbs, is 
 
 “ Majnun one day beheld a dog in the desert , and carressed him a 
 thousand times. 
 
 He kissed him on both eyes in various ways , and people become asto- 
 nished with him for kissing.” Adam Khan and Durkham. 
 
 190. The imperfect or present participle is both singular and plural, 
 and with the exception of those of the fifth class, and a few infinitives 
 
 similar to of the second, which take ( ) or for the masculine, 
 
 and change into for the feminine in the oblique cases, are not capa- 
 ble of inflexion. 
 
 191. The masculine form of these participles may easily be mistaken 
 for the feminine, and vice versa, for as I have before remarked ( — — ) 
 
 and and ( ) and are written indiscriminately in this language, 
 
 particularly in modern manuscripts. 
 
 -i r 
 
 192. The present participle is also used as a noun; thus <o!J| signi- 
 fies flight as well as fleeing ; falling , also a fall ; and *0^*2 
 
 formed by dropping the J of the infinitive and inserting I before the 
 final letter of the root, to which ^ or <& is affixed ; as, fjjy U to break 
 or rend, breaking or rending ; to kiss, kissing. 
 
 Example. 
 
 '9 * s 
 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 109 
 
 knowledge as well as knowing : this will be more fully noticed under the 
 head of hasil-i-masdar, or Verbal Noun, which see. 
 
 9 ' 
 
 The Perfect or Past Participle 
 
 193. The perfect or past participle denotes that the action of the 
 verb is complete, and is obtained in three different ways both for transi- 
 tives or intransitives. 
 
 194. The first method is by adding to the infinitive for the mas- 
 culine, and ( ) for the feminine singular ; as, to place, 
 
 placed ; to see, seen ; jy* to cheat , dy= cheated . 
 
 The following are examples. 
 
 by ^ C-tr v* l# j ^ 6 *$• 
 
 “ Whoever emergeth in safety from the sea of love , 
 
 I consider this very day born of his mother ” Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 * ♦♦ ’ * W, 
 
 <SJ-S ff L£) tf <jf- ^Jt A f- )j* f. ifb ^ )i 
 
 <( If one person say eth to another that our father Adam wove linen 
 and he say eth unto him, c yes, and we are wear er’ s children ,’ and his ( the 
 latter’s) intention be to lower the estimation of father Adam, he becometh 
 a blasphemer.” Fawa’id-ush-Sharrfsea. 
 
 Examples of the feminine singular, Intransitive and Transitive. 
 
 JJ Lri H J of jf\ H 
 
 i( A second assembly of people appeared to him in hell, each with a fiery 
 collar round the neck, and foot bound.” Miseraj Nameh. 
 
 iAj Jy i jy J? Id ffu yj <d 
 
 ^ »T * ^ « 
 
 “ That wounded princess through excess of love, 
 
110 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Was singing these verses in her own language ” Saif-ul-Muluk and 
 Badri Jamal. 
 
 The plural for both masculine and feminine is the same, and is formed 
 by lengthening the {£ of the masculine singular, by the addition of 
 ( ) as in the following extracts. 
 
 / ^ x ^ / X 
 
 *** *Xj *Y* ( 3 ^ ^ f** 
 
 ' •* •• ^ ** «• c x 
 
 “ I cannot laugh and make merry with the people of the world, 
 
 For those departed ones make me weep and lament ” Abd-ur-Rahman, 
 
 “ With both eyes drawn towards the path of the beloved, 
 
 He was sitting distressed in the intoxication of the wine of loveP Saif- 
 ul-Muluk. 
 
 195* The second form of this participle is obtained in a similar man- 
 ner to the first, the only difference being that the of the infinitive is 
 
 dropped and the ^ or ( ) affixed to the root for the masculine and 
 
 »• * 
 
 feminine singular, and L $ for both plurals as in the first class. They 
 are sometimes formed from the same verbs and used indiscriminately ; 
 
 thus I t° dressed, or dressed ; 3*^ to sit, 
 
 •• •• 
 
 uM or seated ; J^l to turn back, or turned 
 
 back. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 «aC> i^i DjL j d) 
 
 to i*. 
 
 “ Consume and enjoy , oh ! thou of good disposition, and true man, 
 
 4 ' > ^ 
 
 \Yhat that one of inverted fortune collected together, but did not 
 
 expend” Gulistan. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 Ill 
 
 IfL j& I & ^y. y ^ ^ I 
 
 “ Notwithstand I summons back this stag-eyed captured heart, 
 
 Yet like the deer it heedetli not my calling ” Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 9 2 A ' A * 
 
 UP* |J jj\ & 
 
 dU* 
 
 V 
 
 ■» <J ■“ i*~ y m ^ " 
 
 I* ’ ^ ♦♦ 
 
 “ This Suttee* who consumeth herself, her intention is this — 
 
 That burnt in the fire I am fortunate but not without honour ” Abd- 
 ur- Rahman. 
 
 ^jj£*> sjll jy\ <*j viXJ alA aj <**1* jaIJJ 
 
 dl) 
 
 “In outward dress a beggar, in words a niggard — 
 
 Like a bright spark of fire enveloped in dust and ashes” Futtih 
 Khan, Mirza. 
 
 Examples of the plural masculine and feminine. 
 
 t* »■ ^ w 
 
 1) ^ 
 
 V v/;iJ 
 
 “ The whole world pluck away their vestments from near me : 
 
 I am become like a smoke-blackened pot though clothed in white gar- 
 ments” Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 If ^ a) a** a** 
 
 ^ yT 
 
 “ Another man appeared to him in hell who was alike weeping and 
 wailing. Clothed in garments of fire from head to foot, they tormented 
 
 * Suttee — a woman who burns on her husband’s funeral pyre. 
 
112 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 his every vein and artery — every nerve and bone” Majmuseat-i-Kan- 
 dahari. 
 
 “ At the Last Bay they (hypocrites) will like an empty almond become 
 ashamed and confounded ; 
 
 For many dressed out in the garments of the True Faith are infidels 
 and blasphemers ” Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 “ The eyes of the beloved are intoxicators, turned round upon the 
 lover this day , 
 
 They are ready prepared for striking : observe for whose spoil and 
 plunder they are ” Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 196. The third class of past participles is formed from the irregular 
 
 and defective verbs, such as to fall, and to sit , 
 
 and those similar to to stand, and (Jt>***^ to rot, which have no 
 
 regular past tense of their own, and require the past tense of the auxili- 
 
 x 
 
 ary of to become, to form it. They appear to have originally been 
 adjectives from which infinitives have been formed, particularly those 
 ending in The terminations for the masculine and feminine are 
 
 also different to the other participles * 
 
 * Strictly speaking, the participles are not parts of the verb as they <lo not apply 
 affirmation, but are merely adjectives, particularly the third form. 
 
 ^ ** 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 113 
 
 The masculine singular is formed by dropping the (J<3£ of the infini- 
 tive ; as, to stand, x% stood ; to fall, fallen ; 
 
 to sit, seated ; (J to rot, rotten. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 \J 4 LfJji ^ 
 
 «• ** .• 
 
 0 <U*>b t) <0 <0 
 
 “ Hungry and thirsty on thy own mat fallen thou art well off, but not 
 so seated on the dais in the house of another ” Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 H f. *f ^ H ^ 
 
 /■ , . “ O' / , 
 
 ^ 6UJ C^s- 5 <U jyJ t> <U 
 
 “ Fallen over and over in red blood with fame, I am fortunate ; 
 
 But not so without honour, even seated on the throne of red gold ) 
 Abd- ul-Hamid. 
 
 9 
 
 ? 
 
 im j A / ^ ^ Kl ^ ^ y 9 . f 
 
 'V ysff t> U?| U?j.> ^ jjj*w ^ WA 
 
 C^I^Al <>5b ^13 ' JaAc l) ^ l a;$j5> 
 
 “ Oh mine eyes, you should bid farewell ! you, oh palms of my hands , 
 and arms of my shoulders, too, should take leave of each other ! You, oh 
 my friends, should pass over (the grave) of this poor and humble fallen 
 one” Gulistan. 
 
 To form the feminine singular <* or ( ) is affixed to the masculine. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 ✓ 
 
 ^ j Js 
 
 Q 
 
114 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ Though thou environ thyself with a fortress of iron, 
 
 Thou wilt not escape from the tent of death erect in every court ” 
 Ruttih Khan, Mirza. 
 
 “ A waist broken through the toil of industry and labour is good, 
 
 But not a purse (of the money of unlawfulness) round a man’s waist) 3 
 Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 The plural masculine form of the third class of these past or perfect 
 participles, is the same as the singular, but the feminine plural changes 
 
 the and ( ) of the singular into ^ and ( ) respectively. 
 
 ♦* / 
 
 The following are examples. 
 
 “ To-day we are proud of our existence. To-morrow the world will 
 count us amongst the departed.” Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 “ I know that thou merely practisest bloodshed and slaughter, 
 
 Seated in this manner like the falcon, with eyes veiled.” Abd-ul- 
 Hamid, 
 
 197 . The past participles are capable of inflexion, and are subject to 
 the same general laws as nouns, as in the following extracts. 
 
 (C Notwithstanding I searched both in deserts and in hamlets, 
 
 I did not again obtain any information of those departed ones)’ Abd- 
 
 ur-Rahman. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 115 
 
 ♦♦ ✓ 
 
 >b <e ^ *4 ,,aA 
 
 v rx 
 
 i . 
 
 Abd-ur- 
 
 ^■aI.u.5^ <3 J <0 
 
 €C 1 know not what is ivritten on my account : 
 
 I Rahman am in anxiety concerning these written things. 
 
 Kahman. 
 
 The Actor or noun of action ^***> | ism fa* ceil. 
 
 198. The active participle, agent, or noun of action, denotes the per- 
 former of any action, and is an inflection of the verb as in Arabic and 
 Persian. It is transitive or intransitive according to the verb from 
 which it is derived, and is both singular and plural, masculine and femi- 
 nine, and is capable of inflection in the same manner as nouns. 
 
 199. There are two methods of forming it — by dropping the of the 
 
 infinitive and adding or for the masculine, and or el? 
 
 h *♦ 
 
 for the feminine singular, as in the following examples. 
 
 * 9 r 9 9' 9s' i ' s . ' 
 
 o | l) £ a? *^3 1 
 
 j5jflLo 
 
 “ Detriment and advantage, good and evil, are from God, who is the 
 giver of kingdoms, and the taker of dominions — all is from God ” 
 Fawafid-ush-Sharrfisea. 
 
 “ I shall be a departer from this world, as rapidly as the English 
 discharge a cannon ” Kasim All, Afridi. 
 
 1j ^ 0 b 0 b <U J ^ dki) cO 
 
 jsbwo <-> b j 
 
 q 2 
 
116 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ In it thou shalt not do any work , thou, nor thy son, nor thy daughter, 
 thy man-servant, nor thy maidservant, nor thy cattle, nor the stranger 
 a dweller within thy gates .” Translation of the Pentateuch.* 
 
 # A . , . A , v s'* 9 * ' . / 'in' 
 
 ^jU^ool aJ jl. JjU 
 
 “ The day of judgment is also a comer, doubt this not, oh my friends ! 
 On that day, what terrors, and what fears will descend upon men!” 
 EawaTd-ush- Sharrf sea. 
 
 < / / *■' <■ / 
 
 50 ^ U 0 O 
 
 “ In the Jdmce Saghir it is thus said — Prostration (in prayer) is the 
 causer of grief and affliction to the devil, is also the corrector of any 
 error or inadvertency (in prayer), and moreover is the will of Almighty 
 God.” EawaTd-ush-Sharrfsea. 
 
 The plural form of this participle is both masculine and feminine. It 
 is obtained by adding (—— ) to the masculine singular ; as or 
 
 t 
 
 ) a reader, or readers. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 x ^ 9 9 „ 9 s 
 
 o I>* L£^ c>d 4?"; *}!? f'ij 
 
 *iii ~ I** Jj 1 
 
 “ I perceive all are travellers, there are no tarriers behind : 
 
 The journeying on this road is both for young and for old.” Abd-ur- 
 
 Rahman. 
 
 * There is a good translation of a portion of the Pentateuch in Pushto, from which 
 I have taken this example. The translator is unknown. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 117 
 
 The following extract contains examples of the plural, both masculine 
 and feminine. 
 
 <c Five things are breakers of prayer , and all are common. First , 
 words are breakers of prayer, whether it may be in sleep or in waking 
 moments, whether intentionally or inadvertently , whether few or many” 
 FawaTd-ush-Sharrfsea. 
 
 200. The noun of fitness is merely the infinitive in the genitive 
 case; as. 
 
 “ Some one knocked at the door, on which lady JEa’esha said — f who 
 art thou ? do not come in, for this is not a fit time for coming/ ” 
 FawaTd-ush-Sharrfsea. 
 
 “ They who lament out of season, slumber at the proper time — 
 
 The beards of those persons are only fit to be pulled.” Abd-ur- 
 Rahman. 
 
 There is an active participle or noun of action of intransitive verbs, 
 which is alone used as a noun of fitness. 
 
 The noun of Fitness **> | . 
 
118 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 The following is an example. 
 
 to aj |^l> 4* 
 
 ^ fi £ " 
 
 “ Waste not uselessly on me thy breath and thy medicine, oh physician ! 
 
 For I am not one to recover, but one to die from the pangs of love.” 
 Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 Of the Tenses 
 
 201. As there is considerable difference in the formation of the 
 inflexions of the verbs intransitive and transitive, they will require to be 
 separately explained. 
 
 According to the system of the Arabian grammarians, on which the 
 grammatical rules of Pushto, as well as most other Muhammadan lan- 
 guages are based, verbs have properly but one conjugation, and two 
 changes of tense — the preterite or simple past, and the aorist; the other 
 tenses being formed by the help of several particles, and the auxiliary 
 verbs, to be, to become , to exist, etc. already explained and illustrated. 
 
 With the exception of the infinitive, verbs have but two numbers — 
 the singular and plural. There are also three persons as in other lan- 
 guages, but the third person precedes the second, and the second the 
 first person. 
 
 Verbs are also divided into perfect and imperfect, regular and irregu- 
 lar ; the latter and the imperfect verbs, being exceedingly numerous. 
 
 Much variation occurs in the formation of the different tenses of the 
 last mentioned verbs, and there is also a change in termination for the 
 feminine gender. 
 
 202. The following paradigm of a regular verb in the active and 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 119 
 
 passive voices, according to the Arabian system just referred to, will 
 show the original tenses. The active participle denotes the agent, and 
 the passive participle the object acted on, 
 
 Infinitive | to seize. 
 
 Active Voice. 
 Past Tense. 
 
 S. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 
 Masc. }ie seized . 
 
 )> 
 
 
 )> 
 
 C^-wAl^ b thou seized. 
 
 a 
 
 U 
 
 S- ^ 
 
 )) 
 
 b L° I seized. 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 P. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 aIa^csi. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 they seized. 
 
 
 
 ji 
 
 CL^^^b y° u seized. 
 
 
 aIa.w.2*. U 
 ✓ ' 
 
 }} 
 
 A Jj l&o we seized. 
 
 £jLa/o Aorist Tense. 
 
 S. 
 
 
 he, she , it, may, shall, etc . seize. 
 
 ** S 
 
 <M thou mayest, etc. seize. 
 
 
 Xj I may, shall, etc. seize. 
 
 P. 
 
 ^ ie V may, shall, etc. seize. 
 
 'V 
 
 you may, shall, etc. seize, 
 j^b we may, shall, etc. seize . 
 
120 
 
 A GRAMMAR OP THE 
 
 y> I Imperative. 
 
 S. 
 
 P. 
 
 c> d let him , her, or it, seize, ^ let them seize . 
 
 1 
 
 <*lA \j d) seize thou. J^b u* seize you . 
 
 i*m\ Actor or Active Voice. 
 
 S. 
 
 . s > < 
 
 l Jy 1 
 
 Masc. , 1 or 
 
 Pern. 
 
 rf S,9* # rf 
 
 I or ^ j 
 
 seizing. 
 
 P. 
 
 r s . .< 
 
 | 
 
 > seizing. 
 
 9 <j 
 
 dx ^ Passive Voice. 
 
 Past Tense. 
 
 S. 
 
 9 . r , " 
 
 jui or j ^fcMAhCSh.| he, or it was seized. 
 
 9 # rf , " 
 
 2 or ^ j was seized. 
 
 Lp^-i or j <0 thou wast seized. 
 
 ♦* 
 
 x ^ # rr 1 
 
 or ^ | 2^ / ?oas seized . 
 
 P. 
 
 9 * * I * ♦ T • . 
 
 or ^ I they were seized. 
 
 or J I j*& they (F.) were seized. 
 
 - ' H " ' 
 
 A ^ U # rf 9.* 
 
 or I ^.0 you were seized. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 121 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Aorist Tense. 
 
 s 
 
 S. 
 
 L** or I he , she , it may be seized . 
 
 .♦ «* «* x 
 
 9 ,.r . r. ~ 
 
 ^A or J I thou mayest be seized. 
 
 «» •* •• 
 
 ^*A or ^A ) I Sj / may be seized. 
 
 P. 
 
 -* . rr . * 
 
 ^A or ^A ^ I they may be seized. 
 
 A h 9 C * r \ 9 \ m 
 
 ^A or ^oo may be seized. 
 
 ♦♦ ♦* ^ ^ 
 
 ^ ^ ^ i* . < ... * 
 
 ^A or ^A ^ I &v\* we mo?/ £e seized. 
 
 s 
 
 y>\ Imperative . 
 
 S. 
 
 . ' r* * 
 
 ^A ^ u«*L | J Axib let him , her , £e seized. 
 
 <*A | dJ 6e Moo seized. 
 
 P. 
 
 ^A let them be seized. 
 
 ^A ^llu^l be you seized. 
 
 9 1 ' 
 
 ^»| Pos/ Participle or Object acted on. 
 
 S. ' P. 
 
 <fi | or I or | 
 
 ** " ** ' \seized. 
 
 ^ y ^ ^ r 
 
 ^ jwSMAfi* I Or I j 
 
 ✓ •• 
 
 Intransitive verbs L /ft J W| - 
 
 > seized. 
 
 The Past Tense 
 
 R 
 
122 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 204. The past being antecedent to the present according to the 
 oriental grammarians, must be first noticed. 
 
 The past censes of intransitives are tolerably regular in comparison 
 with transitives, still there are seven methods or rules regarding them 
 which require some explanation. 
 
 1st. Most intransitives form the past tense by merely rejecting the 
 
 I ... . ; ' > 
 
 J of the infinitive and prefixing the particle p the peculiar sign of the 
 
 past, but the j of this tense, like the of the past and imperfect of the 
 
 Persian, is often omitted as redundant. The last radical letter is move- 
 
 able, that is to say, it takes ( ) or <* after the final letter ; as 
 
 ^ - s 
 
 to know ; ) he knew. Prom the third person, five other 
 
 inflexions are formed, by the application of the affixed personal pronouns 
 
 p 
 
 ( dL&uo ) which have been already described. 
 
 x / 
 
 2nd. Are infinitives which form the past after the same manner as 
 the preceding, but whose final characteristic letter is quiescent, as 
 
 r y y y 
 
 to split, <3*1^. p it split, to run, p he ran. 
 
 3rd. Some infinitives ending in a quiescent consonant, insert a j for 
 the third person masculine singular, which is changed into I for the plu- 
 ral, as to ascend, p he ascended. The other persons are 
 
 regular, as j I ascended. 
 
 4th. A few infinitives reject the last radical letter as well as the sign 
 of the infinitive in the past ; as qj** to burn, ^ p it burnt. This verb is 
 both transitive and intransitive. 
 
 y 
 
 5th. Intransitives formed from adjectives or nouns by affixing (JcV 
 
 A 
 
 reject it again in the past, and the past tense of the auxiliaries or 
 is required to complete it; as to break, it broke . 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 123 
 
 6th. Some infinitives ending in a silent consonant, which is generally 
 d5 do not take the prefixed and therefore their imperfect tenses are 
 the same as the past; thus ^amjUaa ^ to sit , he sat. 
 
 7th. Infinitives having a J as the final characteristic letter, reject it 
 in the third person masculine singular; as ijlcl; to come, ^J^\) he came. 
 
 Examples will be found in the following extracts. 
 
 j\ J dj I 1 & kflXia O 
 
 «J dj »J* JJ t> jl 0 Jls' 0 
 
 “ In short, the youth attained the summit of strength and skill, and 
 no one had the power of vying or competing with him” Gulistan. 
 
 ' s' ' t" ' f ^ 4 
 
 d} ^ } 
 
 “ For some time thou madest a captive of me : 
 
 Thou didst plunge me into inexpressible grief \ 
 
 I abandoned for thee both name and fame: 
 
 I constantly beat my head against the stones Yusuf and Zulikha. 
 
 205. There is an exception to the above general rule in the formation 
 of the inflexions of this tense, for the of the infinitive is sometimes 
 retained, and the affixed pronouns (except for the third person plural) 
 added to it, as may be seen in the following couplet. 
 
 ' \ ' A ' * 
 
 !L>bs C> y^. y£b 
 
 y * > 
 
 a.Jc>a^ ^ d) 4) 
 
 j 
 
 (4? ) p*f. 
 
 “ Notwithstanding that I went according to the precepts of custom 
 and usage, 
 
 I attained not to the knowledge of certainty and truth.” Euttili Khan, 
 
 Mirza. 
 
124 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 206. The third person singular and plural of the past tenses of 
 intransitive verbs is alone subject to change in termination for gender, 
 and the first and second persons merely take the plural form of the 
 affixed personal pronouns for the plural number. 
 
 207. To form the feminine singular of this tense *, <*) or must be 
 added to the masculine, as in the following examples. 
 
 “ It is the consequent result of love that the eye weeps , — 
 
 AlsOj that from weeping , my eye became swollen.” Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 “ She took a tray in her hand , and set out , and with great expedition 
 reached the prison ” Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 208. The masculine and feminine plural of the first and second per- 
 
 sons is the same as the singular, as previously stated, with the mere 
 addition of the plural form of the affixed pronouns ; as } j we 
 
 A ^ p 
 
 arrived , J you arrived . 
 
 The following is an example. 
 
 i I A J ^ jj ^ i c*i rO 
 
 ‘ The hand of destiny lowered the veil of imprudence before the eye of 
 my judgment , and detained behind the obscure curtain of ignorance and 
 incapacity my far seeing prudence ; and suddenly we all became entrap- 
 ped in the talon of misfortune and sorrow iE'yar Danish. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 125 
 
 The following extract contains an example of the plural form of the 
 past tense, in which, as explained in a preceding paragraph, the pronoun 
 is affixed to the infinitive. 
 
 ? ' * ' \ c ^ i , ' ' \ ' | A 
 
 fij yfsti <JU O jj \Xa^> O <U 0^1*^ 
 
 K _2 ' ^ * 
 
 “ A holy man repudiated the feigned manner of the Durweshes, and 
 was entirely unacquainted with their sorrows and afflictions. In this 
 manner we arrived at the palm-grove of Bani Hillal” Gulistan. 
 
 209. The third person masculine plural of verbs which do, or do not 
 take the prefixed j in the past tense, whether the tense he formed by- 
 rejecting or retaining the J of the infinitive, or otherwise, is the simple 
 infinitive with the ) prefixed for the former, and the infinitive unchanged 
 for the latter ; thus to tremble , ) they trembled ; 
 
 x / * 
 
 JU]; to come , they came. The plural form of those which reject 
 
 ) or drop it as redundant, will be explained in its proper place. 
 
 The following is an example of the regular verbs. 
 
 ' .. 
 Id sol;] 
 
 “ When Ali Akbar and Kasim fell, their families were standing by, 
 for such had been written from all eternity.” Muhammad Hamfah. 
 
 210. There is another form of the past tense for the masculine plural 
 of the third person, which may be easily mistaken for the third person 
 feminine singular, as it is written with the same consonants and vowel 
 points as the latter. There is however a difference in the pronunciation, 
 yet it is quite impossible to describe it in writing, and even when uttered 
 
126 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 by an Afghan tongue, it is almost imperceptible, and requires an Afghan 
 ear to distinguish it. This form is used both for transitive as well as 
 intransitive verbs. 
 
 The following is an example.* 
 
 o i x*j>j <vji 2jjt *y»j) 
 
 “ The Imam’s head remained in Saleh’s court. Behold the Yezidis 
 completely deceived ! Saleh having hidden the head under his skirt , car- 
 
 ried it away and buried it in Hassan’s tomb.” Hasan and Husain of 
 Muhammad Ilanifah. 
 
 x 
 
 211. & or (j is sometimes affixed to the third person singular and 
 
 plural of this tense for the sake of euphony, and as a respectful form in 
 religious works. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 • . |A C ^ * 9 9 t 9 ' 9 . ^ ' 9 16 * 
 
 ijj jJIa, <uj j.) jjj aj j d^. UA jy 
 
 “ When the light of my glory shook itself with force, a hundred and 
 twenty -four thousand drops of perspiration fell from it.” Nur Nameh. 
 
 * The author of the iEjaib-ul-Lughat in the preface to that work, remarks on this 
 very subject in the following manner. “ I have adopted the lexiographical system of 
 the Persian to express the Afghani in this work, in order that it may be more easy to 
 those acquainted with the former language, yet notwithstanding this, the perfectness 
 of sound, and completeness of enunciation is alone to be acquired by oral practice. 
 
 The word die is an example of this. When written with simple r, a, quiescent gh, l 
 with the short vowel a , and unaspirated h, is the third person feminine singular — she 
 goes ; and when written with simple r, a, quiescent gh , l with a short vowel approach- 
 ing to a and i slightly sounded, and unaspirated h , is the third person masculine 
 plural.” I think the difference might be well expressed if we wrote the feminine form 
 — raghlah, and the masculine plural of the third person, which the author considers so 
 very difficult with the diphthong ce rather shortened in pronunciation, as raghlceh. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 127 
 
 fjJ (Jjl isy <v u^ 
 
 dj <w)b^c>^ ^ c>4*“ ^ ft. *5^ ^ c ^ 
 
 S S * $ 
 
 (J4>^ J J** ^ h J^ J 3 J 
 
 “ Ten drops of sweat were diffused from my left hand. From the first 
 drop ten thousand rivers of pure wine plowed like torrents through Para- 
 dise ; from the second i a river of honey ; and from the third , a thousand 
 sweet streams.” Makhzan Afghani. 
 
 To form the third person feminine plural of this tense, ^ or ( ) 
 
 ♦♦ ^ 
 
 is added to the simple infinitive, as will be seen in the following extracts. 
 
 °|^ " f 10 */ jjiJ Jf " ufy 
 
 ; <J t>ir J j eXy 
 
 «• «• x 
 
 -5 J, j) f’ 
 
 H •* S ^ 
 
 “ An old and respectable man who dwelt at Bagdad, gave his daughter 
 in marriage to a shoe-maker. The hard-hearted rascal bit her lips so, 
 that the blood immediately plowed / rom them.” Gulistan. 
 
 * X ✓ i A r^f'' * % Pm A 
 
 ^4>C O A^, ^jgl Aa. AJ A^X ^ Aj ^ ^jUUsuZi 
 
 * F * 
 
 “ The other devils said unto him — oh master ! wherefore art thou be- 
 come so sorrowful that the cries of thy grief have gone out into different 
 lands ?” Fawa/id-ush-Sharrfsea. 
 
 212. I have already observed at Para. 204, that a great many verbs 
 
 p 
 
 at times reject as redundant the prefixed ^ the sign of the past tense of 
 
128 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 regular verbs both transitive as well as intransitive, without any apparent 
 reason ; thus, 
 
 5 £ jJLk <!U ^0 <*£ Ua. 2 2 yb 
 
 “ Bishr said > it is my solemn oath by God , that the mouthful which I put 
 into my mouth I knew was poisoned” Fawa/id-ush-Sharrfsea. 
 
 In the following extract, which is an example of the same infinitive as 
 
 " 9 
 
 the preceding one — to know, etc. — the^ of the past is retained. 
 
 ✓ 9 s | >- .9 ' A 9 \A " A 
 
 “ The family encamped on the very place } and they recognized the 
 spot of martyrdom” Muhammad Hamfah. 
 
 213. There are also a number of defective as well as irregular verbs 
 
 9 
 
 which entirely reject the in fact to add that particle would render the 
 word meaningless. In other respects these verbs are subject to the same 
 changes for inflexion as the others already described, as will be perceived 
 from the examples I shall now give. 
 
 <JUj! Lfj* *■* dulac^ 
 
 M • ** 
 
 9 s A 9 " 9 
 
 >x J 
 
 “ The companions of the Prophet came to him and represented — ‘ We 
 have no water that we may drink, neither that we may perform our ablu- 
 tions? ” FawaTd-usli-Sharri’sea. 
 
 • jy ^ J ^ 
 
 "y *V 
 
 j] to dlfyt 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 129 
 
 “ When love-making and love-accepting came between , authority and 
 dependence arose and departed ” Gulistan. 
 
 214. When the verb has a radical, as well as the of the infinitive, 
 as in (J'U, etc., one is generally rejected as redundant in the 
 
 inflexions for the different tenses, with the exception of the third person 
 singular and plural of a few, in which both are retained. In the third 
 person masculine singular both are dropped. 
 
 Example. 
 
 9 s ^ * A ^ p 
 
 uf ' ' £}j } $ ‘H ^ 
 
 “ The nightingales sing both in garden and in meadow — 
 f The flower of the parterre — the Chosen One * — has come/ ” Kasim 
 Ali, Afridi. 
 
 Sometimes both J’s are retained in this, as well as in other tenses of 
 the verb. 
 
 iS 
 
 Example. 
 
 . ^ ^ 9 9 
 
 law ^ >2s ’ ^J>j ^ ySsb pJ 
 
 l» ' * w , 
 
 “ One was Nakir , the other Munkir — the whole torment was on my 
 devoted head. At length they came forth — they stood before me lookers- 
 on.” Story of Jumjumah. 
 
 215. The third persons of the past tense of some verbs in which the 
 letter CL> precedes the sign of the infinitive, are somewhat irregular. In 
 the third person singular they take a j before the CD, thus to 
 
 '' 9 p 
 
 ascend , instead of becoming p } becomes 
 
 * A name of Muhammad, 
 s 
 
130 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Example. 
 
 9 
 
 (jli \jp J 0 * ^)LaLm» <U &j^) <v 
 
 " The prince ascended to a rising ground to obtain a view . 
 
 On both sides the warriors were falling from their steeds” Bahram 
 Gur. 
 
 For tlie plural, the y is changed into I, thus becomes y 
 
 Sometimes however the past masculine plural is written y. An 
 example of d?Uw y is contained in the following extract. f 
 
 A>\y y a) y\ 
 
 ' ♦♦ ^ 
 
 “ At this sight Adam Khan laid waste his heart , and all solicitude 
 for name and fame went out of it” Story of Adam Khan and 
 Durkham. 
 
 216. There are several compound verbs J both intransitive as well as 
 transitive, such as to f all > or J*? to fall into, 
 
 to sit, etc., which are formed by prefixing a preposition to a 
 simple infinitive, the formation of the past tenses of which is difficult and 
 
 9 
 
 requires some explanation. Instead of placing the y of the past tense 
 (when expressed) before the word in its compound state, it is inserted 
 after the preposition. Thus the past tense of the infinitive ^y.ji 
 
 * This is another example of the masculine plural described at page 125. 
 
 f In this case the final letter is no longer quiescent but takes a ( ) as in the 
 
 example referred to. 
 
 X These compound verbs show in what manner some of the compound words in 
 Pushto are formed. jneans to go out, and with on becomes 
 
 Jyy to fall. Again the same infinitive with the preposition in, inside, &c, 
 
 ^ H 
 
 produces to become entangled. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 131 
 
 - 9 
 
 instead of becoming j is wr i tten 2 LSji an ^ 
 
 **JJ l/ 5 In many recent manuscript works, and in some of older date 
 
 «» 
 
 also, one J is omitted in writing, and in conversation the sound of the 
 second letter is scarcely perceptible. From this a great difficulty arises 
 if the past tense be written or spoken without the second j, for then 
 there is no difference between the past and the imperfect tense, and con- 
 sequently there would be in some instances, a doubt regarding the 
 meaning. Futtih Khan, Mirza, who is one of the oldest Pushto authors 
 we know of, always makes the difference between the past and the im- 
 perfect form, in which I have followed him : He says ; — 
 
 “ Of its own free will it fell into the flame of love — 
 
 This crude and imperfect one transported its soul to perfection ” 
 Futtih Khan, Mirza. 
 
 Some of the best prose authors also make use of the second ) to dis- 
 tinguish the past, as in this example : 
 
 9 ^ . * ,9 ' 
 
 JUA O 
 
 “ When this news reached Najasi , he fell from his throne , and Abraha 
 fell down from his horse into the birds’ mouths Babu Jan.* 
 
 Hamid, Rahman, Kasim All, and others, write the past tense of this 
 class of verbs with one j only ; their meanings are however not to be 
 mistaken. 
 
 The following are examples : 
 
 * This writer is said to have been a native of Kafiristan who after having been con- 
 verted to Islamism again relapsed. 
 
 s 2 
 
132 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 „ A 
 
 JU Ua. ^ 5; ^3U*» | a^3 e: 
 
 “ It ivas not love , it was a thunderbolt from the heavens, 
 
 That suddenly fell on my head and my possessions” Abd-ul-Hamid 
 
 j 
 
 mJ* 
 
 yy.vy jyy- *t o~- 
 
 V V 
 
 “ I fell right into the man-devouring whirlpools of love : 
 
 Neither can I advance, nor am I able to run back” Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 217. Another form of the past tense of intransitive verbs remains to 
 be noticed. Infinitives such as to break, to conceal, 
 
 s B / A 
 
 to pass, etc. require the past tense of the auxiliary to be - 
 
 come , to be added after dropping the (JcV of the infinitive. Thus 
 dw CL>U broken, <*£> concealed, d&j*) passed. The auxiliary as 
 
 well as the adjective is subject to change in termination for gender and 
 number. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 i _ry y rl^ H J? u 
 
 " *V •* 
 
 fi W ^ fy* ** 
 
 “ Neither did I go distracted at the rumour of being separated from her, 
 
 Nor did I become deaf — as I was, so indeed I now am” Abd-ul- 
 Hamid. 
 
 “ From the time I became a captive many years passed over me, 
 
 And thou didst not seek for any information regarding me.” Saif-ul- 
 Muluk. 
 
 218. In all the inflexions of intransitive verbs the regular personal 
 pronouns, I, thou, etc., may also be prefixed as in Persian, It is equally 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE, 
 
 333 
 
 the affixed pronouns are indispensible as in the language above referred 
 
 219. This tense denotes some incomplete past action either near or 
 remote. The imperfect of regular intransitives is obtained by dropping 
 
 tc I used to fly to deserts and mountains from the society of men , that 
 I might not be occupied save in the worship of God. 
 
 Only imagine what my state must be at this hour, that in a tether with 
 brutes, I must conform to their society Gulistan. 
 
 220. As in the past tense, the plural is formed by changing the dif- 
 ferent affixed personal pronouns to the plural form ; and the third person 
 masculine plural is the same as the simple infinitive. 
 
 The following are examples : 
 
 * The custom of affixing this class of pronouns, probably sprung from the Semitic 
 languages. In Sindhi they are also much used, for a Sindhian can scarcely utter a 
 sentence without prefixing them to nouns as well as verbs. They are also used in 
 Pehlavi. 
 
 to, as well as in Arabic and Hebrew, to which in this particular Pushto 
 bears a remarkable similarity.* 
 
 The Imperfect Tense 
 
 the prefixed j of the past ; as, 
 
134 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ The wrestler saw that the whole of the caravan were trembling for 
 their lives, and had resigned their hearts to destruction ” Gulistan. 
 
 221. The same observations regarding the personal pronouns being 
 sometimes affixed to the infinitive without dropping the as in the past 
 tense described at page 124, paragraph 206, is equally applicable to the 
 imperfect, except for the third person plural, which, as mentioned in the 
 
 preceding paragraph remains unchanged. For the feminine or ( -) 
 
 H / 
 
 is affixed to the masculine. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 ^ , <. ' 9 y t A + 
 
 ctejy Jjk ,0 J> Uj 
 
 “ Through excess of sorrow King Saf’wdn fell into despair , 
 
 And grief and affliction returned to him with increased force. 
 
 Again he said, in the first place I was not conceiving for a moment , 
 That this fire would blaze up in my dwelling” Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 ^b a Jo*** dfjj d*. fjjjc <v JkSj y sxl 
 
 “ The Chikor * for this reason is sunk up to the knee in blood, 
 
 That she was wont to vie with her in walking” Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 222. As I have already remarked at page 130, paragraph 216, the 
 
 9 
 
 imperfect tenses of those verbs which do not take the prefixed } in the 
 past, or drop it at times as redundant, are in nine cases out of ten, written 
 precisely the same as the past ; and the signification in many instances, is 
 only to be discovered from the context. In conversation too, the dif- 
 
 * The Bartavelle or Greek partridge (Perdix chukar.) It is found in great numbers 
 in the hills, north of Pesha’war. It has red legs, and is much larger than the common 
 bird. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 135 
 
 ference is scarcely perceptible, and it is only from practice in the lan- 
 guage that the difficulty is to be overcome. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 *j £ J> w £ co! «j ls £ U *) o dp Jj» 
 
 * H 
 
 jfyj ju* 5 ^ X> |0 ^ [ 6 " u j J ** ^ 
 
 . 
 
 SOJ,x> 
 
 *v 
 
 “ The agreement that thou hadst made with me, thou now desirest to 
 break. I was thinking that in the present day, fidelity is a medicine 
 which is not to be found in the shop of the druggist of the world” iE’yar 
 Danish.* 
 
 di ¥ d) 
 
 m 
 
 “ When this picture used to fall under people’s observation , 
 
 They were wont to be drawn towards it, as if fascinated on viewing it” 
 Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 223. The third person singular and plural of this, as well as of the 
 other past tenses, is alone subject to change in termination to agree with 
 a feminine governing noun, whatever be the class of verb, regular, irre- 
 
 * I here give the original Persian from the Anwar-i-Sohili of which the above is 
 a translation, as there might he a doubt respecting this tense and the past. The trans- 
 lator is said to be Khushal Khattak one of the most celebrated Pushto authors. 
 
 Ojti jib* 9 <dA o jS ^ jylo lij jS 
 
 ♦» ■ 
 
 t See or yfiS in the couplet at page 132, paragraph 216, which is 
 
 written in the same manner as the above word, although the first person singular of 
 the past tense of the same verb. 
 
136 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 gular, or defective, and will not require a separate explanation, as it has 
 been already referred to at paragraph 205. I shall however give a few 
 extracts as examples. 
 
 b-o <jb3 o*Li> o ^5 d)j) J 
 
 ee In the highest heaven a clamour , noises and vociferations arose. The 
 angels in the heavens even were wailing. From the shock produced hy 
 his fall , the sign of the day of judgment was produced ” Hasan and 
 Husain. 
 
 *jj y* *b y u*i *i 
 
 “ In tears she came to the house, and went out after him with her head 
 bare. 
 
 She was wont to wander about in great distress , and on account of 
 separation, used to reel and stagger.” Tawallud Nameh. 
 
 
 . Jb 
 
 L> 
 
 “ The Wuzir said — * Two pigeons were dwelling in the same nest. 
 The name of one was Bdzindah * the other Nawazindah.”-\ M ’ yar 
 Danish. 
 
 / / H 
 
 yr & ^\yy y“ ‘H 
 
 * Player. 
 
 t Flatterer. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 137 
 
 “ From the eyes of those which used not to become satiated with the 
 treasuries of the world, 
 
 The red tears of blood have now flowed like rain” Babu Jan. 
 
 224. The following extract contains an example of the imperfect 
 tense formed according to the rules I have already explained for the past 
 at paragraph 209, as being easily mistaken for the third person feminine 
 singular, being written in the same manner, but slightly different in 
 sound. 
 
 “ God became pleased at the victory of the Yezidis, and distorted 
 
 afflicted through anguish , and rivers of tears were flowing from their 
 eyes ” History of Hasan and Husain. 
 
 the revolutions of destiny . His (Husain's) family ivas becoming sadly 
 
 225. Although the class of imperfect verbs such as 
 
 etc. have no regular past tense, and require the past of 
 
 Jr to become , to form it, they have a regular imperfect as other verbs. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 “ The prince placed his shield under his head and then sketched him- 
 self on the ground, 
 
 After which, this thought was passing in his mind ” Bahram Gur. 
 
138 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ Understanding and intelligence he possessed beyond bounds. In the 
 same manner in his child-hood the signs of his future greatness, used to be 
 apparent on his forehead ” Gulistan. 
 
 226. Another form of this tense is obtained by prefixing the particle 
 Jo to the past. It implies continuity and habitude, as will be seen from 
 the examples. 
 
 “ That grief which I bore on account of my beloved, although a load 
 upon me, 
 
 And notwithstanding some used to call me mad, yet I was wont to 
 roam in happiness ” Yusuf and Zulikha. 
 
 « They will say, these were our practices, that when the summons to 
 prayer reached our ears, we used to arise to perform our ablutions, and 
 used not to be occupied in any thing else ” Fawa’id-ush- Sham* sea. 
 
 “ They were wont to fly without stopping four hundred leagues ; 
 Each league was six miles : oh ! me, what a crew ” Story of King 
 Jumjumah. 
 
 y # r A* *• '* 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE, 
 
 139 
 
 “Like unto Majnun thou wert used to wander about wildly, 
 
 Ever making enquiries after Layla in deserts and in wilds” Kasim 
 All, Afridi. 
 
 227. It will be necessary here to notice the great imperfection and 
 
 irregularity of some Pushto verbs of which d% is a specimen. The 
 real infinitive appears to be to which the class of pronouns described 
 at page 59, paragraphs 126- — 128, are prefixed. Thus JUt; literally 
 means to come to me or us ; to come to thee or you , and 
 
 to come to him, her, it, or them ; however appears to be the com- 
 
 mon form of the verb to come, for j J and are used with it, 
 
 I came to thee or you ; j we come to him or them; but not jj 
 with JUjd or JUy. 
 
 228. is also another infinitive to come, but its principal use is 
 
 to form the actor, imperfect, and conditional tenses of JUlj in which 
 the latter is deficient. What is most surprizing, and I imagine not to 
 be found in the grammatical structure of any other language, is, that the 
 proper past tense of Jb’i, conveys no preterite signification, and is oidy 
 used as the imperfect of J% - JUjd of and Jb;, of 
 
 Several tenses in which both infinitives are defective, are ob- 
 tained by prefixing ])> and j) to some of the tenses of the auxiliary 
 
 ✓ A 
 
 J.r to become, and will be explained under their respective heads. 
 An example is contained in the following. 
 
 »♦ .» ' 
 
 {j? J}* ^ ^ 
 
 “ Jabra’il said, c 0 prophet of God ! my last sight of the earth is taken, 
 because thou wert the object of my desire when I used to come. Now 
 
]40 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 that thou departest from this world, I have no intention of coming again.’ ” 
 Fawa’id-ush-Sharri’sea. 
 
 229. Jfc* when used without the pronominal affixes signifies to go, 
 but it is also imperfect and has merely a past participle, agent, and 
 imperfect tense. Examples of the masculine and feminine form of the 
 imperfect tense of this verb are contained in the following extracts. 
 
 jy ai <J du UaJ 
 
 |(>j 
 
 “ All alone he was going along the road — no one was with him : 
 
 A hundred praises on such a brave and bold-hearted youth.” Bahrain 
 Gur. 
 
 r * ' s <J* 
 
 g^ls I 1*1 
 
 ^ •* 
 
 yjD Ay* i] J 5 J s 0 " u JJb 
 
 “ Nevertheless modesty became an obstacle, and with empty sighs she 
 contented herself. 
 
 fhe secret of love she was wont to keep concealed, although from her 
 eyes bloody tears used to flow.” Yusuf and Zulikha. 
 
 The Compound Past Tenses. 
 
 230. The principal use of the past or perfect participle is in the for- 
 mation of the compound tenses, and as I have already given such a 
 lengthened explanation of the former, little remains to be noticed regard- 
 ing the latter, which are obtained from them by the addition of the 
 
 auxiliary verbs, or iajjjj (rawabit-i-zamani,) as they are termed 
 
 ♦*/ // 
 
 by the Arabian grammarians. It will be necessary however to treat of 
 them separately. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 141 
 
 The Perfect Tense 
 
 23 1 . The perfect tenses are formed by the addition of the present 
 
 page 109, and like the latter are of three different classes. 
 
 232. There is such a slight difference between the two first classes — • 
 
 examples of them indiscriminately, as both end in Lp, and the terminat- 
 ing letter is alone subject to change for gender and number. Examples 
 
 of the masculine singular and plural will be found in the following 
 extracts. 
 
 “ When the morning dawned and it was time to take wing, perplexed 
 and irresolute in counsel, he began saying — ‘ What shall I do ? shall I 
 return, or with the purposed intention for which I have come out, 
 should I take the road of amusement and recreation ?’ ” iE’yar Danish 
 of Khushal Khan. 
 
 “ That thing, the time for acquiring which may have passed away, 
 becometh the Phoenix of one’s desires ; 
 
 But the immortal bird as yet hath not been caught in any one’s net.” 
 Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 233. The participle must agree with the auxiliary in gender in the 
 
 tense of the auxiliary to be, to the past or perfect participles described at 
 
 the retention or rejection of the of the infinitive — that I shall give 
 
 formation of the feminine form of this tense. 
 
142 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Examples. 
 
 s - 
 
 c/)0 <o jjf jt, .o ij&p sj l jj |j 
 
 if f l*» !<>i <± } Si 
 
 This pestilence (fate) hath reached every house and every quarter. 
 It is necessary that in this net the prudent bird should not flutter .” 
 Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 t) 
 
 
 t) b JLji 
 - ♦ 
 
 “ The sound of his charming words hath gone out into every land ; 
 and a piece of his composition is held as precious as a bond, as valuable 
 as a note of hand .” Preface to the Gulistan. 
 
 234. The plural form of the past participle being the same for both 
 genders, the only difference in the masculine and feminine of this tense 
 is in the auxiliaries ; thus, 
 
 " b *? y. y. ijl jm> U 
 
 v. •*, •« ^ 
 
 “ We have come to you for assistance , therefore make some such 
 excuse, that Durkham may show her face to us.” Adam Khan and Dur- 
 
 khani. 
 
 gc aj j\j 5 fyy cLih o ls'O 
 
 “ The curtains of carelessness and inadvertency must have fallen on 
 thy eyes, 
 
 If not so, the beloved has not drawn her veil over her face.” Abd-ul- 
 
 Ilamid. 
 
 C- \ 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 143 
 
 235. Properly speaking the auxiliary should immediately follow the 
 participle, hut it often precedes it, or follows it after several intervening 
 words ; as will be seen from the following examples. 
 
 S' 9 *99* „ “ * * * 
 
 dtujffl c> 0 8t> ds* 
 
 “Since the bright luminary of thy equity and justice hath set, 
 
 The black night of oppression hath set in, and filled the land with 
 darkness.” Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 y 41 
 
 “ The curls of this wanton sweetheart are hanging in disorder — 
 
 A shadow has overspread her lovely check” Futtih Khan, Mirza. 
 
 236. Like their Persian neighbours, some of the best Afghan 
 authors are fond of using the past participle for the perfect and pluper- 
 fect tenses, to connect the members of the sentence, and suspend the 
 sense, both in prose as well as in poetry. 
 
 Example. 
 
 A ^ f 
 
 <0 d) d) ^*1 
 
 / s + ss " ^ 4 
 
 ^ Ltfj d |* 2^1 UJL 
 
 X / •* 
 
 ^IcU ivJ (L^lcsfc i<l> 
 
 4f Shouldst thou look towards my servants, they (have) come to my 
 house in a state of affliction and distress — covered with dust from the 
 blowing of the winds — searchers after my will — seekers of my mercy — 
 they (have) come solely on my account ” Fawa’id-ush-Sharrfaea. 
 
 237. The following are a few examples both masculine and feminine 
 of the perfect tense obtained from the third class of the past participles of 
 verbs, which are either imperfect, irregular, or have a preposition prefixed. 
 
144 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Examples. 
 
 ^° ^ pi j]jj\ cu »o*<2w y 
 
 With my eyes I behold nothing of my own form or figure, as to what 
 it is ; 
 
 To this degree have I sunk in the light of thy countenance” Abd-ur- 
 Rahman. 
 
 pi Sdjl <6 dUJ^ p) d^ pi JU sj dJj£ 
 
 S * 
 
 A ^ lP*j h 
 
 ■"’’ •• • x ^ ♦♦ 
 
 “ I have sunk mfo perplexity as to whether I am awake or 
 
 whether I am asleep. — 
 
 Do I see the fulfilment of my desires, and the exceeding beauty of my 
 beloved, merely in a dream ?” Yusuf and Zulikha. 
 
 «** 
 
 « * 
 
 ^A AJ*S U* <ul<L <J Jyi ^Ajs4>r la* 
 
 “/ *v *’ 
 
 “ Some were saying, ‘ this is caused by demons who have seated them- 
 selves on this fair one’s spirit. 
 
 When a fiend takes possession of any one, he then sits alone, and apart 
 from others’ ” Yusuf and Zulikha. 
 
 J ^0 jiilj JU 0 df 
 
 - 9 9 , i 
 
 p ) Jyi JU p&> <*J^I CULc*. <■> 
 
 “ If thy face is concealed with curls, there is no cause of apprehension ; 
 The waters of immortality even are concealed in total darkness m ” 
 
 Abdur-Rahman. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 145 
 
 The Pluperfect Tense 
 
 238. The pluperfect tense is formed in the same manner as the per- 
 fect from the three classes of the past participle, to which is affixed the 
 past tense of the auxiliary to be. It is subject to the same changes in 
 termination for gender and number, as the preceding tense. 
 
 239. Examples of the singular masculine and feminine. 
 
 “ In that place there was a bone — see in what period it had fallen ! 
 
 It had become rotten too , and old — of what former age was it ?” 
 Story of king Jumjumah. 
 
 “ Halemali* had gone out somewhere , and had not be^i apprised con- 
 cerning the prophet. 
 
 Some one gave her information concerning him , and through dread on 
 his account she uttered loud cries.” Tawallud Nameh. 
 
 “ A negro had come before the monarch’s daughter , 
 
 And he extolled Muluk in numerous ways.” Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 * The name of Muhammad’s nurse. 
 
146 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ One day I had sat down on the throne quite happy, and without the 
 least apprehension : 
 
 The heat wholly overpowered me, and I became feverish — my body weak 
 and languid .” Story of Jumjumah. 
 
 • 9 ' * 9 „ **«C 
 
 (^0 p 80} I O p dU sj 
 
 UJL t J ^jLl <U l<k^. ^ (*^ ,c 
 
 li l <0 vaj 
 
 “ Alone I had lain down on the couch — I had fallen asleep in tran- 
 quillity and repose. 
 
 Suddenly this disagreeable and ungrateful slave, placed his hand on my 
 person — his lip on my chin ; 
 
 And then his odious fingers on the fastening of my dress” Yusuf and 
 Zulikha. 
 
 240. Examples of the plural. 
 
 j>j jb H ;b Jf b -‘t 2 M f 0 y/j 
 
 */ jb e l h <J i f h'r S P J Pi 
 
 “ There were ten envoys from each country, who had arrived from 
 time to time. 
 
 Her father treated them ivith distinction — he feasted them with magni- 
 ficence.” Yusuf and Zulikha. 
 
 S ' 9 
 
 J'" 5 * H ^ H *Pfb Lfj <**« j o 
 
 U^j J 4 f* P) *t f > A ^ • 1' J 1 ** ^ 
 
 * The masculine and feminine Plural the same. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 147 
 
 ({ 
 
 He said the night you had come here to enquire after this my met an - 
 
 . choly state i 
 
 Thy beauty affected me so much , that my very heart 1 s core burns eter- 
 nally Saif-ul-Muluk and Badri Jamal. ' 
 
 “ The feet of those who had taken up a place in the midst , had stuck 
 fast in the honey, and when they wanted to fly away , their wings also 
 
 “ They had sat down there , and were relating the secrets of their 
 hearts to each other : 
 
 Then these sugar-lipped ones were sucking each other's honied lips ” 
 Saif-ul-Muluk and Badri Jamal. 
 
 And on them had fallen splendid dresses of all sorts and kinds ” 
 Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 241. As I have already remarked respecting the use of the past par- 
 ticiple for the perfect tense by some of the best Pushto writers, they are 
 in the same manner partial to the use of the same participle for the 
 pluperfect, the auxiliary being understood. 
 
 became smeared with it, and they fell into the net of destruction and per- 
 dition iE’yar Danish. 
 
 “ Around the walls of the palace there were silken lines f 
 
 u 2 
 
148 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 The following extract is an example : 
 
 •» *' ^ « ** 
 
 \ ' ' • ^>* 1 " " *• ** *■ 
 
 ^<3 <^aaw 8^.5 <3 
 
 “ 2V. is the splendour of Muhammad which has shone and which has 
 been diffused on the whole world. 
 
 It was the dark night of chaos and inexistence when he like a sun had 
 arisen in it.” Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 The Doubtful Past Tense 
 
 242. This tense is also formed from the different past participles by 
 the addition of the aorist tense of the auxiliary, to be, which is not sub- 
 ject to change in termination for gender and number — the participle 
 being alone affected. 
 
 &X) J W \si JPjty ^ 
 
 “He who may have fallen from mountains again ariseth , 
 
 But he cannot arise again who may have dropped from hearts.” Abd- 
 ur-Rahman. 
 
 ~ 9 ' " '' 9 . , - A * m " 
 
 " The eighth is that man whose rank and employment an enemy may 
 have sought , and having outstripped him , may have attained that office 
 and gained the confidence of the sovereign who giveth ear to his tales.” 
 iE'yar Danish of Khushhal Khan, Khattak. 
 
 | |j ^ <0 <^o } dck 
 
 “ Before the first night as yet may have passed over a dead person , 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 149 
 
 It is a regulated institution that alms should be given on his account .” 
 Fawa , id-ush-Sharrf’sea. 
 
 243. Examples of the Plural. 
 
 K*'" ■» “H J^j^ 1 *f *** 
 
 ^ *V 
 
 <C£ 5 ij$j <ua aj ai 
 
 «* ” »♦, ^ 
 
 “ The cattle which for the most part of the year may have been kept in 
 thy own house > and may not have grazed in the wilds , there is no portion 
 of alms to be given on their account.” Fawa’id-ush-Sharrf sea. 
 
 ^ uy ^y* ^ <*“• Lfv 
 
 »* 4» y " ^ \« " 
 
 “ Their eyes will have become raised towards the road of those } 
 
 Who may have in their hands charitable gifts and alms” ‘ Abd-ur- 
 Rahman. 
 
 k**> ( j;U-^4' 0 1^5^ ji 
 
 •* ♦♦ 
 
 “In the same way as ravenous tigers may have taken their stand on 
 the mountain top , 
 
 So thy elephant drivers are standing on thy elephants.” Ahmed Shah, 
 Abdali. 
 
 The above examples will suffice for this class of the doubtful past 
 tense, as the different past participles from which it is obtained are alone 
 subject to change for gender and number, the auxiliary remaining the 
 same throughout. 
 
 244. There is however another form of this tense obtained by adding 
 the 2nd future tense of the auxiliary, to be , to the different past parti- 
 
150 
 
 A GRAMMAR OR THE 
 
 The following extracts are examples : 
 
 3$ ju aj 
 
 LfJ ^ £ Lfj ^Jc>aU du o 
 
 x z »♦ ♦♦ 
 
 LfJ *3 af ^ ^6 a-aJ du 
 
 Lf) m & u?j ^Jo'aa^j y JL a; U 
 
 ✓ ^ ♦• _ 
 
 ff may have laughed heartily , or may not , 
 
 The heart 1 s grief may have become disturbed, or may not. 
 
 She may have chosen tranquillity and ease, or may not. 
 
 Some one may have enquired about the matter, or may not.” Abd- 
 ul-Hamid. 
 
 jj<L ao a^A a; c^*>0 ijj? 
 
 j/J *i JJ u?j ^ 
 
 - ;* 
 
 “ See ! he may have become seated aggrieved amongst some asses, 
 
 Or may have fallen like a ruby amongst dust and ashes.” Abd-ul- 
 Hamid. 
 
 * * 9 ~ S' ? 
 
 a) U du dob du al^A. 
 
 “ May God confound thee thou fly of human nature, 
 
 For no mouth may have been left free of thy kiss.” Ahmed Shah, 
 Abdali. 
 
 The Past Conditional Tense aJ^ 
 
 245. The past conditional or optative tense of the Pushto verbs is 
 obtained by subjoining the imperfect of the auxiliary, to be, to the past 
 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 151 
 
 participle, with which a conditional conjunction or adverb of wishing 
 must either be expressed or understood in the same sentence. 
 
 246. The auxiliary remains unchanged throughout this tense, and 
 the past participle is alone subject to change in termination for gender 
 and number, therefore a few examples will suffice, as they have been 
 already explained at length. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 to J-% Lf b ^ 5 j 
 
 *» y / 
 
 ' 9 A ,u . * • \' \ 
 
 “ Would that I had never been born ! that I had never come into this 
 world ! 
 
 That I had never seen grief, nor experienced this amount of tyranny 
 and oppression” Yusuf and Zulikha. 
 
 ^ f* ** ^ ** 
 
 “ He became greatly aggrieved, and he also complained against the 
 folks; saying — c if my son had died, half the people of Balkh would 
 have condoled with me.” Fawa’id-ush-Sharrfsea. 
 
 247. With a conditional conjunction or adverb of wishing either 
 expressed or understood, the second person singular of the imperfect 
 tense of verbs also conveys a conditional or optative signification, similar 
 to the preceding, but it is alone used for all six inflexions. 
 
 The following are examples. 
 
 ^ «» 
 # 
 
 43 <y 
 
152 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ For a fool there is nothing better than silence : were he aware of 
 this counsel, he would not be a fool Gulistan. 
 
 “ I had not sunk to this degree in grief and affliction , 
 
 If admonition had gone more or less into my heart Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 “ Could the hand of any one accomplish the works of the Almighty, 
 No one would suffer a moment to pass without obtaining his own 
 desires ” Abd-ur- Rahman. 
 
 248. The second form of the imperfect tense obtained from the sim- 
 ple past by prefixing the particle & as already described at page 138, 
 paragraph 226, is also much used in the construction of the past condi- 
 tional tense, as will be seen from the following example. 
 
 “ By whatever road they were fleeing , the stones were raining on them. 
 If they ascended the mountains the dread birds followed them” 
 Tawallud Nameh. 
 
 and the consequence by the second form of the imperfect above 
 alluded to. 
 
 249. Sometimes the condition is expressed by the simple imperfect 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 153 
 
 Example. 
 
 | X) & LSj*> Xj ^jcjl d) ^ Jf J 
 
 * •< n *• 
 
 “ Ere this, love would have burnt down the house of my body , 
 
 Had not tears come to my assistance” Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 250. The simple past tense is often used in a hypothetical sense, and 
 the consequence by the second future tense ; as, 
 
 s s y " * p s * — " 
 
 “ The Kattar Kafirs will become converts to Islam , 
 
 If the guardian (of the beloved) is softened by my tears” Abd-ul- 
 Hamid. 
 
 Ahmed Shah also writes, 
 
 a) ^Ji\j ^U| df \j dj xjj o 
 
 u I will seize the sword of courage and resolution, 
 
 If grace and mercy come from that which is hidden” 
 
 251. Of the two forms of the conditional just explained, that obtain- 
 ed from the imperfect tense, for which the past tense of the auxiliary 
 to be is used, with the particle d) prefixed, is alone subject to change in 
 termination for gender and number. 
 
 The Present Tense 9 dk^a- 
 
 252. There being fourteen classes of intransitive verbs, including the 
 perfect and imperfect, the present tense of each is formed in a different 
 manner, by altering, rejecting, or adding other letters after dropping the 
 J of the infinitive, and affixing the necessary pronouns. 
 
 253. Class 1st is formed by rejecting the <J of the infinitive, and 
 
 changing the last radical letter for another; as to recover 
 
 x 
 
154 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 (health) ; {sp+P), to fly, isjjK to become ensnared, 
 
 to know, etc. 
 
 Lf y *> L?f x tf j* *> 
 
 af aS a; o CJ^-l o Lpl^A 
 
 (t Man neither dies on account of it, nor recovers from it : 
 
 May the Almighty not afflict any one with the pain of love !” Abd- 
 ul- Hamid. 
 
 y ' ' ' -£<< 2 ' \S 2 
 
 U^. ^Jj^J | L£j^J a^ di a^k. }j a) 
 
 “ 7%is is not the nightingale which flieth around the rose, 
 
 It is my soul which hath flown towards thee.” Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 *1 
 
 ^ x / / y s _p ✓ ✓ '2 
 
 _j^A a) o aj a*) a£J c>&j >a^ j 
 
 “ 77ie Rustams of patience and abstinence like little children, 
 
 Take shelter in privacy from the deep gash of love .” Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 ' jf ^ ^ y* d*ly° c 
 
 >/0 a£J . 'LlA , ^Ic 
 
 ^ \jn ™ y l*' 
 
 “ Some became prophets, and some became disciples, but they made a 
 gentle disposition and good qualities a net. They led particular persons 
 astray, and the public became entangled in the net like birds” Makhzan 
 Afghani. 
 
 < 4 ^ <4 (tfij* 01 ** J H ‘H 
 
 “ In the worship of God, the sweat flows like a river , 
 
 But I tire not by mid-day with ploughing the land” Kasim All, 
 
 Afridi. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 155 
 
 (^d <U. o (^J »t>AJ Id 4a. 15 40 1) \jy** ))f* 
 
 LS'd <*JL d S(>aJ^ Id 4a. A) J *J <V JJ 
 
 <( The Prophet said to us — f Do you know what this stinking smell is 
 occasioned by ?’ The Companions of the Prophet said unto him. ‘ W e 
 do not know what this impure smell is produced from.’ ” Fawa’id-ush- 
 Sharrfsea. 
 
 254. The present tense of the verbs of the 2nd class is formed by 
 
 dropping the of the infinitive, and rejecting the two last radical 
 letters ; as in to run, and to rain. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 p s / s &p s 
 
 4>A/0 IaJ dd* 0 ( d-U3 d 
 
 ✓ X /> / // 
 
 plcj y v_jlj <J ( jj6 &y <y 
 
 “ I obtained such assistance from the faculty of speculation, 
 
 That in one breath I run from Kaf to Kaf—from one end of the world 
 to the other.” Futtih Khan, Mirza. 
 
 ySy d jr a; LfjjJ d^b jj Q)jjb y>& ^ 
 
 ✓ *V x 
 
 “ Though rain falleth on the thistle for an age, 
 
 It will never become a violet.”* Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 255. The verbs of the 3rd class, reject the of the infinitive, and 
 the three last letters in forming the present tense ; as i^A^r to sit. 
 
 so" X X ^ f ft A $ 
 
 J? l •H pb Jbji H V J jb' ji *f J> *> p. 
 
 Pb 
 
 •* <" ^ 
 
 “ The hawk said c when he calls out to me, I return from my flight, and 
 
 * The violet is called at times the Gul-i-Paigliambar, or the Prophet’s flower. 
 
 X 
 
 2 
 
156 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 I sit on his hand. 3 The cock answered, ‘ you speak truly.’ ” iETyar 
 Danish of Khushhal Khan, Khattak. 
 
 256. The verbs which constitute the fourth class are few in number. 
 
 They reject the J of the infinitive and the last radical letter altogether 
 in forming the present tense, and the first vowel which is long, is lost by 
 elision ; as in to crack , or split. 
 
 Example. 
 
 “ She has no equal in loveliness, 
 
 On her account loving hearts break.” Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 257. The 5th class of verbs drop the of the infinitive and the last 
 radical letter for two others in forming the present ; as to ascend. 
 
 The following is an example : 
 
 v- ** 
 
 *>■> y? ^ ° y 
 
 “ Through crudity and rawness, ebullition and agitation ariseth from 
 the pot — 
 
 Of the heart’s death the manifest tongue giveth evidence.” Abd-ul- 
 Hamid. 
 
 258. The 6th class merely rejects the (J of the infinitive, without 
 altering the other letters ; as cJj'' 0 to die. 
 
 / y / # -< -• y s * . * 
 
 <0 o L> fjo aj JUj o 
 
 “ At the fountain of attainment of desire, I die with lips parched, 
 
 From the burning inflammation of the anxiety of separation.” Abd-ul- 
 
 Hamid. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 157 
 
 259. The 7th class of verbs adds another letter after dropping the J 
 of the infinitive for the present tense as in to burn . 
 
 Example. 
 
 — * 
 
 <0 )) U? too to Sjb JJ I ^ Oas' 0 o c/jl* 4a* 
 
 “ 0?x becoming aware that Muluk burneth in the fire of love, 
 
 He again began to speak his thanks and congratulations to him 33 
 Saif-ul-Muliik, and Badri Jamal. 
 
 260. Class 8th drops the J of the infinitive and afterwards rejects 
 
 the two last letters, and lengthens the first syllable from ( ) to I in 
 
 the present; as to bark , to siving . 
 
 Example. 
 
 ^rf\j ji u ji-fjiy* ^ yip h y 
 u pij o b» yyt 
 
 “Red with blood like unto red roses swing 
 
 A thousand hearts in every bend and twist of thy ringlets 33 Abd-ur- 
 Bahman. 
 
 261. The verbs of the remaining six classes are all imperfect, and 
 only two — the 9th and 11th classes — have any present tense : the remain- 
 der take the present of some other verb to supply the deficiency. 
 
 262. The present tense of verbs of the 9th class is formed in a similar 
 manner to that of the verbs of the 1st class, by dropping the J of the 
 infinitive and substituting another letter for the last radical one ; as in 
 
 to break, to remain, to pass away, etc. 
 
 Example. 
 
 ^ Lsyy 
 
158 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ Alas for pleasant life that passeth away thus ! 
 
 Like water it glideth along , alas ! alas !” Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 to run , which is of the 10th class has no present tense, but 
 
 uses the present of which bears the same signification, and has 
 
 been already described under the 2nd class, to which it belongs. 
 
 263. Verbs of the 11th class form the present tense in a similar 
 
 t 
 
 manner to those of the 6th, by the mere rejection of the of the 
 infinitive, and adding the different affixed pronouns ; as in & to go. 
 
 Example. 
 
 y 9 
 
 “ We knew nothing whatever respecting ourselves , as to where we go. 
 Neither did we (then) understand what country it is or what placed 
 Saif-ul-Muluk, and Badri Jamal. 
 
 264. to go , which constitutes the 12th class in itself, has no 
 
 y 
 
 present tense, and uses that of to go or depart , which belongs to the 
 following class. 
 
 y 
 
 265. The infinitive ji; to go or depart, which constitutes this 13th 
 class, is one of the most irregular verbs in the Pushto language. It uses 
 
 y 
 
 ^ as the present tense, which belongs to some unknown root. 
 
 Example. 
 
 jU 
 
 yj \j piL <u 
 
 “ The Prince said — ‘ Make ready my horse and spear , oh friends 
 For I go to China — 1 have very many stages before me.” Bahram Gur. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 159 
 
 266. to come , constitutes the 14th class of the intransitive 
 
 verbs, and is similar to the preceding. The prefixed \j is sometimes 
 changed for and the significations of which have been given in 
 Chapter IY. It has no present tense of its own, and uses that of 
 with the prefixed pronouns already referred to. 
 
 The following is an example : 
 
 ^ <*** Jlj\ 
 
 
 
 ^ ^ •• •»" ' 
 
 L> 
 
 “Again a sound came , that , Ibrahim the friend of God cometh, 
 Aggrieved in heart on account of Imam Husain's death. 
 
 Lady Sa’irah too cometh afflicted and sorrowful , 
 
 Disconsolate on account of Imam Husain's death ” Muhammad 
 Hanifah. 
 
 267. In works on divinity, and, other religious writings^ or 
 
 is very generally affixed to the third person singular and plural, mascu- 
 line and feminine, of the present tense, as in the first line of the example 
 just given. It is also added to the Aorist, Future, Imperative, and the 
 Past, and will be found explained under those heads. 
 
 The Aorist Tense 
 
 268. Properly speaking the present tense is formed from the aorist 
 
 * 
 
 by rejecting the prefixed J of the latter, which constitutes the only dif- 
 ference between them, therefore it will not be necessary to give separate 
 examples of each of the fourteen classes of the intransitive verbs, but 
 
160 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 merely to point out any peculiarities that may exist, and exceptions to 
 general rules. 
 
 The following are examples : 
 
 $ A * 
 
 <v jk) j viJjj 
 
 ♦I ’ »« 
 
 (e Like as a foivl may become entangled in a loose snare of a hundred 
 nooses , 
 
 So her dishevelled locks entangled me in embarrassment and perplexity 
 
 Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 ** j # jf ^ x&x? d*. *jm i ob jJ jj d*. 
 
 I A A * > 9 « | 
 
 (^UL yj 0 8(>*J j\ L^Jjljybah.^ JU 
 
 <c When it comes to his recollection that , I have not made the first 
 kacedah * and he be about to arise from his sitting posture, he should 
 return to the same position and perform the kacedah.” Fawa’id-ush- 
 Sharn’sea. 
 
 0 **J J? } *i fi ^ fj 0 J L? 1 -*- H ^ 
 
 S)b o Lf^ ^ 
 
 “ If I should stand here, the crow will seize me. ; what is it necessary 
 to do ? He said — ‘ the goods of genius and prudence are invented as a 
 remedy for difficulty and perplexity ” iKyar Danish of Khushhal 
 Khan. 
 
 *9 !• / y ^ ^ 
 
 H ^ ^ Jl> ^ 
 
 “I said, I should flee to some other place away from these, 
 
 * A form of sitting at prayer. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 161 
 
 But they running after , quickly seized me.” Saif-ul-Muluk, and Badri 
 Jamal. 
 
 *X) *? J 
 
 .♦ t* 
 
 u He will become worthy of the sash of the beloved, 
 
 When his heart may burst with patience like the rose bud” Abd-ul- 
 Hamid. 
 
 ■" y.' ' ' ' A % | - A * <s 
 
 & M aJ L fjjtf dJj) j] L fy°j <*f> 
 
 M / 
 
 . «. ' . I A > ^ a . " 
 
 jk* a^ c^*aac aJ ^ ^hS ^ 
 
 •* ♦♦ «♦ x 
 
 “ If a person should die, and may have repented of calumny, he will 
 enter into Paradise before all the rest of the creation ; but if he should 
 die, and may not have repented of slander and evil-speaking , he will enter 
 Hell long before the rest of the world.” FawaTd-ush-Sharrf sea. 
 
 9 
 
 269. The prefixed } of this tense, like the > of the Persian, is often 
 rejected as redundant, but the proper signification can seldom be mis- 
 taken. In the following extracts will be found examples in which it is 
 rejected in some instances, and retained in others. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 S p ^ 
 
 lio a.£k. 
 
 * I ^ H M # ^ 
 
 | o a^. as^- 
 
 “ What cause for astonishment is it though the Phoenix should be- 
 come entangled in the net , 
 
 Y 
 
 1 
 
162 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 (By means ) of every bird-catcher who possesseth the net of sincerity 
 and love” Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 
 Lf <>4- & sjf'ifi {ffi ^ 
 
 2Sl) 
 
 <£T 
 
 “ Wisdom also maketh this demand , that the dust of unfaithfulness 
 should not rest* on the skirf of any one’s circumstances or affairs. The 
 cock answered him — ‘ What ingratitude , or what bad faith has been found 
 in me ?’ ” TE ? yar Danish. 
 
 v ^ h . 1 *h y d t i“f j ;* d t ^ f*t 15 ° 
 
 k' Jljsj J-i u J*" d ! £JJ j\ 4) J-** 
 
 t jj l^X] aj 
 
 “ The second is, that I should turn my inward regard towards her, so 
 that her heart should be filled with agitation, and her reason and 
 intellect confused and confounded, by which means her soul ivill employ 
 her on some other affair, and will render her countenance visible like a 
 lighted torch.” Adam Khan, and Durkhaui. 
 
 — - y s s m 9 9 
 
 “ Our God hath bestowed grace on s thy faith fid, so that they should 
 
 / ' ' ' " j 
 
 walk in the ways of Muhammad, the Chosen One.” Fawa/id-usli- 
 Sharrfaea* 
 
 ✓ 
 
 270. An example of the ^ or V prefixed to the third persons of the 
 
 * This is an example of the particle of negation inserted. See Sec. 421. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 163 
 
 aorist as well as other tenses in religious writings* referred to at page 
 126, is contained in the following extract. 
 
 '• ^ - •’ ■ v " v . 
 
 ^ „ y * 
 
 ^ ^ j jj) dj b y,)\ & Lfj'**' ^ 
 
 '9 9 9 
 
 ^lia* jot? L^w) (Jl y*» ** ^ J 
 
 “ Whether a man may sink in the water and he drowned , or may be- 
 come consumed in fire , or may be devoured by wolves ; under all these 
 circumstances the interrogation (at the last day) is certain and beyond 
 a doubt, for He is Omniscient, and Omnipotent FawaTd-ush-Sharrfsea. 
 
 ls£ Future or Precative Tense jc |. 
 
 271. The 1st future or precative tense is precisely the same as the 
 
 ' ^ 
 
 aorist* with the exception that it adds the particle 0 to the third person 
 
 singular and plural, whether masculine or feminine. 
 
 ; . 
 
 272. As I have already stated, the aorist merely differs from the 
 
 >> 
 
 present by the prefixed and the 1st future from the aorist by prefixing 
 the ^ to the third person, and consequently it will be unnecessary to 
 give examples of each of the fourteen classes of intransitives, which have 
 already been given for the present, as by prefixing the particles referred 
 to, these tenses can be formed. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 kjfi * ‘‘V ^ jjk u bj °yb- ° 
 
 “ Hb should stand parallel with the head of tile mausoleum , with his 
 face towards Mekka , and he should stand about three or four yard 
 distant P EawaTd-ush- Sharri'aea. 
 y 2 
 
164 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ^ t/) CL -* S ; r '■f? *j+» 
 
 0 (^liL dkit <u j c> a«& ob a) jj 
 
 “ If d man by inadvertency should omit the appointed section of the 
 Koran (in prayer) in either of the first two inclinations of the body , and 
 at the time of making the inclination , it cometh to his recollection , he 
 should return to the bending position, and on that very place repeat the 
 section required Fawa’id-ush-Sharn’sea. 
 
 273. Like the preceding tense, the prefixed } of this also is often 
 rejected altogether, and sometimes understood ; as in the following 
 extract. 
 
 t> a/j a«x ^ 
 
 •v 
 
 l i ^ oly erf ‘‘t ^ <i>W 
 
 k* j aA*. a*& a) ^JLb o 
 
 X ♦*/ ^ 
 
 “ ^4 listener to slander will become liberated from that sin when he 
 
 shall deny it with his tongue , refrain from it, or shall put in a 
 
 word , so that the calumny be refuted ; or he should rise up from the 
 place , and release himself from hearing backbiting Fawafid-ush- 
 Sharrf sea. 
 
 274. When a personal pronoun is used with the third person of this 
 
 9 
 
 tense, the <3 precedes the prefixed } of the aorist, but when the third 
 
 X 9 
 
 personal pronoun is not used, the j precedes the t> ; as in the following 
 example. 
 
 y>$ j b a) aj Uw j ai 
 
 ^ / 
 
 “ Let not fire reach the house of any one, 
 
 Though its brightness be that of the sun and moon. 33 Abd-ur-Raliman, 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 165 
 
 The Second Future Tense 
 
 275. The second future tense is formed from the aorist by the addi- 
 tion of the particle to, and is subject to exactly the same rules and varia- 
 tions as that tense. 
 
 Examples are contained in the following extracts : 
 
 .. - 'A — -A 
 
 X) jj &S J CXaJ to JU 
 
 I \ 9 " x 
 
 <u> (JU* to to jit 
 
 J X) )o\yC XI j\Jj St> dJJ 
 
 y y s y 
 
 c#" Jh* " ur^ ls 
 
 *• " X y 
 
 y 
 
 “ Passing over the bridge of Sarat is true my friends, and you will 
 be perturbed through awe. Both good and bad will assemble on it ; 
 all actions will be weighed, and every one will know the state of his 
 case.” Fawa/id-ush-Sharrfsea. 
 
 A S , -- / ».i x 
 
 C> LSJfJ *: to aJi ^yo j x) hj jk \j *X) ^ 
 
 jkL lsjZ 
 
 (< If thou dost not take pity on me, I shall die. Thou wilt not act 
 rightly ! thou wilt murder thy sister ! Why dost thou speak, oh deceiver ?” 
 Adam Khan and Durkham. 
 
 «» ^ «» " *• 
 
 “ There are some scorpions of Hell, that if they strike a mountain with 
 their sting, it will burn, and become ashes.” Story of Babu Jan. 
 
 9 
 
 276. As in the two preceding tenses, the prefixed j of this also is 
 rejected as redundant, but invariably so for those verbs which do not 
 take j in the past tense which see. 
 
166 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Examples. 
 
 \ * * ' ' * ' St . ~ .(*. 9 * 
 
 UJ ctej ^ ** w*Jj <0 ^ojyd 
 
 
 e£j 
 
 aJL 
 
 “He who departeth from this world, will not return again in any 
 way, 
 
 Whatever may he his good qualities, for this is the common law of the 
 world” Kasim All, Afridi. 
 
 v '.V * w\ h / * ■ *f *• Ory V 9 
 
 ^ <J * jh J*f yy * *v *i ^ r Jl 
 
 Kyti \j <L) f^&jy ^ ^«U> <U ^ ^ 
 
 A 4 • . c* A 
 
 ^ 
 
 «♦ *• 
 
 “ Depressed in mind, and altered in countenance, Adam Khan said unto 
 Meru and Bald — f if this affair is not completed by my hand, I will dis- 
 appear from this country. Will you go with me, or will you not V ” 
 Adam Khan and Durkham. 
 
 *9 * 
 
 277. When a regular personal pronoun ( <U^du* ) as well 
 
 as the affixed personal pronoun ( <sLaA,o y.^ ) i s used in this tense, 
 
 the precedes the particle y, but when no separate pronoun is used, the 
 9 
 
 & follows the y. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 9 ' . fjL 
 
 ^y\y ^ ft ^^y*** lJ^ o^° ft ^ 
 
 f[+) fly*** y \) f . bb y y <U <&S y\ 
 
 “ I am a longer after roses, I am burnt to the heart by separation. 
 Shmildst thou put off the time to evening even, I shall become en- 
 tirely consumed.” Yusuf and Zulikha. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 167 
 
 * . " 4 , r! ' ' % ' ' ' ' j-cT, 9 
 
 C * p* jL\ *) Ai j pc. o 0 jx aj ^ 
 
 “ The morning of the dark night of sorrow will dawn at last ! 
 
 The grief of separation will at length reach its termination \ 33 
 Yusuf and Zulikha. 
 
 278. In poetry some license is taken with respect to the <*f, and it is 
 often inserted between the syllables of a word ; as in the following 
 couplet : 
 
 
 “ When in this doubt , he should look from the corner of his eye towards 
 the congregation, and determine that ‘ if they sit , I will also sit, and if 
 they rise I will also rise/ ^ Ruslnd-ul-By’au. 
 
 Several words may also intervene between the particle and the verb- 
 one may be at the commencement, the other at the termination of the 
 sentence ; as in this extract : — 
 
 Afiw 6 Aj t) <to SjX? pjj j jk)j t> <V jhf &) 
 
 “ Utter not any more words of counsel or admonition, 
 
 Otherwise I will now go out to the paganism of black curls 33 Abd- 
 ul- Hamid. 
 
 The Imperative y*\. 
 
 279. The imperative mood is always formed in a similar manner to 
 the 1st future tense, with the exception, that it has no first person singu- 
 lar or plural. It drops the affixed personal pronoun for the second 
 persons, and is not subject to change in termination for gender, but is 
 
 
168 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 subject to the same rules and exceptions as the preceding tenses of the 
 aorist and first future. 
 
 The following are examples : 
 
 ^ <0 j) dU djL d& H (^*** ^ ** 
 
 <e Go not towards Syria ! turn back now ! Remain stationary in some 
 place , if thou hast any affection for the Prophet .” Tawallud Nameh. 
 
 UrijtJ L£jy l^I jf* ^ J'i [) ^ ^ 
 
 “ My beloved showeth none of the customs of affection towards me, 
 Alas! my dark dark destiny! shine out a little on me.” Abd-ul- 
 Hamfd. 
 
 •' X ^ / 
 
 “ Be not deceived oh monk, with the devotion of hypocrisy ! 
 
 For the slave-girl’s son and daughter will be held in no estimation.” 
 Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 Ui 0»3l> jj] dU 2^j dU tjJL <u U1 <>3b JU 
 
 “ Come sometimes to my tomb, oh my beloved one ! 
 
 Burn not my heart ( even there) with the fire of separation.” Kasim 
 AH, Afridi. 
 
 * 'J ' 
 
 Transitive Verbs 
 
 280. Under this head are included primitive and casual verbs, 
 which form their past tenses somewhat differently from intransitives. 
 
 281. The past tenses of primitives and casuals are formed by reject- 
 ing the the sign of the infinitive mood, and prefixing to this base or 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 169 
 
 9 9 
 
 or root, the particle, the sign of the past, which is written^, and jjj ; as 
 
 s s * s p s. y 9 '9, 
 
 to shake , - y or - y he shook ; {Jyjy\ to cause to fly, 
 
 9 **\i p * p \ 
 
 y])y\ ~ y or *y\jy\ ~ y he caused to fly. 
 
 .9 
 
 282. Derivative verbs formed from adjectives by the addition of Q \y 
 
 Peject these two letters in forming the past tenses, and thus return to 
 their primitive state, and the past tense of the verbs or iJy to do, 
 is used in forming it ; as bent , to bend, <*) he bent ; 
 
 ^Jjs hard, to harden, £ cjCfr he hardened. 
 
 283. A few verbs derived from nouns and pronouns by the addition 
 
 of {Jy are subject to the same rules ; as j;£ to sound, sound, 
 jf CJut he sounded ; to make one’s own, self, yfl JhaA 
 
 he gained over. There is, however, an exception to this, like all other 
 
 .9' 9 9 
 
 rules, in (Jyyly to frighten, from fly fright, which becomes yjflj - y or 
 9 9 9 ^ 
 
 *y\fl„y - y he frightened. 
 
 284. In the same manner, when primitive intransitives are made 
 
 9 > /• 
 
 transitive, by changing the of the infinitive into {Jy as to burn, 
 
 9'.' 
 
 (I.) (Jjyi to burn (T.), and derivations derived from adjectives made 
 transitive by changing the <Jc>3 into (Jy ; as to swing (I.) and 
 
 uy-^i) to swing (T.), the same rules are applicable as for the verbs men- 
 tioned in paragraph 282. 
 
 285. Transitive verbs must agree with their object in gender and 
 number, in all the inflexions of the past, and the object must be in the 
 nominative, and the agent in the instrumental case. 
 
 U?; ^3 My\ jL y | ly <ix& y\ Jy* 
 
 “ The king called the boy’s mother and father , and dismissed them 
 with many gifts.” Gulistan. 
 
 z 
 
170 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 286. The affixed personal pronouns ( <*l*a*^ ) are not used 
 
 * 
 
 with transitive verbs in the past tense, and the regular prefixed personal 
 
 pronouns in the instrumental case must be used instead. 
 
 The other form of personal pronoun used with verbs to denote the 
 agent, described at page 57 — 59, paragraph 123 — 125, is used with 
 
 transitive verbs to denote the agent, and may precede or follow the } 
 the sign of the past, but the former is the most common. 
 
 When, as in the following example, an affixed personal pronoun is 
 used with a transitive verb, it points out the objective case ; as, 
 
 u Thy languishing eyes made me intoxicated without wine: 
 
 For this reason I wander about drunk and dissolute , without power or 
 endurance ” Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 287. There are no less than twenty-four classes of transitives perfect 
 and imperfect, but only ten methods of forming the past tense, therefore 
 I shall divide them into so many forms. 
 
 288. 1st Form. The verbs of the 1st, 6th, 7th, 8th, and 12th classes 
 
 form their past tenses by rejecting the (J of the infinitive, and length- 
 ening the first vowel from ( ) to I in the singular as in the following 
 
 examples. 
 
 “ With what modesty and diffidence shall I behold bashfulness and 
 
 chasteness — 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 171 
 
 The bud hath thrown back the veil from its head for the sake of the 
 rose 33 Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 ct Mulla Karmali sent some one on before — saying , ( go and give in- 
 formation to Durkhani, that The Unfortunate with people along with him 
 hath come to the spring 3 33 Adam Khan and Durkhani. 
 
 “ That very hour Zen Zenah sent men after Muttalib and called him, 
 and he entertained him like a brother 33 Tawallud Nameh. 
 
 What is thy condition ? relate thy affairs unto us. 3 33 Saif-ul-Muluk 
 and Badri Jamal. 
 
 “ The whole of my limbs they bound with chains of fire : 
 
 I became pinioned, and in this anguish I became distressed and 
 afflicted. 33 Story of King Jumjumali. 
 
 290. The first and second persons plural are the same as the third 
 person masculine singular, with the plural form of pronouns prefixed. 
 
 s> 
 
 The third person masculine plural is formed by merely prefixing the j 
 to the simple infinitive, as in the three examples just given. 
 
 289. The long vowel t is again rejected in the plural for ( ) ; as. 
 
 “ The nurses said to her, ‘ oh daughter ! 
 
 z 2 
 
172 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 291. Another form of the third person plural, applicable to all 
 classes of verbs, is written in a similar manner to the form for the femi- 
 nine singular, as is also the case with regard to intransitive verbs * 
 
 The following extract is an example : 
 
 
 “ Quickly she gave her own clothes to the king’s daughter , 
 
 And clothed herself in the royal robes’ ’ Saif-ul-Muhik and Badri 
 J amal. 
 
 292. The feminine form of the past tense of transitive verbs is ob- 
 
 tained in the same manner as that of intransitives by affixing or <*) 
 to the masculine in the singular, and Lp or ( ) for the plural. The 
 
 is more frequently written than the latter. 
 
 Some verbs take <* and <*J indiscriminately in the feminine singular, 
 whilst others again merely affix the and the verbs of the 1st Form 
 now under explanation, are included in these exceptions. 
 
 293. Examples of the feminine singular. 
 
 “At the place where the wind forced away my veil , 
 A goldsmith was seated in his shop.” Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 A 9 + * A 
 
 b y* ^ 
 
 “ The hand of destiny and death struck the drum of departure, 
 Therefore oh my eyes, you should bid adieu to the head” Gulistan. 
 * See page 126, paragraph 210 and note. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 173 
 
 + ft . ^ ' * 
 
 o |j Xy*Jj jto Jj y ci^s^ sj ^‘“ 17 '° ^ 
 
 ^jl43 
 
 “ This matter was exceedingly difficult for Moses, nevertheless when h e 
 
 > 
 
 cast it ( his staff) down, it became a serpent . This happened by the 
 power of the All Powerful” Babu Jan. 
 
 294. Examples of the plural. 
 
 s p p p * s p y p 
 
 d'f'-j *J f 6\f y/J H jf *i J* ciyJ*l 
 
 “ The red coloured tears from his cheeks he shed, 
 
 And through the excessive grief of absence he was like saffron .” Saif-ul- 
 Muluk. 
 
 295. Some infinitives have more than one method of forming the 
 past tense ; as in to speak, or to say . 
 
 The following are examples : 
 
 y,L ,/ y J? " jjy 
 
 / •* X M •* 
 
 “ The queen spoke to her mother clandestinely, 
 
 And with this circumstance also, she acquainted Badri.” Saif-ul- 
 Muluk and Badri Jamal. 
 
 ✓ ■ + 
 
 “ Nohshadah said — oh ! king of the Universe ! 
 
 In this manner I discover from the books.” Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 The two examples just given are only used in the masculine. 
 
 296. 2nd Form — Consists of the infinitives of the 3rd 4th, and 10th 
 classes, which form the past tense by merely rejecting the (J of the infi- 
 
 * This latter form is more properly speaking the imperfect tense, but used for the 
 past. See page 184, paragraph 320. 
 
174 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 nitive and prefixing the particle as exemplified by the following 
 extracts. 
 
 “ In my life-time thou didst put me out of thy remembrance , 
 
 Like as one forgetteth a deceased person of a hundred years ” Abd- 
 ul- Hamid. 
 
 y» ptf***' 0 ^3 <>aJ )) i>aJ 
 
 x ° / 
 
 “ When Abu Bakr made an exhortation , they all took his advice } 
 acted up to it, and became resolute in it” Fawa’id-ush- Sham* sea. 
 
 y £ £ / ' ^ y 
 
 ^ ^ j zy \j i yS sj W 
 
 “ Again she gave two pieces of gold into my hand 3 
 And required of me the value in pearls and corals.” Saif-ul-Muluk 
 and Badri Jamal. 
 
 297. The plural of this 2nd Form of the past is derived in the same 
 manner as for the 1st. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 vp.yf *jf 0 otj* h 
 
 v' 
 
 /-> 
 
 
 )r° j 
 
 
 
 LT^ 
 
 JO 
 
 * 
 
 jr 
 
 
 j 
 
 9 
 
 »;! 
 
 
 
 >• 
 
 OJ 
 
 !c>aJ 
 
 
 ✓ 
 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 r^ 5 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 175 
 
 “ After forty days they came into the 'presence of the King, 
 
 And made their statement to him in a humble manner — 
 c We have searched through seven regions with great care, 
 
 And find there will be a daughter born to Skahbdl, son of Shah Rulch, 
 Her name is Badri Jamal — the sovereign of the fair.’ ” Saif-ul- 
 Muluk. 
 
 298. Some of the infinitives of the 3rd and 10th classes ending in 
 which are contained in the 2nd Form of the past tenses, insert a ) 
 before the final letter for the third person masculine singular, which is 
 
 changed to I for the plural, the CU then taking an affixed ( ) or <* ; as 
 
 to behold, CDjS - ^ he beheld, M they beheld . 
 
 The following extracts are examples : 
 
 “ The Goldsmith saw that his sweetheart cometh, 
 
 He went out to receive her, delighted and overjoyed ” Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 299. The infinitives which constitute this 2nd Form of the past, use 
 
 <( Sa’ad saw that the prince was not seated on the throne, 
 And through his mind' this thought passed ” Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 4 and indiscriminately for the feminine singular termination, affixed to 
 
 the masculine, which are changed to Lp or ( ) and or J in the 
 
 plural. 
 
 Examples. 
 
176 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ With all speed he repeated the invocation , 
 
 And he breathed on the fair face of the beloveds Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 ^ / ✓ y ^ ^ ✓/ ✓ / p 
 
 2 1 jj A^-=k. Aw J* J J ^ jj 
 
 aIa***^ \j i k _4 > ° 
 
 te My mother said unto me — ( thy grandfather divides the propitiatory 
 offering of dates’ therefore I came and took up a date.” Fawa’id-ush- 
 Sharrfsea. 
 
 a) J W 
 
 ‘/u* 
 
 J j] 6y» jb U jj <jJ <Jj 
 
 “ He placed ten thousand men under each commander , 
 
 And then he demanded boats from the boatmen ” Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 — H «» 
 
 “ Then he dressed himself in plain new clothes , 
 
 And sat in solitude and retirement like the monks.” Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 300. 3rd Form. The infinitives of the 11th and 14th classes form 
 the past tense by rejecting the <J of the infinitive and prefixing the 
 
 9 
 
 particle ) as in the preceding Form, with the exception that the last 
 letter of the root is accented or moveable in this, whilst it is quiescent 
 in the former. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 “ When Durkham heard this reply with her ears , she became faint 
 and powerless ; she sighed , and became (as it were) blind and deaf” 
 Adam Khan and Durkhani. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 1 77 
 
 . < . c> 
 
 ^1) ty*>Lx *X*> il^L*» ^ 
 
 “ He said — f beneath the shadow of the wealth of royalty 1 kept all but 
 the envious, pleased and contented, but they did not become satisfied ” 
 Translation of the Gulistan. 
 
 301. The feminine terminations of the infinitives of this Form, are 
 
 A and <d for the singular, and ( ) or ^ and or for the 
 
 plural. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 9 # * M s> % .9 . ' ' * 
 
 8t>AA^J j 6 j*L. ** fjj J O £*L^> 
 
 ♦* ’ '* 
 
 <*3 lo ^3 j &jJ aX o ju^S^pl jS 
 
 “ In the morning when her father beheld her, he came to his son-in-law, 
 and asked him about it, saying, 
 
 f Oh rascal ! how sharp are those teeth of thine ? To what extent wilt 
 thou stretch her lips ? they are not leather !’ ” Gulistan. 
 
 A * ✓ >■ 
 
 ubj "jjy j y d&jjb s jy t*> y 
 
 “ When the nurse heard this speech from him, they at length departed 
 for their own house ” Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 L L (^O <*J ^3fO Jbt 
 
 " ♦* ^ 
 
 When the nurse heard from her such singular and uncommon words, 
 
 2 A 
 
178 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 She became amazed at the circumstance , and perplexed as to its 
 remedy Yusuf and Zulikha. 
 
 302. By far the greatest number of infinitives in the language form 
 their past tenses according to one of the three Forms already explained, 
 for which reason I have given pretty numerous examples of them. The 
 infinitive of the remaining Forms being few in number comparatively, 
 will not require so many examples to illustrate them. 
 
 303. 4th Form — obtain their past tenses in a similar manner to the 
 verbs of the 2nd Form, by rejecting the of the infinitive, the last cha- 
 racteristic letter being immovable or quiescent, but with this difference, 
 
 * 
 
 that they altogether reject the j of the past, by which there is no differ- 
 ence in the mode of writing between the past and the imperfect ; thus, 
 
 to unloose , he unloosed; to take away* 
 
 lie took away. 
 
 ^JS cJ JJ <u!j ju 
 
 H 
 
 j cjlJLj aUolj j J L? 
 
 ^ «« 
 
 “ With hands folded on navel he stood before him in a respectful - 
 manner , 
 
 And in commendation of the king his tongue be unloosed.” Saif-ul- 
 Muluk. 
 
 Aw Jljl j* y y && 
 
 <jJ cUA> yy Lj fi 
 
 “ On me this torment continued for a long time , and this day a sound 
 fell on my ear 3 
 
 C 9 
 
 * This infinitive is used for animate objects, and f° r objects inanimate. 
 
V* Vo 
 
 TUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 179 
 
 Saying — c depart to the inn of the world and then they took me 
 away to that place.” Story of King Jumjumah. 
 
 " Sardasi’a unloosed her brother’s bonds , which Bahram with much 
 skill had fastened ” Bahrain Gur. 
 
 “ With much distress and suffering they took us away to the prison , 
 And treated us with much impropriety and disrespect” Saif-ul- 
 Muluk. 
 
 304. The feminine is obtained like that of the infinitives of the pre- 
 
 1st Form (which see) inasmuch as it altogether rejects the prefixed 
 
 “ The young woman took the prince by the handy 
 
 And with much pomp and grandeur seated him on the throne” Saif- 
 
 ul-Muluk. 
 
 306. The simple infinitive of this as well as other classes of verbs 
 is often used for the past tense, but in such cases an affixed personal 
 pronoun in the objective case is used with it, as in the following ; 
 
 ceding Form — or <*J for the singular, and ( ) or and and , J 
 
 for the plural. 
 
 305. 5th Form — drops the (J of the infinitive in forming the past, 
 the final characteristic letter being movable, merely differing from the 
 
 2 a 2 
 
180 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 <*) I**** j &J <J 9 <Az\j 
 fhjj J Cr^l & (^11 |t>J 
 
 “ 7V>o men came from above and seized me by the hand. 
 
 They seated me here , and cut me in pieces with a diamond” 
 hommed Hamfah. 
 
 Ma- 
 
 isj* d^* ^ ^ ) *ib u*V° H 
 
 “ He called the whole of them into the assembly , 
 
 And with much kindness seated them near himself.” Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 307. The feminine termination for this class of infinitives in the past 
 is for the singular, and ^ or (J for the plural. 
 
 Example. 
 
 0 
 
 V 
 
 ♦T ^ •« 
 
 u When suddenly that beautiful one , the beloved of the whole world , 
 
 summoned to her father’s presence, and seated by him at his side.” 
 Yusuf and Zulikba. 
 
 308. 6th Form. Consists of the infinitives of the class which reject 
 the sign of the infinitive, and last or final letter in the past ; as 
 to burn, ) he burnt . 
 
 Example. 
 
 ^ & *J Lf /" ^ 
 
 uky. fj * ; )k 6 s * ° J> *j 
 
 " I know not whether it was a man or some other thing, 
 
 Which entirely burnt me in the fire of love” Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 181 
 
 309. 7th Form. Rejects the of the infinitive, and prefixes a sylla- 
 ble to the root, the final letter of which is quiescent. These infinitives 
 
 9 
 
 also reject the prefixed } and are not common ; as (Jjj to remove , or 
 take away, X)fi removed. 
 
 Example. 
 
 “ At last thy eyes carried away my heart from me, 
 
 Notwithstanding I guarded it with patience and endurance .” Abd-ul- 
 Hamid. 
 
 310. 8th Form. The past is formed by rejecting the sign of the 
 
 infinitive, and the prefixed y ; as JJbU to play away , or lose at play, 
 he played or lost . 
 
 Example. 
 
 *k [ t y y yy h Vj* 
 
 jj J 1) (^ J 
 
 “ He who hath lost his life in pleasure, hath not bought any thing , but 
 hath lost his gold.” Gulistan. 
 
 311. The past tense of the casual infinitive is often used for 
 
 the past tense of jw* , as in the following extract :* 
 
 •V * 
 
 ^1^3^ <0 y*h ^LjLs 
 
 “ They who show enmity to the good friends of the Almighty have lost 
 their faith and religion, and have become counted amongst infidels.” 
 FawaTd-ush-SharPaea. 
 
 * See page 97, Class 5th. 
 
182 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 312. 9th Form. The verbs of this class are formed from adjectives 
 
 generally, and obtain the past tense by rejecting the used in their 
 
 j> 
 
 formation, as also the prefixed j of the past, to complete which the 
 past tense of or \j> to do , is required ; as to inter , vj 
 
 he interred. 
 
 Example. 
 
 & <u!j UA i>\j i*«4^ J ^ W 
 
 “ Then the Prophet said , Mow mmM me hell , /or Mom /jms/ filled my 
 heart with much faith.” Majmuseat-i-Kandahari. 
 
 313. The whole of the infinitives of this as well as the 6th, 7th and 
 
 8th Forms obtain the plural in the same manner as those before de- 
 scribed, and take both <* and for the feminine in the singular, and 
 ( ), <J or , J for the plural. 
 
 314. 10th Form. The infinitives of this class use the simple infini- 
 
 9 
 
 tive with the prefixed j for all three persons both singular and plural ; as 
 
 ✓ / s ' 9 
 
 to laugh , j he laughed , etc. 
 
 Example. 
 
 8<>3 CL>b (jJ&jj <d o <u|o <nl | 6 \d j j 
 
 * 
 
 “ The accursed mark was visible on his breast, and on beholding it the 
 Imam laughed. On this , Shimr said — f what is thy laughter at present 
 occasioned by, now that not one grain of thy existence remaineth ?’ ” 
 History of Hasan and Husain. 
 
 The above form of the past is also used for the feminine singular and 
 plural. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 183 
 
 315. llth Form. to do or perform, which is used as an auxi- 
 
 liary, rejects the of the infinitive and the last radical letter in the past, 
 and takes the prefixed j ; as ^ ) or & ) he did : it is imperfect. 
 
 The following is an example : 
 
 y, rf’y ^ v l Sx* yp j <u j kj 
 
 •*/ **y " 
 
 s * * 
 
 “ The Prophet made this reply to the lady Ayesha — ‘ The sound of 
 Nakir and Munkir will fall as pleasantly on the ear of the Faithful, as 
 the application of a colly rium to one’s eyes’ ” Fawa/id-ush-Sharri’asa. 
 
 316. The prefixed particle of the past is sometimes omitted, as in the 
 following extract : 
 
 ^ 6 jljb Js if 
 
 “ Notwithstanding all the force he used to remove the Imam’s hand, 
 
 Yet he did not undo the fastening of Imam Husain’s drawers.” 
 History of Hasan and Husain. 
 
 This verb has no plural form, and does not undergo change in termi- 
 nation for gender. 
 
 y 
 
 317. or <0 is affixed to the third persons singular and plural of 
 this tense, as is the case with other verbs, but it is peculiar to religious 
 writings, or at the termination of a line in poetry for the sake of 
 euphony; thus, 
 
 9 *' \ * { * \ \ 9 \ \ ' ' ' * ' 
 
 <3 SjUaw <ju 8} joe . 
 
184 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ After that Umar bin Saad who was a champion , 
 
 And computed amongst the army of the Yezidis , 
 
 With great wrath struck him with a mace , 
 
 And separated the head of that youth from his body” History of 
 Hasan and Husain. 
 
 The Imperfect Tense 
 
 318. After having explained the past tense so fully, the imperfect is- 
 easily described. 
 
 The different methods of obtaining the imperfect, may be divided into 
 six classes : — 
 
 319. 1st. — Out of the twenty-four classes of transitive verbs, fifteen 
 
 9 
 
 form the past by prefixing the y, and the imperfect tenses of the whole 
 
 of these are obtained by merely rejecting that prefix ; as to bind y 
 
 'r 9 V 
 
 j he bound , jy he was binding. 
 
 The following extracts are examples : 
 
 cs vy y h ^ 
 
 y £ 
 
 •« 
 
 “ He iv as searching about for him every here and there , 
 
 Until at last he found the prince quite beside himself.” Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 /j ji aj aJ^> 
 
 < x xx x 
 
 ji a; alxj JJ 
 
 “ One of the kings of old was extremely negligent in affairs of state, 
 and used to keep his army in arrears.” Gulistan. 
 
 320. to say } which is of the above class, has a second form of 
 the imperfect, which is also obtained by rejecting the prefix. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 185 
 
 “ All were saying — c this is a very virgin of paradise indeed } 
 
 Sent out of heaven into this world ! 3 33 Bahram Gur. 
 
 321. The plural is formed according to the same rules as the other 
 past tenses. 
 
 “All round the heavens he was viewing flames which were taking fire 
 from the stars , and his idols too had fallen, and were turned upside 
 down 33 Tawallud Nameh. 
 
 322. The feminine termination is the same for this as for the other 
 tenses. 
 
 “ Oh my ignorant heart ! Take example from the dead. 
 
 Though they used to amass wealth , they went from this world and 
 left it behind. 
 
 To-day a meeting takes place : to-morrow is separation. 33 Mukham- 
 m as-i- Abd- ul- Kadir . 
 
 “ Stones were falling on the heads of my rivals, 
 
 When I was sprinkling the dust of thy door on my head. 33 Abd-ul- 
 
 Example. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Hamid, 
 
186 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 323. 2nd. — The imperfect tense of the four classes of infinitives 
 which do not take the prefixed } is the same as the past in every way. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 O XjaL )\ j [LL <& lo a) dj a*, j ^ slw jb 
 
 M J d 
 
 •* ✓ ** •* 
 
 ^1x^13 0 jjU. J (^11 <0 (^^IJ <tee> 
 
 “ The king said , ‘ By this command an error has been committed by 
 me , and in a moment of anger an expression has escaped me, but under 
 such circumstances it is necessary that thou wouldst bring* into play 
 such reflection as may be suitable to the condition of a wise counsellor ” 
 iE’yar Danish. 
 
 M ♦* « *' 
 
 “ He had no inclination for eating or for drinking, 
 
 Neither did he open his eyes in any manner ” Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 324. 3rd. — Two classes of verbs lengthen the short vowel ( — — ) 
 preceding the last characteristic of the past for, I in the imperfect ; as 
 
 to bury, £ he buried, he was burying . 
 
 Examples. 
 
 )y. b ^ [ib H fb'J /j 0 S J i*‘ <J 
 
 “ Since they were bringing me up to suffer the pangs of love for the 
 fair, 
 
 Would ! that in my childhood my father and mother had been child- 
 less” Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 * The imperfect tense is often used in a potential as well as an habitual sense. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 187 
 
 1 l) 1 ^ JA&/0 <£) Aiw ^ ilvot)b <J Jt^b ^j^J5^3 
 
 *ji <■> ***> <■> Jjj**j U ^ <*j ^ ^jy 
 
 “ When thou didst make Fir’ceawn* a ruler , who in Misr\ laid claim 
 to divinity ; 
 
 The river Nil% became obedient unto him , and thou for his sake didst 
 affliGt thy chosen people .Ӥ Babu Jan. 
 
 325. 4th. The imperfect tense of to take away or remove * 
 which forms its past by prefixing y, and which differs from all the other 
 
 infinitives in the language in this respect, is formed by rejecting y in 
 
 s> 
 
 the same manner as the J in the first form. 
 
 / h 9 9 * A 
 
 Jj <6 i)jj J j\jj | <& t>Hj U ^ 
 
 A) Xj JosJ y£ ji 2J aJ CL ? bj A) Us* J 
 
 “ / saw a learned man who had become enamoured with a person, and 
 his secret became known. Indeed he used to endure no end of injustice 
 and cruelty, and show great forbearance and resignation 9 Gulistan. 
 
 326. 5th. Another form of the imperfect, used in a continuative 
 sense, is obtained by prefixing the particle <V to the past tense, as exem- 
 plified by the following extracts : 
 
 jt <y 3-b J. j & " Jj (f % v 
 
 <iij dJ dJ it) 3)1) 4:) <u|^ ^ <jU. <*) U 
 
 Notwithstanding I constantly weep and wail, I found no other part- 
 
 ner in my grief than the nightingale. 
 
 I would speak of the circumstances of my beloved, and he would 
 
 lament on account of the rose 9 Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 * Pharoah. t Egypt. X The Nile. § The Israelites. 
 
 2 b 2 
 
188 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 JU ^ j] £ cJ/t^ ^ jIa^a. AAa&)| 
 
 y£ XjS SUdb O A; Lj ^| c^a*^I; a* 
 
 “ In short the shoemaker accepted the young prince's service , and with- 
 out apprehension he used to bring him to his own house, and take him 
 back to the palace." iE'yar Danish. 
 
 327. This prefixed appears to be used indiscriminately with both 
 the imperfect and past, as in the following extract, in which it is pre- 
 fixed to the simple imperfect of one verb, and to the past of another, 
 both forms conveying a continuative meaning. 
 
 ' , 9 9 . 9 1 1 9 « 9 9.y ' . ' s' 
 
 dU ±}J A*jJ> aJ ZJ U b Zjjjss’j AJ A> 
 
 ^ r i ^ %JA*t A i A=^J aLm* 0 ^ ^ A^b. Am? 
 
 /• ** 
 
 a1&^ 1^ AJ ^ 
 
 H 
 
 ff Howmuchsoever a person was diseased, or his sickness were even the 
 plague or ulcers, yet he would become cured of that malady when Musa 
 would touch him with the rod ; and when he would strike dried up 
 trees with it, they would become fresh, and fruit would hang from them." 
 Babu Jan. 
 
 328. A few imperfect verbs which have no past tense, form the im- 
 
 9 
 
 perfect, when they have one, in a similar manner to those which take } 
 in the past. 
 
 329. The terminations for the feminine gender already explained are 
 the same for all classes of verbs. 
 
 The Compound Tenses. 
 
 The Perfect Tense 
 
 330. The compound tenses of transitive verbs arc obtained, in the 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 189 
 
 same manner as intransitives, by adding the different tenses of the auxi- 
 liary, to be, according to the gender and number of the governing noun, 
 to the past participle of the verb conjugated. 
 
 331. Transitive verbs have but two forms of the past participle 
 
 which differ but slightly from each other — one affixing ^ with its 
 
 variations for gender and number to the infinitive ; whilst the other 
 
 rejects the <J of the infinitive, and affixes it to the root ; thus 
 . / t * * 
 to ask , as ^ e ^ > l)}** burn, LSJ** burnt . 
 
 ♦* 
 
 There are consequently but two forms of the perfect tense, and there- 
 fore a few examples will serve to illustrate it. 
 
 332. Examples singular and plural. 
 
 ' \? ' K ' A " , ^ 
 
 ft f ^ {J. 
 
 “ The scorpion said, oh brother ! the fear produced in my heart from 
 crossing this water, hath thrown me into the whirlpool of perturbation” 
 iEfyar Danish. 
 
 ^£0 aj ) A jO jb gb 
 
 ^ Ua. a^ 
 
 ** ** « x 
 
 “ What is the crown and the throne of thy sovereignty ? 
 
 Since thou hast taken the name of my union with thee.” Saif-ul- 
 Muluk. 
 
 a<£ aj^ ^*3) aj *i>U |0 
 
 AJ CUj&S J 
 
 “ f This unembellished firmament became ornamented with ornaments and 
 embellishments , which the diamonds of omnipotence and power have 
 carved.” Futtili Khan, Mirza. 
 
190 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 V) ^ c'r if ^ ji Lp 1 ^ tej&S 0 U> 
 
 “I have perused a hundred volumes on patience, and endurance, 
 
 But what shall 1 do? I am out of patience, and distracted in heart? 3 
 Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 333. The participle and auxiliary assume the feminine form and 
 number to agree with a governing noun of that gender ; as, 
 
 “ That from which even Majnun was appalled in the grave , 
 
 Love hath assigned such a grievous calamity unto me? 3 Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 pi ^ &»y^ id'*’ y* h J ^ Lf ^ ^ 
 
 •v 
 
 “ I have entrusted with thee both my destiny and inclination ; 
 
 In every way I will be the most humble of thy lovers? 3 Kasim All, 
 Afridi. 
 
 334. The auxiliary is often rejected in this tense, as in the following- 
 extract :* 
 
 ji j,y y^y** ^ ^ ** 
 
 «• ^ ♦» 
 
 & G ^ I/O 
 
 •* •* 
 
 “ Thou art the apple of my eyes, and that camel on which thou art 
 mounted, together with the goods loaded on it, I have given unto thee? 3 
 Tawallud Nameh. 
 
 The Pluperfect Tense 
 
 ♦♦ 
 
 335. This tense is formed in the same manner as the preceding from 
 the past or perfect participle, to which it adds the past tense of the 
 auxiliary. 
 
 * Also see page 143, paragraph 236. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 191 
 
 Examples. 
 
 W ^ ^ l) ^ ^iLvuuJ 0 *)J 1*3 
 
 “ I had not as yet taken the name of friendship, 
 
 When separation again assembled an army against me.” Abd-ur- 
 Rahman. 
 
 ————— ___ ✓ 
 j*?U. <JU &U»j> tj c L^Sj 
 
 “ The Afrit who had borne away the mandate of Shahbal, 
 
 Had brought it immediately into the presence of the king” Saif-ul- 
 Muluk. 
 
 z > " f -* " 
 
 ✓ * ** C_ 
 
 A * yjii &'* X* fff ^ 
 
 “At any time whatsoever, the Prophet had never performed any acts 
 of enchantment, 
 
 Neither had he ever spoken falsehoods in his life time.” Fawa*id-usii- 
 Sharfsea. 
 
 336. Examples of the feminine. 
 
 
 <*b 
 
 A A X '' + s s " ^ 
 
 &j o d&fj ^ 
 
 “ Damnah said, { a certain tortoise had acquaintance with a scorpion, 
 and one with another used to breathe the breath of unity and concord ; 
 and they had moreover laid the foundation of friendship and affection ” 
 iE’yar Danish. 
 
192 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Sfjy sfj 4 * 
 
 Jt H )} JQ ) X 
 
 “ At this dialogue Muttalib became much terrified , for by unseen hands 
 swords had been drawn, and vjere gleaming all around him.” Tawallud 
 JNameh. 
 
 The Doubtful Past Tense 
 
 337. This tense also is obtained from the past participles, and the 
 aorist tense of the auxiliary, to be, for which there is but one form, 
 
 which remains unchanged in all six inflexions for both genders. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 " 9 < 
 
 
 “ What enquiry makest thou respecting Durkho and Adam Khan ? 
 
 A person in his life-time may have clad himself in a shroud ! ” Kasim 
 All, Afridi. 
 
 P - / X S * / ^ t ^ 
 
 “ Until he may not have been shod with the shoe of madness , 
 
 The foot of every noble horse becometh rubbed on the ground of love.” 
 Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 o LSJ c> Jj pc. Ul 
 
 “ The amount of my sorrows will be within the computation of that man , 
 Who may have counted over every hair of his own body.” Abd- 
 
 ur- Rahman. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 193 
 
 338. Another form of this tense is obtained by using the second 
 future tense of the auxiliary, to be, affixed to the past participle as in the 
 following examples : 
 
 to 1==*^ to jo& (J-*A to 
 
 ” «* * 
 
 “ No one in the whole course of his life will have beheld 
 
 The trials, imposed upon me every hour by my beloved ” Abd-ur- 
 Rahman. 
 
 y _ sj / S " „ 
 
 (jlAjO to jJy> 1*4* U-a* ** JJ 
 
 O to I/O to dS {J>f*** 
 
 9 
 
 * 
 
 “ The learned man by way of apology gave answer unto him, saying, 
 ‘ my notice has never been drawn towards Durkham. If I knowingly, 
 may have acted disrespectfully towards her, may the Almighty make 
 my eyes sightless ” Adam Klian and Durkham. 
 
 The Past Conditional Tense ^*lo. 
 
 339. The inflexions of the third person masculine singular of the 
 conditional tense of the auxiliary, with the past participle and a condi- 
 tional conjunction or adverb of wishing, gives the past conditional or 
 optative tense. The auxiliary is not subject to change in termiiTation 
 for either gender or number, but the participle is liable to both. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 + ' S 9 ' y . /- '9 
 
 pz 4) O c> OjIs W LfJ ^Jt>J (J jS 
 
 “ If thou also hadst seen in the same manner what I have beheld, 
 
194 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 perhaps thou too might est have fled from their oppression into the deserts 
 iE'yar Danish. 
 
 L> dJ JU IJ ^)(>j y* I^ijl 0 aS" 
 
 “ If thy heart had found any quiet in truth and sincerity , 
 
 Thou wouldst not have bestowed adulation or flattery on any one.” 
 Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 A | ' 9 . ~ % A ~ 
 
 LSfl'i ^ I <L> to {jpjjL. L-J L^j ^ ^ 
 
 “ Had my heart but been aware of this kind of anguish, 
 
 I would never have taken even the name of friendship.” Abd-ul- 
 Hamid. 
 
 H Lf b c yfa ^/° ^ 
 
 “ I would not for a moment have selected absence, 
 
 Had any one placed death and separation for me to choose between.” 
 Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 The Present Tense 
 
 340. The twenty-four classes of transitive verbs have twelve methods 
 
 of forming the present tense, the whole of which differ materially from 
 
 % 
 
 each other, and require a separate explanation. 
 
 341. 1st Form. This consists of the infinitives of the 1st, 2nd, 5th, 
 17th, 18th, 20th, 21st, and 24th classes, and constitutes the greatest 
 number of verbs in the language, which obtain the present by merely 
 rejecting the J of the infinitive and affixing the necessary personal pro- 
 
 & 
 
 nouns. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 V — 
 
 'b l *: 
 
 
 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 195 
 
 u A pampered son taketh not to discipline and morality, 
 
 And a shaded palm giveth not ripe dates.” Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 3U 
 
 M ju jd> ihb o ^*3 o ^ 
 
 “ 1 pro ft ties sly place a load on my head for the sake of carnal desires , 
 But my waist never becometh bent for devotion or prayer” Kasim 
 AH, Afridi. 
 
 342. 2nd Form. The two last radical letters are rejected and two 
 
 u » • A , 
 
 others taken in lieu of them ; as to demand or desire, 
 
 * 
 
 he demands. 
 
 Example. 
 
 / p + S * y , * 
 
 jif) 3J ^ f 4 ** J 
 
 J* 'ft* uhj) 
 
 /• ** •* ♦♦ 
 
 ft Through dread I am unable to look on the host of her beauty — 
 
 Her eyebrows are bows ! her eyelashes pierce through coats of mail !” 
 Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 343. 3rd Form. In forming the present tense of the verbs of this 
 division, the two last characteristic letters are rejected, and another 
 
 ' 9 
 
 taken in place of them ; as to find , y ° he found, etc . 
 
 Examples. 
 
 f s j */ b ff *xb fj Jlr" f M )^i 
 
 “ She made this request to her father, saying, 1 All those of my own 
 age learn to read, give directions that I may learn to read also * ” 
 Adam Khan and Durkham. 
 
 *X) 0 " yj) ( *> Lf ^ yj 
 
 “ There are many extrinsic friends in the world, 
 
 2 c 2 
 
1 9b 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 But Rahman findeth not a friend of the heart.” Abd-ur- Rahman. 
 344. 4th Form. These infinitives lengthen the first short vowel 
 
 (— — ) into I for the present; as v-ta to speak , he speaks ; Ji? 
 
 to weep , he weeps. 
 
 Example. 
 
 ^ 
 
 dh* ft j J ** (*}ty 
 
 “ If any one asks, ‘ What hath happened to thee, O ! Mad Afridi V 
 I laugh and weep hut I do not tell my perplexed state to any one” 
 Kasim Al^ Afridi. 
 
 315. 5th Form. This includes the infinitives of the 7th class, and is 
 something similar to the one immediately preceding. It changes the 
 short vowel {-—) for j in the present ; as to call or name, Jy 
 he called. 
 
 Example. 
 
 d Lfj-^ &)) y <3)b wf 
 ' M ^ 
 
 Ioj 
 
 “ Thou callest God the giver of daily bread, nevertheless consider it 
 acquired by employment ; 
 
 Yet with all this knowledge, thou callest thyself grateful.” Abd-ur- 
 Rahman. 
 
 346. 6th Form — constitutes the 8th class of infinitives, which reject 
 
 * s 
 
 the last radical letter and take another in place of it; as to kill. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 197 
 
 Example. 
 
 “ What between thy eyes and thy eyelashes, I am perplexed and be- 
 wildered . 
 
 One kills me with red fire, the other with sparkling glances ” Abd- 
 ul- Hamid. 
 
 347. 7th Form. The infinitives of the 10th class form the present by 
 rejecting the three last radical letters, and take another in their place ; 
 as to discharge, J he discharges. 
 
 “ So true doth she discharge the arrows of her eyelashes, 
 
 That no one escapeth with safety from the battle with her ” Abd-ur- 
 Rahman. 
 
 348. 8th Form. The present tense of the 11th class of infinitives is 
 obtained by altogether rejecting the two last characteristic letters of the 
 root and the of the infinitive ; as to hear, he heard. 
 
 “ When I hear the sound of her dog’s voice , I become as delighted, 
 
 As one becometh merry and glad at the melody of the rebeck ” Abd- 
 ur- Rahman, 
 
 Example. 
 
 Example. 
 
198 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 349. 9th Form. The infinitives of the 12th class, which constitute 
 this division, reject the last radical and the of the infinitive fcr the 
 present ; as to recognize , he recognizes. 
 
 Example. 
 
 9 * * * 9 ^ ^ v' 
 
 • ** y 1 
 * 9 y s s 
 
 ^ ^ 1<^A. ^ 
 
 “ And if the other sayeth unto him , ( I do not recognize the will of 
 the Almighty ,’ or, ‘ In this place the will of God availeth not,’ or, ‘ The 
 influence and power of God, extendeth not here he becometh a bias - 
 phemer .” FawaTd-ush-SharrFaea. 
 
 350. 10th Form. The infinitives constituting the 14th class of tran- 
 sitive verbs, change the final letter for another in forming the present 
 tense, similar to those of the 6th Form, but so far differ inasmuch as 
 the former contain but two letters in the root, and the latter three. 
 
 Example. 
 
 Jj itfW* 
 
 u OJJ 
 
 
 u The grass which moveth not from its proper place acquireth moisture ; 
 Then wherefore scourest thou the world in search of thy daily bread.” 
 Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 351. 11th Form. The 19th class of infinitives form the present tense 
 
 ✓ * 
 
 by rejecting the last radical letter of the root for two others ; as Jjd 
 to knead, he kneads. 
 
 Example. 
 
 cJjJ £ } &2J & Ua. <0 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 199 
 
 “If I take the steed of the heart on the road of carnal desire, 
 
 He goetli not along, for my heart’s reflection made him lame ” Ahmed 
 Shdh, Abdali. 
 
 352. 12th Form. The verbs of the 23rd class form the present tense 
 by affixing an extra letter to the root after rejecting the sign of the infi- 
 nitive ; as (J to burn, ) ie burns. 
 
 Example. 
 
 Lb o ^ <0 xy y 
 
 “ Fire burns whatever may be cast into it, 
 
 In the same manner, a seeker after this world will not become satiated. 7 
 Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 353. It is here necessary to mention that the infinitive to do, 
 has two other forms of the third person, besides the regular ones 
 
 ✓ 
 
 and ^ examples of which are contained in the following extracts : 
 
 y s 
 
 Si'f y~ a; aL* a; 
 
 “ Alas ! Christians exercise dominion over Hindustan ! 
 
 Oh ! where are those valourous swords-men gone ? 
 
 Shopkeepers have now become soldiers in India, 
 
 And the great and noble of the land ask for alms Kasim AM, 
 Afridi* 
 
 l^b;0 d aj dife'j J O CL?;Uc dJ tVl *f> 
 
 “ Whosoever placeth his hopes on the fabric of this world, 
 
 Voyageth on the ocean in a paper boat’ 7 Abd-ur- Rahman. 
 
 * The Afrldis of the present day do not seem to have a more favourable opinion of 
 the shopkeepers than our friend Kasim All in the last century. 
 
200 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 354. The above form is often written with 
 
 * ; thus- 
 
 
 
 H 0 J? c> 
 
 S 
 
 * 
 
 £ 
 
 “ If a monarch maketh a boast of the imperial treasure, 
 
 Lovers will make a boast of the cheeks of their beloved .” Abd-ur- 
 Rahman. 
 
 355. The affixed or di already described for the other tenses, is 
 also used with this. 
 
 Example. 
 
 \ rK. ' ^ ' 9 
 
 yyy f d^y 0 i Lf J 
 
 “ Act not as he says, for the whole of his advice and counsel is delusive 
 
 and wrong. Sin is his snare — the fowler of the Faithful — and maketh 
 them slip and slide in many ways.” Eawa’id-ush-Sharrfsea. 
 
 The Aorist Tense £jUi*. 
 
 / 
 
 356. The aorist or future indefinite tense of transitive verbs, is 
 formed in a similar manner to that of the intransitives already described, 
 but they have also some peculiarities of their own. 
 
 357. I have before remarked respecting the intransitive verbs, that 
 properly speaking this tense is an original one, and the present formed 
 
 9 
 
 from it by merely rejecting the prefixed whilst the present tense of 
 those which reject this particle, is the same as the aorist itself. 
 
 358. There are four different forms of the aorist, which I shall 
 describe separately. 
 
 359. 1st. Thirteen out of the twenty-four classes of transitives — 1st, 
 3rd, 4th, 6th, 7th, 8th, lltli, 12th, 13th, 14th, 19th, 21st, 22ndj and 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 201 
 
 9 
 
 23rd, merely differ from the present by taking the prefixed as seen 
 from the following examples : 
 
 £>'*#yb \j &-&J 
 
 is* Jk j*> h J^V- * 
 
 “ Every recluse who may begin a life of devotion without a guide or 
 director , 
 
 In the imagination of Khuslihdl Khattak, is but an empty pod. i} Khush- 
 hal Khan. 
 
 aJ Ua. 
 
 “ Though I may behold with mine eyes an hundred wrongs at thy 
 hand , 
 
 Yet I shall never become convinced of thy injustice and cruelty Abd- 
 ur-Rahman. 
 
 f ; J <jf 
 
 y y ~ ^ y p y A 
 
 ul k s ib cr%° 0 isp b f d t »f j y_ 
 
 “ They made a request unto the prophet Sultman, 
 
 Saying , ‘ Oh king ! give direction unto Nohshadah, 
 
 That he here repeat a tale in such a manner , 
 
 That the whole assembly of friends may hear/ ” Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 «• «• ** 
 
 ** *• " 
 
 A 
 
 * The second person plural in some works is written as above instead of with 
 2 D 
 
202 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 " The world is a place of filthiness and impurity — you should keep 
 your minds at a distance from it, that you may never fall head downwards 
 into it” FawaTd-ush-Sharr? sea. 
 
 9 
 
 360. The prefixed j of this class of infinitives is often rejected as 
 redundant, like the ^ of the Persian. 
 
 The following is an example : 
 
 A t , s K * + p 
 
 o ^IXa^o d) 8^1*0 \j o y 1 
 
 9 9 
 
 rr 
 
 W 
 
 " We are hopeful that through the blessing of veracity and candour, 
 both of us may obtain redemption from the talon of grief and anxiety ” 
 iEPyar Danish. 
 
 361. 2nd. Six classes of infinitives — the 5th, 9th, 10th, 16th, 17th, 
 
 9 
 
 and 20th, entirely reject the prefixed j in the aorist, and therefore this 
 form of the verb does not differ from the simple present in any way. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 d ctl cLx IaJ U cLsaX ya jS 
 
 0 ] Xj fj> 'j ilb ° ij , t-j-* 
 
 t( If I should stake and lose my head on love, then what blame is it 
 of mine ? 
 
 If they should stake their heads on thy esteem, what cause of grief 
 is it to them” Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 9 . , ' 9 . A 
 
 y <b. JU. \j 
 
 djo >/(/ It) 
 
 “ Come now, that we may abandon the sorrow and trouble of the 
 
 world ! 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 203 
 
 That after a good fashion we may warm this companionship with 
 
 wine: 
 
 Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 362. 3rd. The transitive infinitives of the 2nd class which are formed 
 
 from adjectives by the addition of require the aorist tense of & 
 and to do, to perform ; as in the following examples of to fill, 
 
 and to prove. 
 
 *0" ^ 'r* I J L * 
 
 «• 
 
 “ Like the moon, fate hreaketh on the head to-morrow, 
 
 The wallet of any one which it may fill to-day” Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 Cjf L fj'i 0 ^5^ L£ji ^j° I j'i 
 
 “ That friend and companion of mine, alas ! is now no more, 
 
 That on him I might prove the sincerity and truth of friendship.” 
 Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 363. The verb to do, as I have before observed, besides the 
 
 regular form, has two other forms of the present for the third persons 
 singular and plural. One of these, written is used with 
 
 the addition of the necessary affixed pronouns, and the prefixed y, for all 
 the inflexions of the aorist both singular and plural. 
 
 Example. 
 
 lo pit £ j j\j>\ aJ £ 
 
 cAi 1 , 
 
 * See page 96, paragraph 160, and page 16S, paragraph 281. 
 2 D 2 
 
204 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 " He who may confess with his tongue, and may truly venerate. in 
 his heart — 
 
 Saying, ‘ I have acknowledged the One God, and the holy Prophet has 
 been sent — 
 
 Verily, he hecometh a Mussleman, and the Mussleman is an orthodox 
 man.” Rashid-ul-By’an. 
 
 364. The other form of the third person present is also used for 
 the aorist, hut merely in the third persons, and with or without the pre- 
 fixed 
 
 Examples. 
 
 <Q A) aJ J Cl) ^dJ^AXO 
 
 AJ»I« <V j* ^UL*o A) yf A) A) J.A|l) yS A) 
 
 “ The Mu’ cetazilas * have said, that Musslemans who may commit an 
 enormous sin, will doubtless depart from their faith, but it will not consti- 
 tute paganism, and they cannot be termed either Infidels or Believers 
 Fa w aTd - u sh- S h ar n’ sea . 
 
 ^ ciO jJ* jJU ^5 j c_4 
 
 Si>AjU A^ ^aaa. 
 
 “ The brightness and lustre, will become world- conquering like the sun , 
 
 Of every brow, which candour and probity may illumine.” Abd-ul- 
 Hamid. 
 
 1st Future or Precative Tense y\. 
 
 365. This tense like the corresponding one for the intransitives, 
 merely differs from the aorist in the third person singular and plural to 
 
 * A sect of Muhammadan schismatics. 
 
# 
 
 PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 205 
 
 which is prefixed the peculiar sign of the 1st future, and the third 
 
 * 
 
 persons of the imperative mood. 
 
 366. There are three forms of this tense, which differ slightly from 
 each other. 
 
 367. 1st. The regular verbs which take the prefixed ) in the aorist, 
 
 merely prefix the 0 to it for the first future. 
 
 ✓ 
 
 Example. 
 
 “ He should perform the ablutions anew ; still washing the whole body 
 is much better. He should also take two clean cloths , which may be 
 either quite new or washed , one of which he should wrap round the loins , 
 and the other he should throw over his shoulders .” FawaTd-ush- 
 Sharrfsea. 
 
 368. 2nd. Those verbs formed from nouns and adjectives by adding 
 iJj as already described,* which require the assistance of to do, in 
 
 (( Moreover it is incumbent on every believer , that he should learn 
 by heart these few words, that he may thereby strengthen his faith.” 
 Makhzan Afghani. 
 
 forming their different tenses, do not take the prefixed j in this tense. 
 
 The following is an example : 
 
 369. 3rd. The different forms of the aorist of to do, are used 
 
 * See page 96, paragraph 160, and page 168, paragraph 281. 
 
206 
 
 * 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 with the prefixed 4 of the third persons, for the first future also, either 
 
 “ Day and night he should worsihp and adore ; 
 
 He should abandon all sin and disobedience ; 
 
 He should ever give good counsel to his heart ; 
 
 And should keep himself according to the law. 
 
 He should make observation to-day, for to-morrow is separation ” 
 Mukhammas of Abd-ul-Kadir. 
 
 ✓ 9 9 9 p . * * | _ 
 
 “ If a man in the constant habit of praying, may become afflicted with 
 sickness, and it may be difficult for him to stand up, it is the order that 
 he should say his prayers sitting” Rashid-ul-By'an. 
 
 370. The second person of the imperative, is sometimes used with 
 the 6 prefixed for the third person of the first future, as in the following 
 extract : 
 
 with or without the prefixed J ; as, 
 
 " In the hope of what pleasant thing art thou in the time of youth free 
 from care ? 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 207 
 
 May the Almighty remove thee ! oh thou ignorant Panjabi Jutt.” 
 Futtih Khan, Mirza. 
 
 “ It is stated in the Sharahh Tanbiah , that it is right on the part of 
 the relations and neighbours of the defunct person , that they should 
 send victuals to his family.” Fawafid-ush-Sharri’aea. 
 
 372. The second future tense of transitive verbs, of which there are 
 
 four forms, is obtained from the different forms of the aorist by the addi- 
 tion of the prefixed 4J, and are as follow. 
 
 373. 1st. Regular infinitives which take the prefixed j for the 
 aorist; as, 
 
 “ You brothers will go in search of game , and will be so much taken up 
 with your sport , 
 
 That you will put him altogether out of your minds , and will become 
 incautious regarding him . 
 
 Then some old wolf will whet his fangs on him , and will tear his tender 
 kmbs asunder.” Yusuf and Zulikha. 
 
 371. The termination ^ or previously described, is added to this 
 as well as the other tenses of verbs for the third person. 
 
 Example. 
 
 2nd Future 
 
208 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 <U \j X'S> JU;| <JUk.^A<«0 0 4$^ dlxks dU ^aXj| ^ dU <d 
 
 “ By inference I will conclude that it is occasioned by my monitor , 
 If through patience and long-suffering any misfortune befalleth me” 
 Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 374. The regular infinitives in this as well as in the aorist sometimes 
 reject the prefixed } ; as, 
 
 p '9 
 
 $ O Jj_J 5} 
 
 Jb o'" fib v v j 4" ^ v" 
 
 <f The nurse said , ‘ oh daughter l now God forbid, 
 
 That I should mention such a secret matter to any one.’ ” Saif-ul- 
 Muluk. 
 
 375. The of this tense sometimes precedes the j and vice versa. 
 It depends on whether a regular personal pronoun ( dhakX* ) as 
 well as an affixed pronoun ( ) be used, or the regular per- 
 
 sonal pronoun omitted at the beginning of a sentence. 
 
 a / s p 9 /• ^ ✓ p 
 
 eM; *y i lHj. ° *> <*0 y J? 
 
 / X ✓ y ^ X X ✓ S 9 p 
 
 “ He said thus unto him , ‘ Oft Me great day of resurrection , 
 
 And the Almighty shall make enquiry concerning justice ; 
 
 I will enquire of thee, Oh! ‘ Saleh son of Hamid, 
 
 Regarding the equity and benificence shown to the whole nation .’ ” 
 
 Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 (i«j i> ^oUIJjL 
 
 9 . — > 
 
 L j ** 
 
 M 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 209 
 
 " Until he may not have become immersed like the rose in his own blood , 
 He will not behold thy blooming rose-coloured cheek ” Abd-ur- 
 Bahman. 
 
 376. 2nd. Infinitives, in other respects perfect, which reject the pre- 
 fixed } in the past tense, also reject it in the aorist, and consequently in 
 the second future also. 
 
 Example. 
 
 ✓ , s * ^ 
 
 dS JU (^<3 dteJ UJL ps: I 
 
 “ In the first place , my concern is as to whether at the time of death 
 I shall bear away my faith, or whether I shall lose it” Fawafid- 
 ush-Sharrfsea. 
 
 377. Compound infinitives formed by prefixing a participle to a sim- 
 
 " A '' 
 
 pie verb, such as 1° place, to seize , etc., also reject 
 
 the J. 
 
 Example. 
 
 JU J/jiL juL jU a) J j 
 
 “ I certainly will not relinquish the punishment agreeable to the 
 laws . The Durwesh said, ‘ You command truly, nevertheless, he who 
 stealeth part of any property devoted to pious uses, it is not lawful to cut 
 off his hand’ ” Gulistan. 
 
 378. 3rd. Infinitives formed from adjectives, nouns, or pronouns, by 
 adding (Jj, require the aid of to do, in this as well as the other 
 5 e 
 
210 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 tenses, and consequently are subject to the same rules as that verb 
 in forming the second future tense ; thus, 
 
 “ The young maiden said, ‘ Oh youth ! wherefore hast thou come here ? 
 This is an infidel, and he will break all thy bones !’ ” Bahram Gur. 
 379. The infinitive to do, is sometimes used in forming the 
 tenses of these derivative verbs ; as, 
 
 9 „ a x ^ ^ a , . i ^ * a ' A 
 
 e>y d i l fj* ^ j y ^ ^ [Vj^ y 
 
 fc How long shall I endure sorrow? There is no remedy found for this ! 
 And therefore I will cut my throat with a sharp sword.” Saif-ul- 
 Muluk. 
 
 380. 4th. The infinitive Jy to do, chiefly used as an auxiliary to 
 other verbs, particularly those of the 3rd form just described, prefixes the 
 to to its different forms of the aorist for the second future. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 ju Sj 
 
 (^0 ^ to } 
 
 “ What answer shall I Rahman give unto my beloved ? 
 
 What reply is therefrom the dead unto the living ?” Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 \f k' \f ju ^ j 
 
 s’ 
 
 “ The merciful showeth mercy at the last day. Infidels he will send 
 to Hell, but the Faithful he will make joyful and glad, and infidels he 
 will disperse and put to flight.” Makhzan Afghani. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 211 
 
 ' \ ' ' W 
 
 >* ~ 
 
 V Ji \^J&) d 1 )^ *> cTv' 
 
 ✓ «- 
 
 “ Green parrots and nightingales fly about the parterre in disorder and 
 tumult , 
 
 But the autumn will now soon arrive , and will disorder the garden 
 for them ” Abd-ul-Kadir. 
 
 The Imperative Mood j*\. 
 
 381. The imperative of transitive verbs like that of the intransitives, 
 is not subject to change in termination for gender, and has no first per- 
 son singular or plural. It merely differs from the aorist and first future 
 as regards the pronominal affixes, and the ^ the peculiar sign of the 
 third person of the latter tense. 
 
 382. There are four descriptions of the imperative, which may be 
 thus defined — 
 
 9 
 
 1st. Regular infinitives which take the prefixed ) in the past and 
 aorist tenses, also use it in the imperative ; thus, 
 
 <w>b 
 
 
 
 iir jj 
 
 jjU^ Ujl afj U a) j 
 
 “Then Aurang said give ear unto me! Hear the account of the 
 battle from me , oh ! my guest ” Bahrain Gur. 
 
 Like the ^ of the Persian imperative, the regular infinitives in 
 
 > 
 
 Pushto often reject the prefixed j ; as in the following example. 
 
 fo Cj 
 
 f <V la* dtJ JUaX) zjj) 
 
 ♦♦ 
 
 ^ *? 
 
 2 e 2 
 
212 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ If a person enquireth — who is most discreet ? say it is he 
 
 Who placeth not his affections on any one save the Creator ” Abd-ur- 
 
 “ Yakub said , depart and enjoy yourselves by roaming in the forest, 
 But do not take Yusuf from me, for this matter is afflicting to me” 
 Yusuf and Zulikha. 
 
 384. The imperative mood of compound infinitives also belong to 
 this form ; as, 
 
 // / | A ' ' , * 
 
 jjs <t*U**^ If** o jjy fks JU jf L 
 
 y 
 
 “ The stranger leave out of the question, for verity, even though it 
 may be a mother or father, 
 
 Let it not happen, that any one may be in need of the help of others” 
 Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 385. 3rd. Like the corresponding forms for the aorist, and future 
 tenses, the infinitives derived from adjectives, etc. require the assistance 
 
 of to do, in forming the imperative. 
 
 Hahman. 
 
 383. 2nd. Infinitives which totally reject the ) in the past and 
 aorist, also do away with it in the imperative ; as, 
 
 Example. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 213 
 
 “ Again for the second time Badrah Khdtun said, * oh daughter ! 
 
 If thou hast any gratitude for thy mother’s milk, 
 
 One time at least, show thy face unto thy afflicted lover, 
 
 For he has performed many toils and troubles both by sea and land ’ ” 
 Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 386. Some of these infinitives have also another form of the impera- 
 tive, in which the last radical letter of the regular imperative is changed 
 into 0|, as will be seen in the following example : 
 
 h jji l<o y Jib h 
 
 “ Go to him quickly, and transmit information regarding him , 
 
 And with all possible speed bring him into my presence ” Saif-ul- 
 Muluk. 
 
 387. As in the preceding form of the imperative, some of the infini- 
 tives included in this, have also a second form ; thus, 
 
 A , 
 
 “ The king commanded, saying, ( bring you some more victuals , 
 
 And satiate this demon in a proper manner ’ ” Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 388. 4th. The infinitive ^Jy to do, is somewhat irregular in the im- 
 perative, having <*£ & or for the second person singular, and is f 
 with the necessary personal pronouns, for the third person singular and 
 
 r- • A r 
 
 plural. *y is changed into \^y for the plural of the second person. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 / . ✓ / 
 
 ^ 
 
214 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ Bring tidings of the fragrant zephyr of the morning ! 
 
 Gladden the rose of my heart in the blooming garden !” Ahmed 
 Shah, Abdali. 
 
 “ Do battle with the enemy oh my son ! do not retreat from them, so it 
 behooveth” History of Hasan and Husain. 
 
 389. The prefixed j is sometimes retained and at times rejected. 
 
 390. The Pushto like the Murathi language has no regular form Of 
 
 with a slight difference in the construction. 
 
 391. There are but three tenses — the present, past, and future. 
 
 392. Intransitive verbs have no passive voice, but a passive form — 
 the different past participles with the auxiliary, to be, — is used for the 
 potential of intransitives. The verb agrees with the agent, and the mas- 
 culine or feminine form of the past participle must correspond accord- 
 ingly ; but the third persons of the past tense of the auxiliary, like all 
 intransitive verbs, alone has a different termination for the feminine 
 gender. 
 
 393. Therefore, whenever the passive form of an intransitive verb is 
 met with in a sentence, it can be instantly recognized as the potential 
 mood. 
 
 The Potential Mood 
 
 the potential mood, and the Passive form of the verb is used instead 
 
 The following are examples : 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 215 
 
 Present Tense J u - 
 
 “ From the waves of thy love I cannot escape by any road : 
 
 Both my hayids have become powerless for the swimming of wisdom ” 
 
 Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 “ I could not overlook even a straw or a splinter , 
 
 But love hath made me disregard both life and goods.” Abd-ur- 
 
 “ If through your rank , some mode of livelihood be established for me 
 which may cause peace of mind, I shall not be able to emerge from the 
 debt of gratitude as long as I live.” Gulistan. 
 
 394. The transitive form of the potential is easily distinguished from 
 the passive voice, as both the agent and the object must be expressed for 
 the former, whilst in the latter the agent is never expressed, or remains 
 unknown. The verb also agrees with the object in gender and number 
 for the former, and the agent must be in the instrumental or agent case 
 in the past tense. The object is sometimes put in the dative, as is also 
 the case with regard to a few infinitives which require it. 
 
 Past Tense 
 
 Rahman. 
 
216 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 45 4^ ^_«C 40 
 
 LmJjlok*a.A ^jgO &0 < aJ ^^»vu>A 
 
 W ♦* 
 
 “ In the same manner as an armless sleeve cannot do any thing , 
 
 So without grace and favour, man is confounded and perplexed.” Abd- 
 ul- Hamid. 
 
 Past Tense . 
 
 l V) lA> Jd 
 
 /<. A 
 
 ^ <s; a " ^ ^ ^ f Jy u 
 
 ♦♦ *• «• *5 
 
 
 “ A holy man hath said — f To-day that you are able to do, you do not 
 understand, and when you understand, you are unable to perform ; and 
 in the same manner when I could do, I did not comprehend, and when 
 I comprehended I could not perform/ ” iE/yar Danish. 
 
 Future Tense 
 
 
 4) 
 
 
 loij oJU) O ju 4J JJ 
 
 “ Thou mult not be able to bear the burthen of trust, 
 
 Therefore travel light on the road of integrity, thou inexperienced 
 one !” Futtih Khan, Mirza. 
 
 * 
 
 \&f S ' O slid. 0 
 
 (( Every stone and every clod of earth of this world which is seen 
 All are sculls, some of kings and some of beggars.” Abd-ur- Rahman. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 217 
 
 i ' 9 • 
 
 The Passive Voice 
 
 9 ' 
 
 395. The passive voice of a verb is called from the Arabic 
 
 word signifying unknown , as the agent is never mentioned. 
 
 396. Transitive verbs alone have a proper passive voice, which is 
 obtained by prefixing the different forms of the past participle to the 
 
 * A x 
 
 auxiliaries Jp oi" to be, or become ; as in the following ex- 
 
 amples. 
 
 Present Tense 
 
 9*9 
 
 
 i 
 
 “ It is stated in the Hujat-ul-Islam that if a person lighteth places of 
 worship with lamps, he is ever forgiven the sins of seventy thousand 
 years.” Fawa^id-ush-Sharri’sea. 
 
 J fjl y aj 0 4/0 ' 3 aj AxA 0 
 
 ^ « 
 
 A 9 # " A A (f * ' 
 
 “ Owe day the Shah Namah of Ferdowsi was being read m to assem- 
 bly, on the subject of the decline of the dominion of Zohak, and on the 
 prosperity of that of Feridun.” Gulistan. 
 
 Past Tense <3^* 
 
 •v- 
 
 S A A '' A * ' 9 * * ' ' I 
 
 ^1 ^ *}*jbj* AJ ^ 
 
 a- J>" ^ ^ 
 
 “ It so happened that they were apprehended at the door of a certain 
 city on suspicion of being spies, and were placed together in a chamber , 
 and its door was closed up on them.” Gulistan. 
 
 9 T? 
 
218 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Perfect Tense 
 
 ^1^1) aU=>b l^a« 3 a) y*; ^5 <o <^y, j* a*& y 
 
 s' ** 
 
 “ If thou hast not become dead to the world before death , 
 
 Count, oh fool ! as false and futile } all thy devotion and austerity ” 
 Kasim AH, Afridi. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense 
 
 ^ Jill >1 * } Lfj~ <?£ 1) ! *&) *i *J crd;j° 
 
 ^JC, if. tf ' ^ ^ yj. ^sf 1) Lf )j 
 
 ^ c/(;’ K ^'h <c 
 
 “ Luring the whole of the Durwesh’s life no son had been given 
 unto him. He said, ‘ If the Almighty bestow eth a son on me, save this 
 ragged garment which I have clothed myself in, whatever else may be in 
 my possession, is an oblation to the poor.” Gulistan. 
 
 \' A 9 
 
 2nd Future Tense *&***# . 
 
 .9 ' .9 ' 7 . 
 
 “ No one should place a snare on the highway of this world, 
 
 The griffin and the phoenix will not become the prey of any one. ,f 
 Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 Aorist Tense 
 
 1 *ib *) j9 " Lfy;*?.; if <G. itejb ii Lpl J JJ sj <o JJ jyo 
 
 ' . . . ' \ 7 9 9 ' x " v 
 
 *>$ *** ^ (** L J fjifJ ^ 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE.. 
 
 219 
 
 “ His father said unto him, ‘ Oh son ! whatever matter thou art ac- 
 quainted with y do thou also state ’ He said unto him , ‘ I fear I may be 
 asked concerning that with which I am not familiar.’ ” Gulistan. 
 
 Doubtful Past Tense 
 
 | A ' ^ s s A £ \ , * , " ^ 
 
 &JW jj <V 4) <**A (+lj^ 
 
 s j> A * * ^ 
 
 LSJ 4) j)t>^ Lj ^ <**°! 
 
 “ Third — that man who may have been removed from his office or 
 situation, and who may have no hope of obtaining it again’’ iE’yar 
 Danish. 
 
 Past Conditional Tense <hbj£> 
 jf Lp ij <D ^Jl\j Ojaj 4J dJ ijpjl |c> 
 
 " *’ " M 
 
 aj |j s^b o 4^ &) *>ib <ua> <v U-l 
 
 U M v ♦♦ < 
 
 ✓ ^ 
 
 •« 
 
 “ ould to God that this son from non-existence had not come into 
 being ! that my love and affection had not been placed on him ! and this 
 weasel had not been unjustly killed on his account.” iE’yar Danish. 
 
 397. There is another method of forming the passive voice by using 
 the imperfect tense of verbs with the auxiliaries, but it is peculiar to the 
 transitive verbs, and is not used in forming the compound tenses. For 
 the singular, the third person is used for all three persons, and the third 
 person plural for the plural forms. 
 
 The following are examples ; 
 
 2 v 2 
 
220 
 
 A GRAMMAR OV THE 
 
 Present Tense 
 
 ^jOl3 LnJ | idd' 0 <0 J*} td IaM> 
 
 “ The agony of death , although it is called so hitter and so sharp ; 
 
 Yet by the help of thy sweet lips , it is the water of immortality Abd- 
 ur-Rahman. 
 
 X X ✓ ✓ / y- X / 
 
 *ib ^ cis'd J-jj ** J) aJ|o euliw> aJ| Id 
 
 “ The whole of these eight qualities (of God) are called natural , 
 together with the essence itself are termed primitive and pristine 
 Fawa/id-ush- Sbarrfsea. 
 
 Imperfect Tense I ^dto. 
 
 ^♦jld^-J <0 j*A/0 ^ <Lu> Acd a*u 0*^1^* d^J 
 
 “ They continued to look towards him as long as he was being seen. 
 After which the king set out on his return to Egypt.” Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 9 
 
 2nd Form for the or Continuative Tense . 
 
 •• ^ 
 
 <xj <o aj a^, ^ Id aj <^d 
 
 H * **.<* 
 
 9 ' ' 9 . . 9 . 
 
 yui OJjjij ailjib <u (jjy ^ d I <us* ^yti 
 
 “ They will say, ‘ Our practices were, that we used to be present in the 
 mosque at such a time, that there we always used to hear the calls to 
 prayer Fawa/id-ush- SharrPaea. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 221 
 
 Past Tense <3^° 
 
 ♦♦ ^ 
 
 p + * p ** ^ A I 
 
 ^ } <vli> aoUjS ^ ^ Jis^ jAaw J Ojl <*<& <*J il-iO'J 
 
 ;v L .V 
 
 •*/ 
 
 ff The king became enraged and ordered a solution of the matter . $o 
 messenger was seized awe? the epistle read.” Gulistan. 
 
 I "»T. ^ 
 
 Second Future Tense (J-aaX^o. 
 
 L <ij h <U 
 
 } . 9 ' A 
 
 c> o j|o&> a; j| Jl^l 3J 
 
 u After death an account will be required from every man, 
 According to the number of the sins of this world.” Abd-ur- Rahman. 
 
 Aorist Tense gjUa-o. 
 
 4> *£■=>«• ^ ji ^ S^aA la* <lj 
 
 / ' ^ ~ 
 
 ^ P P y ' p 
 
 *> [ t J^b ^ ^ ** cs 5 ^ •>'-» <«y JF ** *** y y* 
 
 LfJ-if <w Id <0 <« ^ 
 
 ^ " * ♦* ♦* 
 
 “ If such a speech be heard from any person on which certain blas- 
 phemy ariseth, it is not necessary to adjudge it as such on that account 
 alone ; for it may have fallen from him unintentionally, or perhaps he 
 may not understand its signification, and therefore he does not become a 
 blasphemer on that account Fawa/id-ush-Sharrfsea. 
 
 Past Conditional Tense 
 
 { j>j *** ^^ll*** I ^ I^A dJ jS 
 
 Jt> bj a) &} ^|<>A l ) &t>A> 
 
222 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “Before friendship ariseth, were but absence to be seen, 
 
 No servant of God would become mixed up in the matter” Abd-ur- 
 Rahman. 
 
 398. Both forms of the passive are occasionally to be met with in 
 the same sentence ; thus, 
 
 " <jb &)*£■ J-hf *> 
 
 . * . > r 
 
 
 cs 
 
 <i2w 
 
 v 
 
 “ Or if he thus sayeth , ‘ that in buying and selling until falsehood is 
 not spoken no profit is obtained, or if he sayeth that there is no expe- 
 dient save in falsehood and perfidy , in order that that which is unlawful 
 in the sight of God be considered trivial and trifling , he becometh a blas- 
 phemer” Eawa/id-ush- Sharri’ sea. 
 
 399. After this lengthened analysis of the Pushto verbs, it will be 
 advisable to give a table of the moods and tenses according to the 
 arrangement with which the European learner will be best acquainted ; 
 although the Arabic method, which is the same as the Hebrew, is by far 
 the most simple ; and I imagine that few will commence Pushto who 
 are unacquainted with Persian, and the primary rules of the Arabic 
 Grammar, necessary in the study of it. 
 
 400. It will be more particularly requisite to give a table of all the 
 moods and tenses of a few imperfect and irregular intransitive verbs, on 
 account of the varieties which they assume ; but I shall retain the sim- 
 pler method in the conjugations of the regular transitives and intran- 
 sitives. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 223 
 
 401. Conjugation of the irregular, imperfect intransitive verb 
 to come. 
 
 j&aa# Infinitive. to come. 
 
 Present Tense 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 / come. come. 
 
 \Jty thou comest - you come . 
 
 M 
 
 Xl; he, she, it 
 
 comes. 
 
 *\j they come . 
 
 Imperfect Tense 
 
 S. 
 
 or / was coming. 
 
 * 
 
 js\> or thou wast coming. 
 
 Mas. or CL?|^ he, or it was coming. 
 
 Fem. or s/je, or i/ was coming. 
 
 P. 
 
 7 r 
 
 \ 
 
 or we were coming. 
 
 A w 
 
 • ?/ow were coming, 
 
 o 
 
 or ^ey were coming. 
 
 F. or or they were coming. 
 
 * ' (» ♦ 
 
 Second Form for Continuative Tense. 
 
 S. 
 
 // x 
 
 f^e\) V or /Mb *> I used to come. 
 
 d) or ij*b s ! thou usedst to come. 
 
 M 
 
 F. 
 
 d) he, or it used to come. 
 
 •i 
 
 <0 or <d£]j & she, or it used to come. 
 
224 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 P, 
 
 come . 
 
 come . 
 
 come. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 Xi or & we used to 
 
 X) or *1 you used to come. 
 
 *9 “ 
 
 V * 
 
 M. xol\j X) or dU /Aey wseo? to 
 
 F. J% or J=i) " (^=1) or x ; they used to 
 
 * * » «» 
 
 ✓ >> 
 
 Pas£ Tense U*-. 
 
 *v 
 
 s. 
 
 r % or I came . 
 
 or £Aow earnest. 
 
 ♦* •* 
 
 he, or it 
 
 «# 
 
 <*UxJj or *Ur, 5^0, or 
 
 P. 
 
 >> < 
 
 or 
 
 came. 
 
 came. 
 
 we came. 
 
 A ,< A 
 
 ^1U|^ or you came. 
 
 M <• 
 
 aisl; or they 
 
 s * 
 
 F. JJ^b or vJ^!) ^^b> or the v 
 
 came. 
 
 came. 
 
 Perfect Tense 
 
 S. 
 
 F. 
 
 (*d J^b 
 
 ✓ >• 
 
 M. ^ have come. 
 
 F. 
 
 «• X 
 
 M. ^5 thou hast come. 
 
 F. 
 
 SJ Jil; 
 
 * 
 
 M. is^ he, she, it, have come, 
 
 * 
 
\o 
 
 PUSHTO LANGUAGE, 
 
 225 
 
 M. lJ^I) we have come. 
 
 «• 
 
 A ^ 
 
 M. ^3 you have come • 
 
 «* •* 
 
 M . ]) they have come . 
 
 ^ *v 
 
 Pluperfect Tense 
 
 S. 
 
 F. 
 
 p J‘b 
 
 M. 
 
 p s 
 
 ^J^\) I had come. 
 
 F. 
 
 S?; lM1> 
 
 M. 
 
 i^y thou hadst come. 
 
 F. 
 
 *> J^L> 
 
 M. 
 
 9 ' 
 
 Sy he, she, it had come , 
 
 
 
 
 P. 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 yy we 7«ac? come. 
 
 
 
 
 A ^ 
 
 L£y V ou had come. 
 
 F. 
 
 
 M. 
 
 9 **' ' 
 
 yy they had come , 
 
 .Firs/ Future Tense ^ I. 
 
 S. 
 
 ^ i should come. 
 
 thou shouldst come . 
 
 * 
 
 c> I ) or ^»\j 0 <**A he, she, it should come . 
 ' «v 
 
 P. 
 
 ^-ay we should come . 
 
 A 
 
 2/ow should come . 
 
 . I A . , i> 
 
 y or ^ they should 
 
 come . 
 
 2 G 
 
226 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Second Future Tense 
 
 9 
 
 A. 
 
 s. 
 
 p~ \j or p£>\j <*j &j I will come, 
 t <u \j or ^J»\j <u <t> thou wilt come. 
 
 *» 44 
 
 S 
 
 il» <*j \j or he, she, it will come r 
 
 P. 
 
 or J; ^ Ku ?oe will come. 
 
 A A „ 
 
 or <V you will come. 
 
 " "9 
 
 sj- “V !> or 4/ they will come. 
 
 Subjunctive or Aorist Tense 
 
 r 4 !) 7 mcry, shall, etc. come. we ma y 3 shall, etc. come , 
 
 A 
 
 thou mayest, etc. come. V ou ma y> shall, etc. eome. 
 
 4# 
 
 he, she, it, may, etc. come . Ij they may, shall, etc. corner 
 
 Doubtful Past Tense 
 
 
 
 
 
 S. 
 
 F. 
 
 fi *} 
 
 ■ ^ 
 
 M. 
 
 pi <*J / may have come. 
 
 44 
 
 F. 
 
 C# 5 ^ 
 
 ♦4 / 
 
 M. 
 
 4 ? tfAow mayest have come. 
 
 44 11 
 
 F. 
 
 " (-Ml) 
 
 M. 
 
 4e, s/*e, i/, may Acre come. 
 
 
 
 
 P. 
 
 Jl we may have come. 
 
 A 
 
 you may have come . 
 
 ♦4 #4 X 
 
 ✓ 
 
 <V Mey may /*are come. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 d*bj**> 
 
 S. 
 
 JiJ I > or 
 
 come. 
 
 come . 
 
 or pj v i had 
 
 or ']) dS If thou hadst 
 
 ♦♦ «* 
 
 M. CL>J; If he or it had come. 
 
 F. df' or dfi\j dS If she, or it had come. 
 
 P. 
 
 or jp]) * V we had 
 
 Pj or ^JJl ; df If you had come. 
 
 > * , 
 
 Si\j or Jill; <lf If they had 
 
 jlj'j) or JJj; ^ or ^ If they had 
 
 come. 
 
 > 
 
 come . 
 
 00 mo. 
 
 Imperative Moodj' 0 !. 
 
 S. 
 
 cl> or ■*% ltI), a "1; come thou 
 
 6 \j or <3 J; 
 
 ' •* «» / 
 
 ✓ «< / 
 
 t? •*** or ^ 
 
 P. 
 
 let him , her, or it come. 
 
 oomo you. 
 
 
 7 ^ 
 
 f* 
 
 or <3 
 
 let them come. 
 
 , lu d .iA or < 4 «lj c3 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Potential Mood *<**2^. 
 
 Present 
 
 S. 
 
 P J>b 
 
 M. 
 
 ✓ , 
 
 *<£ ^b I can come. 
 
 ♦T ^ 
 
 M. 
 
 thou corned come. 
 
 us" U J "l> 
 
 M. 
 
 I^am he, she, it can come. 
 
 •J, •» 
 
 
 
 P. 
 
 .r 
 
 Cf% 
 
 zoo com come. 
 
 A 
 
 A 
 
 lT 
 
 •» 
 
 ^b^j ?/ow c<m come. 
 ♦« ^ 
 
 A 
 
 they can come . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S. 
 
 
 M. 
 
 ^b N / could come. 
 
 LfJ-" U'L) 
 
 M. 
 
 ^bl; thou couldst come. 
 
 A 1- 
 
 M. 
 
 ^b N 4e, $/ze, i/ could come . 
 
 P. 
 
 S> A 
 
 1^ we could come. 
 
 »» ^ 
 
 A A 
 
 yow could come. 
 
 A * " a p 
 
 yiit or Ur or y» they could 
 
 come. 
 
 , s ' 9 
 
 Future 
 
 S. 
 
 or \j <u sj I will come, 
 or a* thou wilt 
 
 9» i M * 
 
 <J • " ,>1) or ^.b jj <v <t*A Zte, s/je, i/ will come . 
 
 come. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 P. 
 
 $ 9*9 
 
 <o or <b we will come. 
 
 «« M 
 
 S S' 
 
 J> JU J*b or ^ - Jpb *>. ^ you will come. 
 (T » “ .• 
 
 ' *9 
 
 & a; JJl^ or <J*> ^J^]) they w% tl come. 
 
 The Agent pA. 
 
 S. 
 
 ..9.* t 
 
 M. K\j or 
 «♦ *• 
 
 F. or 
 
 The comer 
 
 M, and F. 
 
 P. 
 
 f ! y-b 
 
 Jp\> 
 
 comers. 
 
 Past Participle ^\. 
 
 S. ' P. 
 
 F. M. come. M. and F. 
 
 .. .. „ 
 
 Noun of Fitness o<i>U) ^1. 
 
 A or ^ or A or j^b d of or f or coming. 
 
 402. The imperfect and irregular intransitive jjj to go. 
 
 ✓ / 
 
 Infinitive (or Verbal Noun) to go. 
 
 Present Tense J 1 ^ 
 
 come . 
 
230 
 
 M, 
 
 F. 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Imperfect Tense 
 
 S. 
 
 ^*11^ or / was going . 
 
 or thou wast going. 
 
 o?' he, or it was going. 
 
 **• 
 
 <ilb or <dJ ,94^ or it was going . 
 
 P. 
 
 or we were going. 
 
 P 
 
 JU or . JJ 
 
 were going. 
 
 M. 
 
 a; or JJb“ 
 
 F. or JL" or or /Aey 
 
 were going. 
 
 ivere 
 
 going. 
 
 2nd Form of Imperfect Tense jl^UI ^lo /or Continuative. 
 
 s. 
 
 fp J > " or I used to go. 
 
 p 
 
 or thou used to go * 
 
 p 
 
 M. jV j <u or <*J he, or it used to go. 
 
 * 9 * p 
 
 F. or X* J *! or or •ftj v or ^ 
 
 '. 9 
 
 she, or it used to 
 
 M. 
 
 <*. J or aJjV ^ & or <0^ du 
 P. 
 
 P p <*J or we used to go. 
 
 C*P J M or ifp *> you used to go. 
 P j *t P «? P j “V jjv *t they used to go. 
 
 *9 9 
 
 F. <9 J H j <9 Lfi^ <V 
 
 ** / < 
 
 dft 5 -9 <_$ * " 
 
 /Aey «sed to go. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 231 
 
 Past Tense 0 • 
 
 •v 
 
 S. 
 
 (?P> 0T 2 0r frl or ri* I went. 
 
 or w Us or Jti or thou went, 
 
 ♦♦ ° ♦♦ 
 
 M. iVj or he, or it went. 
 
 p s * s p ^ p 
 
 Pdi^J porW or or j or she, or it went , 
 
 P. 
 
 *.^.9 9 .. 9 
 
 J>Pjor J^jor & iV we went. 
 
 ^ or Lfi^ ) or you went. 
 
 A ^ . A 
 
 M. 
 
 a* ^ or or J^i or they went . 
 
 F. jV,’ or jl'i’i.rjii or^J - L>^ they went . 
 
 / / 4% 
 
 Perfect Tense 
 
 ft Jtf or (J-J or pi jb- or J 3 I have go7ie. 
 
 ^ iJJJ or ^5 or J or ^o?ze. 
 
 •* 7 *• «. ** 
 
 «o JJJ or (J-J or or ^e, s/je 5 it has gone. 
 
 P. 
 
 i !>’ or we have gone. 
 
 Jtj* or V°u have gone. 
 ♦♦ , ♦!/ 
 
 ✓ ^ 
 
 ^ ^UJ or they have gone . 
 
232 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 * 
 
 Pluperfect Tense ^*lo. 
 
 s. 
 
 V J6 or or or ^11 I had gone . 
 
 ♦♦ ♦♦ 
 
 J-^ or J J or or ttoa /<«<&•/ ^o«e. 
 
 * ** •• ♦* 
 
 *j JJj or or or £ 0 ^ ^o^o. 
 
 •♦ «* 
 
 P, 
 
 j> ^ / 
 
 Jt? ^owo. 
 
 A X y 
 
 2/O0 ^00? ^0^0. 
 
 ** '•/ •», 
 
 J J& or JJ or jfc or J they had gone. 
 
 ' ' ' »+ *v 
 
 First Future Tense y>\. 
 
 * 
 
 S. 
 
 f*J) or I should go. 
 
 ^ )) or ££ thou shouldst go. 
 
 •• 
 
 * ^ or L> <£*& 
 
 ♦♦/ x 
 * / / 
 
 \^J" ^ )) °r JJ t> <**A 
 
 sfo, or «/ should go. 
 
 P. 
 
 ^ orjZpl we should go. 
 
 A A 
 
 or 2 /ow should go. 
 
 M 
 
 t? ^ «>' Lf“ ^ t 5 -?* 4 ) 
 
 " * y 
 
 ^ r they should go. 
 
 st) 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 Second Future Tense 
 
 S. 
 
 or & * *j) , 
 
 • * ' r i 
 
 or r x > * 
 
 *? X^ or ^ X^ *i " ) 
 
 - " * ' -C 
 
 »*» A 5 J 
 
 will go. 
 
 thou wilt go. 
 
 xj ;;or ^ 
 iW or <**£> 
 
 Ae, z/ will go , 
 
 •v 
 
 / / ^ . 
 or <**A -/ 
 
 •v *v 
 
 P. 
 
 / 9 9 
 
 <&} j£)l or jl*> du X 
 9 x 9 9 > we will go. 
 
 jr * J) or jj A) j 
 
 *i X^ or C5" X^ *} ) 
 
 a** ^ ' r you will go. 
 
 d - XX or XX *i ) 
 
 H •» 
 
 u . $or^Z>$i sj jka>^ 
 
 , " f they will go. 
 
 & jj jj or jj <ix jkb ) 
 
 
 Subjunctive or Aorist Tense fX^*- 
 
 s. 
 
 /■ ✓ 
 
 J) or | 4 Hi I may , shall or will go. 
 
 \^J" JX or thou mayest, shall or wilt go. 
 
 J) or he, she , it may, shall or will go. 
 
 ** *v 
 
 P. 
 
 9 ^ - 9 . 
 
 j** J} or X* we may, shall or will go. 
 jj or X* V ou ma V ) shall or will go. 
 
 ♦♦ t< 
 
 XX or ^m> they may , shall or ivill go. 
 
234 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ✓ / 
 
 ft u . 
 
 J X) JJj 
 Lf; " tP 
 
 M. 
 
 E. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 Doubtful Past Tense ^u. 
 
 •» 
 
 s. 
 
 Jj or p> i) or J? I may have gone. 
 
 x ^ / 
 
 or JJ or J a, JUS or £Aoz« mayest have gone. 
 
 * ♦♦ •* ♦* 
 
 or or ^5 dj ^lb or she , ^ may have gone. 
 
 or 
 
 P. 
 
 
 « or we ma y ^ ave 9° ne ‘ 
 
 j *> or you may have gone. 
 
 & * 
 
 JUJ or they may have gone. 
 
 Past Conditional Tense sJsjw ^U. 
 S. 
 
 r ii; or / ^r0tt£. 
 
 or^lJ hadst thou gone. 
 
 «% 
 
 CU or <0 <iT had he , or it gone. 
 A U or had she, or it gone. 
 
 P. 
 
 9 ' 9 
 
 9 s or jlS £ had 
 
 A M" A w ^ 
 
 -Jib or , -b <0 
 
 f w 
 
 aU or 
 
 Cf 
 
 jfc * 5 * 
 
 we gone. 
 
 you gone. 
 
 (Jb or & 
 
 had they gone. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 285 
 
 Imperative Mood y° 1 
 S. 
 
 A 
 
 du. or 
 
 or dw <70 ^ow. 
 
 / y ✓ 
 
 c> <t*& or o ^ or 
 
 " * v r let him, her, or it go. 
 
 0 or t) <i*& or d> jj or J 
 
 A ^ 
 A 
 
 *y 
 
 *« ' 
 
 0 
 
 or 
 
 ^ or JJ or ^s" y° w - 
 
 ♦4 •• 
 
 etf“ ? ft or cs" 
 
 <A **& 
 
 let them go. 
 
 or t> or 0 or 
 
 j , •• . y •# ^ 
 
 Potential Mood ^5^°! 9 <^^. 
 Present (jUw. 
 
 S. P. 
 
 JL-/ 
 
 can go. 
 
 >r we can go. 
 
 *v 
 
 thou canst go. ^JJ-> you can go. 
 
 Jh JE he, she, it 
 
 •t ♦♦ 
 
 can go. ^ 
 
 they 
 
 can go. 
 
 Past ^,^°- 
 
 
 S. 
 
 P. 
 
 S A * m 
 
 ^lb I could go. 
 
 we could go. 
 
 A -" <# 
 
 \sSj~ ^*b thou couldst go. 
 
 ^b-> you could go. 
 
 •• •v 
 
 he, or it could go. M. 
 
 ^ib they could go. 
 *5- 
 
 A / 
 
 Xjw (JJj she, or it could go. F, 
 
 they could go. 
 
 2 h 2 
 
 
236 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Future JJSU*. 
 
 s. 
 
 x x ✓ ✓ 
 
 r ». or *} *J I shall be able to go. 
 
 dU J* or dU dt) thou ivilt be able to go. 
 
 ' / ^ 
 
 *> ^UJ or di <**4> she , it will be able to go . 
 
 
 p. 
 
 2 s * y * H / 
 
 du ^liJ or ^ib <u fcko ?oe s^a// able to go. 
 
 ju& or JIJ * JX> you will be able to go. 
 
 •» *♦ ^ ♦♦ 
 
 ;JJb or ^yb dj j*b they will be able to go. 
 
 z d) 
 
 The Agent JcU r i. 
 
 S. " P 
 
 M. *>>yj or / 
 
 the goer. 
 
 ** y ** p r 
 
 P. &A or ) 
 
 JW) 
 
 M. and F. - 0 ? goers. 
 
 
 Past Participle Jjxk* ^1. 
 
 S. P. 
 
 * s C '"w \ » 
 
 JJ or Jl) or J* or ^JJJ gone. or gone. 
 
 Nouns of Fitness o^LJ ^ | . 
 
 ^ or ^b 0 O or >* 0 o/ going , etc. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 237 
 
 403. Conjugation of the irregular intransitive To ascend. 
 Infinitive (on Verbal Noun) To ascend. 
 
 Present Tense J^. 
 
 S. 
 
 P. 
 
 9 
 
 or typ* we ascend. 
 
 A r®". A « 
 
 or you ascend. 
 
 or ^ ascend. 
 
 or{jpjfte*> thou ascendest. 
 
 ♦♦ ' ” 
 
 X>aw or he, she, it ascends . or ^e?/ ascend , 
 
 - ^ * - 
 
 Imperfect Tense I . 
 
 ♦v 
 
 S. 
 
 ^ ✓/ ✓/ 
 
 or / was ascending. 
 
 ^iXaw or £^oa was£ ascending. 
 
 Ae, or i/ was ascending. 
 
 r / x 
 
 or sAe, or was ascending. 
 
 P. 
 
 or we were ascending. 
 
 or 2/ ow were ascending. 
 
 S //* 
 
 M. CIjI^ or £/je?/ were ascending. 
 
 F. ^cw or or ^e?/ were ascending. 
 
 * •• •» 
 
 Second form used as the Continuative Tense. 
 
 S. 
 
 p&L j to or |*Aa. ^ <u / ^sec? /o ascend. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 A 
 
 us 
 
 ^IaCw ^ di 
 
 ' 9 
 
 or } to thou used to ascend. 
 
 9 
 
 CL^aw j d) he, or it used to ascend . 
 
 9 ' 9 
 
 F. j to or j to she, or it used to ascend . 
 
 M. 
 
238 
 
 A GRAMMAR OP THE 
 
 M. 
 
 P. 
 
 y ' ^9 
 
 p ^ or ysL. p to we used to ascend . 
 
 a ss 9 l\ " s> 
 
 p to or J to you used to ascend. 
 
 Cl: la* p to or p to they used to ascend. 
 
 F. or p to — or p to they used to ascend. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 Past Tense ^lla* ^*?U. 
 
 S. 
 
 9 
 
 p&L. p or p I ascended. 
 
 "9 ' 9 
 
 p or J thou ascendedst. 
 
 " ** 9 
 
 he, or it ascended. 
 
 <u^k p or p she , or it ascended. 
 
 P. 
 
 9 ' 9 
 
 ji 
 
 jr^ i or j we ascended. 
 
 IacL p or J you ascended. 
 
 •• ♦* 
 
 ' . 9 9 
 
 d:UL p or p they ascended. 
 
 p or or J they ascended. 
 
 Perfect Tense 
 
 S. 
 
 F. 
 
 / /✓ 
 
 M. 
 
 to I have ascended. 
 
 *♦ 
 
 F. 
 
 ** / 
 
 M. 
 
 ^ s s 
 
 thou hast ascended. 
 
 F. 
 
 8(J 
 
 M. 
 
 * * 
 
 JZa*. he. she , it has ascended. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 P. 
 
 9 I ' 
 
 jt we ^ ave ascen d e d- 
 
 A ^ ^ 
 
 V ou tiave ascended . 
 
 •• ♦♦ / 
 
 they have ascended . 
 
 Pluperfect Tense 
 
 ♦V 
 
 s. 
 
 F. 
 
 /♦> 
 
 M. 
 
 ♦♦ 
 
 / 7jo«? ascended. 
 
 F. 
 
 
 M. 
 
 r / 
 
 thou hadst ascended. 
 
 F. 
 
 x ^ /• 
 
 Xj 
 
 ✓ 
 
 M. 
 
 4j si 
 
 ♦4 
 
 he , she , had ascended. 
 
 p. 
 
 we had ascended. 
 
 ♦* / 
 
 A ^ 
 
 tf; you had ascended . 
 
 4 
 
 x / ^ y 
 
 ) J-Xi. M. ^ they had ascended. 
 
 First Future Tense j*>]. 
 
 S. 
 
 9 9 
 
 j or J I should ascend. 
 
 } or } thou shouldst ascend. 
 
 9 9 . 9 
 
 O j or L ^ <**& 
 
 s ^ r * 
 
 . -Xtk. 9 or 
 
 7*e, it should ascend . 
 
240 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 P. 
 
 y s> y 
 
 y y y . y 
 
 j or ) we should ascend. 
 
 A ^r, y A . ' 
 
 ^A.,o* j or } you should ascend. 
 
 s> y y 
 
 O ) or } O j*& 4 
 
 " " ^ ^ r they should ascend. 
 
 ^ or ^ ^ ' 
 
 Second Future Tense 
 
 S. 
 
 & j or fa j du sj) 
 
 ,? t y * 
 
 } or J *} ** ' 
 
 ^Xtk. a; ^ or ( ^Xtk. ^ & aJ 
 
 «♦ 
 
 . * . ^ 
 
 ^^acw aj ^ or >5 ^ 
 
 a; j or ^ aj a*a> 
 
 / will ascend. 
 
 thou wilt ascend , 
 
 he, she , it will ascend. 
 
 y y 
 
 p. 
 
 y . .y 
 
 ^A<k a; ^ or ^ 
 
 ^ r c , * * f<r. 9 * 
 
 ^Aa^, aj j or ^ )y° 
 
 a . >> A # y y.~ 
 
 <v j or L£y>^ j ^/*U 
 
 ^•CCk aj ^ or ^ a; 
 
 ♦♦ M 
 
 > ^ ^ 
 
 <y j or L^y*i^ y ^ 
 
 y ' y % 9 
 
 u j or ) *> 
 
 we will ascend. 
 
 you will ascend. 
 
 they will ascend. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 241 
 
 » * 
 
 Aorist Tense 
 
 S. 
 
 V'. 9 ' . * 
 
 ) or J I ma y or shall ascend . 
 
 2 or ^jmL. J thou mayest or shalt ascend . 
 
 «• * 
 
 ff. > . * 
 
 ) or ) he, she, it may or shall ascend. 
 
 ♦* * 
 
 / /» 
 
 P. 
 
 9 ^. 9 9 9 
 
 y or j w e m ®y or shall ascend. 
 
 ^X^ j or J you may or shall ascend . 
 
 ) or ) they may or shall ascend. 
 
 Doubtful Past Tense 
 
 S. 
 
 «» ^ ^ * ' ' 
 
 m) & or m* di I may have ascended , 
 
 * it 
 
 J*- or thou mayest have ascended. 
 
 e« 
 
 *i or W *! he, she, it may have ascended. 
 
 P. 
 
 ^ c r 
 
 jl we ma y h ave ascended. 
 
 v 
 
 A 
 
 you may have ascended. 
 
 // 
 
 <JU they may have ascended. 
 
 'V «v 
 
 2 i 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 £12 
 
 Past Conditional Tense 
 
 s. 
 
 p kd* & or <*$ had I ascended. 
 
 or ^ hadst thou ascended . 
 
 M. CL5^£w had he , or it ascended. 
 
 F. ctlX-ik <*> or & had she , or it ascended. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. J:i 
 
 p. 
 
 jS or y 
 A" or i 
 
 or 
 
 aT had we ascended. 
 ^ * had you ascended . 
 d:Lk S$ or & had they ascended. 
 
 s> ✓ 
 
 sS or & had they ascended . 
 
 Imperative Mood y >\ 
 
 S. 
 
 p 
 
 duCTrL or duCfiL ^ or or ^ ascend thou. 
 
 p . 9 
 
 <3 j or {j£rf*iL. j 3 
 
 JC 
 
 • . j& 
 
 /o/ Aer ; ascend. 
 
 ^ J or J 
 
 (3 
 
 A fT \ * A ^ 
 
 2 or j ascend you. 
 
 * » % P 
 
 (3 } or (^-si ^ <3 
 
 ^ or ur^.5 0 5*4 
 
 •V ». * 
 
 let them ascend . 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 243 
 
 Potential Mood 
 
 •V ' 
 
 Present 
 
 Q 
 
 io. 
 
 or I can ascen d- 
 
 or thou canst ascend. 
 
 e« * *7 
 
 • S' /» / 
 
 ^ J-i- or ^ it can ascend. 
 
 P. 
 
 ^7 c: 
 
 y» ^ we can ascend. 
 
 w /• 
 
 A A („V 
 
 Cf2 ^ ascen d- 
 
 ♦♦ ••/ 
 
 ^ ie y can ascen d- 
 
 Past ^$lo* 
 
 A ' ^ ✓ A /'Z 
 
 L/^ or Sr ^ I could ascend . 
 
 A r/ A r ^ 
 
 kSj*» or couldst ascend. 
 
 * ^ 
 
 *** he, or it could ascend. 
 
 ♦♦ 
 
 ^ or it could ascend . 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 P. 
 
 / A 
 
 we could ascend. 
 
 A 1 i.'r 
 
 ?/om could ascend . 
 
 M. ^aa> ^ ,A ^* or lJt*" ^6?/ could ascend. 
 
 ♦v y 
 
 •^* could ascend , 
 
 / A 
 
 2 i 2 
 
244 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Future uM* MAfO # 
 
 s. 
 
 r 
 
 aJ 
 
 ✓ / 
 
 or 
 
 A 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 <o 
 
 jfc** 
 
 < 
 
 or 
 
 r“ 
 
 3. 
 
 L^* 
 
 •« 
 
 & 
 
 s / 
 
 or 
 
 
 A 
 
 cf 
 
 <X) 
 
 
 or 
 
 A 
 
 ♦♦ 
 
 
 a; 
 
 ♦ 
 
 / 
 
 ^IaSw 
 
 ♦t 
 
 or 
 
 A 
 
 #♦ 
 
 i. 
 
 L*“ 
 
 aj 
 
 Jsi 
 
 or 
 
 A 
 
 j> / shall or will he able to ascend . 
 
 £> ju aj J 
 
 I, thou shall or wilt be able to ascend. 
 
 or^» ** he, she , it shall or will be able to 
 
 ascend. 
 
 ^ <v Jy° 1 7 
 
 -7 ^ \ we shall or will be able to ascend. 
 
 y y } 
 
 yi U 
 
 J, JLL t> 
 
 »« ♦* X 
 
 mi iO yhX I 
 
 you shall or will be able to ascend. 
 
 du orj 
 
 [they shall or will be able to ascend. 
 
 The Agent 
 
 S. 
 
 M. ^y^orjoy^ 
 * 9 ; \ 
 
 P. 
 
 9 * 
 
 the ascender. M. and F. ^ ascenders . 
 
 w J 'r L or J 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 245 
 
 9 ' 
 
 Past Participle ijjj**-' 0 ^**1. 
 
 F. M. ascended. M. and F. ascended . 
 
 Noun of Fitness ^ ! . 
 
 s' 
 
 9 ' %% ' ' 9 \' t ' 
 
 M. and F. or 6 or j&a* J or for ascending. S. and P. 
 
 404. Conjugation of an irregular intransitive verb. 
 
 Infinitive (or Verbal Noun) To fall. 
 
 Present Tense *&***. 
 
 M. 
 
 S. 
 
 faji W 
 
 A 9 
 
 thou fallest. 
 
 P. 
 
 we fall. 
 
 * * 9 
 
 * * * 
 
 
 ■Jtji he, she, it falls . 
 
 you fall. 
 
 ♦♦ 
 
 4 9 
 
 L they fall. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 Imperfect Tense ^*?U. 
 
 S. 
 
 rsji or rW i was falling. 
 
 C 
 
 <J*yy or jyy thou wast falling. 
 
 •• ’ •• / 
 
 ^yy he, or it was falling. 
 
 ^yy or ^jtji she, or it was falling. 
 
 V. 
 
 j b yy or yyy we were falling. 
 
 A '' a 
 
 JbjLj you were falling. 
 
 >1*V or 
 
 ^ ^ they were falling. 
 
 F. ifjtji or Cfjj orfjjiji orjifjij 
 
246 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 Second Form , or Continuative Tense. 
 
 S. 
 
 or yyy* ^ i use ^ f a ^’ 
 
 or & thou used to fall . 
 
 CL 5 yy he, or it used to fall. 
 
 aJLJ yy a; 0 r ** she, or & use d t° /«#• 
 
 P. 
 
 
 or yyy « we used to fall. 
 
 h ' ' A „ ' 
 
 or d i you used to fall . 
 
 m. ** ° r ^yty ° r Jfyy *Tj 
 
 F. J-y.y *> oryyy *> w Ji>y.y *t or J?yy v J 
 
 }> they used to fall f, 
 
 s p 
 
 Past Tense ^lia^o 
 S. 
 
 fyy. °r yyy, ifeii. 
 
 Jyy. or Jyy thou didst fall. 
 
 ^yy or ^yy he , or it fell. 
 
 or she , or it fell . 
 
 P. 
 
 p s * p y 
 
 j^yy ° r yyy we 
 
 Jjyy or fyy you/eii. 
 
 ^ // 
 
 ^[yy ° r ^\yy ° r ^yy the v f eU - 
 
 f . \Syy ° r ^yyor^yyorJ>yy theyfeii. 
 
 M. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 247 
 
 Perfect Tense 
 
 I have fallen . 
 
 S. 
 
 M ; f. or or 
 
 ♦♦ l 
 
 F - c 3 - * 7 ^ or or *biJ 
 
 M ' U= J or L^%v'v or 
 
 “ , " - “ ~ _, }- Wom /(«6^ fallen. 
 
 P ' or «' d yJ 
 
 M. or or iZJjjj he, or it have fallen. 
 
 P. *i> or JJJj} or <o.J she, or it have fallen. 
 
 p. 
 
 M - J- LfPjl or Jf'fl?, or 
 
 > 7 \ we have fallen. 
 
 ’’ ” 
 
 M ‘ d- dPji or JSj# or 
 
 ^ j> you have fallen . 
 
 F - JL 
 
 L# J J 
 
 d 
 
 or or <u\jJ they have fallen. 
 
 • S? ” » c./ji have fallen . 
 
 Pluperfect Tense £>**> , ^L». 
 
 s. 
 
 \ I had fallen. 
 
 M. 
 
 ^ or 
 
 F. 
 
 P dj-ji or 
 
 M. 
 
 & Jkf.or 
 
 F. 
 
 l r J Jd or 
 
 M. 
 
 *■> LfP-ji or 
 
 F. 
 
 *J ^jtji or 
 
 JJi 
 
 )i or *jj 
 
 Uy 
 
 J' 
 
 r* thou hadst fallen. 
 
 or it had fallen. 
 
248 
 
 A GRAMMAR OP THE 
 
 P. 
 
 M. 
 
 yy 
 
 c/yiyv 
 
 or u&dyi 
 
 F. 
 
 9 
 
 yy 
 
 
 
 M. 
 
 A 
 
 ^?y 
 
 Jy.y. 
 
 ♦* 
 
 r" 
 
 or 
 
 F. 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 M. 
 
 9 
 
 yy 
 
 V 
 
 or . 
 
 F. 
 
 y 
 
 
 or Jjjty ( 
 
 ?A we had fallen. 
 
 JyJ 
 
 ■ 
 
 [> you had fallen. 
 
 JA 
 
 9 they had fallen. 
 
 First Future Tense y>\. 
 
 S. 
 
 I should fall. 
 
 A 
 
 thou shouldst fall. 
 
 t 9 +/ 
 
 * isji or ^ *** he, she, it should fall. 
 
 >i "" *' *• ' 
 
 P. 
 
 ^4 9 
 
 we should fall. 
 
 * *. 9 
 
 you should fall. 
 
 A 9 A 9 '. 9 
 
 4 LSji or ^ th e y should fall. 
 
 Second Future Tense 
 S. 
 
 &J I will fall. 
 
 <U thou wilt fall. 
 
 <0 or ^Jty, *! *** he, she, it will fall. 
 
 'A 9 * 9 
 
 4 AJ or 
 
 A 9 A 9 
 
 . 9 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 249 
 
 P. 
 
 9 ,9 
 
 9 . 9 
 
 yL^ 4j or *} we 
 
 A A 9 
 
 or y lT 1 ' you will fall. 
 
 ♦♦ *’ »• 
 
 A ^ , 9 9 
 
 ^ ** or they will fall. 
 
 Past Conditional Tense 
 
 
 S. 
 
 M. 
 
 fi 
 
 jj 
 
 Jjiji 
 
 «• 
 
 or 
 
 — 
 
 
 F. 
 
 /*i 
 
 <SJ 
 
 
 or 
 
 Syy 
 
 
 M. 
 
 »• 
 
 ♦# 
 
 <U 
 
 <yyy 
 
 or 
 
 Jyy 
 
 ♦« 
 
 
 F. 
 
 J 
 
 «t 
 
 <JU 
 
 yyy 
 
 or 
 
 <rfe 
 
 
 M. 
 
 >» 
 
 dU 
 
 Jyy 
 
 or ^ 
 
 or 
 
 «« 
 
 , 
 
 > 
 
 y 
 
 « v 
 
 •3 
 
 F. 
 
 L?; 
 
 <0 
 
 ^yy 
 
 or 
 
 or 
 
 <U*> J 
 > 
 
 may have fallen. 
 
 J> he, she, it may have fallen ■ 
 
 P. 
 
 M - Ji u - L/jirf or or " 1^1 
 
 F. yl *> 
 
 )> 
 — ' 
 
 JyJ 
 
 we may have fallen . 
 
 M - y- *• \jyy or ^Jyy or , „ 
 
 " ••' y you may have fallen. 
 
 F- cr: H 
 
 
 * / > 
 
 M. uy «tJ or or 
 
 P. 
 
 <jy 
 
 > j 
 
 j> //fey have fallen , 
 
250 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Past Conditional Tense jutjs . ^lo* 
 
 
 s. 
 
 M. 
 
 r 5**3* ^ ° r f* ^i'v ^ had I fallen. 
 
 Jkfi ^ or * hadst thou fallen. 
 
 H *♦ 
 
 9 ^ 
 
 & had he or it fallen. 
 
 9 Jk 
 
 F. & or *W' * had she or it fallen. 
 
 P. 
 
 or At £ had we fallen. 
 
 A '' A «* " ^ 
 
 yy <0 or J?£ * had you fallen. 
 
 44 ^ ♦» 
 
 ^ or l ftjlji ^ had they fallen. 
 F. J )Jj> or ^ or J?fyi & had they fallen. 
 
 Imperative Mood y > I. 
 
 S. 
 
 fall thou. 
 
 9 ^ 
 
 } t> or ^ A ‘ji)i ^ l e t him fall • 
 
 P. 
 
 - *' 
 
 yl y fall you. 
 
 9 ^9 ” .9 
 
 c> ^ 3*^ tet them fall. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 251 
 
 Potential Mood* 
 
 Present lK 
 
 s. 
 
 M. 
 
 A 
 
 r 
 
 jyy or 
 
 F. 
 
 r 
 
 ^yy. ° r 
 
 M. 
 
 
 Jyy or 
 ♦* 
 
 F. 
 
 
 yyy or 
 
 M. 
 
 Jyy or 
 
 F. 
 
 
 yyy or 
 
 
 y * i 
 
 kJ 
 
 Jk>J 
 
 can fall. 
 
 thou canst fall . 
 
 «» 
 
 /«e_, cow fall . 
 
 P. 
 
 M. 
 
 
 r 
 
 F. 
 
 
 1" ( 
 ^yyy. 
 
 M. 
 
 A 
 
 r 
 
 F. 
 
 uP 
 
 % ^ 
 
 J V 
 
 © 
 
 M. 
 
 
 r 
 
 F. 
 
 kJ* 
 
 
 we fall. 
 
 you can fall. 
 
 * What I have here termed the Potential Mood is really the Passive form of the 
 intransitive verbs, which is alone used to express power, will, or obligation. I have 
 already described the peculiarities of the passive and potential form of the verbs in the 
 analysis of the different moods and tenses, which see— page 170— 177. 
 
 2 k 2 
 
252 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Past 
 
 S. 
 
 M. 
 
 '"A 
 
 A 
 
 ftr 
 
 or 
 
 F. 
 
 ✓ A 
 A 
 
 r-r 
 
 or 
 
 M. 
 
 A 
 
 ♦* ^ 
 
 or 
 
 F. 
 
 A 
 
 L?J" 
 
 c 7 j A'v or 
 
 M. 
 
 dxu 
 
 (Jjtji or 
 
 
 A 
 
 * 
 
 F. 
 
 
 CL>y_ji or 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 F- 
 
 j&Pi 
 
 J> thou couldst fall. 
 
 Jb& he, or it could fall. 
 
 s ^ ie t or it could fall 
 
 F. 
 
 ,.r 
 
 ;jr 1 or - f 
 
 we cowZd fall. 
 
 ' or 
 
 }> ?/ow cow/e? /«//, 
 
 . r ^Vj 
 
 Jyj 
 
 S* ** ' r ' 
 
 or they could fall. 
 
 &£ or tFv>-> they could fall. 
 
 >/ ? > v 
 
 jIsLi- 
 
 s. 
 
 M. a? or ,*i <« »fl 
 
 F. ^ or ^ <V *jJ 
 
 M. a; or^i " "'] 
 
 J> / wi// he able to fall. 
 
 ) 
 
 thou wilt he able to fall. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 253 
 
 P. 
 
 M. or 
 
 r Jbii * b* we will be able to fall . 
 
 •v **> 
 
 A A . i-"" ^j- 
 
 M. to or ^ *1 lT 0 you will be able to fall. 
 
 ♦♦ *j ^ .. ». y 
 
 A . r" A 
 
 M. to 'Jijty or^S, to they will be able to fall. 
 
 The Agent 
 S. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 
 o> - ^yy/i 
 >>- r 
 
 uSSJ or&JJjtyJ 
 
 the fuller. 
 
 r 
 
 M. and F. .j *v ^ j >thefallers. 
 
 i JyjtyJ 
 
 Past Participle ^1. 
 
 S. 
 
 M - p* " 
 
 p. or *>jiJ 
 
 M - Jj$ or *>bi\ 
 
 **" ^ p fallen. 
 
 p- Jyj " 
 
 c^jU ^m»|^ 
 
 M. and F. 0 ^ °f> or for falling. S. and P. 
 
254 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 405. The following is a paradigm of a regular intransitive verb 
 according to the system of the Arabian and Hebrew Grammarians. The 
 method of forming the different compound tenses by the aid of the auxi- 
 liary has already been explained in the analysis of the moods and tenses 
 which see. 
 
 ✓ ✓ ^ y 
 
 Infinitive or Verbal Noun to run. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. and F. 
 M. and F. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. and F. 
 M. and F. 
 
 .9 
 
 Active Voice 
 Past Tense 
 
 S. 
 
 ^ 9 
 
 5c>a 1 Ij j or } he, it ran. 
 
 dj&AlJj or j she, it ran. 
 
 .. s 9 * ' 9 
 
 j or J thou didst run . 
 
 j or j I ran. 
 
 P. 
 
 Jv .' , 9 ' # 9 • 
 
 j or (J J they ran . 
 
 (Jc^aIcJ 2 or j they ran. 
 
 t> Jxj ^ or L you ran. 
 
 ; or ; we ran. 
 
 Present Tense £jLax>. 
 
 S. P. 
 
 .I, s . > 
 
 J he, she, it runs, or may run. J ie U run j or mai J run> 
 
 \ r. ' A r . . 9 
 
 j thou runneth, or may run . J 2 / ou run > or mai J run • 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 255 
 
 Imperative Mood j* I 
 S. 
 
 ' 9 ' 9 * 
 
 or J & 
 
 *’" ** \ let him, her, or it run. 
 
 &j or ^ J 
 
 ■f* 9 
 
 J.cj dilj j 
 
 J> run thou or do thou run . 
 
 P. 
 
 r. . 9 «r. 9 9 
 
 J.ci t) •) or , j 4 
 
 
 , 4 . .,] 
 
 let them run. 
 
 uMJ 9 
 
 ?/om, or c?o you run. 
 
 Verbal Noun or Infinitive (Jc^Ucj to 
 
 Active Participle ^m»\ u 
 
 S. 
 
 9 y 9 y 
 
 M. or 
 
 ** 9 y ” s 9 ' f* runner. 
 
 f. ^ 
 
 rzm. 
 
 P. 
 
 
 r l , 1 
 
 M. and F. <{ * ^ ^ l. the runners . 
 
256 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 9 , 
 
 Passive Voice 
 
 Past Tense 
 
 S. 
 
 M. 
 
 <&w 
 
 or 
 
 Icj he, or it could run . 
 
 F. 
 
 A 
 
 or 
 
 or it could run. 
 
 M. 
 
 A 
 
 *£r 
 
 or 
 
 ^c^aL; P) 
 ♦♦ 1 
 
 
 
 f thou couldst run , 
 
 F. 
 
 
 Jc>aU j or 
 
 ✓ ' 
 
 M. 
 
 *" A 
 
 rr 
 
 or 
 
 
 
 I could run . 
 
 F. 
 
 x A 
 
 or 
 
 tsJxjJ 
 
 P. 
 
 they could run . 
 
 you could run . 
 
 we could run . 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 257 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 M. 
 
 M. 
 
 Present Tense 
 
 S. 
 
 & or iS&Mj he, or it can run . 
 
 t JoJlcj or she, or it can run . 
 
 . J» . or ^^1*0 
 
 Hr - ^ - y thou canst run . 
 
 or 
 
 +& Jc>j2j or 
 
 I ** ' i j 
 
 Jc>^j or c^J J 
 
 cow run . 
 
 P. 
 
 / / / 
 
 - or they 
 
 can run . 
 
 u#" CS )li ^ A J or 
 
 ” 
 
 / > ' y ' 
 
 ?/ow cow row. 
 
 «oe cow row. 
 
 Imperative Mood j*I. 
 
 S. 
 
 <s£ j or <*£ £c able to run . 
 
 / / 7 ^ x 
 
 or t3 <U4 let him, her, or it be able to run. 
 
 « ^ ' <* « •* 
 
 P, 
 
 A ^ A 
 
 ^ 0r y ou a ^ e t° run ‘ 
 
 or ^<£> l> ^*jJ> let them be able to run . 
 
 406. The following is the conjugation of the imperfect transitive 
 
 9 * 
 
 verb jJ y to do, to make, or perform, which is chiefly used in forming 
 the inflexions of other verbs. The compound tenses are wanting. 
 
258 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Infinitive (or Verbal Noun) ff? T o do. 
 
 Present Tense . 
 
 9 
 
 o 
 
 > I do. 
 
 S. P. 
 
 9 ' . 
 
 jyf we do. 
 
 {Sj* thou doest. you do. 
 
 d *>f or he, she, it does. or f, they do. 
 
 Imperfect Tense fj<I^ I (the governing noun singular.) 
 
 S, 
 
 F. M. 
 
 U or ^ f < *W u I was doing. 
 
 If G or if I < *j was/ doing. 
 
 or cX m, f iff dka he, or it was doing. 
 
 <i) f <ik& or If T K she, or it was doing. 
 
 V. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 .9 ' 9 ' ^ .9 9 
 
 fy or dJ t & , f, iff we were doing. 
 
 9 ' 9 „ * ^ 9 9 M 
 
 a)^r ^G or CJ, <sS } f, iff ,^*G you were doing. 
 
 9 y, 9 ' ^ p 9 
 
 or CJ, <6, f t iff y*& they were doing. 
 
 (The governing noun plural.) 
 
 F. M. 
 
 9' _9i 
 
 If Lo . or jy u I was doing, 
 if G or s,< G thou wast doing. 
 
 * 9+ * 
 
 iff dUA or If <*** he, or it was doing. 
 
 9 * 9 ^, 
 
 djt <tk* or ff$ she, or it was doing. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 259 
 
 F. 
 
 9 ' 9 
 
 M. 
 
 . 9 '- 9 
 
 9 ' 9 9 '^ > 
 
 ijj) or we were doing . 
 
 d? J* or you were doing . 
 
 ^JjS yka> or ^JjS they were doing . 
 
 Second Form — ( the governing noun 
 S. 
 
 
 F. 
 
 
 M. 
 
 
 
 jjS' 
 
 ♦♦ 
 
 S' 
 
 ^iS^or 
 
 ■ <*r 
 
 
 I was doing. 
 
 jjr 
 
 d 
 
 s’ 
 
 cJ^or 
 
 
 
 thou wast doing . 
 
 jjr 
 
 J 
 
 «• 
 
 CJor 
 
 aJT 
 
 p. 
 
 J 
 
 he, she, it ivas d 
 
 jjf 
 
 y 
 
 ClJ^or 
 
 
 j* 
 
 we were doing. 
 
 4'r 
 
 y 
 
 C/^or 
 
 < < •> 
 
 r 
 
 you were doing. 
 
 jjs" 
 
 J 
 
 *# 
 
 CJ^or 
 
 ‘‘C ^ 
 
 J 
 
 — 
 
 they were doing. 
 
 
 
 (The governing noun plural.) 
 
 s. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 9 '^ 
 
 9 *, 9 ^ 
 
 Jj f lS° or I was doing. 
 
 * •* 
 
 ps ? ' 
 
 J/ d or j/ 0 thou wast doing . 
 
 jy ^3 or ^3 he, she, it was doing . 
 
 x ♦« 
 
 P. 
 
 * i r ^ 
 
 or too were doing . 
 
 J/ y or y ?/ow were doing. 
 
 ^3 or ^3 they were doing. 
 
 + «♦ 
 
 2 l 2 
 
260 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 The Imperfect used as the Continuative. 
 
 S. 
 
 ITj H or iS j <*J U or CJ or b> « *> U 1 used to do. 
 
 r j » or J$ j du U or or < aT dU U thou used to do. 
 
 b* ^ du or & ) dtJ or CJ or b^ do 4*A i/ used to do. 
 
 b* J du or & j a; di*A or t*£j^or b? ^ aj she, it used to do. 
 ' ' ^ ^ ✓ * "• 
 
 P. 
 
 ȣfj or 
 
 ^jor 
 
 " ^ 
 CJ ^ or 
 
 b"^, af ^ a; kf^/o or ClT" or b| af a; we used to do. 
 
 b^, af j <u or or b^ aT <i> yow used to do. 
 
 £ ^ a> ^ du or CJ or <0 a; jxto they used to do. 
 
 S. 
 
 I f } or aj or or b^ ^ ** I used to do. 
 
 ♦* ♦♦ 
 
 9 9 / ^ 
 
 io or & } 0 aa or vJJ or K aT Mow w$ec? to do. 
 
 or af ) ^ aa or or K ^ ^ ** he, sh.e, it used to do. 
 
 (« ** 
 
 P. 
 
 cr; 
 cr; 
 
 or 
 
 or 
 
 or 
 
 * S 9 * 
 
 *x * >y 
 •O, " ; 
 
 H 
 
 <u or or b^ aS^ 
 
 & or ^Lf" or b^ ^ 
 du or CJ or ^ J 
 
 dU W£ WSOC? /O C?0. 
 
 aj ?/ow used to do. 
 aJ they used to do. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE, 
 
 261 
 
 * 
 
 Past Tense 
 
 «v 
 
 S. 
 
 CJ^or k^ a£ lo or eTj or \f), £ j U I did. 
 
 'SS' or 1^ <xf U or *n or ^ j lj thou didst, 
 
 or k^ & A*b or cTJ or k* j, jS j a*A he , or it did . 
 
 y ^ p p $ 
 
 <JJ or % a^ a*£> or CJ ^ or !0> " > *** she, or it did. 
 
 P. 
 
 y y- f y y p 9 9 9 
 
 CJ or k^ <*S Jy*> or CJ j or <r ^ kt. «oe 
 
 y yy y 9 » * / ^ 9 2* 
 
 CJ or k? af ^*»IJ or CJ ^ or k* ^ aS ^ ^j*»b you did . 
 
 ^ ^ ^ 9 2 9 
 
 CJ or K aS* G r LfJ ^ or k^ ? af ^ jk& they did . 
 
 Second Form. 
 
 S. 
 
 CJ^or k5 a? or UJ^or k^ af" ^ 
 
 «» #♦ 
 
 CJor £ af <3 or CJ^ or k^ af 0 ^ £/iow diofo/. 
 
 K^f or If af or CJ ?r If af ^ he, she, it did. 
 
 P. 
 
 v£r or If af ^.-o or Cl/~ or If aj ^ zoo 
 
 cJ^or If af ^/o or CJ^or If af j you did . 
 
 C/" or If aJ 
 
 or 
 
 ?r K af u 3 
 
 j they did. 
 
\ o 
 
 262 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 First Future Tense yA^ y* I. 
 
 S. 
 
 'S' 9 * 
 
 *5 sj or y j I should do. 
 
 .9 r 9 
 
 S or j thou shouldst do. 
 
 &xit or & ***, ) & <***1 
 
 9 % 9 s 9 I 
 
 ^ or dtf 0 *> y ^ ^ 
 
 he } she , or it should do. 
 
 P. 
 
 9 ^ 9 
 
 J 
 
 9 { 9 s . y 
 
 >S Sj or y } we should do , 
 
 A ^ 9 A f 9 
 
 l_A or lA } y° u ^diould do. 
 
 9 9 # 9 f f 9 9 
 
 o j t> yxlb or && J £ J***) J 4 1 
 
 9 9 s' 
 
 \r o ij or &\r o »j, 
 
 wr r !> 
 
 f they should do. 
 
 J 
 
 Second Future Tense 
 
 S. 
 
 s 9 r 9 • 
 
 ^3 to ^ or y J *i i) I d°- 
 
 9 .9 
 
 3 to tj or J to to thou wilt do. 
 
 1^ j <U or cVlr' j *}, ij J *i . .„ , 
 
 ' sAe, or it will do , 
 
 P p — 9 ! 
 
 If aj sj or ojf *> S), ^ ai !; 
 ^ ♦♦ > 
 
 J 
 
 P. 
 
 .P^ 9 9.9 9 
 
 jS to ij or y ) to jy> we will do. 
 
 A 9 K f 9 9 .m 
 
 3 to tj or J to ?/ow zoi/Z do. 
 
 9 . "9 * / . >> 
 
 j ^ or J to or ) to ytt j 
 
 x l //jey w*// c?o. 
 
 9 ... 9 f 9 
 
 ^ to ^ or &b to *j or ^ to 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 263 
 
 Aorist Tense gjLa*. 
 S. 
 
 9 
 
 fS or ) I may or shall do. 
 
 Ji or J* thou mayest or shalt do. 
 
 •I M 
 
 9 9 9 s 9 
 
 Vsj or J *> J ) he , she , it may or shall do. 
 
 9^ 9 
 
 P. 
 
 >> 9 
 
 £ &j or ^ ) we may or shall do. 
 
 * ^ 9 A P 
 
 ^3 &j or ^ J you may or shall do. 
 
 *♦ »« 
 
 9 9 9 9 
 
 or J J > they may or shall do. 
 
 * 
 
 Imperative Mood^°I. 
 
 S. 
 
 ^ j or or <*S tj } jS do thou. 
 
 6 or 63& tj 6 ^ 2 6 XxA I 
 
 " ' ' **- ^ y let him f her , or it do. 
 
 0 *j or C 6 ^ } J 
 
 P. 
 
 9 A - A 'V 9 V * 'V 
 
 ^ or or ^ ^ do you. 
 
 9 / . J j9 9 f 9 
 
 5 j 6 or 63 o ^ 6 S j o **a> "| 
 
 **' let them do. 
 
 9 9 9 * 
 
 6 8j or 63k 6 8},^ 6 8j J 
 
 The Agent Jxti **>!. 
 
 -* I / 
 
 S. 
 
 P. 
 
 j ' 
 
 or j&\ _ 
 
 *V „ " , „ r^ e ^ oer * M. an( * F. 
 
 ui2r or J 
 
 jyj 
 
 Me </oer^. 
 
264 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 The Noun of Fitness ^**1. 
 
 9 ' ' ' 9 9 ' , 9 *,' 
 
 y or jy O, A) or yy t> of \ or for doing. 
 406. Infinitive or Verbal Noun. y To do , 
 
 Present Tense (J^»* 
 
 S. 
 
 P. 
 
 rf 
 
 Ido. 
 
 we do. 
 
 vf you do, 
 he, she or it does. ^ey ^°- 
 
 
 r thou doest. 
 
 Imperfect Tense j\yy\ — (governing noun singular.) 
 
 ' *v 
 
 F. M. 
 
 ¥ or */ u / u 7 was doing. 
 
 ^ or ^ ^ ^ doing . 
 
 4 ]^ or <**J*>, or it was doing. 
 
 ^ 0V ^jf'**** £ <** A sh e > or it was doing . 
 
 F. M. 
 
 1 v r ' v 9 
 
 *X or T ^ ^ we were doing. 
 
 ✓ 9 m f 
 
 &y or */ u-U, j.r you were doing . 
 
 fc C •' V 
 
 or 2^) vj were doing. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 (Governing noun plural.) 
 
 F. 
 
 S. 
 
 M, 
 
 J'f or ± ?f u 
 
 J/or^/ U* 
 
 J/ or 
 
 J S or iff A. 
 
 J/ U I was doing . 
 j/ b* thou wast doing. 
 j/ <** or ^ zoos doing. 
 j/ s/ze, or zoos doing. 
 
 F. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. 
 
 or LSjf )y° jJj-i we were doing, 
 
 or c/^" y° u were doing. 
 
 9 9 
 
 or theiy were doing , 
 
 Second Form — (the governing noun singular.) 
 
 S. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 J / or 5 /V / ^ 7 zoos doing. 
 
 * ✓ . 
 
 or 0 thou wast doing. 
 
 S * 
 
 A, Z or he, she, or it was doing . 
 
 P. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 or we were doing . 
 
 or ^ you were doing. 
 
266 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Second Form — (the governing noun plural.) 
 
 S. 
 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 
 J/or 
 
 ' s?i*V 
 
 I was 
 
 doing. 
 
 J/° r 
 
 vf ? 
 
 ^ thou wast doing. 
 
 J/ m ' 
 
 
 ^ he, she, or it was doing. 
 P. 
 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 
 J/ 
 
 <f 9 
 
 or j* 
 
 J* we were doing. 
 
 J/ 
 
 or L£j^y° 
 
 y* you were doing. 
 
 j/ 
 
 or 
 
 <jf J? the v 
 
 were doing. 
 
 Second Form of Imperfect as the Continuative — ( governing noun 
 
 singular.) 
 
 S. 
 
 
 
 
 F. 
 
 
 
 M. 
 
 
 
 
 
 j/S 
 
 cU 
 
 or 
 
 ,/j 
 
 di 
 
 u 
 
 V ' 
 /; 
 
 d) 
 
 u 
 
 I used to do. 
 
 
 & 
 
 dU 
 
 or 
 
 •/; 
 
 d) 
 
 G 
 
 r> 
 
 d) 
 
 G 
 
 thou usedst to 
 
 do. 
 
 ¥> 
 
 di 
 
 or 
 
 
 d) 
 
 <Ua> 
 
 r> 
 
 d) 
 
 Aii 
 
 he, 
 
 or it used 
 
 to do. 
 
 Sf, 
 
 d) 
 
 or 
 
 */> 
 
 d> 
 
 A.k!b 
 * * 
 
 y> 
 
 d) 
 
 dk& 
 
 she, 
 
 or it used 
 
 to do. 
 
 P. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 s> j> 
 
 } <u or J ff ) )y A we used to do. 
 
 du or j ^ y° u use d t° d° m 
 
 F. or ^ 
 
 >> > /o ofo. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 267 
 
 ( Governing noun plural.) 
 
 
 
 S. 
 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 Jfy 
 
 or J 
 
 * 9 
 
 <J £ j di L® I used to do. 
 
 j/p *>. 
 
 or isj* } ^ 
 
 ^ thou usedst to do. 
 
 4i>« 
 
 > ✓ 
 or 
 
 2 d> he, or it used to do. 
 
 j/j, 
 
 s 9 
 
 or 
 
 i}J> ) *** s he, or it used to do 
 
 
 F. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. 
 
 Jfpor 
 
 ^ ' 
 
 d) isy j d) )y° 
 
 * 9 9 
 
 J S 2 d{ we used to do. 
 
 Jj’por 
 
 d> 
 
 V * V 
 
 i) y J dl you used to do. 
 
 x 9 
 
 ^ ^ 9 9 J. they used to do 
 
 F. ^JS p <V ifj ) H J*& ) 
 
 Second Form- 
 
 — (the noun singidar.) 
 
 
 S. 
 
 F, 
 
 M. 
 
 d)£ ^ ° r J *1 
 
 ' € 9 
 
 j > j ^y° Ai . I use d to do. 
 
 ^9 9 
 
 dj$ J or *J> J <-> d) 
 
 ' 9 
 
 J) j <3 & thou usedst to do. 
 
 , v 9 s' 9 f 
 
 d)y ^ or *y J ^ d) 
 
 '< 9 v 
 
 j) j ^3 d: he, she, or it used to do . 
 
 
 P. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 ,V * '<* 9 
 
 or J J' 0 d; 
 
 Ss9 9 
 
 y 2 di we used to do. 
 
 d) S } or & S ^ j* 
 
 'r* 
 
 y 2 j* dP you used to do. 
 
 's 9 's' 9 9 
 
 d)ji ^ or *y j 
 
 9 y 
 
 y } ^j) di they used to do, 
 >0 
 
 2 m 2 
 
268 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 F. 
 
 ( Noun in the plural number .) 
 
 S. 
 
 M. 
 
 ' 9 
 
 Jh or I used to do. 
 
 or j 6 a; (J 1^5* j o <u thou used to do. 
 
 i ^ r 9 ^ i 9 ^ 
 
 ^2 J or 1^2 ) *• ^ ^ e i she , or it used to do . 
 
 P. 
 
 F. 
 
 or Lf £ ) j* *> ) y° *■! roe used to do. 
 
 ^ £ ) or 3 I* ^ J J' 0 *i y° u use d to d°- 
 
 f 2 or ^ j <w they used to do. 
 
 s y 
 
 Past Tense 0 • — (For a noun singular .) 
 
 S. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 *y> or J to J) j U I did. 
 
 ' * > , w '^9 |- 
 
 or r ; b x> b thou didst. 
 
 s S> ^ 9 ' " 9 ' 
 
 d)jZ j or %> 2 > ) ^ J a*A he, or it did . 
 
 q; or ) a * A 2* ^ *** S ^ e) ° r ** ^ d ' 
 
 P. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 . V 9 S 9 * 'S 9 9 
 
 a ) jS j or J 2 ) )y° we dld ‘ 
 
 * 9 9 9 » * 9 9 m 
 
 dJjf ) or *J> 2 £ ) iS>b you did. 
 
 / jy * ). 
 
 . V / \ > . A lhe, j did - 
 
 F. * >2 J or j J -) 
 
 M. 
 
 9 9 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 2G9 
 
 ( For a noun plural.) 
 S. 
 
 
 F. 
 
 
 M. 
 
 
 
 
 or is/ ) 
 
 u 
 
 
 u 
 
 / did. 
 
 
 or J 
 
 II 
 
 J/I 
 
 u 
 
 thou didst. 
 
 4f> 
 
 c 9 
 
 or Lf^ ) 
 
 dk& 
 
 j/; 
 
 ✓ 
 
 <tx& 
 
 he, or it did. 
 
 
 or is/ j 
 
 dkib 
 
 j/J 
 
 dk& 
 / / 
 
 she, or it did. 
 
 P. 
 
 F. 
 
 M 
 
 9 9 
 
 we did. 
 
 tV 9 S 9 9 f 9 9 
 
 JJ ) or L f/j Jjb jj* 
 
 '9 9 9 * •'Z 9 9 m 
 
 / / j or is/ j J/. ; y° u did - 
 
 „ , they did. 
 
 F. / / ) or is / j ) 
 
 Second Form — (for a noun singular.) 
 
 S. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 x 9*9 
 
 A/ ^ ) or t/ ^ ) 
 
 V ^ 
 
 vj ^ I did. 
 
 0 } or 0 ) 
 
 v> 0 j thou didst. 
 
 J / or */ s? 3 ! 
 
 '* r 9 
 
 / j he, she, or it did . 
 
 
 P. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 iV ' 9 < 9 9 
 
 j or *j-> ) 
 
 *) £ y * or y ) 
 
 I V 9 f 9 9 / 9 9 
 
 V 9 9 
 
 j> j* j we did. 
 
 / 9 
 
 j* ) you did . 
 
 they did , 
 
270 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ( For a noun plural.) 
 S. 
 
 
 F.. 
 
 
 M. 
 
 or 
 
 
 
 ' >> 
 
 J I did. 
 
 J/ 0; or 
 
 s?/ 
 
 * ) 
 
 J/ 6 j thou didst. 
 
 J/ or 
 
 
 iJ> 
 
 H 
 
 D 
 
 (JjZ ^ j or *7 
 
 
 F. 
 
 JL . 
 
 M. 
 
 
 or y° 2 
 
 , -> * * 
 
 j* j we did. 
 
 j/ri 
 
 s * 
 
 or ^ 
 
 iJj^ ) V ou did. 
 
 
 S' 9 * 
 
 or s?r ^ 
 
 ijj^ ^ ) they did. 
 
 Perfect Tense 
 
 dr 
 
 / **/ 
 
 . — (For a noun singular.) 
 
 F. 
 
 
 S. 
 
 M. 
 
 
 3J to 
 
 S J J.3 b 
 
 5 l> jS 
 
 Lf J tjtjf 
 
 bo I have done. 
 b thou hast done. 
 
 is^ Sf 
 Lf^ Lf^ 
 
 he, or it has done. 
 <**£> she, or it has done. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. 
 
 f L‘ 
 
 9 
 
 0 isj^ jjj' 0 we have done. 
 iS 6 LS £ you have done . 
 
 V / -v 
 
 is ^ ) 
 
 
 they have done. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 271 
 
 S. 
 
 (For a noun plural .) 
 
 P. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 L£ ^ I have done. 
 
 «• ♦• >C 
 
 x x* 
 
 k^° we have done. 
 
 s' / 
 
 / ^ 
 
 b efowe. 
 
 / / 
 
 \jfi you have done . 
 
 S’ s 
 
 <**■& he, or it has done. 
 
 V -* 
 
 ^<3 they have done . 
 
 (_£ J she , or it has done. 
 
 
 Second Form — (for a noun singular.) 
 S. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 
 L£^ ^ Aave flftwe. 
 
 x >* 
 
 sJ 0 
 
 ^0 S' t) thou hast done. 
 
 ♦* ♦♦ -O X 
 
 "/ j 
 
 L£j^ he, she, or it has done. 
 
 P. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 cx 
 
 O ' 
 
 S>\X 
 
 V" 
 
 V ^ 
 
 (^0 we have done. 
 
 P. 
 
 s j £ \y° y° u k ave done. 
 
 50 / J they have done . 
 
 (For a noun plural.) 
 
 S. 
 
 M. and F. M. and F. 
 
 V V ^ 
 
 ^ dcwe. efowe. 
 
 s' •* ^ ✓ 
 
 ^ dorae. 2/ ow done. 
 
 ' 's " 
 
 's V m V V 
 
 1 ie > s ^ e > or ^ h as done. Lf ^ L£p ^ ey have done. 
 
 ** ** s> .» **. . ^ ■> 
 
272 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Pluperfect Tense L ^^ /0 - — (The noun singular.) 
 
 F. 
 
 s. 
 
 M. 
 
 8} J* Lo 
 
 zj {Sjf l* I had done. 
 
 if G 
 
 Zj {S ^ ^ ou hadst done. 
 
 bj ji a*A 
 
 Zj {jp ^ juA he , or it had done. 
 
 zj a* A 
 
 zj ^ £ a^A she, or it had done. 
 
 F. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. 
 
 s' 9 
 
 *J J 
 
 9 9 
 
 Zj ) y° we had done. 
 
 zj y° u d° ne • 
 
 F. 
 
 9 P .9 ^ 
 
 ' >* ) 
 
 s "*s p r they had done , 
 
 a; ^ ' 
 
 F. 
 
 > / u 
 
 (Noun plural.) 
 
 S. 
 
 M. 
 
 KS^ ^ had done. 
 
 > / u 
 ✓ y 
 
 j f <** 
 
 y ✓ 
 
 ^ ^ thou flfowe. 
 
 y 
 
 p 
 
 22 ^$ 2 * he, or it had done . 
 
 -5 'f 
 
 * < 
 
 ^ 2 <** A she, or it had done . 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 P. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 
 jy we had done. 
 
 ^ /u*‘ 
 
 9 V -V 
 
 jy V ou had done. 
 
 M. 
 
 9 ' V .^X 
 
 Lf >> j* A | 
 
 " }> they had done. 
 
 F. 
 
 >Jf j* J 
 
 Second Form — (noun singular.) 
 S. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 *; / ^ 
 
 
 t^P / had done. 
 
 * 
 
 j> 
 
 *5 Lf 'J* & thou hadst done. 
 
 s/J 
 ^ ♦♦ 
 
 * V * 
 
 he, she, it had done, 
 
 P. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 ^i r .r 
 
 y V' 
 
 1 ^ h a d done. 
 
 >3 / y 
 
 s' 
 
 9 V 
 
 ‘ *J Lf j> you had done. 
 
 •j / J 
 
 * V „ 
 
 *5 Lpj-J ^ done. 
 
 ( Noun plural.) 
 
 S. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 ;/V I had done . 
 
274 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 F. 
 
 P. 
 M. 
 
 9 ' s 9 
 
 / ? y 's * 
 
 y* or we had done. 
 
 V 9 
 
 } y j*> or jy L£y y° V ou had done. 
 
 s* * 9 V' 9 
 
 2 j> ^ or {jpy ^ they had done . 
 
 ✓ ^ ** 
 
 FirsZ Future Tense yc<z» y> I. 
 
 S. 
 
 V 9 
 
 £y ) I should do. 
 
 thou shouldst do. 
 
 j or iSjfi J £ <*** he, she, it should do. 
 
 P. 
 
 S ^ 9 
 
 )y J we should do. 
 
 A f 9 
 
 iSy J V ou should do. 
 j or Lf j** they should do. 
 
 Second Future Tense JkJ. 
 
 S. 
 
 9 ' S 9 
 
 C>6 ^ ° r C-+ ^ **' t) I w ill do. 
 
 ) or t?/ >*i " thou will do. 
 
 / * 
 
 <JU } or ^ $y ) <i*A Ae, sfo, iZ wi/7 c?o. 
 
 ✓ ^ 
 
 P. 
 
 * S 9 9 f 9 9 
 
 } y Sj j or )y ) & we will do. 
 
 / 9 A ^9 9 
 
 <y j or J U*'* y° u w% ht do. 
 
 / 9 f 9 % 9 
 
 <o J or Lsy j *} they will do. 
 
 U 
 ♦♦ - 
 
 L? 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 275 
 
 Doubtful Past Tense — (Noun singular.) 
 
 S. 
 
 F. 
 
 
 
 M. 
 
 
 
 KS) f *> 
 
 * ** 
 
 U 
 
 
 ✓ 
 
 cu 
 
 U 
 
 / have done . 
 
 s 
 
 £ <0 
 
 U 
 
 ♦♦ x 
 
 
 u 
 
 thou mayst have done. 
 
 is) jf " 
 
 X* 
 
 <**£> 
 
 o 
 
 
 ✓ 
 
 he, or it may have done. 
 
 
 <UA 
 
 / ✓ 
 
 
 <sf *4 
 
 <ixA> 
 
 ✓ / 
 
 she, or it may have done, 
 
 F. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. 
 
 jS di fe&o \j? S d) we may have done . 
 
 {j?) di dJ you may have done. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 
 iSj £ d: jk& J 
 
 ^ they may have done . 
 
 (Noun Plural .) 
 
 S. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 d) U I may have done. 
 
 LfJ Lf/ * thou mayest have done. 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 P. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 * 
 
 ^g) )y° we may have done . 
 
 ' 
 
 iS r V ou ma V have done. 
 
 < / 
 
 ^ 9 
 
 isj* they may have done. 
 
 Second Form — (noun singular.) 
 
 S. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 iS) Jj 0 ‘V or iS) is* *2 I ma y ^ ave done. 
 
 r- r ** ' ** 
 
 iS) £ d & or is) ^)f ^ ^ th ° u mayest have done, 
 i^y ^ ^ to or is) is £ ^ & he, she , it may have done. 
 
 F. 
 
 l> to or 
 
 P. 
 
 M. 
 
 / 
 
 ig) j) yo d) or is) ^ (f 3* we ma y have done . 
 
 /* /• / 
 
 iS) £ y° ^ or LS) y° u ma y have done. 
 
 £ r ^ 9 
 
 sJ W L* J *i they may have done. 
 
 ( Noun plural). 
 
 S. 
 
 iS) is y ^y° I ma y have done. 
 
 s 
 
 i$) isjf ^ thou mayest have done. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 277 
 
 P. 
 
 Ljpj y* <*J we may have done . 
 
 ✓ <* 
 
 Ly y° y° u ma y ^ ave ^ one • 
 
 ✓ ✓ 
 
 Lf} y dU they may have done . 
 Conditional Tense — (Noun singular.) 
 
 F. 
 
 S. 
 
 M. 
 
 t^b or L£) (^b or Lf} £ If I had done. 
 
 {j?]j or is) ff ^ £ L£b or LfJ U £ If thou liadst done . 
 
 M. Lp b or Lf}^ *** ^ Lf b or Lf> Lf^ ^ V or ^ h a d done. 
 F. (^I; or Lf} £ A*A £ (^b or i^f} \jS^ *** ^ V s ^ e or ^ ^ad done. 
 
 F. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. 
 
 or iSjJf j)j* £ Lfb or Lf? LfJ^ )y° ^ V we had done. 
 t^b or Lf} j>S* £ Lfb or Lf2 Lfj^i ^ ^ V you had done. 
 
 * p p 
 
 Lpb or Lf? £ ^ £ Lfb or Lf? Lf % £ If they had done. 
 
 ( Noun plural.) 
 
 S. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 Lfb or Lf} Lf )f £ If I had done. 
 
 <^b or Lf? is £ U £ If thou liadst done . 
 
 •♦ v ><s 
 
278 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 (jplj or ^p^ {j? £ S If he or it had done, 
 
 or S If she or it had done. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 \j or Lp; S V we had done. 
 
 ^\p or {sj* S If you had done, 
 or S *i x * ^ If they had done . 
 
 ♦♦ ^ ** *• >C 
 
 Second Form — fraotm singular .) 
 
 S. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 ^pl; or S or 1^?) L fj S If I had done. 
 
 or {sj £ S ^p | ) or ^p; LSjS ^ S If thou hadst done. 
 
 S' 
 
 ^pl; or Lp^ S' or S' If he, she, it had done. 
 
 F. 
 
 ^ 9 
 
 P. 
 
 M. 
 
 ^pl^ or jS y*> S Lp l) or {£) S If we had done. 
 
 or J* S or Lp^ ^ff y* S' If you had done. 
 
 Lpl^ or \J* S^ or ^ S If they had done. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE* 
 
 279 
 
 ( Noun plural.) 
 
 S. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 Lfb or ifj tf '/ ^ 6 If I had done. 
 
 H ♦* 
 
 hfb or 6 6 If thou hadst done. 
 
 S 
 
 <sb or isj tf f J) & If he, she, it had done. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 /■ f 
 
 Lflj or L£j y 6 If we had done. 
 Lfb or uy Ls^f y sX If you had done. 
 or J) & If they had done. 
 
 Imperative Moojd j *\. 
 
 S. 
 
 s> 
 
 or XjZ j do thou . 
 
 KS^ ^ J or ^ let him , her , or it do . 
 
 p. 
 
 A S 
 
 yx or {Sv } do you. 
 
 * ) or > t? j** iet tkem d °- 
 
 The Agent 
 
 S. 
 
 9 ^ S9 
 
 M - JX JX\ 
 
 f. yf eCj/i 
 
 the doer. M. and 
 
 rJ&\ 
 
 ■&) 
 
 [> the doers . 
 
280 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 The Past Participle 
 
 * 
 
 S. P. 
 
 F. * M. M. and F. 
 
 or done. done. 
 
 The Noun of Fitness C^U ^*>1. 
 
 M. and F. £ or >r* of or for doing . S. and V, 
 
 Passive Voice 
 
 Present Tense 
 
 s. 
 
 p. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 jS I am done. 
 
 we are done. 
 
 ** * 
 
 \^S thou art done. 
 
 x .. ** ^ 
 
 A v 
 
 iSJ* you are done. 
 
 he, she, it is done . 
 
 *V ^ " / 
 
 they are done. 
 
 Imperfect Tense j\y ^ *>1 ^*1°. 
 
 v 
 
 S. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 trJ 
 
 ✓ A 
 A 
 
 (!r 
 
 L£J^ I was doing . 
 
 <erf 
 
 * 
 
 
 thou wast doing . 
 
 
 *w 
 
 s 
 
 he, or it was doing. 
 
 /Z 'f 
 
 or t J& 
 
 she, or it was doing . 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 281 
 
 P. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 9 A 
 
 we were d° in 9' 
 
 A A ^ . 
 
 LfJ’ V ou were doing . 
 
 or 
 
 A A x j 
 
 or ^.Sj 
 
 ythey were doing , 
 
 Second Form for Continuative Tense . 
 
 S. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 fy* j> j to ^yil> {j£jS * & I used to be doing. 
 
 Lfj** ) to j to thou used to be doing . 
 
 r * 
 
 <*«£> ^ j.3 ^ <*; he, or it used to be doing 
 f A * ^ 
 
 du or j & she, or it used to be 
 
 9 A " A 
 
 P. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 9 A ^ ^ / 
 
 ^ ^ we used to be doing. 
 
 A A />. 9 
 
 J to you used to be doing . 
 
 y» or (J is J 
 
 A A O | 
 
 Ur or /-> 
 
 ^ S s' 
 
 2 o 
 
 J> they used to be doing. 
 
282 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 / f 
 
 Past Tense 3^*° 
 S. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 1 's ' 
 
 -'A ^ s ' A ' ^ 
 
 j) J I* yZt 3 I WClS d° ne ‘ 
 
 3 th° u wast done. 
 
 s 
 
 't 51 
 
 <*£ ^pj3 y he, or it was done. 
 
 ' A A^ x / 
 
 or »j<£> j5 } she, or it was done. 
 
 s 
 
 P. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 jjiii {jp & j we were done. 
 
 ^p ^p j5 ) V ou were done. 
 
 9h "A '9 
 
 j* Jr i sf i\ 
 
 A V' I 
 
 Jj“ *9* x y 
 
 [> they were done. 
 
 Perfect Tense 
 
 S. 
 
 M. 
 
 ^ ^aw j5” I have been done. 
 
 ^3 yii» jf ^3 Lp j-f thou hast been done. 
 
 SO ji" ^pJ LpA^» he, she, it has been done. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 9 " ' £ 
 
 j> m {SJ*** we have been done. 
 
 ^Js y° u h° ve been done. 
 
 L£^ L£j*» they have been done. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 283 
 
 Pluperfect Tense 
 
 s, 
 
 F. M. 
 
 ^ ^ V 9 '* < 
 
 ^ jj KSJ**> I had been done. 
 
 / /• x ^ 
 
 ^5 ji* L f} thou hadst been done. 
 
 s *■ 
 
 5} s* ^T** ^ ie > s h e ) it had been done , 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 s ive had been done. 
 
 a if . r 
 a 
 
 y° u ^ iai ^ ^ een done. 
 L$J*> L£J^ they had been done. 
 
 First Future Tense y>\. 
 
 S. 
 
 F. 
 
 * ? ; 
 r j > 
 
 M. 
 
 p* ) I should be done. 
 
 ' J> f -> 9 
 
 ^2, j 5 thou shouldst be done . 
 
 " 9 ' 9 + 
 
 he, or it should be done. 
 
 ", * ** ", 
 
 V 9 'S 9 
 
 F. <J> / * ) * •* 'She, or it should be done. 
 
 2 o 2 
 
284 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 P. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 ^ '9 
 
 yt» J we should be done. 
 
 A . ' c * 
 
 ^2' -3 y° U s ^ ou ^ ^ e d° ne ’ 
 
 
 5 " ^ t) 
 
 / ✓ 
 
 
 they should be done. 
 
 ' 9 
 
 Second Future Tense 
 
 S. 
 
 M. 
 
 r " 4?/ i 
 
 ' 
 
 f** 3 *• 
 
 F. 
 
 * V 9 
 
 pw d) ^ y 
 
 " 9 
 
 !***> jj y & 
 
 M. 
 
 ' 9 
 
 Lf *i 
 
 V * 
 
 \jr <££ 9 *i 
 
 F. 
 
 ^S. i> J' ■) 
 
 < * 
 
 {£* £9*! 
 
 M. 
 
 ' 9 
 
 L*" *■>. L f£J 
 
 £* U?/ J •>■! 
 
 F. 
 
 **« /s 
 
 •V ✓ 
 
 uf / 9 x> . 
 
 [> I will be done. 
 
 ■JJ 
 
 n 
 
 thou wilt be done. 
 
 « J 
 
 he } or it will be done. 
 * A she. or it will be done. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 9 's9 9 
 
 '^9 s ^,y 
 
 J y» > y y y* we will be done. 
 
 A . 9 A 's 9 f — 
 
 J you will be done. 
 
 \jT <*j y Lsjfi y & they will be done. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 Aorist Tense 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 j j I may or shall be done, 
 
 j ) thou mayest or shalt be done. 
 
 ^ Lfj*'' ) he, she, it may or shall be done. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 ^ f- 9 
 
 y* } we ma y or s hvdt be done. 
 
 you may or shall be done. 
 
 ** v/i they may or shall be done. 
 
 Doubtful Past Tense \*U& ^u. 
 
 S. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 aj I ma y ^ ave heen done. 
 
 J yi*» £ aj *<Sff thou mayest 
 
 have been done . 
 
286 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 M 
 
 F. 
 
 M 
 
 F. 
 
 Past Conditional Tense 
 
 ' *• ^ 
 S. 
 
 Ls\) or l f} Lf '-ff *J 
 
 If I had been done. 
 
 If thou hadst been done. 
 
 F. L*b or y*** ff 
 M. Lfb or Lf; ** ^ 
 
 or Lf^ ^ > 
 
 (^b or LfJ *** ^ If he, or it hadst been done. 
 
 t^b or y*h X ^ If she, or it had been done. 
 
 P. 
 
 m. L^b ° r Lf^ ^ V we had been done. 
 
 /■ "" 
 
 M. ^b or jf L/*^ ^ If y° u held been done . 
 
 ; ^ 
 
 M. ^b or LSJ 1J>J* y xSb ** If they had been done. 
 
 Imperative Mood y > |. 
 S. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 , s $ 
 
 **> Lgjf 
 
 » { 
 
 S & M * 
 
 }> be thou done. 
 
 V . '<> 
 
 ,JL isjl j j 0 cU tt> let him or it be done. 
 
 j) j J let her or it be done. 
 
 P. 
 
 A 
 
 >“ S?/P| 
 
 ' r 
 
 you done. 
 
 M. fif F. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 287 
 
 -X ' 
 
 Past Participle ^*»|- 
 
 S. 
 
 F. M. become done. 
 
 P. 
 
 s become done . 
 
 M. and F. Lf^ 3 
 ✓ / 
 
 407. Conjugation of a regular transitive verb. 
 
 ✓ x / 
 
 Infinitive, or Verbal Noun To throw, or dart , 
 
 Active Voice 
 
 
 
 ^ y 
 
 Past Tense — (governing noun singular .) 
 
 S. 
 
 F. 
 
 j or dSJty j 
 
 ' 9 9 
 
 eiZ&j* * or ^ 
 
 M. 
 
 he or it threw. 
 
 aII&j 
 
 j or &»*l) ) J she or it threw . 
 
 
 i) ^ or &****£ ^ ^ 
 
 ■i) -5 
 
 U thou didst throw. 
 
 f 9 9 . 
 
 all&j ^ or ^ ^ bo I threw. 
 
 F. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. 
 
 9 
 
 1 
 
 - 9 9 , 9 i 
 
 aJu^ j or j 
 
 ' * ... ^ ^ - . 9 9 
 
 J&lfoj j or j J you threw . 
 
 " $ 9 9 9 9 
 
 Ajb&Jp } or j j ^J' 0 we threw. 
 
 J> they threw . 
 
288 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ( The governing noun plural.) 
 
 l ) 
 
 
 S. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 9 ' 
 
 ^ j <zk&> 
 
 i" ^ 
 
 9 
 
 c j <**a> 
 
 u. ^ 
 
 9 .« 
 
 J u 
 
 9 
 
 ^ , 
 
 J u 
 
 ✓* 
 
 r ^ 
 
 
 P. 
 
 9 / 
 
 
 M. 
 
 V ’if 
 
 \' p * . 9 
 
 ) or j) 
 
 ^ ^ /• 
 
 ^ -?... > 9 .„ 
 
 Mey threw. 
 
 } or j ^ L/*^ ?/ om threw. 
 
 9 '99 .' 99 
 
 j or J )y° J we threw. 
 
 Second Form — (the governing noun singular.) 
 
 
 
 S. 
 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 ✓ 
 
 or 
 
 s' 
 
 &H? \J 5 
 
 ^3 j ^ ie or ^ threw. 
 
 * 
 
 or 
 
 9 
 
 <£&sj 0 j 
 
 9 
 
 ^ ^ throw . 
 
 or 
 
 
 9 
 
 0^3} J ^ threw. 
 
 + •# 
 
 
 
 P. 
 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 
 or ^ 
 
 , * ^ 
 
 ^3^ threw. 
 
 
 9 
 
 or <^ava3^ 
 
 9 
 
 j* j ?/o?/ threw. 
 
 
 >» ,? 
 
 O?’ ^ 
 
 f 9 
 
 2 we threw. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 289 
 
 (The governing noun plural.) 
 
 S. 
 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 ✓ 
 
 or 
 
 
 , ; t p> j? 
 
 ^ jj he or it threw. 
 
 or 
 
 2 
 
 <-> J 
 
 J 0 j thou didst thro 
 
 or 
 
 3 
 
 i ^ 2 
 
 ) I threw. 
 
 * •• 
 
 P. 
 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 J 
 
 or c^Z>) J> ) 
 
 Ih v ^ 
 
 ^ J they threw . 
 
 /• 4l 
 
 
 2 
 
 or y° j 
 
 y you threw. 
 
 
 2 2 
 
 or y ) 
 
 * s 
 
 ' 2 2 
 
 y j we threw. 
 
 
 Aorist 
 
 1 . 9 
 
 Tense 
 
 
 •s. 
 
 P. 
 
 Ji j he throws, or may or shall throw. j they throw, fyc. 
 
 •’ ^ »v 
 
 x' S A ( S 
 
 lJ J J thou throwest, or may fyc. throw, j you throw, §*c. 
 
 «» ♦♦ 
 
 " 9 9 \ 9 
 
 j 1 throw, or may or shall throw. y ) ) we throw, fyc. 
 
 Imperative Mood^I. 
 
 d)j or d)j j throw thou. 
 
 \ 9 \ 9 
 
 * } or J ^ ^ him, her, or it throw. 
 
 P. 
 
 A 2 
 
 or j throw you. 
 
 f 9 \' 9 
 
 ^ J or let them throw. 
 
 ♦> " «v 
 
 2 p 
 
290 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 The Agent JxU 
 
 M. or ^ ~1 
 
 •• ' " > the thrower. M. & F. *?- ^ L throwers . 
 
 9 /.? % 9 r 
 
 F. or J 
 
 
 The Passive Voice 
 P«s< Tense 
 
 *V 
 
 s. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 <c£ ^ or j cUA he or it was thrown . 
 
 «♦ /■ ** ✓ 
 
 A ^ 9 * 
 
 byi, u-'&lj J or ^ <**& sAe or was thrown. 
 
 LSJ*» J or j"] 
 
 LSj* 1 ^ or 
 
 ✓ / 
 
 - * ,' ' 
 
 J or J&l 
 
 J> thou wast thrown. 
 
 ' A .? ^ j 
 
 ^*-**^5 ^ or 
 
 K 
 
 was thrown. 
 
 P. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 * *. 
 
 ' ?A V A ^ 
 
 or (J^ J or I 
 
 v / 
 
 A ^ 9 
 
 j> they were thrown. 
 
 j~ or J yi i or J&1) ) 
 
 y, / *t / ^ ^ 
 
 A ' "9 
 
 {SjZ> ^ or J yoa were thrown . 
 
 *V " *•/ ' 
 
 P a ' \ 9 9 
 
 jyh j or j we were thrown. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 291 
 
 F. 
 
 Second Form. 
 S. 
 
 M. 
 
 £ , 9 $ p 
 
 J or <£&lj j J he, she , fyc. 
 
 iv as thrown. 
 
 Asp P A p 
 
 j or j LSJ~ j thou wast thrown. 
 
 ' A " P P * A P 
 
 ^ or <£&lj } j thrown. 
 
 P. 
 
 F. 
 
 >> 
 
 M. 
 
 \J*&y j or } fjyt> j they were thrown. 
 
 A A s p P h ti ' p 
 
 ) or j L J you were thrown. 
 
 s a ^ y ' p p A ^ 
 
 jyi ^ or CU&>; J J* ^ we were thrown . 
 
 Present or Aorist Tense £jLi/o. 
 S. 
 
 M. 
 
 ♦♦ 
 
 J 
 
 ♦♦ ✓ 
 
 F. 
 
 * 
 
 cC 
 
 •* r 
 
 
 M. 
 
 •• 
 
 -5 
 
 •» ✓ 
 
 F. 
 
 .. 
 
 J 
 
 M. 
 
 a 
 
 r 
 
 j 
 
 ♦♦ < 
 
 F. 
 
 *■ 
 
 /♦ 
 
 r 
 
 
 ' >> 
 
 thrown. 
 
 ' , \ 
 
 •H> j - 1 ifAr0TO - 
 
 [/4row^. 
 or w«y or s/zo// 
 
 or or s/m/Z 
 
 thrown. 
 
 2 p 2 
 
292 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 P. 
 
 * |7. . 9 > 
 
 M. & F. y or y they are thrown , or may or shall be 
 
 [ thrown . 
 
 A r. . ^ ... ^ 
 
 M. & F. or ?/o& are thrown, or may or shall be 
 
 [ thrown . 
 
 M. & F. J or ^ we thrown, or may or shall be 
 
 [ thrown . 
 
 Second Form. 
 
 S. P, 
 
 9 A u * 
 
 y he, she, it is thrown, fyc. y they are thrown, fyc. 
 
 9 A t u . 9 
 
 ly y thou art thrown, fyc. U'^^iy y you are thrown, fyc. 
 
 ?* < ** .**• 
 
 **1) y I am thrown, fyc. 
 
 A 
 
 kjt 
 
 * A iT. . ^ 
 
 y we are thrown, fyc. 
 
 Imperative Mood^I. 
 
 S. 
 
 9 
 
 m. - * / * ** : ' ^ y 
 
 sjT t' > l_#" 0 >J 
 
 let him or it be thrown. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 . t" 9 9 
 
 J? •i ^d; ) * <**0 
 
 ' *v " ^ l 
 
 A U.n > % / [ 
 
 ^ t> L2**£>Jy yj 
 
 j> let her or it be thrown . 
 
 s IZ > f) 
 
 < \T ✓ [ 
 
 be thou thrown. 
 
 ***> ij^ly y <*«£ yj 
 
 P. 
 
 S 9 J 9 
 
 L#^d; ) j 5*^1 
 
 *V> / .« / *■ -9 i 
 
 - a , Jti.j 
 
 , L^“iJ > ^ > 
 
 j> let them be thrown. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 293 
 
 or 
 
 M. & F. 
 
 
 
 
 be you thrown. 
 
 Past Participle dr** r l 
 
 s. 
 
 M. or 'l 
 
 * ** f become thrown. 
 
 F. J&Jj or J 
 
 P. 
 
 lPv 1 
 
 M. and 4. **' " j> become thrown. 
 
 J 
 
 408. Conjugation of a transitive verb which rejects the prefix^. 
 
 o Infinitive, oh Verbal Noun. d)$\) ^ 0 bring. 
 
 . 9 ' $ . 
 
 Active Voice <**</*. 
 
 Tense — f Governing noun singular .) 
 
 S. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 ✓ ^ / 
 
 0?' sub -*** ub ^ he or it brought. 
 
 * + 
 
 or *!>!✓ < ** A or i/ brought. 
 
 J ub or s ub b ub b " Mom broughtest. 
 
 ^ub or Lo U I brought. 
 
294 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 P. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 " 9 
 
 M. X)\) they brought. 
 
 f. «&i> or *i)b they brought. 
 
 / 9 m * ^ I m 
 
 or X)!) Lr y° u brought. 
 
 , ' 9 ' ? 
 
 h)b or ^ Xxb we brought. 
 
 (The governing noun plural .) 
 
 S. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 ✓ ^ / y 
 
 or X*b l)X)\) *** b> e or it brought. 
 
 / / 
 
 ^JX)\) or X^J *** l)X)\) s ^ e or ^ brought. 
 
 l)X&) or »b b ’ Jl;L> b ’ thou broughtest. 
 
 ' ' I 
 
 Jtib or X)b JXxb U 1 brought. 
 
 P. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 9, ' 9 
 
 M. »X>b or the y brought. 
 
 x " 9 
 
 F. (JX)\) or X)b J k * the y brought. 
 
 x x ^ 9 m 
 
 JVb or Mb vT b " uP b V° u brought. 
 
 * ' 9 ' 9 
 
 Jxib or XX s ) )y dX) ] ) ^ we brought. 
 Second Form — (the governing noun singular.) 
 
 S. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 i] 'vb or 5 i;l> J? Dl> J* he > she ’ or il brou, J hL 
 
 \j or *X) [ J O X)b 0 thou broughtest. 
 
 or ^ )Jj >jP I brought. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 295 
 
 F. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. 
 
 / y ^ 
 
 or s i;b i;b J> they brought . 
 
 ♦* ♦♦ 
 
 4l>!> or *DL> _r° i;b y you brought . 
 
 / '9 '9 
 
 *'XX) or *Xxl) y° Xjb we brought. 
 
 (The governing noun plural.) 
 
 S. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 r y ^ 
 
 dub or l# 5 Ji;b l) he, she, or it brought. 
 
 ' ♦♦ ♦# 
 
 ^ / x 
 
 Ji;b or 1>L> * dub Mow broughtest. 
 
 dub or ub y dub I brought. 
 
 P. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 di>!> or i;b y dub y they brought . 
 
 y y H *♦ 
 
 Ji;b or X)b y° dX)b y y° u brought. 
 
 s 
 
 ' S 9 ' 9 
 
 dub or X)b j* dub y we brought. 
 
 9 
 
 Aorist Tense 
 
 S. " P. 
 
 ^X)[) h e > she , or it may bring, or brings. isXX\) ^ ie V ma V bring, or bring. 
 
 ** *y 
 
 A 
 
 ^ sX)b thou mayest bring or bring eth. ^X)\) V ou ma V bring, or bring . 
 
 - 9 
 
 rub i may bring, or bring . jXjl) we ma y bring, or bring. 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 296 
 
 Imperative Mood j*I. 
 
 S. P. 
 
 LSjj ^ \) or ^ ^ bim, $ c ' bring. ^ J** them bring. 
 
 s * 
 
 - A . * r 
 or *X)\) <U bring thou. <j*b ^rm^ yow. 
 
 The Agent (Jxli ^*»t. 
 
 S. 
 
 P. 
 
 
 M - the hrhvjgr. M. & F_ ^ the bring ers. 
 
 F. 
 
 Passive Voice <***^- 
 
 Past Tense 
 
 s. 
 
 M. 
 
 \' A . A " ' 
 
 or ^ Dl> *" he, fyc. was brought. 
 
 S * s 
 
 ^fjrXpb S?y u?Dl> thou wast brought. 
 
 'S' ' A ^ 
 
 r>" i;b /•y- Lfi;b / was brought. 
 
 P. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 A A ' S 
 
 jy* or ^ ^ they were brought. 
 
 ' /■ 
 
 A A ✓ 
 
 M. & F. 2^ ow were brought. 
 
 S> A 
 
 M. & F. jyi were brought. 
 
 \ 
 
FUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 297 
 
 Second Form. 
 
 S. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 a , ' 
 
 tyb or *** he, ty c ' was brought. 
 
 A X A 
 
 \Sy» &X)\) 07 X)b thou wast brought. 
 
 - A ( x x A x 
 
 *^1) or / was brought. 
 
 P. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 x A X 2 ' x 
 
 (Jj-£ cD^i) or X)b J* (JXxb ^ey were brought. 
 
 A A x A A ^ 
 
 t?y Ji;L> or X) i> di;L> you were brought . 
 
 9 A / A ' 
 
 4r“ Ji?i; or X'b 5j“ iJiib we were brought . 
 
 Present or Aorist Tense £jUsao. 
 
 S. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 be, fyc. is brought, or may be brought. 
 
 -X 
 
 thou art brought, or may be brought. 
 
 Aft ^ Aft H 
 
 / ^ X 
 
 r 1 r 7 am brought, or may be brought . 
 
 P. 
 
 M. & F. 
 
 {$X)b they are brought, or may be brought. 
 
 »* ^ " 
 
 A x 
 
 y° u are brought, or may be brought. 
 
 s , ' 
 
 yh \^X)y we are brought , or may be brought. 
 
 "2 Q 
 
298 
 
 A GRAMMAR of ti ir 
 
 Second Form. 
 
 S. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 t» he, fyc. is brought, fyc. 
 
 ♦V "i, 
 
 s 
 
 *X)\) X)\) thou art brought, §c. 
 
 44 ♦« 
 
 (*• *X)b r X)b 1 am brought, fyc. 
 
 P. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 L2* X)b lJ* diji> the v are brought, fyc. 
 
 *> " «v 
 
 A A * 
 
 X>b \J“ JAj1> V ou are brought, ffc. 
 
 44 * 44 
 
 S> s 9 * 
 
 jr X'b t uX)b we are brought, fyc. 
 
 * 
 
 Imperative Moodj*I. 
 
 S. 
 
 M - t ^Xpb or ^ let him or it, be brought. 
 
 «/ / *' ** " 
 
 ✓ 
 
 F. & X)b or X)b ^ **** l e t her or it, be brought. 
 
 ** " ' *•/ 
 
 p. t& p; " M. <& L$X)b ^ he thou brought. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. & F. 
 
 > 
 
 LfX)\) ^ let them be brought. 
 
 ^ ^fX)b l e l them be brought. 
 
 ♦*/ * ✓ 
 
 A M 
 
 L^Xjb he you brought. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 299 
 
 Past Participle 
 
 S. P. 
 
 / ^ ^ 
 
 F. y* X)\) M. (SJ** KSX)]) brought . M & F. {Sy* brought. 
 
 409. Conjugation of a derivative transitive verb, formed from an 
 
 9 * 
 
 adjective by the addition of <J^, which requires the aid of the verb 
 
 to do, in forming its different inflexions. See page 169, para. 282. 
 
 ✓ ^ ;//• 
 jcX'-ft' 0 Infinitive or Verbal Noun. To fill. 
 
 Active Voice 
 
 
 XA <&X*0 s 
 
 Past Tense ^.^U. 
 
 S. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 or i$S <»** / <**£ he or it filled. 
 
 *1 S or & $ f she or it filled. 
 
 >6 >o y , ^5 ^ ^ 
 
 jj or U jf cJ3 g //iOM didst fill, 
 
 si \j . f or */ ^ u I filled. 
 
 P. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 / vrT| y£l 
 
 •* „ they filled. 
 
 ¥ or J 
 
 -P 
 
 or r ^b" c4 2 /ow filled. 
 
300 
 
 A GRAMMAR OP THE 
 
 ( Governing noun plural .) 
 S. 
 
 I Jj or 
 
 he or it filled. 
 
 J/ or £ *** J ejj ai 
 
 A*& sAe or i/ filled. 
 
 J/ or / c/J b J/ 
 
 S£ ° r $ u J/ ^4 to 
 
 p. 
 
 b thou didst fill . 
 I filled. 
 
 j/ ^ they filled, 
 jfi or fi jxib they filled. 
 
 \jJ* or £ kJT ^ {Jjf sjfi you filled. 
 
 4 / or £ ufi )y> jjT cJT kS^> we filled. 
 
 Second Form, . — (The governing noun singular .J 
 
 he, she, it filled. 
 
 d.)jf or Sj5^ 0 Cl4" e> thou didst fill. 
 
 ¥ or ^ / ^4 ^ J filled. 
 
 P. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 or * 
 
 they filled. 
 
 >/ ^ J / ^ 
 
 a) or ^ you filled. 
 
 <0^5 or <4 y* jf j* we filled. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 301 
 
 ( The governing noun plural.) 
 
 S. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 j/ he, she, it, filled . 
 
 0/ or / ^3 * J/ 0 //iow didst fill. 
 
 jy or ^ ^ ^ I filled. 
 
 V. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 jy or ^r ^5 J/ they filled. 
 
 )/°r / e4 ^ J/ ^ r you filled. 
 
 ijj? 0V if J* we fi lled ' 
 
 Present or Aorist Tense g^La/o. 
 
 S. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 he fyc. fills or may fill. 
 
 L? ■f Lp/' thoufillest or may fill. 
 
 ♦♦ d> 
 
 rJ ** r/ ^ I fill or may fill. 
 
 P. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 LSJ^ they fill or may fill. 
 
 u> x J* y° u fin or ma v fiih 
 
 we fill or may fill . 
 
302 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF TH 
 
 Imperative Mood j#\ 
 S. 
 
 M 
 
 M. O Lf £ CjJ 0 let him or it fill. 
 
 S' S’ 
 
 F. ^ ^ ^ let her or it fill. 
 
 S * 
 
 . & F. *Ji ^ 4 ) M. ifi' jj fill thou. 
 
 M. J Cf^ *^4 fi y*> let them fill. 
 
 y y 
 
 F. ^ ^ j*.t> let them fill. 
 
 M. &. F. Ufjf c/'^ fill you. 
 
 The Agent ^1. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 S. 
 
 or 
 
 
 ^ \ the filler. M. & F. -- j> the fillers. 
 
 «a* - ^jsjJ 
 
 -F C • 
 
 Passive Voice 
 
 Pa5/ Tense — (The governing noun singular.) 
 
 S. 
 
 & Js ^ he or it was filled. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. * or she or it was filled. 
 
 A y y A y 
 
 ^ T* $ ^ ^ Lf J-* Mow 2005/ 
 
 * 
 
 f-r / ^ rr ^ / ioo5 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 308 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 P. 
 
 y r> ✓A 
 
 y»> or 
 
 or dj* Lfj> ^4 they were filled. 
 
 * A A ' s' 
 
 ijp* or they were filled. 
 
 • * eij you were filled . 
 
 -PA ^ ^ 
 
 were filled. 
 
 Second Form. — (The governing noun plural.) 
 
 S. 
 
 87 ^ 
 
 * A 
 
 M. 
 
 <*£ he, fyc. was filled . 
 
 A i> ^ 
 
 thou wast filled. 
 
 *• A _£> X 
 
 £ 7 * 8 ;kS / was filled . 
 
 P. 
 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 * A 
 
 Jr 
 
 ✓ 
 
 9 ' s 
 
 U*> 
 
 ✓ 
 
 'a 
 
 they were filled. 
 
 A A 
 
 d# 
 
 A A 
 
 you were filled. 
 
 /- A 
 
 AT 
 
 j4 
 
 9 A ^ ^ 
 
 ^ ^ we were filled. 
 
 
 Present 
 
 9 
 
 or Aorist Tense 
 
 S. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 he, fyc. is filled, fyc. 
 
 *v 
 
 ^ jr <4 * l?/ ^4 thou art filled, fyc. 
 
 fif *^<3 ^3 I am filled, §c. 
 
304 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 P. 
 
 
 F. 
 
 
 M. 
 
 
 
 4 
 «* ^ 
 
 sf/ 
 
 c/3 
 
 
 c4 
 
 they are filled, tyc. 
 
 A 
 
 * 
 
 •• 
 
 
 
 sT f/ 
 
 <4 
 
 you are filled, fyc. 
 
 J> 
 
 i. 
 
 y 
 
 Sf/ 
 
 <4 
 
 9 A (" 
 
 -T 
 
 
 we are fitted, fyc. 
 
 
 
 
 Second Form. 
 
 
 s. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 9 s 
 
 he, fyc. is filled, or may be filled. 
 
 9 ' 
 
 thou art filled, or may be filled. 
 
 y 9 
 
 I am filled, or may be filled. 
 
 F. 
 
 L?“ 
 
 A 9 's' 
 
 4 
 
 p. 
 
 M. 
 
 ^ they are filled, or may be filled. 
 a' V" 
 
 y° u we filled, or may be filled. 
 
 y* UJ^ y* we are filled, or may be filled. 
 
 Imperative Mood I. 
 
 S. 
 
 M. A *** let him, fyc. be filled. 
 
 ^ ^ , * * 
 
 p. o £ ^ d ** l et her, $ c ' befitted. 
 
 F. ^ M. 4*> <0 be thou fitted. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 305 
 
 P. 
 
 M. 
 
 O ^3 ^ tet them be filled. 
 
 F. ^ Lf^ ^ let them be filled. 
 
 ** - /■ *'✓ /• 
 
 ^ l/ ^ 
 
 F. (3-,.? CJ3 t4 ^LP>^ £<? you filled. 
 
 Past Participle (J^xju ^ ). 
 
 S. 
 
 M. '^3^1 
 
 *J ^ }> become filled, 
 
 f. y**i ^ dS^ j 
 
 Lffy" L ? f l ^-b~) 
 
 M. &. F. - *V \ become filled. 
 
 L fjf ^ 3 j 
 
 410. Conjugation of a regular casual verb to cause to fly } 
 
 formed from the present tense of the infinitive lM to fly. 
 
 Active Voice CJ^x* <*x*^. 
 
 Pas/ Tense ^*?U . — (The governing noun singular.) 
 
 S. 
 
 P. M. 
 
 -Ujyyl ^ *x& ^Ijy I ^ <txA he or it caused to fly. 
 
 * &kib she or it caused to fly. 
 
 ps ii 9 
 
 *bj)\ j ^ jb)b ^ thou didst cause to fly. 
 
 fis y 
 
 d bJ ) l ; u j>b)b ^ I caused to fly. 
 
 2 r 
 
306 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 P. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 M. ^ they caused to fly . 
 
 f. *bj)b j*» they caused to fly. 
 
 1/“ ibyb vr b ?/oz< caused to fly. 
 
 *bj)b j!j)b if we caused to fly. 
 
 (The governing noun plural.) 
 
 S. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 9 * 
 
 J kj)b ■*** 
 Jjj)b ■*** 
 
 JjjPo b " 
 jjsjy i j ^ 
 
 dy> J| ^ <*» he or it caused to fly. 
 
 J s ^ e or ^ caused to fly. 
 (JjJj) I J thou didst cause to fly. 
 
 9' 
 
 Mb u I caused to fly. 
 
 P. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 ^ they caused to fly. 
 
 S'. t s 
 
 j they caused to fly. 
 
 S' . S m 9' . s ■ %• 
 
 JjJyl ^ you caused to fly. 
 
 (Jjjjll ) )y° ^ we cflwsee? to fly. 
 
 Second Form. — ( The governing noun singular.) 
 
 F. 
 
 4 )bJ 
 
 djjjl j 0 
 
 •t 
 
 S. 
 
 M. 
 
 9 I 9 
 
 he, she, it caused to fly. 
 
 H 
 
 j&b O Mom eftds/ cmmso /o fly. 
 s . S 
 
 ji jyl j I caused to fly. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 F. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. 
 
 ps s ^ 
 
 *bjj^ } \J? J A ,he 'J caused to fly. 
 
 ♦« I* 
 
 ps p 
 
 *bjj>b y Ay) y you caused to fly . 
 
 ps p 9 p 
 
 J y° J y 0 we caused to fly . 
 
 ( The governing noun plural.) 
 
 S. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 cbV 1 > <J Jd) 1 j J he , she , or caused to fly. 
 
 ' ^ ♦♦ tf 
 
 9^ 9 y 
 
 dj>j)1 J> * Jjj) f J 0 thou didst cause to fly . 
 
 Jjy^l ^ ^ Jj^ 1 i ^ 1 caused to fly. 
 
 y •# M 
 
 P. 
 
 F. M. 
 
 ps 
 
 du)bj Jj>J)b ^ they caused to fly . 
 
 X M ♦* 
 
 ^ . >> >>-" . 
 
 Jjjyb y Jiiyb y you caused to fly . 
 iJjJpl ^ (Jjjjyl ^ we caused to fly. 
 
 9 
 
 Present or Aorist Tense 
 
 s 
 
 S. 
 
 he, she , it causes to fly , or may cause to fly . 
 
 £Aow causest to fly , or may cause to fly . 
 
 / e*mse /o fly, or may cause to fly. 
 
 2 r 2 
 
308 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 P. 
 
 LfjJj) I J they cause to fly , or may cause to fly. 
 
 you cause to fly , or may cause to fly. 
 we cause to fly, or may cause to fly. 
 
 Imperative Mood j* I. 
 
 S. 
 
 ^ Ij or J ^ *** l e t him fyc. cause to fly. 
 
 y y 
 
 or do thou cause to fly. 
 
 P. 
 
 let them cause to fly. 
 
 y y 
 
 A s A s - 
 
 or 1 J do you cause to fly. 
 
 The Agent 
 
 y 
 
 S. 
 
 M - ijfjjfl or 
 
 $ s ^ ✓ 9 * f the causer to fly . 
 
 F. uO)jjll or&jjjjji'lJ 
 
 P. 
 
 M. & F. i fh e causers to fly. 
 
 J»)fl J 
 
 % 
 
 * Infinitives similar to the one now conjugated wliich has | as the first letter, add 
 that letter to the prefixed j in the second form of the imperative mood, and the t> 
 follows immediately after. In the same manner with regard to the other inflexions. 
 
 s 
 
 the prefix takes a ( — ) instead of ( — ). 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 309 
 
 F. 
 
 9 ' 
 
 Passive Voice a**#- 
 
 Past Tense 
 
 •• / 
 
 S. 
 
 M. 
 
 he, she, it was caused to fly . 
 
 ✓ ♦* 
 
 X A ^ A ^ 
 
 <£r thou wast caused to fly . 
 
 ** / ** •• 
 
 £yl» ijjjylj fy» ^ /was caused to fly. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. & F. 
 
 X A ^ 
 
 or 
 
 F. 
 
 A O. 
 
 Jj* JjjJb they were caused to fly . 
 
 A A . . 
 
 Jtijb you were caused to fly . 
 
 we were caused to fly. 
 
 •* ✓ 
 
 Second Form . 
 
 S. 
 
 M. 
 
 he, she, it was caused to fly, 
 KSJ** tyjy I J ^ J thou wast caused to fly, 
 
 aJjjjyl ^ J I was caused to fly . 
 
 P. 
 
 F. 
 
 A 9 , 
 
 M. 
 
 9 
 
 _r dtiyb jy //ioy were caused to fly . 
 
 ✓ ^ 
 
 A A ^ A A ^ ' 
 
 ^ J ?/0M were caused to fly. 
 
 )y* Ui )Jr 1 3 ciiiy I J we were caused to fly. 
 
310 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Present or Aorist Tense 
 
 S. 
 
 F. 
 
 9' 
 
 M. 
 
 9 
 
 « ^ he, she, it is caused to fly, fyc. 
 
 r, " «x - 
 
 j thou art caused to fly . 
 
 r JjJj’b r Jjjjb 1 am caused to fly. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. & F. 
 
 . 9 * 
 
 they are caused to fly. 
 
 •v *v 
 
 A 9' , 
 
 J you are caused to fly. 
 
 *» «) ^ 
 
 y* } we are caused to fly . 
 
 F. 
 
 Second Form. 
 
 S. 
 
 M. 
 
 9. . 
 
 ^-Iw I he, she , it is caused to fly. 
 
 *♦ x 
 
 art caused to fly. 
 
 *» ♦> 
 
 I am caused to fly . 
 
 P. 
 
 F. 
 
 M. 
 
 ?' x r! 
 
 they are caused to fly. 
 
 •v " 
 
 A ♦ | A . \T 
 
 l i?jy I I 2/° w caused to fly . 
 
 «♦ ^ •• 
 
 9 ^ f 9' % .r' 
 
 y» jJ \)jy\ y* UjJy' we are caused to fly. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 311 
 
 Imperative Moodj' 0 !. 
 
 S. 
 
 M. b ^ ***> tct hi> m or it be caused to fly 
 
 F. O Lbjyb ^ *** tet her or it be caused to fly. 
 
 M. & P. A& JjJjJl; M. <*£ be thou caused to fly . 
 
 P. 
 
 . p 
 
 m. <Jjjyb ° let them be caused to fly. 
 
 ♦v «v ■" 
 
 F* <3 tet them be caused to fly. 
 
 •# ^ 
 
 M. & F. > J&>!> you caused to fly. 
 
 H 
 
 Pas/ Participle jj*k* *a. 
 
 p. 
 
 ^ . \ p \ 
 
 M. l <>Jr1 i \\ i'! 
 
 , " , f- caused to fly. M. & F. ^jUy I caused to fly. 
 
 p. y jfjflj 
 
 ♦ * • 
 
 Negation and Prohibition 
 
 ♦♦ ♦♦ 
 
 411. To signify negation and prohibition the particles <0 and <&° 
 are used with the verbs, but as their position depends on the description 
 of the infinitive with which they are used, it will be necessary to give a 
 table of each. The third persons singular and plural of a few of the 
 infinitives already conjugated will be sufficient for the purpose. 
 
 412. The particle of prohibition &<° is alone used with the second 
 persons of the imperative mood, and invariably precedes the inflexion of 
 the verb with which it is used, whatever its description. 
 
 413. Infinitives such as to come } Jb& to fall , M 
 
312 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 to bring , and Jfa to cut , which have a prefixed particle, place the <0 
 after the latter, both in the past and present tenses. 
 
 Infinitive or verbal Noun. To fall. 
 
 y- J> 
 
 Past Tense 
 
 — 
 
 S. 
 
 9 
 
 M. CLy } <0 he, it did not fall. 
 
 P. U ^ <0 J <U she, it did not fall . 
 
 P. 
 
 /L' 
 
 M. they did not fall. 
 
 i-'' , ^ • 
 
 F. \J>>) & Ijpj* <0 they did not fall. 
 
 Present or Aorist Tense £jl«oo. 
 
 S. 
 
 M. & F. Lp^ Lp^J he, she, it may not fall. 
 
 s 
 
 P. 
 
 /' '9 . 
 
 M. & F. Lfjl LpJ^ ** th e y ma V not fall. 
 
 Imperative Moodj^I. 
 
 S. P. 
 
 A 
 
 M. & F. do rco/ thou fall. M. & F. LPJjljj do not you fall. 
 
 9 # ' 
 
 Participle ^<*>1. 
 
 S. P. 
 
 
 *V^ ** ^ y not fallen. M. & F. \ x j> not fallen. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 313 
 
 414. Regular verbs, whether transitiVe or intransitive, take the <0 
 
 9 
 
 after the prefixed but the participle <k° as before stated, invariably 
 precedes. 
 
 Infinitive or Verbal Noun. To run . 
 
 * 9 
 
 Past Tense* 3^° 
 
 S. 
 
 - ' 
 
 M. he , it did not run. 
 
 F. *3 J ao^lcj <*3 } she , it did not run. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. 34>J.£j <*3 j <*3 j Mez/ die? not run. 
 
 F. <*3 j they did not run. 
 
 s' 
 
 , / 
 
 Present or A oris t Tense 
 
 S. 
 
 M. & F. ^1-j <0^ <*x& he, she, it may not run, fyc. 
 
 P. 
 
 M. & F. *3j they may not run, fyc. 
 
 ** * 
 
 Imperative Mood I. 
 
 S. P. 
 
 M. & F. <&° do not thou run. M. & F <** do not you run. 
 
 9 # " 
 
 Past Participle 3^*^° 
 
 S. P. 
 
 <*3^| 
 
 M. aIc^ ^3 a3^] 
 
 F. a3 <\) J 
 
 not run. M. &. F. " J> wotf run. 
 
 <*Jj 
 
 * 1 have here S iven but one forrQ of th e past, as the particle <t5 is placed in the 
 same position for all four. 1 
 
 s 
 
314 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 * x ^ 
 
 Infinitive or Verbal Noun. To do. 
 
 Past Tense 
 
 S. 
 
 M. £ ^ ^3 or jiS <JU ^ <**& did not do. 
 
 d) d.} * or i j.5" JU ^ 
 
 F. 1 , y \she,i 
 
 dJ £ d > } or Xj) <d j Jb 
 
 it did not do. 
 
 P. 
 
 9 9 
 
 M. £ d> j ^3 or j> j j*& they did not do. 
 
 cl) S cO 2 or x S cO j iii'') 
 
 Y. ^ y 9 y they did not do. 
 
 i] $»> or »/ *b^J 
 
 9 
 
 Present or Aorist Tense 
 
 S 
 
 S. 
 
 M. and F. ^ ^ <**& he, she, it may not do, fyc. 
 
 s' 
 
 P. 
 
 £ .9 t 9 
 
 o d* ^ they may not do, fyc. 
 
 M. and F. Lfy ^ J y 
 
 s 
 
 Imperative Mood y°l 
 
 s 
 
 S. 
 
 P. 
 
 ✓ A 
 
 M. & F. £ or x£ d* do not thou do. M. & F. <** do not you do. 
 
 .9 
 
 Past Participle f' 
 
 S. 
 
 M. . J '$£> or L? '•$ "1 L? > 5 " 1 
 
 J- no/ rfone. M. & F. " f no/ done. 
 
 F. ^ a or jf <«J jy <«J 
 
 F-n 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 315 
 
 f- they did not briny. 
 
 a/o Infinitive or Verbal Noun. ^JX^J To bring . 
 
 y f 
 
 Past Tense 
 
 •v 
 
 S. 
 
 he, or it did not bring. 
 
 jJnj <d \j d6 \j 
 
 F. x }> she, or it did not bring. 
 
 ♦♦ .. 
 
 P. 
 
 " v ' P 
 
 M. they did not bring. 
 
 s ** p 
 
 " b * 1 > " bj klt ) 
 
 V. , 1- 
 
 ^ * l) ^ 
 
 Present or Aorist Tense £jL*°. 
 
 S. 
 
 M. and F. <*** /^e, i/ wo/ bring, fyc. 
 
 P. 
 
 • M. and F. L^X) ** b ^ ie V ma y n °t bring . 
 
 Imperative Moodj^I* 
 
 S. 
 
 y 
 
 M. and F. X) b or *X) b ^ 0 no t ^ou bring. 
 
 P. 
 
 A 
 
 M. and F. L&XJ b ** ^ 0 n0 ^ y° u bring. 
 
 p % ' 
 
 Past Participle (Jj*** ^**1. 
 
 S. ' P. 
 
 ^ + % ' % 
 
 F. X) b ** M. {j$X) b ** n °t brought. M. & F. L$XJ b ^ no ^ brought . 
 
 2 s 2 
 
316 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 415. When used with infinitives similar to (JU^ to fill, the 
 follows the adjective or noun, and precedes the auxiliary ; thus, 
 
 / ^ f * * 
 
 Infinitive or Verbal Noun. To fill. 
 
 Past Tense 
 
 M 
 
 or £ si skit he, it did not fill. 
 
 d) S si <6^ or *S si dk&^) 
 
 F. ^ ^ „ j> she , it did not fill . 
 
 d)j> <13 dS^ or */ » J> J 
 
 P. 
 
 M. £ si ^ or si jk&> they did not fill. 
 
 dJ S si dS^ or s S s> S$£ 
 
 F. „ ^ [> they did not fill, 
 
 s) \jT si dS^ or si sS^ J J 
 
 Present or Aorist Tense £jL&o. 
 
 S. 
 
 M. Lf/ <0 sk& he or it may not fill, fyc. 
 
 F. si afc ski i she or it may not fill, §c. 
 
 V. 
 
 M. si they may not fill , fyc. 
 
 F. l <W CJJ jki they may not fill, fyc. 
 
 Imperative Mood j*!. 
 
 M. and F. or d* do not thou fill. 
 
 P. 
 
 y 
 
 M. and F* LSyf’S ** do not you fill. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 317 
 
 Past Participle 
 
 s 
 
 S. 
 
 M. J or '•V? 
 
 F. Jfi or J 4} A J 
 
 not filled. 
 
 P. 
 
 M- ^ £ or s? "'i 
 
 „ „ \ not filled. 
 
 F. J> p or L? e/f *5 J 
 
 416. In the passive voice, the past participle or the imperfect tense 
 used with the auxiliary as a second form (already described at page 176) 
 may precede, and the & precede the auxiliary, or the particle of nega- 
 tion and auxiliary may precede, and the past participle and imperfect 
 tense follow ; as will be seen from the following paradigm. 
 
 jtVa* Infinitive or Verbal Noun. To throw. 
 
 S. 
 
 M, 
 
 
 . ^LaaCO ^ dui» dU 
 
 r* he or it was not thrown . 
 
 aJ ^*1) or &+**> 
 
 Y J J ' V she or it was not thrown . 
 
 I " . A *■ . ' \ 
 
 ^ & jut or dW 
 
 p. 
 
 9 A 
 
 j** or 
 
 M **" " they were not thrown . 
 
 r.. ^ f. ' K . • / 
 
 •V 
 
 a "A . ' / 
 
 or ^ 
 
 F.^ " ' they were not thrown . 
 
 _>« or Jj-i AJ J 
 
318 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 M. 
 
 j he or it may not be thrown , 
 
 she or it may not be thrown . 
 
 Present or Aorist Tense £;U. 
 
 S. 
 
 •*, «« ' 
 
 •• ^ 
 
 £ ai a*^ 
 
 F. ' 
 
 d) dk & J 
 
 P. 
 
 , • | h . 
 
 m. *> they were not thrown , 
 
 **x ' 
 
 - . / 
 
 F. ^*** t, lJ ^ J** they were not thrown . 
 
 Imperative Moodj^I. 
 
 S. 
 
 M. J&d* or a^> &*> 
 
 ** ^ do not thou be thrown. , 
 
 j\ ^ <** or d& d* 
 
 p. 
 
 M. // <w> 
 
 - ‘v " do not you be thrown. 
 
 F. ^ 
 
 •• ^ ^ 
 
 Past Participle J;*** f*]. 
 
 S. 
 
 M. i; L?r " or C£T "I , , ,, 
 
 * - V not become thrown, 
 
 f. y* ** or y* ^ 
 
 ' < ^ ' 
 
 p. 
 
 Lf^ 
 
 ' ' *'''.\ 
 
 L&J * 3 
 
 }> wo/ become thrown. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 319 
 
 417. The positions which the particles of negation and prohibition 
 assume, will also be seen from the following extracts : 
 
 ^aX*J dJ L’4^ pi ^ p*Ji di yi 
 
 “ I will not bear with this Moghali ( tyranny ) of thy guardian. 
 
 If I am really born of an Afghan woman” Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 * p * /■ 
 
 s!y H J-j®* H 
 
 “ Every terrestrial being who practises not humility , acteth not 
 rightly : 
 
 Every one will be excellent according to his own manners and customs” 
 
 Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 c/y J* " x> J " '*€)£■ 
 
 ♦i, - ^ 
 
 0 ^ dj <tJ dff 
 
 “ Who does not consume himself and does not give /o others, look 
 not towards him, 
 
 That sitteth like a serpent on a hidden treasure ” Khushhal Khan, 
 Khattak. 
 
 ^Ia/O jA ^ ^ t) d*>yl diyl 
 
 “ Pious persons have said that the devil’s snare is a large one ,* that 
 you should put off repentance until the last hour; but postpone it not, 
 oh ! children of the true faith,” Fawaid-ush-Sharri’sea. 
 
 * Which means, that his deception is great. 
 
320 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Chapter U3L 
 
 THE SEPARATE PARTICLES- 
 
 418. Under this head are included adverbs, postpositions or prepo- 
 sitions, conjunctions and interjections. They contain, besides pure 
 Afghaman, a number of Arabic and Persian words. 
 
 419. The Adverbs may be divided into fourteen different classes — 
 of place, time, number, quality, similitude, collection, separation, de- 
 monstration, interrogation, dubiation, exclamation, affirmation, negation, 
 and prohibition. 
 
 420. They serve to qualify nouns, and are for the most part unde- 
 clinable; thus. 
 
 “ Since thy ringlets have pierced the very heart of Rahman , 
 Therefore from his eyelashes the white tears flow ” Abd-ur- 
 
 Adyerbs. 
 
 ltahman. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 321 
 
 “ If thy face becometh turned from God unto the world , 
 
 It will be also turned from heaven unto hell ; 
 
 Thou wilt for ever wander driven from door to door ; 
 
 Thou wilt nowhere find a resting or a dwelling place.” Abd-ur- 
 Rahman. 
 
 
 “ When one degenerate being appeareth in a family , 
 
 He bring eth disgrace on his lineage both present and past.” Abd- 
 ul-Hamid. 
 
 421. A number of adverbs are subject to the usual change in termi- 
 nation for the ablative case ; as in the following example : 
 
 di *j*° ^ ^ <*^1 y ^ llCU |j JsJj *jyjj 
 
 “ The Wuzir said, ‘As yet this boy has not eaten any of the fruit 
 from the garden of his own existence.” Gulistau. 
 
 422. A few adverbs derived from nouns and adjectives are liable to 
 the same change in termination for gender, number, and case, as the 
 nouns they qualify. Thus^^ much , becomes in the feminine sin- 
 gular, and m the feminine plural and the oblique cases of the sin- 
 
 gular. The masculine plural is the same as the singular, and the oblique 
 plural for both genders is j 
 
 jit jo (jtt & ^ 
 
 * ^ ** " 
 
 “ The lover’s suit is an exceedingly difficult one — 
 
 The object can only be obtained after many twists and turnings” 
 Kasim Ali, Afridi. 
 
322 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 423. The adverbs of most frequent occurrence in the language are 
 as follows : 
 
 'A 9 ? / 
 
 Adverbs of Place <j&Jl 
 
 here, hither . 
 
 ✓ ^ 
 
 a^la> <Cl& there , thither . 
 
 ♦♦ 
 
 .. / ' 
 
 there, thither. 
 
 s s 
 
 s 
 
 or aij aj 'J 
 
 v from this place. 
 
 L^) 
 
 ♦♦ 
 
 a*& a) from that place. 
 
 * 
 
 before, hitherto. 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 |^k (^0 or acJ this side . 
 
 axfc that side. 
 
 ‘•i side % siofe. 
 on both sides. 
 
 jj or Aij*. Jj 1 
 
 > elsewhere. 
 
 ♦♦ 
 
 a^lib aklj here and there. 
 
 y or te&j* I so far, to this 
 fjfjji) degree. 
 
 y so far, to that 
 degree. 
 
 aK^. somewhere. 
 
 Jv 
 
 s s 
 
 & ^ 
 
 jd j* or M yt y 
 
 ujll) 
 
 [• everywhere. 
 
 or Uk. near, on this 
 
 ^ ♦♦ r 
 
 & 
 
 side. 
 
 aJ>s*^ nowhere. 
 
 J * y 
 
 s 
 
 near, about . 
 
 14 A 
 
 "it or somewhere or 
 
 other. 
 
 ' y 
 
 aJ w^ere or wherever. 
 
 Jv J 
 
 inside , within. 
 
 A y " ( " 
 
 ax* or J^k axfc beyond, on that 
 side. 
 
 t>jU above and below, 
 tjj 5u*j upside down. 
 
 * ti 
 
 ip or<y^ above overhead. 
 -'a 
 
 or jux^j under. 
 
 a), far, at a 
 
 distance. 
 
 «*jL* rowid o&owtf. 
 
 >**» V 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 323 
 
 Adverbs of Time. 
 now, at this time . 
 AS" ever, sometime. 
 
 * s 
 
 air <or 
 
 sometimes. 
 
 & t 9 9 
 
 w Uj)| uijjk. 
 
 <^.5 too &!/* since 
 V> three days si 
 
 since. 
 
 at the dawn of 
 
 r. 
 
 AS never . 
 
 e 
 
 always. 
 
 &*. ASjjt 
 
 whenever. 
 
 & & some time or 
 
 ZJ>) daily. [othe: 
 
 * 
 
 nightly. 
 
 or J>b Hjb) 
 
 > 'perpetually. 
 
 ✓ ^ 
 
 ^ )j instantaneously . 
 d t gradually. 
 c ^v successively . 
 or 1^- ^ before, prior. 
 
 after, afterwards, 
 secondly . 
 
 iJV 1 %ow, presently. 
 
 ^ to-day. 
 
 to-morrow . 
 
 2 t 2 
 
 day. 
 
 Aff AT sometimes, occa- 
 sionally. 
 
 Jt5* ever. 
 
 db'd long since. 
 
 «• 
 
 /as/ mpA/. 
 
 <*!.*. jA often, 
 jff I or once, at last. 
 
 A*-jl or once. 
 
 <d^jl or j\ often, repeatedly, 
 jb *>)b repeatedly, often. 
 AS* did frequently. 
 
 I A 
 
 jt once. 
 
 I * A 
 
 <*aa- Hjj twice. 
 
 all Jt) 
 
 thrice. 
 
 A L>y instantly , quickly . 
 
 jU yU ; jjjj quickly. 
 
324 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 i^6j6 shortly , soon. 
 
 unawares , sud- 
 
 denly. 
 
 4a £ eC all at once, sud- 
 denly. [place. 
 fi rs t> m the first 
 
 yL | at last, at length, 
 
 finally, at the end. 
 9 * 
 
 yesterday. 
 
 y y 
 
 shortly, soon. 
 
 L* day after to-mor- 
 row. 
 
 & **X) ^ V four days since. 
 
 early in the morn- 
 ing. 
 
 J*' always , ever. 
 
 ddJ a! jJj always, continu- 
 ally. 
 
 as yet. 
 
 y 
 
 sometimes. 
 
 Adverbs of Quantity, 
 
 ly^cylb^or so much. 
 
 y * 
 
 j6S %yf>y!t that much. 
 j&S this much. 
 
 
 It as much as. 
 
 
 it howmuchsoever . 
 
 gratuitously . 
 jl. jL a great number. 
 
 much, in a great 
 \ degree, by far. 
 
 orj^ a little. 
 
 Adverbs of Similitude. 4aa 
 
 ^1$, 4c J or thus, in this man- 
 ner. 
 
 JLcj or 1^ thus, in this way. 
 
 M 
 
 or 
 
 
 6 * 6 S <>ac 
 
 ) 6*6 4J 
 
 
 jj 
 
 A & 9,9 9 
 
 JUaawmJ I 
 
 dxit so, in that manner. 
 
 dt? <**£> so, in that way. 
 
 * 
 
 4cJ 
 
 
 it\6 
 
 16^ 
 
 v thus, so. 
 or ) 
 
 9 s . 
 
 for example. 
 
 * 
 
 ^ x* that is to say. 
 
 \ like, as. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 325 
 
 A f P 
 
 Adverbs of Admonition, etc. 
 
 p or tjjJ j look out ! have 
 
 care ' 
 
 know ! recollect ! 
 
 // 
 
 a& jlJ ^aA. take care ! mind ! 
 
 be cautious ! 
 
 Adverbs of Society and Separation ^ c>a*J| 
 
 ", S> * * SL 9 ? 
 
 A. 
 
 alone. 
 
 / ✓ 
 
 face to face. 
 
 apart , at a dis- 
 tance. 
 
 ti 1 at the side. 
 ti' ^ side by side. 
 
 A A 
 
 singly , individu- 
 ally. 
 
 U*** or 
 
 al-o J,aJ apart, separately . 
 together • 
 
 J* J* separately . 
 
 ^‘3 aJ 
 
 H 
 
 jU separately . 
 
 a; ^ uselessly. 
 
 besides , except . 
 
 A 
 
 Adverbs of Extremity and Termination 
 
 
 io > U P to > un til' 
 
 asO or 1 hitherto , /o /to 
 
 J 
 
 a^.^1. or wto/, /o /^a/ do- 
 gree. 
 
 * + 
 
 beyond bounds . 
 
 ' ' » 
 
 /o to/ degree . 
 
 U*!^ till now , as yet . 
 
 > x 
 
 •• 
 
 50 /ar as. 
 
 till when ? how 
 long? 
 
 j> to the end. 
 to the last . 
 
326 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 AAA 9 9 
 
 Adverbs of Interrogation 
 
 \Sy^ "j where ? whi- 
 
 Lpll jS ) ther ? 
 
 dS5>l. how? in what 
 manner ? 
 
 t* A 
 
 how much ? 
 
 f a) or dS A 
 
 y A since when ? 
 
 r- 
 
 whence ? 
 
 U? 
 
 ii 
 
 ilT when ? at what 
 time ? 
 
 AS y or ASy until when ? 
 
 8 
 
 
 how much ? 
 
 ' ^ s' ^ 
 
 ASy, L£J}Z fS y ^ till when ? how 
 
 upy) lon 9 ? 
 
 aIX ja. how often ? 
 
 A to why not ? 
 
 ° ♦♦ 
 
 A &X SjJ aJL ^ why ? how ? 
 
 dd a; ) wherefore ? 
 
 * y 
 
 O du. or for what ? 
 
 ♦« 
 
 i£d)' cU. m what way ? how ? 
 
 Adverbs of Dubiation 
 
 to may be. 
 
 &j*> probably. 
 
 yp * y Li perhaps . 
 
 ^ perhaps not. 
 
 ** * 
 
 A 
 
 sjj God knows. 
 
 ^ «» 
 
 Adverbs of Affirmation and Emphasis | 
 
 a&> ^ certainly , 
 
 doubt ■ 
 
 merely , only, ex- 
 actly. 
 
 9 ' 
 
 •* necessari iy • 
 
 indeed, yea. 
 
 &>] 
 p * y 
 
 right or wrong. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 327 
 
 ,j y 
 
 no means , 
 
 never. 
 
 <u really, truly. 
 
 isy. necessarily, it be - 
 hoveth. 
 
 ijjjyi by all 
 
 means . 
 
 9 ' 
 
 fc^A or never, by no 
 means. 
 
 Jafti only, simply. 
 
 at all events, whe- 
 ther or not. 
 
 exactly, quite. 
 
 &. S> 9 S> 
 
 Adverbs of Prohibition and Negation 
 
 M no, not, nay. 
 
 M do not. 
 
 ", 9 9 9 
 
 Conjunctions L 
 
 424. The conjunctions most in use are : — 
 
 yT £ tf. 
 
 although. 
 
 J^A also, even, like- 
 wise. 
 
 (Jj or but, yet, however. 
 
 <* 
 
 besides, except, 
 but. 
 
 *3 sS and if not, un- 
 less, otherwise. 
 
 K4*» <*xA a) then, therefore. 
 <j£b but, moreover. 
 
 notwithstanding . 
 jfX# unless. 
 
 A A 
 
 ^ or jl and, also. 
 
 <>£#» 07 therefore, then. 
 
 that, because , or. 
 unless, if not. 
 
 «» 
 
 * z' ^ 
 
 <*J 
 
 »♦ — < r 
 
 b or. 
 
 then, because, 
 therefore. 
 
328 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Example. 
 
 •ivy *i b* H ji LfJ ^ 0 ^ 
 
 ' ** 
 
 c#%i " 
 
 # V 
 
 “ The Durveshs * calling is to forsake all carnal and worldly desires ; 
 but they, through spitefulness desire to rush on each other with swords 
 and with arrows .” Makhzan Afghani. 
 
 A 
 
 Prepositions and Postpositions 
 
 9,9 
 
 425. Besides the simple prepositions and postpositions used in form- 
 ing the cases of nouns and pronouns, already described in Chapter II., 
 there are other particles used in the same manner which require the 
 noun, adjective, or pronoun, to be used in the genitive or ablative case 
 when capable of inflexion. 
 
 The following are examples : — 
 
 *49 3 $ j\ y yJ lP° 
 
 It ^ ^ u ^ 
 
 U*> J UJ J y*> O jSj 
 
 ** ' «. t» x 
 
 “The law is like unto a tree whose roots have gone under the 
 ground; and (if thou shouldst make use of understanding and argument) 
 the topmast branch of it has gone up into the heavens.” Makhzan 
 Afghani. 
 
 ddl. jjL y & 1^ y* & y* y, 
 
 “ The moth casteth away its life but once in its lifetime, 
 
 But the candle doeth this several times in one night.” Abd-ul- 
 
 II amid. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 329 
 
 Tho chief prepositions and postpositions are :* 
 
 O of 
 si, aJ to. 
 
 in - 
 
 V (>iV y below , under . 
 
 with. [of 
 
 for , for the sake 
 
 426. Interjections 
 
 well done ! bravo ! 
 
 s’ 
 
 have a care ! 
 
 alas ! alas ! 
 
 sorrow ! alas ! 
 
 dsif avaunt ! get 
 
 <d or aj from . 
 y from. 
 
 s / 
 
 on, upon. 
 
 ✓ * 
 
 ^•b o over, above. 
 
 ♦ * 
 
 Sz?*- before. 
 
 0 in, between . 
 
 s 
 
 lackaday ! 
 
 L> 
 
 & 
 
 i5 would to God ! 
 
 Y*>) 
 
 J strange ! good 
 God ! 
 
 9 9 
 
 A oh! [away! 
 
 iSjJ dear ! dear ! 
 
 7 r i 
 
 c'c 1 tfl? ^ woe ! woe ! 
 
 s& indeed ! really ! 
 jJjLjj a!* begone ! get 
 away ! 
 
 Sm> , S*4z>. hush ! silence ! 
 
 V V v V 
 
 Example. 
 
 jU^ t> dbjV (jJi 
 
 s * 
 
 “ These loved ones are like unto the flowers of spring , 
 
 For in the autumn they wither and fall. Alas ! alas !” Ahmed Shah, 
 Abdali. 
 
330 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THF. 
 
 Chapter VIE. 
 
 THE DERIVATION OF WORDS. 
 
 427. There are a number of derivative and compound words in the 
 Pushto language, formed from nouns, adjectives, and verbs, by prefixing, 
 affixing, or inserting, certain words or letters. They may be considered 
 pure Afghanian. 
 
 428. Abstract nouns may be obtained from adjectives in eight 
 different ways : — 
 
 First . — By rejecting the final letter of the adjective and prefixing 
 another; as, {j?p hungry , or ^ hunger . 
 
 “ Hunger and thirst all at once overpowered him ; 
 
 In his body no power or strength remained” Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 Second. — This form rejects two letters of the adjective for three 
 
 " In the contentment of the contented man, there is neither hunger nor 
 
 THIRST ; 
 
 Example. 
 
 others ; thus, thirsty, or thirst. 
 
 Hi 
 
 And they become nobles who in the ragged garment acquireth this 
 alchemy” Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 331 
 
 Third . — Shortening the word by the rejection of^ for ( — ), and affix- 
 ing I ; as, j)jj or bright, ]j)j or brightness . 
 
 |j ^iy yy ^jU^I o *jy *5 jfyj ^ <-> y \yj & 
 
 “ By the light of it the business of this life cannot be perfected ; 
 
 For this world is as the lightning and the light of the sky” Abd-ul- 
 Hamid. 
 
 Sometimes this word takes another letter, as in the following 
 example : 
 
 . ✓ ^ f ^ / 
 
 ^Jy Ij3i y> 
 
 “ As when the sun riseth on the world , light and brightness cometh , 
 So doth friendship and affection give life to both breath and footstep” 
 
 Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 Fourth. — The middle letter of the adjective is rejected ; b inserted in 
 
 its place ; and — or A affixed ; as, jy dark or black, 8jl J or jLJ dark- 
 ness or blackness. 
 
 S6*»Jy 0 &) 1 Oj/'aiA J Aw 8^(J &jy ^{ 4 *. ijff 
 
 “ The whole world became filled with darkness from this dust and 
 vapour ; 
 
 In the heavens thunder rolled, and lightning flashed as from swords.” 
 Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 Fifth. — The final letter of the adjective is inflected from A or ~ to ^ 
 and ^ f * or jf affixed ; thusj good, goodness, 
 
 " u-^ji A uji 
 
 Uj «<r 
 
 2 v 2 
 
332 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ Journeying on this road is difficult to the fickle and capricious : 
 Consider him a man who layeth the foundations of goodness.” Kasim 
 All, Afridi. 
 
 The whole of the nouns of the preceding classes are feminine ; ahd 
 
 are feminine, are all masculine. 
 
 Sixth . — This form is something similar to the fourth class, being 
 formed from the same adjective (which however remains unchanged) 
 
 “ Thy countenance was white like unto the sun — yea ! it was brighter 
 than the orb of day : 
 
 But now , alas ! it is become so black, that its blackness is like unto 
 charcoal” Yusuf and Zulikha. 
 
 Seventh . — The nouns of this class are formed by dropping the final ^ 
 
 ♦♦ 
 
 9 * A 9 % a 
 
 of the adjective, and affixing ; as, is&jj alive or existing, 
 
 “ When shall I entertain hope for my own existence? 
 
 Since separated from her, life itself to me is infamous.” Kasim All, 
 
 the following, with the exception of those formed by affixing LJ, which 
 
 life , existence ; captive , prisoner, captivity, imprisonment . 
 
 *4 
 
 Example. 
 
 Afridi. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 333 
 
 9 •» 
 
 Eighth . — This class is formed by the mere addition of the affixes 
 L-iji and l ; thus, separate , separation; barren , 
 
 9 m % ' ' ' %% . .1 
 
 barrenness ; affectionate, affection, love ; 
 
 wad, madness ; ^y° satiated, wr satiety ; jj*»* 2 * impudent, 
 
 Li impudence, familiarity. 
 
 i_y ^ <d ^5 s^j i-'ji. <*) 
 
 /; J? *1 '/) Ji ^ 
 
 JM 
 
 AJ 
 
 
 
 Iaa.v.S' 
 
 t( Suddenly she awoke from her slumbers, her heart filled with love 
 
 and AFFECTION. 
 
 She sat up and gazed around, but sighed, for she beheld not her be- 
 loved one” Yusuf and Zuliklia. 
 
 y\k, *>' 0 ^ 
 
 Lf^> jL i; ' 1 2>jy> <o jiL d p*j « 
 
 “ God forbid that separation should be caused between two lovers ; 
 For in separation the lover 1 s body is in health, but his heart is sick ” 
 Kasim All, Afridi. 
 
 xy Lzf y* }i * u^l ly> ^ Xy° * &*>**> 
 
 “ Whereas from her presence thou didst not acquire satiety, 
 
 Grief on her account has now satiated thee ” Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 The whole of these derivatives when capable of inflection are subject 
 to the same changes as other nouns. 
 
 429. Abstract nouns are obtained also from primitive nouns, by the 
 
 s’ 
 
 mere addition of the affixes and thus, a child, 
 
334 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ✓ 
 
 childhood; « man, a human being , f* 
 
 hood , humanity ; a guest, entertainment, hospitality. 
 
 * 
 
 The following are examples : — 
 
 man • 
 
 jd c»o| jo ctCL dJ ^ 
 
 ^ **/ 
 
 ^ ^ y ^ ji> L?y ^ 
 
 «v ^ • •• 
 
 “ Whoever from childhood may not have walked in the path of 
 modesty and morality , 
 
 In the years of maturity virtue and piety departeth from him ” 
 Translation of the Gulistan. 
 
 lt j 0 o' 0 " f* 0 *■?' 
 
 s' „ " s r*3"' A * * m m * s 
 
 Cl 5U> <*7^ ^ ^ 
 
 ✓ /■ 
 
 “ Oh son ! did not I say unto thee at the time of thy departure , that 
 the hand of bravery if empty is hound, and the paw of lion-like intre- 
 pidity broken ?” Translation of the Gulistan. 
 
 9 x A 9 /. s’ / / * ^ 
 
 xj i>*lj Jj^A. <v j o jil U^d^o jo sLob 0 L»L> 
 
 <o ^ ° 
 
 •* cr ** 
 
 “ He said unto him, ‘ 0 father ! what didst thou not eat of any thing 
 at the king f s entertainment ?’ The devotee said, ‘ In his sight I did not 
 make use of any thing of consequence. 3 ” Translation of the Gulistan. 
 
 Arabic and Persian words when used in this language, as may natural- 
 ly be supposed, are generally governed by, and subject to their own 
 rules of grammar ; but in some instances the Pushto affixes and prefixes 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 335 
 
 may be found used with the words of these languages; thus, 
 
 ^ 9 - * t, 
 
 generous, generosity ; niggard, [Jf* niggardliness ; 
 
 y 
 
 strange, strangeness. 
 
 430. Nouns of intensity are formed by prefixing adjectives to them ; 
 
 y y 
 
 M «• 
 
 thus, jy dark, prefixed to y darkness, becomes total darkness ; 
 
 and in the same manner jy prefixed to signifies total darkness, 
 y is not generally used without an adjective prefixed. 
 
 Example. 
 
 * ^ p * $ $ * 
 
 ^ (** ‘‘ijl ^ cjb 1^0 yj j 1 $ 
 
 “ Of what consequence is it though thy countenance is enveloped in 
 curls, 
 
 For the water of immortality itself is hidden in total darkness.” 
 Abd-ur-Kahman. 
 
 431. The particles of exaggeration and diminution used with nouns 
 have been already described under that head, (page 36 — 39) and need 
 no further notice. 
 
 432. Adjectives may be formed from some nouns by the addition of 
 
 and Lp ; as, night, nocturnal; yesterday, 
 
 yestern or yester. 
 
 The following are examples : — 
 
 A 9 - . ~ — " ^ s> * 
 
 J jlj j j\j 
 
 “ Dabshalim, after hearing these words related his nocturnal dream 
 to the Derwesh , and also mentioned this secret to his friend” iE’yar 
 Danish. 
 
336 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “Abdullah set out to see Mucecdwiya , and when he enquired about the 
 circumstances of the preceding day (yestern), Mucea’wiya said , 
 ‘ My daughter says, Oh ! father, the wife of this Abdullah is very hand- 
 some. When shall I appear to advantage in his sight ? I declare unto 
 you that I will not have Abdullah under these circumstances ; but if he 
 will divorce his wife, then I will accept him willingly. , ” History of 
 Hasan and Husain. 
 
 433. Adjectives of intensity may be obtained in the same manner as 
 nouns of intensity, by the use of particles either prefixed or affixed to 
 
 “ Lovers are totally blind to the defects and blemishes of the be- 
 loved ; 
 
 But do not thou also become wholly blind to her virtues and merits.” 
 
 A .sr. 
 
 the word ; thus, blind, totally blind ; white, 
 
 LlJU perfectly white, or pure or spotless white. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 9 
 
 Abd-ur- Rahman. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 337 
 
 Cf Since thou hast pierced the heart of Rahman with thy ringlets , 
 From his eyelashes the pure white water flows” Abd-ur- Rahman. 
 
 yp V 
 
 LT*"'' t;; 
 
 J j *! J- 1 H 1^ 0 
 
 Cf Whoever may have washed his garments in his own blood , 
 
 Will , like the dew of the night , be ever spotless white.” Abd-ur- 
 Rahraan. 
 
 434. Several Persian, and a few Arabic adjectives are also to be met 
 with in Pushto, differing but slightly from the originals in pronuncia- 
 
 tion ; for example, aggrieved , from the Arabic noun grief, and 
 
 Persian fjJ stricken ; and in the same manner or 
 
 treacherous , malicious ; ^ feverish ; or yj\ spoiled, worthless, 
 
 from the Arabic word^jJ, and the Hebrew "1J"Q signifying, cut short, 
 ✓ ✓ ✓ 
 etc. ; intrepid, brave, from the Pushto noun the heart, and the 
 
 Persian particle signifying possession, having ; warlike, gallant, 
 
 9 ~ ", 
 
 from the Afghaman noun a sword, and (jJ the active participle of 
 
 x * 
 
 the Persian infinitive to strike, to smite. 
 
 Example. 
 
 ^ - 9 „ s, 
 
 a) O jy U 
 
 Vt /*~ 3 ^ ** ^ 
 
 “ The tongue again becometh liberated, like the warrior from the 
 thickest of the fight ; 
 
 Although I may seize it with my teeth that it should remain silent ” 
 
 Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
338 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 435. Another description of adjective is obtained by prefixing an 
 adjective to a noun ; as, disappointed , foiled, etc., from the 
 
 Persian adjective ^ half, and the Afghaman noun desire, inclina- 
 tion ; thus, — 
 
 9 ' 
 
 yj 
 
 “ Behold the incomplete brightness of the lightning and be prudent ! 
 The affairs requiring deliberation perform not with exceeding haste !” 
 Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 436. A few adjectives are obtained by affixing the Pushto particles 
 (a corruption doubtless of the Persian possessive particle tW>) and 
 
 to Persian and Arabic nouns; thus,jL5 indigence, poverty, 
 indigent, poor ; wealth, ^ wealthy , opulent ; war, 
 
 battle, k warlike, martial ; honor, reputation, 
 
 honorable, reputable. The letter is also added to Persian and 
 Pushto nouns indiscriminately in the formation of adjectives; thus, 
 
 / x 
 
 a worm, wormeaten ; ^ pus, matter, purulent, mattery ; 
 
 s’ * 
 
 the Pushto for scab, scabby ; dirt, filth, dirty, filthy ; 
 
 " 1 ^ 
 
 blinking, purblind, , .p a blinkard, purblindness. 
 
 437. A few adjectives can be formed by compounding two nouns, 
 
 as in the Persian language, but they are rare ; thus, ^Jst° pretty, 
 
 * 
 
 delicate, from milk, and the face ; thus, — 
 
 9 9 
 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 339 
 
 <c / once made enquiry from one of those who accounted himself 
 amongst the Arabs of Baghdad , saying , 1 What sayest thou in respect to 
 
 the handsome V ” Translation of the Gulistan. 
 
 438. There appears to be no purely Afghaman mode of forming rela- 
 tive or patronymical adjectives, and they are for the most part obtained 
 by affixing the Persian called the yai-i-nisbut } to the noun ; thus, 
 
 p 
 
 a native of Kabul; or L a native of Peshdwer ; 
 
 *V * X 
 
 a native of the Kohistan. 
 
 In the districts bordering on the Panjab and Kashmir, such as Bunir 
 and Pakli, the affix is sometimes used (a corruption evidently of 
 
 the Hindee word Vlj) ; thus, jJI Bunirwal — a native of Bunir; 
 
 Pakliwdl — a native of Pakli. At the same time it must be 
 remembered that this affix cannot be always applied, for we could not 
 call a native of Peshawer, a Peshawenwal, nor a native of Kabul, a 
 Kabuli wal. 
 
 439. The past participles of verbs are extensively used as adjectives 
 
 in this language, both alone and with a conjunction; thus, 
 
 5>' % 
 
 pampered , obtained from the infinitive (JjjjU to pamper , formed by affix- 
 ing Jj the sign of the infinitive of active verbs of this class, to the 
 Persian noun jlS, signifying, delicacy, softness, etc. ; and f & of the 
 same age , cotemporary , from the past participle of the verb to be 
 
 born, with the Persian conjunction together, with, similar , mutual . 
 The following are examples : — 
 
 U,£> | ^ dk 
 
 
 JlX' tf l> 
 
 Inverted destiny made me adverse and wayward, 
 
 9 Y 9 
 /W A /V 
 
840 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 When my sympathizing lovers and friends became cruel and sanguin- 
 ary” Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 A t b f i Jlr" ^ sH 
 
 jjy pb sj 
 
 “ Durkham made a request to her father, saying — c All those of my 
 own age learn to read, pray give directions that I also may read ” 
 Tale of Adam Khan and Durkham. 
 
 It should be borne in mind that these derivatives are subject to the 
 same changes for gender, number, and case, as other nouns or adjectives 
 under whose classes they may come. 
 
 440. The hasil-i-masdar ) called also the ism-i- 
 
 * 
 
 masdar ( J of the Pushto verbs, is derived from the infini- 
 
 tive ( ) the source or essence of the verb, by rejecting the 
 — the final letter of the former, and substituting d>. It is not subject 
 to any change for gender or number, but changes the final <* into 
 
 in the oblique cases ; as, t° separate, separation ; 
 
 to grow (as a plant or grain), ^ growth. Infinitives 
 
 9 
 
 terminating in ^ are subject to the same rules. 
 
 The hasil-i-masdar of the preceding infinitives which are intransitive, 
 are used as nouns ; but in case of making them transitive by changing 
 
 " p 
 
 the neuter sign JtV into the active termination of infinitives the 
 hasil-i-masdar can then only be construed as a mode of action or man- 
 ner of being indefinite, as to time, place, and sometimes even of person ; 
 
 p* P* V P* 
 
 thus, to separate , ^ causing separation; JAh to make 
 
 grow , & causing growth or growing. The hasil-i-masdar of a 
 transitive infinitive terminating in of which there are a few in the 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 341 
 
 language and exceptions to the above rule, can be construed as a noun ; 
 
 thus, to ask , & enquiry. 
 
 The verbal nouns of a few infinitives instead of affixing merely take 
 ; and in the oblique cases ^ is also added. They are also subject 
 to the same rules of construction as those already described. 
 
 441. The ism-i-haliah ( ^1 ) or verb in its present state, 
 
 similar to the present or indefinite participle of our language, is also 
 used occasionally as a simple noun ; but chiefly in the place of the infi- 
 nitive. It forms the imperfect tense with the affixed personal pronouns, 
 and appears to be the source of that form of the verb. It is likewise 
 obtained from the infinitive by substituting for the final J ; and is 
 subject to the same rules for gender and number as the hasil or ism-i - 
 
 masdar , but differs with regard to inflexion. Intransitives, and the few 
 ✓ 
 
 transitives ending in together with all others whether intransitive 
 
 or transitive (with the exception of to run , and to sit ; 
 
 9 
 
 and those terminating in from which this form of the verb cannot 
 be obtained), change the final <* into ( — ) or in the oblique cases. 
 Those which lengthen the second syllable by changing ( — ) into I ; as, 
 jjpi to fly, ^j^J| flight or flying, drop the I altogether in the oblique 
 
 y 
 
 and the is altered to ( — ) or fi, as for the other forms already 
 described. The hasil-i-masdar cannot be used as the imperfect tense. 
 
 442. These forms of the verb — the hasil or ism-i-masdar, and the 
 ism-i-haliah , are subject to certain rules in construction which require 
 explanation.* 
 
 * “ It now only remains to be observed that besides the infinitive as above 
 described, there is another species of noun in some measure resembling it, which 
 
 the Arabian Grammarians term or the Infinitive Noun . Between these 
 
342 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE! 
 
 These forms of the verb are constructed in no less than nine different 
 ways. 
 
 First . — The ism-i-masdar as a noun is connected as the 
 or governing word in the relation of the genitive case with an agent, the 
 
 two nouns, namely the o an d the I there is precisely the same dis- 
 
 tinction in point of sense, as between the woi'd drink and the Participial Noun 
 drinking, when used as a general term in such an example as the following : — 
 
 ‘ Bacchus ever fair and ever young. 
 
 Drinking joys did first ordain ; 
 
 Bacchus’ blessings are a treasure, 
 
 Drinking is the soldier’s pleasure.’ 
 
 In which lines the word drink might be substituted for drinking without much 
 detriment to the sense, for drinking joys mean the joys of drinking or drink, and 
 the same may be observed of all other words of the same classes ; as, grief, griev- 
 ing ; kiss, kissing j love, loving • etc. How then shall we ascertain the true cha- 
 racter of these words ? What for instance is love as opposed to the general term 
 loving ? It is certain that they are both general terms descriptive of certain sensa- 
 tions of delight or modes of pleasure in the mihd, and as such may become either 
 the subject or predicate of a Proposition, but this explains nothing, and if we ask 
 the Arabian Grammarians for an explanation, they answer us by pointing out a 
 
 > A " 
 
 mere distinction in their application. The they say, has no other 
 
 government than that of any common Substantive Noun, but this again is contro- 
 verted by the Grammarians of Koofah and Bagdad, who bestow upon it the very 
 same regimen as that of the j****, and even admitting the fact, which I believe to 
 be just, it differs nothing in this particular from the Infinitive of a Neuter Verb. 
 The essential distinction then, for some essential distinction there certainly is, 
 between the Infinitive and the Infinitive’s Noun or Ismo Masdar, is not in my judg- 
 ment simple abstraction, that is, making the one an abstract Noun in opposition to 
 the other ; for, as I have observed before, they are both general or abstract terms, 
 but rather in the idea action or energy conveyed by the Infinitive, which action 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 343 
 
 object being at the same time expressed in the ablative case, and the 
 verb agreeing with the governing noun. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 “ Thus, the intercourse of the sweetheart with a rival is, 
 
 As though one mix together pure and impure — hoty and profane ” 
 
 Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 Locke observes, however various, and the effects almost infinite, is all included in 
 the two ideas of thinking and motion. These are his words, s For action, being the 
 great business of mankind and the whole matter about which all laws are convers- 
 ant, it is no wonder, that several modes of thinking and motion should be taken 
 notice of, the ideas of them observed, and laid up in the memory and have names 
 assigned to them ; without which, laws could be but ill made, or vice and disorder 
 repressed. Nor could any communication be well had amongst men, without such 
 complex ideas, with names to them : and therefore men have settled names and 
 supposed settled ideas in their minds of modes of action, distinguished by their 
 causes, means, objects, ends, instruments, time, place and other circumstances , etc.’ 
 
 “The real distinction then between the masdar and the Ismo masdar seems to 
 be this. The Ismo masdar signifies simply the name of a mode without any 
 reference to action or energy j the masdar denotes a mere complex idea and indi- 
 cates indefinitely the action, energy, or being of that mode. Love for example 
 is a name assigned to a certain feeling of delight, but loving is something more, 
 being another name by which we indicate the action or efficacy of that feeling called 
 love ; and hence we perceive the real cause of its possessing an active or transitive 
 government, in contradistinction to the Ismo masdar, which having no reference 
 to action, has no other regimen than that of any common Substantive Noun. 
 
 “ Action indeed is applicable to every Infinitive, and this the Arabian Gramma- 
 rians acknowledge by dividing all the verbs in the language into two general classes. 
 
344 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ✓ $ X X* v x — ^ 
 
 •• •*, «« x 
 
 <f From destiny there is no escape for any one , 
 
 ‘ Though he enter the sacred plain of Mekka itself. } ” Abd-ur- 
 Rahman. 
 
 The entire construction changes, should the verb, which is intransitive 
 in the preceding examples, be changed to a transitive in a past tense, the 
 hasil-i-masdar then becomes the object, and jta and the muzaf-illeh 
 or words governed in each of the above examples, become the agents 
 
 p p s * 
 
 in the instrumental case; thus, £ y 
 
 A '**'*9 A ' 
 
 which they term and that is, verbs denoting actions transitively 
 
 (the actio transiens of Logicians ;) and verbs denoting actions inherent or insepara- 
 ble, ( actio immanens) which we are accustomed to call neuter ; and hence we per- 
 ceive the propriety of the rule laid down in the Commentary, namely, that the 
 jpujr or active Participle may be derived from either a transitive or intran- 
 sitive verb, which is saying in other words that every action supposes an agent. 
 
 “ This idea of action is conveyed in other languages by terminations, as beat-fw^r, 
 etc. but in Arabic with a few particular exceptions, there is no distinguishing mark 
 by which we can discriminate the Infinitive from the Infinitive’s Noun, so 
 that we must trust entirely to the context for the sense of either. Every Parti- 
 ciple however in our language when used as a general term, is the just represen- 
 tative of an Arabic or Infinitive, I mean every Active Participle 
 
 formed by adding the termination ing to the Imperative of a Verb, which seems 
 in this case to possess a similar power to the characteristic to, and therefore it may 
 perhaps be said that we have two Infinitives ; as, 
 
 “ Drink-m^ is the soldier’s pleasure, or To-drink is the soldier’s pleasure,” 
 
 Formed by annexing ing and prefixing to to the Imperative in one sense, and the 
 jtXxoxj Drink, in the other. See “ The Miut Amil,” by Capt. A. Lockett.” 
 Notes to page 207 to 211, Calcutta, 1814. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 345 
 
 (t the beloved formed such intercourse with the rival and again 
 
 j f ^ “ every one effected escape from destiny.” 
 
 Second. — The ism or hasil-i-masdar is used as the L-jUa* or govern- 
 ing noun and also the agent, connected with the aJ I or word 
 
 governed, in the genitive case, the object being expressed in the ablative 
 case, and the verb which is intransitive, being governed by the agent ; 
 thus, 
 
 Sjij <C to SO J SjJ cU.'Lo o 
 
 lo 
 
 “ Although people be inclosed in armour or in helmets , or be defended 
 by lofty fortresses ; yet this protection of the Almighty hath surpassed 
 all” Makhzan Afghani. 
 
 In the event of a transitive verb in a past tense being used, instead of 
 
 an intransitive as in the above example, the ism-i-masdar as the 
 would become the agent in the instrumental case, connected with a 
 
 aj) in the genitive, and the pronoun lo would refer to the 
 
 object; as, t) |o “ The protection of the Almighty 
 
 protected him.” 
 
 The ism-i-haliah is also subject to the same rules as the ism-i-masdar 
 just explained ; and although generally used as a mode of action, in this 
 particular instance it may be used as a noun also. 
 
 Example.* 
 
 m ^ y ' ' * A s' ✓ ^ 
 
 <v\j j* a*. axa o 
 
 * This example has been already given for the present participle, the ism-i-haliah,, 
 for which, see Page 103 — 109. 
 
 2 Y 
 
346 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 " May Khizer be the doorkeeper of that gate and wall , 
 
 By ivhich thy coming in and going out — thy entrance and thy 
 exit taketh place” Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 If the present tense of an active verb be substituted for which 
 
 is intransitive, the ism-i-haliah which was the U-il becomes a mere 
 noun in construction with an auxiliary verb ; and the dJ | L-JLio which 
 was in the genitive case, becomes the agent in the nominative ; as in the 
 
 following sentence ; M <U !• ^ “ by which thou effectest 
 
 exit and entrance .” The agent would of course assume the instrumental 
 case with the verb in the past tenses. 
 
 Third. — The ism-i-haliah as the ?Ua*> in conjunction with an object 
 in the genitive case, with the agent expressed in the same sentence, the 
 transitive being governed by the object ; thus, 
 
 “ Thou shouldst not take amiss, beloved one , my looking ; 
 
 For the nightingales take flight round the rose.” Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 With an intransitive verb the ism-i-haliah becomes the agent and the 
 U-jLa/o in the genitive case, and the former agent becomes the object in 
 
 the ablative; as, jJj dJ <U J which would be ren- 
 
 dered — “ my sight should not view the beloved one amiss.” 
 
 Fourth. — The ism-i-haliah is connected by the genitive case as 
 to the object, the agent being neither expressed nor understood, having 
 then a passive signification, and the verb agreeing with the 
 
 Example. 
 
 da* b dJ (^t> J 
 
 *-> H ^ o’*dl 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 347 
 
 " Knowing Muhammad (or knowledge of) is a sacred duty , in this 
 manner , that he is the Prophet of God on whom we have placed our 
 faith.” Fawa/id-ush-Sharri’sea. 
 
 With the present tense of a transitive verb used in place of the auxili- 
 ary the ism-i-haliah as the would become the agent, and 
 
 the object would be necessarily expressed; as in the following sentence 
 
 &o^' c O “ Knowledge of Muhammad 
 
 giveth religion to the believers.” 
 
 p 
 
 Fifth . — The hasil or ism-i-masdar is the joined to the 
 
 object by the genitive case, the agent expressed in the vocative case, and 
 the object which is the governing the verb ; as in the following 
 
 extract. 
 
 ' \ ' ' . . | " *. 
 
 LrH 0 j*ji 0 Lf ^ 
 
 “ Since thou eatest the mouthful of recommendation. Oh Hamid ! 
 Over one wound thou placest another wound.” Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 If an intransitive verb be substituted for the transitive in the preced- 
 ing example, the object in that would become the agent, and the hasil-i - 
 masdar as the I would convey the meaning of a simple noun ; 
 
 thus, ^ ^ “ Since the mouthful of recom - 
 
 «* « ** 
 
 mendation may become hard.” 
 
 p 
 
 Sixth . — The ism-i-masdar as the <**)l or word governed, is 
 
 connected with the in the genitive case. The agent is not 
 
 expressed, and the object governs the verb. 
 
 Example. 
 
 '' ' ' |A ^ ^,9 A p " ' ' ? 
 
 2 y 2 
 
348 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 f* Lfll? 
 
 “ The world is the place of acquirement, and he who has effected 
 
 nothing in this, that world is the place of ejectment and expulsion. 
 
 Therefore, oh men ! every one should weep, and not account himself free 
 
 from sorrow and affliction” Eawa/id-ush-Sharrf’sea. 
 
 f 
 
 Seventh. — The ism-i-masdar as the i s connected with an 
 
 9 
 
 object — the <tJ! grammatically, — in the dative case, but really in 
 
 the genitive. The agent is also expressed. 
 
 Example. 
 
 
 
 ^ <U ^ 
 
 IJU 
 
 “ All who were on the face of the earth or in the heavens, were hopeful 
 of, and dependent on him; and for his nourishment the affection of all 
 men became manifest” Tawallud Nameh. 
 
 Eighth. — The ism-i-haliah or ism-i-masdar, may be used as a noun in 
 construction with an auxiliary verb, the agent being expressed and in 
 the nominative case if the verb be in any other than a past tense, and 
 the object in the ablative ; thus, 
 
 “ Thou shouldst not take amiss, beloved one, my looking ; 
 
 For the nightingales take flight round the rose” Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 With any past tense of a transitive verb used instead of the present 
 
 .9 9 
 
 tense, the agent which in the above example is in the nomina- 
 
 iV- 
 
 tive, would become in the instrumental case. 
 
 Sometimes neither agent nor object is expressed, but is understood 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 349 
 
 from something that has gone before or will transpire ; as in the follow- 
 ing example : 
 
 “ They neither make enquiry of, nor cast a look towards each other ; 
 
 Back to back they pass along , the friends and acquaintances of this 
 world” Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 Ninth . — The ism-i-haliah or indefinite participle is used as a mode of 
 action indefinite as to time or place, in three different ways : 
 
 First . — When the agent is not expressed, but understood from some- 
 thing which has passed or which follows, and the ism-i-haliah is placed 
 in the ablative case, whether the verb be transitive or intransitive ; as 
 in the following extracts : 
 
 “ Whenever a person may appear in a place of worship , for every foot - 
 step which he takes, twelve good actions will be written, both on coming 
 and on going.” Fawa’id-ush-Sharrfsea. 
 
 “ I said, I should flee from these to some place or other ; 
 
 But they by running seized me very quickly ” Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 Second . — The ism-i-masdar and the ism-i-haliah is the in the 
 
 relation of the ablative case to the <kJ | the agent in the genitive 
 
 case ; as in the following extracts : 
 
350 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ With much joy and delight he made a royal feast , 
 
 On account of the arrival of that youth — Hassan Mimundi .” Saif-ul- 
 Muluk. 
 
 *x) ** Jji 
 
 <J { i j-fj ' 0 uUj h *f Jr* 
 
 “ When making thy supplication raise the hands , and recall to thy 
 heart thy sins ; 
 
 Moisten both thy eyes by shedding tears of purity and innocence” 
 Rashid-ul-By’an. 
 
 Third . — The ism-i-haliah is, as I have already shown at page 103, 
 
 commonly used as a simple indefinite participle, at which time it is 
 
 j> s> 
 
 neither cJLi/o nor <*J| neither inflected nor used with an 
 
 auxiliary. 
 
 The following are examples : 
 
 <£a*wI) & 
 
 I •• 
 
 “It is stated in the Siraji, that the putting aside of alms * is neces- 
 sary and right, both to the freeman and to the rich ” Fawa’id-ush- 
 Sharrfsea. 
 
 ** *v •* 
 
 “Although ascending from earth to heaven is a weighty matter ; 
 
 Yet this journey is attained with but one footstep of piety and sin- 
 cerity.” Abd-ur- Rahman. 
 
 * The alms given on the /Edu-l-fitr, after the Muhammadan Lent. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 351 
 
 443 Another class of nouns is obtained from the third persons of 
 the past tenses of verbs ; as, 
 
 A) H Jip ^ <*$• 
 
 “ Confound that sitting and rising though it may be on a throne , 
 
 Which ever riseth with reproaches , and sitteth with censures” Abd- 
 ul -Hamid. 
 
 444. The imperatives of some verbs also furnishes another description 
 of derivative nouns, and of which the following is an example : 
 
 j ju <x) <cJt> 
 
 *» o 
 
 “ Trade and traffic, buying and selling, are all in the hands of others ; 
 
 There is neither an opening or commencement here for me nor for thee ” 
 
 Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 Chapter FffiL 
 
 THE PUSHTO NUMERALS. 
 
 * S '»■' Ax 
 
 M 
 
 445. The Cardinal numbers with the Pushto names and the Arabic 
 figures which are used to represent them, are as follows : — 
 
 A " 
 
 The first number jri becomes y in the oblique cases ; and before a 
 feminine it takes *, and is liable to the same changes for number and case 
 as other adjectives. The other numerals being plural, take the inflected 
 form of the plural, and are not subject to any other changes for gender 
 or. number. 
 
GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Figures. 
 
 352 
 
 Figures. 
 
 1 1 *ji> Ji 
 
 2 
 
 r 
 
 (^) or Sjt> 
 
 3 
 
 r 
 
 S’ 
 
 4 
 
 r 
 
 jA 
 
 5 
 
 a 
 
 J&t 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 A . > l «v 
 
 .>*.<*> or '> — -A-**** 
 
 7 
 
 V 
 
 ✓ 
 
 8 
 
 A 
 
 all 
 
 9 
 
 <i 
 
 43 
 
 10 
 
 1 * 
 
 uJ 
 
 11 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 12 
 
 i r 
 
 U*) ^ 5 J or 
 
 13 
 
 i r 
 
 cr 
 
 14 
 
 ir 
 
 crbl ? 1 
 
 15 
 
 t a 
 
 
 16 
 
 1 1 
 
 l/it" 
 
 17 
 
 i y 
 
 X’ ^ 
 
 LT J * 2 >' 
 
 18 
 
 1 a 
 
 43 1 
 
 19 
 
 M 
 
 ( w ) jj »^3 or 
 
 20 
 
 r* 
 
 
 21 
 
 r i 
 
 
 22 
 
 rr 
 
 A 
 
 ✓ 
 
 23 
 
 rr 
 
 /■ x 
 
 24 
 
 
 ) . J*aw or d**&3 A >5^ 
 
 25 ra 
 
 26 r i 
 
 27 rv 
 
 28 pa 
 
 29 M 
 
 30 r* 
 
 31 ri 
 
 32 rr 
 
 33 rr 
 
 34 rr 
 
 35 ra 
 
 36 n 
 
 37 r* 
 
 38 rA 
 
 39 n 
 r- 
 
 
 <J I 
 
 LT>> 
 
 U^jd 
 
 . * A 
 or 
 
 Lrjy '^r 
 
 LTji^ & 
 
 « » 
 LTji 
 
 J 4)\ 
 
 LTjJ 
 
 L> <0 
 
 40 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 353 
 
 Figures . 
 
 
 | F W 
 
 wra. 
 
 
 41 
 
 f i 
 
 ♦ 1 a A 
 
 61 
 
 1 1 
 
 A 
 
 c(ma,« a. 3 
 ••v 
 
 42 
 
 f r 
 
 1 t A 
 
 62 
 
 i r 
 
 '9 
 
 4a<jai5 5j ^3 
 
 43 
 
 t c r 
 
 jiiL 
 
 63 
 
 ir 
 
 Aaaaau jJ 
 
 44 
 
 ff 
 
 ^ ^.1^. 
 
 64 
 
 if 
 
 ^AAAtt» 
 
 45 
 
 fa 
 
 
 65 
 
 ia 
 
 <Cvaa-vI> 
 
 v . 
 
 46 
 
 fl 
 
 
 66 
 
 n 
 
 <d AAAAU 
 
 “v V 
 
 4 7 
 
 fv 
 
 8*^1 
 
 67 
 
 17 
 
 Aaaauj 5*5l 
 **v » 
 
 48 
 
 f A 
 
 dJ| 
 
 68 
 
 1 A 
 
 <*aaa£ <J| 
 
 "V 
 
 49 
 
 fl 
 
 <0 
 
 69 
 
 11 
 
 JUaaAV dii 
 "X 
 
 50 
 
 6 ♦ 
 
 
 70 
 
 V • 
 
 b! 
 
 51 
 
 a i 
 
 A * \ A 
 
 71 
 
 y l 
 
 , A A 
 
 b'jri 
 
 52 
 
 6 r 
 
 ✓ > 
 
 Sjl> 
 
 72 
 
 vr 
 
 b;| 
 
 53 
 
 ar 
 
 J-' 
 
 73 
 
 y r 
 
 b'-f 
 
 54 
 
 af 
 
 
 74 
 
 vf 
 
 [ ihA 
 
 55 
 
 aa 
 
 
 75 
 
 ya 
 
 b^l jls a .^ 
 
 56 
 
 ai 
 
 tj-JeH Cjdi 
 
 76 
 
 VI 
 
 b*l 
 
 
 
 '■'JS V 
 
 
 
 *!> V 
 
 57 
 
 ay 
 
 u"j-=*J *y' 
 
 77 
 
 vv 
 
 b' *y' 
 
 58 
 
 a a 
 
 **\ 
 
 78 
 
 VA 
 
 bji <Ji 
 
 59 
 
 ai 
 
 d) 
 
 79 
 
 A 1 
 
 b;| <» 
 
 60 
 
 1 ♦ 
 
 Aaaa-w 
 
 "V 
 
 80 
 
 A * 
 
 (J| 
 
 2 z 
 
354 
 
 
 PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 
 
 Figures. 
 
 
 
 Figures. 
 
 
 
 81 
 
 A | 
 
 
 91 
 
 1 ! 
 
 
 
 
 
 92 
 
 
 
 82 
 
 A f 
 
 U| 8*L> 
 
 1 r 
 
 \S*p sjo 
 
 83 
 
 a r 
 
 
 93 
 
 ir 
 
 tfy;° 
 
 84 
 
 At* 
 
 Lo'l jjli 
 
 94 
 
 sr c 
 
 <?y 
 
 85 
 
 Ad 
 
 yf ^ 
 
 95 
 
 
 ^ a v 
 
 86 
 
 A1 
 
 1*3 I 
 
 ** V 
 
 96 
 
 in 
 
 
 87 
 
 AV 
 
 ✓ / 
 
 IJl S^jl 
 
 97 
 
 IV 
 
 ✓ 
 
 L?y ^ 
 
 88 
 
 AA 
 
 LJ| dJ I 
 
 98 
 
 1 A 
 
 L^ji Jl 
 
 89 
 
 A ^ 
 
 S’ 
 
 Li* | A3 
 
 99 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 90 
 
 s * 
 
 x- * 
 
 y ° r 
 
 100 
 
 ! * * 
 
 
 100 
 
 1 * * 
 
 y y.. 
 
 1,000 
 
 I • • * 
 
 
 200 
 
 r * • 
 
 A " i> 
 
 1,000 
 
 1 • ♦ * 
 
 A 
 
 300 
 
 r* * 
 
 ^ - A 
 
 y£ or y* 
 
 2,000 
 
 r* * • 
 
 *>j 6** 
 
 400 
 
 
 
 3,000 
 
 r* • ♦ 
 
 t!jj° 
 
 500 
 
 d ♦ * 
 
 / ,p a 
 
 or ^ Air^ 
 
 4,000 
 
 r 6 * • • 
 
 iii ^ 
 
 600 
 
 i ♦ • 
 
 
 5,000 
 
 d • • • 
 
 
 700 
 
 v • ♦ 
 
 
 6,000 
 
 v • • 
 
 |JJ ^!^4W 
 
 800 
 
 A • ♦ 
 
 A ^ 
 
 ^ J| 
 
 7,000 
 
 V* * * 
 
 yj *jyl 
 
 900 
 
 1** 
 
 A 
 
 A3 
 
 8,000 
 
 A • * • 
 
 *JJ <o| 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 355 
 
 0,000 1 • • * 
 
 IV * 
 
 10,000 !•••• 
 
 VJ cr J 
 
 100,000 * 
 
 eCT 
 
 10,000,000 t ♦••*••• 
 
 
 1,000,000,000 f 
 
 *— iJ}, 
 
 1,000,000,000,000 1 
 
 kJ’S* 
 
 The Ordinal Numbers 
 
 446. The ordinal numbers in this language are formed similar to the 
 Persian ordinals, with the exception of the first, by affixing ^ . The 
 changes to which they are subject for gender, number, and case, have 
 been already described at paragraph 86; 
 
 cb 1 ° r fi rst ■ 
 
 second. 
 
 * 
 
 third. 
 t>^ fourth. 
 
 (&i fifth. 
 
 fj-f* or sixth. 
 
 t » ' seventh. 
 
 ^ I eighth . 
 
 f, f4> ninth, 
 
 ' * 
 
 r l 
 
 J tenth. 
 
 * r n 
 
 Numerals of Fractions 
 
 ^ a quarter, 
 or ^ a half, 
 jkj* three quarters. 
 
 one and a quarter. 
 
 <*4** one and half. 
 
 one and three-fourths. 
 
 2 z 2 
 
356 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 The Days of the Week £7**!. 
 
 JUL Saturday . 
 
 jl&. Wednesday. 
 
 d*/%w Thursday. 
 
 9 
 
 Friday. 
 
 L2/ 
 
 ♦♦ 
 
 jy' orj to | Sunday. 
 
 T-i or Monday. 
 
 * 
 
 44 > Tuesday. 
 
 Amongst the tribes north of Pesh’awer, Thursday is called & 
 
 the Day of Pilgrimage. 
 
 9 9 ^ 
 
 The Months of the Year ^4^*. 
 
 447 . The Afghan tribes bordering on the Panjab, who are however 
 but a small portion of the children of Afghana, use the months of the 
 Hindu Calendar when referring to matters of agriculture. The names 
 of the Afghan months are — 
 
 A 9 ' ' 
 
 .*•*«*». Hasan Husain . 
 
 ly 
 
 x / 
 
 Zjk+e Safar . 
 
 .9 
 
 The First Sister. 
 
 ♦♦ 
 
 A 
 
 jjL 4*^0 The Second Sister . 
 
 The Third Sister. 
 
 yj v 
 
 s 
 
 i L The Fourth Sister. 
 J> God’s Month 
 
 0*^1 The Month of the 
 
 l " Night of Destiny. 
 
 Lfiy 
 
 o>iL J 
 
 The Fast Month. 
 
 y 
 
 u| The Lesser Feast 
 
 j 
 
 U© Month. 
 
 <oLo The Intermediate 
 Month. 
 
 Feast 
 
 The Greater Ft 
 
 J 
 
 Month . 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 357 
 
 The fourth month of the Afghan year. The Second Sister — com- 
 mences on the 23rd of the month of December of the present year 1854. 
 
 448. The Seasons 
 
 ijr-i Spring. 
 tfi; 1 Summer. 
 
 9 f sss 9 
 
 LfiXj jr 
 
 * * 
 
 LSJ A-? ^ ^ 
 
 •% 
 
 “ Oh ! beauteous are the roses of spring , 
 
 And like nightingales are lovers. 
 
 The rose i$ useless without its nightingale , 
 
 And Philomel without its rose.” Yusuf and Zulikha. 
 
 
 ** Autumn. 
 
 d Winter. 
 
 9 9 
 
 *■!» <J.aL (J.) 43 
 
 ijb North. 
 
 449. The Cardinal Points dJ.4^. 
 
 ijt ^S' South. 
 
 A3 ^^3 c3 fi A)G1a3 0 d.cff | ^ 
 
 *r 
 
 Up 
 
 “ The parrot said, c O/j / magpie ! would to God that between me and 
 thee were as much distance as there is between the East and the West.’ ” 
 Translation of the Gulistan. 
 
358 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Cfjaptrr II. 
 
 ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 c 'l 
 
 4S J . 
 
 J 
 
 450. I have generally fully explained the different peculiarities and 
 exceptions of the various rules of each part of speech under their respec- 
 tive heads, and but little remains to he described beyond a few remarks 
 peculiar to the idiom of the language. 
 
 As regards the order of words in a sentence, the chief circumstances 
 to be borne in mind are, that the adjective should properly precede the 
 substantive ; the nominative the verb ; and should generally appear first 
 in the sentence. Nouns in the different cases as required, and a parti- 
 ciple or adverb may follow, but the verb should terminate the sentence. 
 In poetry, and in some styles of prose also, greater license is taken and 
 allowed, their poets like those of other nations varying the dispositions 
 of the words as they consider most suitable to the numbers and ten- 
 dency of their poems. 
 
 The order and arrangement of words will be seen from the following 
 extracts as well as from the numerous examples already given, and also 
 in the four idiomatical tales given in the Appendix for this purpose. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 359 
 
 “ The nightingale opened the mouth of gratitude and gave thanks unto 
 the Almighty. Then he said , ‘ thou hast acted kindly with me , and cer- 
 tainly the return of such goodness should also be goodness . Know that 
 beneath this tree there is concealed a vessel full of gold— take it and 
 spend it in thy necessities’ ” M’yfa Danish of Khushhal Khan. 
 
 aj J s.jr* 0 ft? 3 *j**tf° 
 
 " k J uf (_r^ " Lf J f crd; 5 ;r ib yy ‘‘t ^ ^ 
 
 “ Maiy’sarah by name , there was an old house-born slave of Murtaza 
 Ali, who was also called by the name of Abd-us-Samad. When the 
 relatives divided the goods and chattels amongst themselves, this (slave) 
 fell to the lot of Husain in the distribution ,• and he used to show great 
 affection both towards the elders and the juniors of the family.” His- 
 tory of Hasan and Husain. 
 
 45 1 . When nouns of different genders occur in the same sentence, 
 the adjective, the verb, or the participle, governed by them in common, 
 must take the masculine form ; as, 
 
 “ The Prince, Nashurbanu, the Queen, all these were seated together 
 in one apartment ; 
 
 Nouns. 
 
360 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 The whole night they passed together in pleasure , until the light 
 of day became apparent.” — Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 Whenever a noun is to be used in the same sentence with another, 
 which is more immediately acted upon by a verb, the former must be 
 put in the accusative case,* which in Pushto is the same as the nomi- 
 native ; thus, 
 
 <0 yjU. J. { i. _jl j lsj* 
 
 vt/ &V' 
 
 
 “ These deceivers act in thi# manner — they give victuals unto the 
 people, and they bias the world towards themselves ” — EawaTd-ush 
 Sharrf sea. 
 
 The particle O which governs the genitive case generally precedes the 
 9 
 
 noun it governs, the or governing noun immediately preceding 
 
 it likewise ; but it may also precede the governing as well as the noun 
 
 governed. 
 
 Example. 
 
 UUI p o »ji 
 
 — 
 
 p P to cbjj Cibji to ;t ^ jijk *• if 
 
 9 9 ' ' 9 ' " . " " * 
 
 <tb y y dS'jL# aj <0 jr 0 j&jj (Jj; 
 
 6C One day the gardener was sitting looking at the beautiful rose , when 
 he beheld a nightingale which continued rubbing his face on the leaves of 
 the flower, and uttering loud lamentations, was separating its golden leaves 
 
 with his sharp beak.” — iE’yar Danish of Khushlial Khan. 
 
 9 1 
 
 * Called the ^ by the Arabian Grammarians. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 361 
 
 When two nouns in the ablative case come together in a sentence, 
 the ( ) or <*, the sign of the case, is only used with the last ; thus, 
 
 “ Freedom and independence , and the affairs of the world are far 
 distant from each other : 
 
 Take off thy hands from the business of the world if thou doeth 
 any thing ” — Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 552. The adjective must always agree with its noun in gender, case, 
 and number, except with an uninflected masculine noun in the plural 
 number, when the adjective is used in the singular. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 jjL LSS ij&jy b Jhuy 
 
 " ^ X •*#'•» ^ •• 
 
 / 
 
 “Black eyes ; sable locks ; dark eyebrows ; 
 
 These are all gloomy calamities and man-devourers.” — Abd-ul- 
 Hamid. 
 
 c ^ yj djif* Jri * 
 
 I* 
 
 ✓ y p p * 
 
 “ In the world the roses of spring are manifold in number , 
 
 If thou lamentest like the nightingale , oh heart of mine ! — Ahmed 
 
 f 
 
 Shah^ Abdali. 
 
 The plural form of the nouns is most generally used with the 
 numerals whether in the nominative or any other case, and not always 
 in the singular as in Persian and Urdu. Still there are exceptions, and 
 both forms may even be used in the same sentence ; thus, 
 
362 
 
 A GRAMMAR, OF THE 
 
 V ^)) 
 
 *1 It •* 
 
 y L/*%° ^ 
 
 “ In this manner for ten nights and days there was such a princely 
 party ; 
 
 The whole tribe were greatly delighted at this assembly” — Saif-ul- 
 Muluk and Badri Jamal. 
 
 r* 
 
 r* 
 
 Vj jr 
 
 <u 
 
 u* 
 
 A/0 
 
 jl f}/ 
 
 r* 
 
 te There were at a guess about seven hundred thousand horses and 
 camels also ; 
 
 One hundred thousand wild-asses too , with buffaloes, cows, and 
 deer.” — Saif-ul-Muluk and Badri Jamal. 
 
 fC If she maketh a promise of one hour m any matter , 
 
 I have no hope of the fulfilment of the affair in a year” — Abd-ur- Rah- 
 man. 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 553. In the different tenses of intransitive verbs, and in the present, 
 future, and aorist of transitives, in which the affixed personal pronouns 
 
 (dLalojJlt*) are used, the separate personal pronouns 
 
 may be altogether omitted as in Persian, Arabic and Hebrew, or may 
 be used with them ; and when the meaning is clear without them, they 
 may be dropped in the third person singular and plural of intransitives. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 363 
 
 Example. 
 
 u±>L*)| ^ *> b <*-' u sj pi aJ L&1 J 
 
 € ‘ I am living merely on the recollection of my sweet hearty 
 
 Alas! I shall never exist without my beloved” — Ahmed Shah, 
 Abdali. 
 
 In the following example an affixed personal pronoun in the dative 
 case, has been joined to the past tense of a transitive verb, and the 
 regular personal pronoun sj also used ; and although it refers to the 
 same object in the sentence it is not inflected. The meaning would be 
 complete and clear without the and to put it in the dative form M to 
 
 or to would be incorrect, unless the affixed pronoun be removed. It 
 must therefore be borne in mind, that in using a separate personal pro- 
 noun with an affixed one in the dative case, which it naturally assumes 
 when used with the past tense of a transitive verb, the former must 
 retain the uninflected form ; thus, 
 
 1*2? joh. jUaJ jOS- ^ 
 
 f/A' b " nj )■, hi " *ij 
 
 “ Grief on account of the beloved hath made me wretched ; anguish for 
 her hath made me ill indeed ” 
 
 “ Why should not my heart be sad ? when in my mind I think of her 
 flowing locks ” — Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 It should also be remarked that the last word of this example, 
 is the first person singular of the present tense , and the affixed personal 
 pronoun ^ is in the nominative case. 
 
 3 a 2 
 
3GI 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 A verb is often used in construction without any noun or pronoun 
 
 point, matter, affair, concern, etc., is generally understood ; as in the 
 following example. 
 
 ee At all events, whatever hath been decreed by fate will happen ; 
 
 Although a person may have never cast his eyes on destiny ” — Abd- 
 ur- Rahman. 
 
 If speaking of one’s self with another, preference is given to the first 
 person in the first instance. The Afghans being a plain spoken race too, 
 use the singular and not the plural form of the pronoun, as in Persian, 
 Urdu and English, when referring to one person only. 
 
 “ I and thou are both the slaves of one master, and the dependents of 
 the audience hall of the sovereign. I am never at rest from my duty, for 
 I am ever with my head in the desert” — Translation of the Gulistan. 
 
 When a third person is mentioned, the words of the speaker himself 
 must be repeated instead of using the third person as in English ; thus, 
 
 x * •• ^ " O ^ ^ 
 
 " When he recollects that, the Kaceda * has not been performed by ME,f 
 
 expressed. Under these circumstances some 
 
 Example. 
 
 * A mode of sitting at prayer. f Signifying, “ performed by him. ,, 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 365 
 
 if he be near unto the sitting posture, he should return to that posture 
 and perform the Kaceda.” — Eawa/id-ush Sharrf sea. 
 
 (•)£* fj- L£-' ajS jy *o> 
 
 “ They did not know at all as to where we go ( meaning where they go) 
 
 3 
 
 Neither did they distinguish what country it is, or what place )’ — 
 
 Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 The pronoun is used for the third person, but generally in a 
 demonstrative sense with reference to a distant object ; and by way of 
 discrimination, the pronoun or l<3 must be used, in the same 
 
 way as we use that and this in English. The following is an example. 
 
 Jlj 3 dU dU |0 
 
 “ Muoea’wiya said, ‘ An arrow hath pierced my heart, and in the end 
 the wound will give forth bloody water . I have neither acquired this 
 ( world) nor that, and I know not what answer I shall make to the 
 Giver of all good at the last day) ” — History of Hasan and Husain. 
 
 When the use of a second pronoun is required to refer to the same 
 thing as the subject of the sentence or nominative before the verb, the 
 common or reflective pronoun must be used. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 ✓ ^ 99 
 
 KS^ <U \jy° 
 
 “ Oh ! Mirza, He himself glorifieth himself, and unto Mirza His 
 favour and beneficence is extended — Euttih Khan, Mirza. 
 
366 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 “ It is the season of spring ; the nightingale laments and bewails ; 
 
 His heart is filled with anguish ; the rose is inebriated with its own 
 intoxication ” — Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 When a pronoun in the second number of a sentence, refers to the 
 same subject or thing as the nominative or subject of the verb in the 
 first, the personal and particular pronoun must be used instead of the 
 reflective or reciprocal ; thus, 
 
 / p s * ■' ✓ * 
 
 H *X) 0 b Lfj *j ^ f Lf ' 
 
 “ Alas ! that before death Iliad once reached such a river , whose waves 
 having flowed to my knees, I had filled mg water-vessel according to the 
 wish of my heart ” — Translation of the Gulistan. 
 
 The common or reflective pronoun may also be used in a substantive 
 sense, as in the following : 
 
 ^ / 9 * * 9 \ 9 „ ' 
 
 “The strangers and her own [relations) also, said unto her , ‘ The 
 sending away of the Prophet was not necessary unto thee. 1 They 
 rebuked Khadijali , and she stood reproved before him” Tawullud 
 
 Nameh. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 367 
 
 is also joined to nouns and pronouns by way of identity, 
 peculiarity, or emphasis ; as in the following extract. 
 
 i JF'' 1 u 1 / H yji) 
 
 
 K C&s 
 
 “ God Almighty himself hath said , 4 whoever hath placed his hand 
 on the Koran , congratulate him , OA Faithful !’ ” Makhzan Afghani. 
 
 The pronoun <!U- used both as an interrogative and an indefinite, 
 although not applicable to persons generally, is often used to express 
 scorn or astonishment ; as in the following examples : — 
 
 )b [> jj ) soj <U. Jt>3 
 
 Ls. 
 
 <0 
 
 “ Enquire not Oh vulgar ! concerning the anxiety and care of Hamid. 
 What knoweth the mat-weaver regarding the value of cloth of gold?” 
 
 Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
 4f W hat unfortunate hard grain I am, I cannot imagine ; 
 
 Since I do not become ground in the mill-stones of absence .” Abd- 
 ul-Hamid. 
 
 It may also be used in a discriminative or characteristic sense ; thus — 
 
 “Whether ruler or subject , or whether foreign and strange ; 
 
 The whole world is mounted on the tail of calamity and evil.” Abd- 
 ul- Hamid. 
 
 The adverb is used emphatically to denote dissimilarity, contra- 
 riety, and non-existence, between matters or things ; as, 
 
368 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ✓ - 
 
 dUy^ 
 > V 
 
 J'i 
 
 C) dU 
 
 J? 
 
 O J-x) J.x) djy^. 
 
 ♦t 
 
 “Where ^jt?5 of the beloved? where the sorrow of heart and 
 sold ? 
 
 Where the nightshade’ s red berry ? and where the ruby of Badakh- 
 shan?” Abd-ur-Rahman. 
 
 fjji *f Lf J ^ *ib 
 
 ✓ / H 
 
 (jltV^Uw J*£. <Uj^. 
 
 “ Since people barter their faith for the world’s wealth, they are fools, 
 Where is fifty days? and where eternity and everlasting life?” Abd- 
 ur- Rahman. 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 454. Transitive verbs in any past tense of the active voice must agree 
 with, the object in gender and number, whether it may or may not be 
 put in the oblique case ; as in the following extracts : — 
 
 [) ^ ^ dd ^ f!>4i 
 
 “ Bahrain released that damsel from confinement : 
 
 He drew her out from the well.” Bahram Gur. 
 
 , 9 s , p p 
 
 11^ ^ du ^jl^i*** sL*» 
 
 “King Stillman opened the covering with his own hand: 
 
 To him became apparent a portrait of his beloved mistress.” Saif- 
 ul-Muluk. 
 
 In the preceding examples, the objects are feminine and the verbs also. 
 The agent, as has already been explained, is used in the instrumental 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 369 
 
 case, and takes the inflected form when capable of inflection. The 
 
 “ He who yesterday commiserated and condoled with my sorrow and 
 grief . ; 
 
 Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 Pushto nouns have no particular terminations for the objective case ; 
 it is distinguished merely by its position, which properly is after the 
 agent and before the verb, when both agent and object are used in the 
 third persons masculine. In all other instances the object may be 
 known by the gender and number which the verb assumes to agree with 
 it; and by the affixed personal pronouns, which, as in the Semitic 
 dialects, point out the objective case. 
 
 “ When Aorung made Bah ram acquainted with this circumstance , 
 
 Care and anxiety excited him; he became perplexed and distracted ” 
 
 Bahram Gur. 
 
 agents in the preceding extracts were not capable of change : in the 
 following example the agent becomes 
 
 Destiny to-day made that friend of mine sanguinary and cruel” 
 
 Examples. 
 
 “At the skirt of the mountain he perceived a dark cave ; and a man 
 
370 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 of enlightened mind was seated at the mouth of the cavern , free from the 
 disquietude of strangers ” iE’yar Danish of Khushhal Khan. 
 
 4 jl Sj o <*J JO 
 
 ♦♦ ** ", .. x •v' / 
 
 ** ✓ 
 
 “ The slave previous to this had never beheld the sea, and had 
 never experienced the annoyance and inconvenience of a boat. He began 
 to weep and lament ” — Translation of the Gulistan. 
 
 Reverse the order in these examples and the meaning is also reversed. 
 
 Thus in the first, Cb* would be the agent and C-dyl the object ; and 
 
 in the last, would be the agent and iAy 0 the object. 
 
 *« ^ 
 
 There are some transitive verbs such as to speak , and Jar 
 
 to look at, to observe, with which it is absolutely necessary that the 
 object be put in the dative case, without which the sentence would 
 convey no meaning. The following are examples. 
 
 “ <• ^ «• m 
 
 “ The Queen spoke privately unto her mother, and with this cir- 
 cumstance she also acquainted Badri ” — Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 9 9 
 
 J) ^ 4) J? Jj ^ J) J J.L f 
 
 c>| 
 
 Adam Khan said to balo, Go thou and bring him; and when he went 
 and brought him , the Mulla said unto him, Let the women go away, then 
 1 will come to thee ” — Tale of Adam Khan and Durkham. 
 
 In sentences where there may be two objective cases, the one denot- 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 371 
 
 ing the object and the other the person, the object of the transitive 
 verb must be put in the dative case. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 «* «» 
 
 “ Since I cast my eyes towards this rosy-cheeked one. 
 
 With those eyes I shed tears of blood ” — Abd-ur-Eahman. 
 
 ** .. .♦ «• ^ .. 
 
 “ When he caused bahram to be decked out in a suit of clothes , 
 
 The blaze of his beauty became greater than the sunT — Bahram Gur. 
 The dative case is sometimes used instead of the genitive to express 
 relation or possession ; as, 
 
 8 lib jj ^ bo jj^b iXksi* <&£. 
 
 “ That curiosity which father had sent for me, came to my recollec- 
 tion at that very hour and £ime.”—Saif-ul-Muluk. 
 
 80} I LSJ*'?. j l)j ** Cjb** *°)lj H (j** 3 ^ (^! 
 
 “ Oh ! thou ever fascinated and distracted with the cares of the flesh ; 
 Why awaken for thy life and soul sleeping calamity and misfor- 
 tune Abd-ul- Hamid. 
 
 The infinitive form of the verb, besides its other uses already de- 
 scribed, is also used to denote the absolute necessity of an action ; thus, 
 
 s / / / / / / ✓ ✓ ^ 
 
 (J.J L£0 (J^ lJ , . j 
 
 “ Moreover , that which is legal and right it is necessary to account 
 lawful ; 
 
 3 b 2 
 
372 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 And that which is prohibited and untawful it is necessary to account 
 so .” — Rashid-ul-By’an. 
 
 The past tense of a verb is often used in a future sense, as in the 
 following extracts : — 
 
 “If absence shall make me sad, or grief on grief shall at night 
 
 ATTACK ME ; 
 
 I will make thy name my helper, Oh ! thou Redresser of Wrongs ! 
 Oh ! thou Selected One ! — Ahmed Shah, Abdali. 
 
 “ Oh ! gentle gale ! if thou wilt bring news of the beloved ; 
 
 Thou wilt remove the absence-burned spots from the heart ” — Ahmed 
 Shah, Abdali. 
 
 The present tense in many instances may also be used in a future 
 signification ; as — 
 
 “ The rapture and bliss of Paradise will be nothing in his eyes, 
 
 When the beloved displayeth one of the charms of her countenance .” — 
 Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
PUSHTO LANGUAGE. 
 
 373 
 
 “ Six brothers , together ivith the army , we will all go with thee ; 
 
 And whatever task thou wilt impose, that we will perform ” — Bah- 
 rain Gur. 
 
 “ /shall have wo concern on account of the bitterness of death, 
 
 If my beloved may be seated by the pillow at the head of my bed .” — - 
 Abd-ul-Hamld. 
 
 565. Two words which resemble each other in sound, are often 
 adopted when one alone would be sufficient ; but one of the words, 
 generally the latter, has no signification, and appears to be used merely 
 for the sake of sound. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 0 C)jMi o LSj o 
 
 k- *i 
 
 
 “ For the sake of the profit of the world it behooveth not , 
 That thou shouldest rend the collar of any one’s fair fame* 
 
 Hamid. 
 
 •Abd-ul- 
 
 j*t> J H *x) 
 
 i> y&ji j IT £jjc> aj 
 
 “ With the insnared heart in the snare of curly locks entwined, 
 
 The mind maketh false arbitration regarding discretion and caution” 
 
 — Abd-ul-Hamid. 
 
APPENDIX I. 
 
 Specimen extract from the Articles of War. 
 
 / / / / ^ / / 
 
 LpjSiJ ^ ^ 
 
 lym Lf<^ ^ 5l i^ 
 
 a) Lpj jlpyiA* <s^ 
 
 s «• • y *» 
 
 «» 
 
 >> ^ A 
 
 j|t> S<>«e <*> ;l 
 
 ** ** / 
 
 O £a* 4 Lfj l i 
 
 / X 
 
 .S^ j ^ ^ lJ 
 
 LTJ> 
 
 
 <*3 
 
 £ L LgXj ^ ^ ^ 
 
 •*v 
 
 0 Lf^ jl ^ . 
 
 Lfi ; fi l i J* d 
 
 tV Lfjl^d <*? ^ LfJ^ J 
 
 s 
 
 A) ^^3 4 ) ^ 
 
 \j^ ^ AM >> 1^. r 5J ^ 
 
 »i «* «* •* 
 
 Crimes punishable by General Court 
 Martial with Dismissal or Suspen- 
 sion of Officers, or by General or Dis- 
 trict Court Martial with Dismissal, 
 Reduction, Corporal Punishment, or 
 Simple Imprisonment with or with- 
 out Solitary Confinement, or Loss of 
 Standing on the Roll of Non-Com- 
 missioned Officers and Soldiers. 
 
11 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 ^9 ^ 
 
 y^. y ) 2^l> 
 
 Article 22. 
 
 ^I^avo do jfa) a^. 
 
 Any Officer or Soldier who shall, 
 
 l d jd J* 
 
 X ** 
 
 in operations in the field, spread re- 
 
 LpjA^. 0 y^ a) a 
 
 ports by words or letters calculated 
 
 a 1 0 c^sk* t) a) y 
 
 to create unnecessary alarm in the 
 
 a*& a) a^ jyA. 
 
 troops, or in the vicinity, or in rear 
 
 / ✓ 
 
 b ^1^5 b ^a-o a^ a) 
 
 of the army ; or 
 
 j&J o !Sj;oU. b y-*)^ 
 
 ^Jli |<>aJ \.iyk b *yj ailaci? 
 
 / - 
 
 
 (** ' , 
 
 r^ f*b 2* 
 
 Article 23. 
 
 ^b ■h v e {r- j 4 $ 
 
 Who shall in action, or previously 
 
 o <*j b o 
 
 V v « * 4 
 
 to going into action, use words tend- 
 
 ^*Jfc]c> aJ ^ y^ 
 
 ing to create alarm or despondency ; 
 
 yxib a) a a. ^ 
 
 or 
 
 ^ / 
 
 L^O^lb b &y>^ a? 
 
 s’ 
 
 **> 1 o^ 
 
 **V 
 
 
 ^iAAM.1 * >^1^. 
 
 r r “ y >* 
 
 Article 24. 
 
 Lf^y ° j* )\ 
 
 Who shall be drunk when on, or 
 
 a j b J*S DiJ aj o for Duty, or on Parade, or on the 
 
 >#• 
 
 aj b yy 0 o*; 
 
 aj b oyy o 
 
 Line of March ; or 
 
APPENDIX, 
 
 111 
 
 
 ' a i •*• ♦ r 
 
 S’* '.♦ . ft *1 
 
 **a <*^v 
 
 jio »Jj 4 *. e/^i ^4 _ji 
 
 ' - 
 
 1^/? y*? 
 
 * ' S^A A 
 
 S<>4£ dJ^A 4 a jl 
 
 ^ A j? 
 
 4*^3 ^ L£^ ^ 4,La 
 
 dJjA 4^ 
 
 ^ " A 
 
 jlj «<>4I5 4*A J ^3d| ^ 4j 
 
 ^ ^ b . ^ " y- 
 
 ♦x « 
 
 „ (^A | S * » ' 
 
 *? l d if/ j " J 5 s j^ 
 
 S 
 
 / / 
 
 ^lb c^J|j>£ (^1*J 43 
 
 " , " a ^ 
 
 L£j-«*> 4^J»A )\ L s) iSj*> 
 
 ^o 43 ^*k 4j ^JOl 4i 
 
 ^4; *yl 
 
 43 d-»^^A O ^SaJ l " ^ % * ^$h 
 dJ^A 0 5^b O b ^^.kS* ^y^A/c 
 dJ^iL jA Ly ^ ^ 
 
 Article 25. 
 
 Who shall strike or force any Sen- 
 try; or 
 
 Article 26. 
 
 Any Soldier who shall be grossly 
 insubordinate or insolent to his 
 Superior Officer in the execution of 
 his office ; or grossly insubordinate 
 and violent in the presence of a Court 
 Martial ; or 
 
 Article 27, 
 
 Who, being on actual service, shall 
 refuse to assist in making field 
 works ; 
 
IV 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 sjf vy H 'i 
 
 - > 
 
 ^ <o sjlj j Jjijy 
 
 ♦* ' 
 
 cV jk* sL-f^ af 
 
 a) ^.*w^Lo <3 
 
 • ^ *'''■' s s- t\ 
 
 *» 
 
 s s s A H / 
 
 jfc^sUJ a*& j AaJj* 
 
 cf" ^ ^ £ 
 
 Shall, if an Officer, on conviction, be 
 sentenced to be dismissed the service, 
 or to be suspended from Rank and 
 Pay and Allowances ; 
 
 *> y Lfj ^ ^ 
 
 / *v 
 
 b & a*& ^ 
 
 ^Sl^o oJ|t>* Lfj^ ^ 
 
 s 
 
 \s* *> j 5 y l/ ^y 
 
 Ij O <*) I 
 
 b b 
 
 0.3b sbJ^axji ^ l**^J I Ac 
 
 Lf ^ t> Jjf a) ajyto 
 
 jf »UlK aj a} 
 
 b vfJjLo j b t> oib 
 
 A # y ^ ^ 
 
 ^Mjob' 0 aj (>a 3 b 
 
 And, if a Soldier, shall, on conviction 
 before a General, or District, or Gar- 
 rison Court Martial, be sentenced to 
 suffer such punishment as a General, 
 
 or District, or Garrison Court Mar- 
 \ 
 
 tial is by these Articles of War re- 
 spectively empowered to award ; 
 
 Provided, that such Offender shall 
 not be sentenced to Death, or Trans- 
 portation, or Imprisonment with 
 hard labour. * 
 
 0 A 
 
 tj eJl 
 
 
 bj**» 
 
 A/vw,A3 |^j ^y> 
 
 s 
 
 2>. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 IDIOMATICAL TALES, ENGLISH AND PUSHTO. II. 
 
 The Afridi and the Mulla. 
 
 A certain Afridi being desirous to learn to read, went into a village to 
 a Mulla and said to him, that it would be a great favour if he would 
 give him lessons. The Mulla asked him whether he had learnt any 
 thing previously, and the Afridi told him that he had not learned to 
 read. He then asked him what he would commence with, and the latter 
 replied, that he would do as the tutor might direct. The Mulla told 
 him that in the first place he should get the Alphabet by heart, and 
 then commence reading the first section of the Koran; to which the 
 Afridi having agreed, he was requested to come the next morning. 
 
 When the Afridi made his appearance the next morning, the Mulla 
 taking the Alphabet in his hand pointed out the first letter, and request- 
 ing his scholar to repeat after him, said “ Alif.” “ Alup” repeated the 
 Afridi. “ That is not the pronunciation,” said the teacher, “ repeat exactly 
 as I say — Alif.” “ Alup ” says the Afridi again with the greatest 
 
 innocence possible. “ Do not pronounce it so,” said the Mulla, “ call it 
 Alif ;” and the Afridi like an obedient pupil obeying his instructor to 
 the letter safd, “ Do not pronounce it so, call it Alup” The Mulla 
 again said, “ That is not correct, call it Alif.” “ That is not correct, 
 call it Alup” said the Afridi. The Mulla, who was not a second Job, 
 now losing all patience said, “ Oh ! infidel, call it Alif,” on which the 
 Afridi replied, “ Oh ! infidel, call it Alup” The Mulla at this becom- 
 ing very angry gave the Afridi a box on the ear. The latter now thought 
 within himself, “ Master commanded me to repeat whatever he said, and 
 doubtless it is necessary that I should also do as he does ;” so thinking 
 this a part of the lesson, he dealt the Mulla a hearty box on the ear in 
 
VI 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 return. At this specimen of Afridiness, the latter becoming more 
 enraged than ever, seized the Afridi by the throat ; and the pupil obev- 
 
 state they both rose from their squatting position and commenced wrest- 
 ling. At length the Afridi having the advantage in strength, succeeded 
 with little trouble, in laying the Mulla at full length on his back, and 
 seated himself on his breast ; at the same time looking towards the lat- 
 ter expecting him to go on with the lesson. 
 
 In this unpleasant situation it struck the Mulla that his amiable pupil 
 might probably have taken his words, “ to imitate whatever he might 
 say,” in too literal a light, and that possibly he might be only imitating 
 him in this instance ; so taking his hands off the Afridi he exclaimed, 
 “Oh! Infidel, let me go.” The Afridi replied, “Oh! Infidel, let me 
 go,” and allowed the Mulla to get up ; after which he said, “ Master ! 
 that was not a good lesson by any means, it was a hard fight.” The 
 Mulla answered, “ You speak truly ; to-morrow it will come to swords.” 
 “ If such is the case,” said the Afridi, “ I will go home and fetch my 
 sword,” and he set out accordingly. The Mulla glad of this opportunity, 
 thought there was no time to be lost ; and that very night he made 
 himself scarce. 
 
 ing his instructor to the letter seized him by the throat also. In this 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 Vll 
 
 A ^ 
 
 ^—5 ^ a *^ *lb Lf*i 
 
 «« M /• 
 
 d*is\j Ia**^ 8} ^1/0 S^a**» 4X& <x) ^a»J (**^ 
 
 4 t r^ ^ s ^ H Lf^y 1 ‘"t &j 
 
 , .s y a # 9 % ' .9 ^r A , " . 
 
 C— fti) 4j|^ 4 a. ) Xj y J-? J L_J^fiw ^a^ 4) Oj j Um 8^a) 
 
 ^ ' , A ' 9 .9 9? 9 
 
 ^l*o Lo d)jj 4xi& 43 i*} 1^ Xj 4a* 4 a. jib 8t) 43 ^^.w» A 1 l) ^ 8} rtJl ^ 8j 
 
 x 9 9 9^ 9 *9 
 
 LJJl 4 >!j 4 j)j du> ^wjS>!l> ^ sj ^>L ^-J' ; xj L^t>jyl ( a 3 ! j xj 
 
 9 9 9 ' 9 
 
 43 1j ^a. lo ^ 8; !^U c— Jl ^ 43!^ 4-0 j 85 Lft>^l 
 
 s 9 * -' ^ 
 
 ^Isj c-^I J <*$* ^to I )j di\j Lp<>3 |c> ^ xj L£&yf L-iJ! 
 
 ^ 9 ~ y ’ ^ ^p x ^ /* 
 
 J^Sl LfO^sl L-iJl 43 |^ 8 ^ u?| ^ 8 ; 4 ? Lf^^l & y»* 
 
 / / /• / 
 
 4) u-J! <ulj vjpl j »; 4)^; <jUo £L»| j 4a» 
 
 ^ .» «* 
 
 9 t\ A A ✓ Qs* 
 
 4j3b U 8^ y I 8 ^aaA. 8^3 ^ 1 4au 4a A. ^aA. (3 t) 
 
 ’ /" / ^ 
 
 9 * 9 ^9^99 
 
 dijj xj dxit d) pjJj Xj xj 4 is* xljA 8j ^tul 4^ (^C>^i| 
 
 , ' ' ' 9 ' ' 9 , ^ ' 
 
 8^31^ ^ !<^ < *‘*‘^ > (*^ ^ ^Iaa«| 4^ 4a. 8|^aw 
 
 L^(>^S| LpO 4j ^ 4A|^ 4J ^b*w| 4t^AAi/0 Xj±j\ 
 
 S' s' 11 
 
 ^ # ^ ^ t ' A s' A ' . ' ' * ' + 
 
 pb Xj*) j Lf^5| d \jzyo jl d& J4$ 4 ) cubj 4) L->y 
 
 if*" " A l"*l . ^ 9 % \ * ' * ' 
 
 J%J Jj5J^ ^ ^ *ub° y !;* 5 *j c^"“' 0 bfj' 0 
 
 ^5 aj j| o.~£_j sj aCcj aj tft>j,i| syj aXf a] ^.j 
 
 i_yb ^ Jr- jy <*$■ ^ j 1 AaaaS^ 
 
 4J 4cc> 43 4J j^Sv (.<0 4a. 4^j j5si !^U Lp^ 4J 
 
 Ua. ^0 4)1^ 8* d£ A,) ij &j xj 4a. 4a. jj 
 
 ^ *v ^ *r 
 
 ^ >» / / /» 
 
 to (^! J 8^ 4J tpJsJjil ^5 4xA 4] J.A3 
 
Till 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 utytij, ^ */ J " ^ cr^ _)l 
 
 I ' ' ^ m ' * ' A t • . \^ ' A 
 
 ^)W> ^<sA ^y [^y^*** ^ ^ ij <D ^ dt) O jl 
 
 J)^ ^ ^ 1 * LwLiij * 5* 5* ^ i L-i? ^5 ^ 
 
 ti^ jy & Af 5 j Lf-J ^ Lf LfJ 
 
 j\jk ^ J J J&y* ^ ^Jlsr^A ^U jj <t^» Sf 
 
 " - ^ ." A />* 
 
 (^AA* ^ 4^£i <£*& <U ^1 5^) ^ 
 
 The Grammarian and the Ass. 
 
 It is related, that KisaM, the Grammarian, Mas sitting one day in his 
 house, and heard some person call out in the street ; — f Hear, Oh ye peo- 
 ple, a wonder ! the ass upon which I am now riding is KisaM, the Gram- 
 marian ; let those who are absent be called that they may behold him/ 
 The Grammarian ran out in a rage, to discover who it was that had 
 made an ass of him, and saw a tall fellow with a large head, to whom he 
 went up and said ; — f Pray Sir, how comes it, that Kisa/yi whom we 
 know to be a man, is turned into a brute V f I will tell you/ says the 
 man, — f last night I offered up a prayer to God for that purpose, in order 
 to release ^CEmar* from the beating of Zaid, and getting up sometime 
 afterwards to shut the door, I found this very ass at the threshold, and I 
 therefore naturally enough concluded, that my prayer was granted, and 
 that God had transformed him as you see/ Kisa/yi laughed heartily 
 at the supposed stupidity of the fellow, and returned to his house ex- 
 claiming ; — 1 La hawla wala kuwwuta ilia hiHaln ' — t There is no power, 
 and no strength but in God/ 
 
 * CEmar and Zaid are fictitious names used by the Arabian Scholiasts and 
 Grammarians in their examples. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 IX 
 
 
 d Jai 
 
 6 '-M“ *i Ji *v s ?" 5 t^id' 
 
 Ojks* Lf 1 > Lf^^i 0 Jb' ^ £**° ^ 
 
 j A Lf ^ Lfj s * i*i jj*» y *J a*. !o jJ& ? c Ai i»l> 
 
 a ^ \^i) *5 <*$■ ^s" *? *^ s ='° 5 j?^- a *^ i_)° <**• '— 
 
 •V / ** ** " 
 
 9 ' , >> S S t\ S x 
 
 *$* L£ J ^ CL>j^ \j j4> j\ Am j4$ Aj |j 
 
 a b ^ Lf^r ^5 ^ s j ■*$• Lf J ,J 
 
 /. i> ^ . A . . ' ' ' .9 ' * A 
 
 (^?| J ^1 <iu> ^ a <*s A <U& ja*j L^c Ji 
 
 jj C— A2t je*, (iX^jv ^*jb*3| ^^3 1 *S <A^. 
 
 ✓ 
 
 0 ik * jty <k*“ b1$£j pl\) AJ Xj &) l) Xj A^. sS 
 
 »» •* ** rt ’ 
 
 a) I'J'&J t) j^c A&> Sjb t> t) ^A. !>lo <*;*. 8} ifi<-> 
 
 * 99* * . S'-* s, S S I t\ . s s 
 
 o ^j^s* *! 9 ^ ^ ^ ^ *j-^ a Ln^^b ** y a) ^$ aw 
 
 U ^<3 j |j ^*0 sjljyJ aj Lfjly° 
 
 x 9 h ** 9 ^ 9 i 9 
 
 &*jS <i 2 ^. Am ^jLX ^! ci)^ ji)^a 3 l-co ^-a- %y ^ ^ 
 
 S */ 
 
 3 ^ Lp^^ 1^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 
 
 dd)| b ^| E^3 Vj (J^A.V ^ ^| a5 Aj) \£ j] (Jc>A^^ 
 
 u 
 
 L^ 
 
 The Old man and the Doctor. 
 
 An old man complained to a doctor of bad digestion. Oh let bad 
 digestion alone, said the doctor, for it is one of the concomitants of old 
 age. He then stated his weakness of sight. Don't meddle with weak- 
 ness of sight, replied the doctor, for that also is one of the concomitants 
 of old age. He complained to him of a difficulty of hearing. Alas how 
 
X 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 distant is hearing, said the doctor, from old men ! difficulty of hearing is 
 a steady concomitant of old age. He complained to him of want of 
 sleep. How widely separated, said the doctor, are sleep and old men, for 
 want of sleep is certainly a concomitant of old age. He complained to 
 him of a decrease of bodily vigour. This is an evil, replied the doctor, that 
 soon hastens on old men, for want of vigour is a necessary concomitant 
 of old age. The old man (unable to keep his patience any longer) called 
 out to his companions — f Seize upon the booby ! lay hold of the blockhead ! 
 drag along the ignorant idiot ! that dolt of a doctor, who understands 
 nothing, and who has nothing to distingush him from a parrot, but the 
 human figure, with his concomitants, of old age, forsooth ! the only words 
 he seems capable of uttering.’ The doctor smiled, and said, Come my 
 old boy, get into a passion, for this also is a concomitant of old age. 
 
 . '' A ' 
 
 O j] *)\j 0 Jib 
 
 > t ^ A 9 m | < A 
 
 ■l a) U-a. * sj <0 L— 
 
 V' ' ^ 
 
 a) ^ L dt& L-a. 
 
 £ ** J Lj jZ, aSjp ^jo L? 
 
 ^JbXji y Vy=- H ^ J A ^ Vy*- ‘J 
 
 a> ^pO a) ^pO ^ LpjL' 0 l<^ LpO SyOj-A. 
 
 / 7 M 
 
 ^ A S' *\ i S ' • * • 
 
 SO Lp^ 10 aa* & ^ {j? 0 JJJ a^» 3 
 
 / *• 
 
 *ili Lp^ ° ^ ^ ** )X) H 
 
 V 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 XI 
 
 / M ^ A . 9 - . y n *■ 
 
 ) M y*& ji U'bj \) J*L j\ Jiw j43 MJJ ^ 
 
 9 A 
 
 A '9 
 
 {jgo ju isy^ [} j |o $j(j £ o 
 
 ♦♦ ♦• H H 
 
 ^oL> ^ 1 — b ^.4>2 !w| |0 jy$ cJ ^aa>U j 
 
 "' t' v 
 
 ^ sji) ftp Jf ^)y° d ^ of fiP off o Jl xd 6 
 
 C - C ' - 
 
 9 A '' 9 . ' t s . 
 
 *$•> *J Lf^ i_jbvj Oj»l *? Lf ^ 
 
 ^ ^ ** s s * ** 
 
 L> <JaO <W ^ ^ ^5 ^4-5 ^P^aJ* ^jA***» Lpl 
 
 so 
 
 Umbsur — The Joy of his Parents. 
 
 I resided at Busrah, said a certain Arabian Yorick, as a parson and 
 professor of humanity, and was one day a good deal amused by a strange 
 fellow, squint -eyed, straddle-footed, lame of both legs, with rotten teeth, 
 stammering tongue, staggering in his gait like a man intoxicated, puffing 
 and blowing like a thirsty dog, and foaming at the mouth like an angry 
 camel, who came up and seated himself before me. ‘ Whence come you/ 
 said I, ‘ Oh father of gladness V ‘ Prom home, please your worship/ said 
 he. ‘ And pray where is your home V I rejoined, ‘ and what is the cause 
 of your journey V ‘ My home/ he replied, ‘ is near the great mosque, ad- 
 joining the poor-house, and I am come for the purpose of being married, 
 and to beg you will perform the ceremony. The object of my choice 
 is this long-tongued, importunate, hump-backed, scarlet skinned, one- 
 eyed, no-nosed, stinking, deaf, wide-moutlied daughter of my uncle.* 
 ‘ Do you agree Miss Long-tongue, said I, to marry this Mr. Pot-belly V 
 ‘Ay/ said the lady (with a great deal of Doric brevity) ‘Then accept my 
 friend/ cried I, ‘ this woman for your wife, take her home, cherish and 
 protect her/ So he took her by the hand and departed. 
 
Xll 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Now it happened that about nine months after this event, that they 
 
 when my old friend Adonis called out, — f Oh your worship ! we have 
 been blessed with a most sweet and fascinating child, and are come to 
 request you will bless and give him a name, and offer up a prayer for his 
 parents/ Now, what should I behold but a little urchin, stone-blind, 
 hare-lipped, without the use of its hands, splay-footed, bald-headed, ass- 
 eared, bull-necked, not possessing one sense out of the five, and altoge- 
 ther frightful and deformed ; in short a perfect epitome of all the quali- 
 ties of his parents. At this sight I said to them, ‘ Be thankful for this 
 darling boy, and call him Umbsur,* for truly he has all your perfections 
 combined in himself, and that child is admirable indeed, who resembles 
 his parents/ 
 
 both returned to me rejoicing, and they had hardly seated themselves 
 
 * Literally — The Joy of his Parents, being compounded of mother, ud fa - 
 tlier, and joy. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 XU1 
 
 M " A A ✓ . . *" ' . " A , 
 
 C** ** ^ /*l i^jr^b *si ^ ^ ^ JuUw 
 
 ✓ v I ** - ** " 
 
 $ h $ s" * ' '*> 9 
 
 \^\ ^J*^*'**ji J} w Mj) Ii3 U-a. ^ 
 
 JLa/aO cU <jJ I/O 5t3 lo-fiw 8^ & jj) <£J^) ^1 8^*3 ^jCH^ 
 
 Lf^ 5 * c^j ^ j; S^/ ^ Uj Lfl ^ 
 
 *;b UX ^p| jlIa.!^ ^l> ^Jfc ^ j sj U ^jgw.: j xj jl^JJ <ju a*a> <U$^ 
 
 ^pjl(3,A^ j| Xj** >1? J ! ^j: & 1^ <*j* <*^ 1 !^ 
 
 s 
 
 j£ <J X ^ *jJ J 0 C^i ^ >5 
 
 ia. <0 C^m» 13 ^ ^1 jlcj; Lj dLs-** U Xj» XJJ dU X^jJ 
 
 t) ^*^5 <l) L!L^a 2^. ^jgl j &j <£J l«$.-£k. ^^^3 
 
 M H 
 
 ^ I** A i *'' ♦*♦ I ♦ A A , . 
 
 j**>^ y (^i3 {sy** I <3^ d . >* ^ ?d ^ " L? 1 ^ 
 
 _jl ^1; l^C)b j)}£ v j\ Lf^" <^=J ^ p' 1 if Jt <_jJfl) ^ 
 
 dUi <U* 0 L«5jls dlj ^ jit LSjJJ Ut) 8 jU <3j^b j^/0 J 
 
 Ji 2-.V <j 6^ l_ 4 ed» ^ Ji ^d; ^ */i / 5 
 
 LT^)d " <*d^ ^ oj^ ^ ^ 
 
 y o ♦« •* 
 
 0 i^«jU J; j’ (^Jj Ojj \ yD 61 y^ji) yj y i> S->" Lf J- - ^ 
 
 ** ** y 
 
 Lf^ *j l v J »j ^ <« ^ <_fJ j)/ ^ ^ o ^ J^d jy° 
 
 ♦• * y A - ?AA - p r ^ . A A ''x a t( A 
 
 J^5 Lf^ r ^^a/o| io3 3 ^y) j\ {£y y*» j{^ ^)' Am 
 
 j}^ l3 | J J (iXA j\ ^V I >3 L’^AXj.j l_t» 
 
 ** >i - 
 
 I I A " " 9 „ 
 
 L fy j^i jl jj* 0 c>y ;i f J}-°' ^ Lf 1 ^ *■? 
 
 THE END ^ {.{J u ; 
 

 
ERRATA 
 
 Please make the following corrections with a pen. 
 
 Page 
 
 1 
 
 uotef fo> 
 
 * page 6 
 
 read page 3 
 
 8 
 
 11 
 
 a 
 
 
 a 
 
 | " t 9* '' 
 O ')j* 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 24 
 
 
 badah 
 
 a 
 
 b add ah 
 
 10 
 
 1 
 
 )> 
 
 &* 
 
 a 
 
 
 a 
 
 9-11 
 
 jy 
 
 etc. 
 
 • ^ / 
 
 a 
 
 v^Jl-k. e tc. 
 * * 
 
 » 
 
 19 
 
 V) 
 
 sLi 0 
 
 a 
 
 e!>° 
 
 11 
 
 9 
 
 a 
 
 
 a 
 
 •v # 
 
 12 
 
 4 
 
 a 
 
 / 
 
 a 
 
 / ' 
 
 » 
 
 15 
 
 » 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 & 0 Aa. 
 
 a 
 
 23 
 
 a 
 
 S 
 
 a 
 
 ¥j 
 
 if 
 
 24 
 
 a 
 
 
 n 
 
 lyj 
 
 * 
 
 15 
 
 8 
 
 a 
 
 y-jj^ 
 
 if 
 
 
 a 
 
 18 
 
 a 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 17 
 
 8 
 
 if 
 
 
 a 
 
 cj&'j 
 
 
 18 
 
 if 
 
 or Which, 
 
 etc. ,, 
 
 or c 5 ^,* which, etc. 
 
 18 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 Lf-J 
 
 » 
 
 12 
 
 a 
 
 and jj&* 
 
 a 
 
 and & 
 
 a 
 
 25 
 
 a 
 
 LSf iA^f etc. 
 
 a 
 
 * 
 
 ' A • , 
 
 ISJ* L S^f etC ‘ 
 
 19 
 
 6 
 
 if 
 
 <sj 
 
 a 
 
 *// 
 
 20 
 
 12-19 
 
 if 
 
 in the declension of 
 
 iSj* place ( ) over the (j* thus 
 
 n 
 
 22 
 
 if 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 r 
 
11 
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 22 
 
 11 for 
 
 
 read 
 
 
 
 15 
 
 33 
 
 Lf 
 
 33 
 
 LS 
 
 V 
 
 23 
 
 11 
 
 33 
 
 X 
 
 33 
 
 9 
 
 24 
 
 14 
 
 33 
 
 s> * * 
 
 33 
 
 
 33 
 
 21 
 
 S3 
 
 &}& a 
 
 33 
 
 
 25 
 
 3 
 
 33 
 
 / • ' 
 
 33 
 
 9 ■ " ' 
 J 
 
 26 
 
 2 
 
 33 
 
 cows, etc. etc. 
 
 33 
 
 ly or ci'j'P 1 (Kandahar) 
 
 27 
 
 16 
 
 33 
 
 9 9 
 
 33 
 
 j [ cows, etc. 
 
 )) 
 
 23-26 
 
 33 
 
 
 33 
 
 C5\>^ 
 
 29 
 
 1 
 
 33 
 
 
 33 
 
 
 30 
 
 11 
 
 33 
 
 * .. '9 
 
 3333 3^3 
 
 33 
 
 ' ' *' * 
 33)3 3 
 
 33 
 
 17-23 
 
 33 
 
 Gen. yjjj z Act. 
 
 33 
 
 Gen. Act. 
 
 33 
 
 9 
 
 33 
 
 * [ J 3)3 
 
 33 
 
 d [ Jjjj J»>« 
 
 34 
 
 17 
 
 33 
 
 
 33 
 
 
 36 
 
 3 
 
 33 
 
 AiJUx j JUwaiJ 
 
 33 
 
 dA-flye j 
 
 ✓ X 
 
 36 
 
 24 
 
 33 
 
 
 33 
 
 5-* 5->v 
 
 37 
 
 10 
 
 33 
 
 
 33 
 
 > 
 
 (* 
 
 38 
 
 23 
 
 33 
 
 
 33 
 
 L5^ 
 
 39 
 
 4 
 
 33 
 
 pi 1 * 
 
 33 
 
 
 40 
 
 10 
 
 33 
 
 +*&* o 
 
 33 
 
 '*',1^9 
 
 p&XsO 
 
 * X 
 
 42 
 
 6 
 
 33 
 
 OJ 
 
 X 
 
 33 
 
 Ai 
 
 33 
 
 8 
 
 33 
 
 
 33 
 
 ^i^oo 
 
 33 
 
 9 
 
 33 
 
 cj’ 1 } 
 
 33 
 
 C5 5 !* 
 
 • X 
 
 44 
 
 6 
 
 33 
 
 
 3i 
 
 , 4 _c^ in all instances 
 
ERRATA, 
 
 111 
 
 44 
 
 7 /or 
 
 read 
 
 ii 
 
 1 1 „ */ 
 
 „ jki A) 
 
 it 
 
 .12 „ <6 A*4> *1 
 
 ✓ 
 
 „ <6 aJ 
 
 46 
 
 6 „ Ij 
 
 a ^ 
 
 47 
 
 1 » vypiy 1 - 
 
 » 
 
 s 
 
 50 
 
 17 « C£»l 0 *1 
 
 if iSJj* t&j* 
 
 53 
 
 6 » (*> f Si'j 
 
 a & 
 
 55 
 
 7 „ « 
 
 a * 
 
 56 
 
 io ,, ^yf 
 
 a & 
 
 57 
 
 9 „ l rj&&- 
 
 w UViJ* 
 
 a 
 
 10 „ £j* 
 
 9^ 
 
 a 
 
 62 
 
 25 „ j** 
 
 * 
 
 » J** 
 
 65 
 
 11 „ a 
 
 a * 
 
 a 
 
 12 „ <-j 
 
 tt *** J 
 
 a 
 
 » J*5 
 
 a dP$ 
 
 68 
 
 24 „ 
 
 . 9 
 
 a J** 
 
 70 
 
 15 „ 
 
 tt W 
 
 71 
 
 16 „ *! or j’J' 1 
 
 a jt *1 && or ji* 
 
 71 
 
 21 „ 
 
 93 LS ** 
 
 72 
 
 73 
 
 75 
 
 22 )} 
 
 8 „ \£d 
 
 10 n iSS** 
 
 15 „ 
 
 8 &J 
 
 
 tfiS 
 
 i.st 
 
 » IS* 
 
 ii 
 
 + * 
 
 r 
 
 S3 
 
IT 
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 75 
 
 20 for 
 
 J** 
 
 read y* 
 
 a 
 
 21 
 
 99 
 
 or y A 
 
 99 
 
 jo.x~*ji or y 
 
 76 
 
 1 
 
 99 
 
 
 99 
 
 JlaAawC 
 
 }j 
 
 9 
 
 99 
 
 J** 
 
 99 
 
 .9 
 
 y* 
 
 99 
 
 11 
 
 99 
 
 
 99 
 
 y 
 
 99 
 
 12 
 
 99 
 
 r-y **. *> 
 
 99 
 
 yy ^ 8) 
 
 77 
 
 12 
 
 99 
 
 
 99 
 
 yy 
 
 
 16 
 
 99 
 
 
 99 
 
 aJl^ 
 
 99 
 
 23 
 
 99 
 
 
 99 
 
 A 9 - 
 
 is**y 
 
 99 
 
 24 
 
 99 
 
 ^jl & *** 
 
 99 
 
 Lf^jl A * A 
 
 78 
 
 9 
 
 99 
 
 a 
 
 99 
 
 
 93 
 
 38 
 
 99 
 
 
 99 
 
 . * 
 
 79 
 
 7 
 
 99 
 
 3d±jS 
 
 99 
 
 aJjo£ 
 
 80 
 
 20 
 
 99 
 
 ✓ 
 
 0*^* ) 
 
 99 
 
 
 99 
 
 22 
 
 99 
 
 A A" - 
 
 99 
 
 A A " V A ' 
 
 .i or Jy 
 
 81 
 
 23 
 
 99 
 
 ✓ A 
 r>~ 
 
 99 
 
 ✓ A 
 
 82 
 
 6 & 7 
 
 93 
 
 
 99 
 
 
 99 
 
 9 & 10 
 
 99 
 
 and jy 
 
 99 
 
 and 
 
 83 
 
 8 
 
 99 
 
 Air=» 
 
 99 
 
 A 
 
 85 
 
 19 
 
 99 
 
 &* 
 
 99 
 
 dJ 
 
 99 
 
 23 
 
 99 
 
 S* 
 
 99 
 
 
 86 
 
 17 
 
 99 
 
 A 9 A 9 
 
 ^ or ^ J 
 
 99 
 
 * a 9 a 9 
 
 y or y j 
 
 99 
 
 15 
 
 99 
 
 or cr- j ^ 
 
 v • 
 
 39 
 
 A A 9 ' 
 
 <y or tr -* ) *** 
 • / •/ 
 
 87 
 
 9 
 
 99 
 
 
 99 
 
 . 9 
 
 yA 
 
ERRATA. V 
 
 87 
 
 20 for 
 
 {Gy** 
 
 read ^y* ***> 
 
 88 
 
 21 
 
 »> 
 
 <^u 
 
 *• 
 
 /■ 
 
 9 ) 
 
 C5^ 
 ** ✓ 
 
 89 
 
 16 
 
 a 
 
 /* 
 
 99 
 
 
 90 
 
 5 
 
 >> 
 
 
 99 
 
 .9'* - 
 
 92 
 
 4 
 
 >) 
 
 d^ and 
 
 99 
 
 and 
 
 tj 
 
 11 
 
 a 
 
 * 
 
 99 
 
 
 >> 
 
 22 
 
 » 
 
 
 99 
 
 
 95 
 
 7 
 
 jt 
 
 ^13 or 4.5^1** 
 
 99 
 
 i <d i oi* f g -LU 
 
 96 
 
 6 
 
 >> 
 
 Jz>y 
 
 99 
 
 4/ 
 
 a 
 
 11 
 
 )> 
 
 MS and ty[ i/j 
 
 99 
 
 ?/ir? and Wj_/ ) 
 
 >f 
 
 22 
 
 a 
 
 Xjr^y and 
 
 99 
 
 and nj 1 *^* 
 
 97 
 
 10 
 
 
 J<SijX5 
 
 99 
 
 Jaa/0 
 
 99 
 
 13 
 
 » 
 
 
 99 
 
 
 104 
 
 13 
 
 
 “ wealth and goods period: 
 
 >9 
 
 » 9 
 
 “ wealth and goods , 
 
 
 18 
 
 )i 
 
 . » 
 L5^ 
 
 99 
 
 • 
 
 106 
 
 5 
 
 99 
 
 ifijJl. 
 
 99 
 
 C- 
 
 » 
 
 14 
 
 99 
 
 
 99 
 
 A X* 
 
 -5 ^ 
 
 107 
 
 21 
 
 99 
 
 
 99 
 
 
 108 
 
 4 
 
 99 
 
 I/O 
 
 99 
 
 
 » 
 
 7 
 
 99 
 
 & 
 
 99 
 
 
 a 
 
 9 
 
 99 
 
 
 99 
 
 
 111 
 
 9 
 
 99 
 
 Ali. 
 
 99 
 
 9 
 
 aJU. 
 
 113 
 
 3 
 
 99 
 
 
 99 
 
 d&*Vj 
 
 
 15 
 
 99 
 
 <x3(j 
 
 99 
 
 «iob 
 
 ✓ 
 
VI 
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 113 
 
 21 for 
 
 ( ) 
 
 read ( ) 
 
 314 
 
 4 „ 
 
 and 
 
 33 (*Lr“ an ^ °^*** x3 
 
 )> 
 
 12 „ 
 
 y° 
 
 9 
 
 33 y* 
 
 )) 
 
 23 „ 
 
 and 
 
 ,9 , -9 . 
 
 „ y* and ^y> 
 
 115 
 
 16 „ 
 
 yP* 
 
 •9s. 9 
 33 JS 1 ' 0 
 
 116 
 
 19 „ 
 
 Jpp 
 
 33 <A~>^ 
 
 117 
 
 3 „ 
 
 pjy u 
 ** / 
 
 33 C$5'^ jtX> 
 
 119 
 
 12 » 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 18 „ 
 
 15^-0 43 
 • ✓ 
 
 ,7 t 83 
 
 120 
 
 7 & 8 „ 
 
 and 
 
 „ ^y~M and &y 
 
 » 
 
 19 „ 
 
 LSJ* 
 
 77 ^ 
 
 33 
 
 20 „ 
 
 ^ljL<kT (&*> 
 
 JjL^f (&/o 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 121 
 
 15 „ 
 
 
 33 ** 
 
 124 
 
 19 „ 
 
 LS) 1 ^ 
 
 •V 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 20 „ 
 
 9 -. . 9 
 
 9 -f- 9 
 
 «A<»J • 
 
 77 * • 3 
 
 126 
 
 15 „ 
 
 A\J 
 
 „ ** 
 
 127 
 
 17 „ 
 
 jjGUaxi 
 
 77 U 
 
 129 
 
 17 „ 
 
 C5> G 
 
 » </^ b 
 
 130 
 
 9 „ 
 
 -■• A 
 AJl) j| 
 
 „ 430 > 
 
 „ 25 & 26 „ 
 
 i)$j$ and dyr? 
 
 „ JlJiri ail< l 
 
 
 
 
 
 133 
 
 21 „ 
 
 
 ,7 ^ 
 
 137 
 
 23 „ 
 
 J P 
 
 77 
 
 77 
 
 33 
 
 * 
 
 SjL 
 
 24 
 
140 
 
 a 
 
 142 
 
 145 
 
 >> 
 
 149 
 
 ii 
 
 152 
 
 153 
 
 a 
 
 154 
 
 M 
 
 155 
 
 159 
 
 160 
 
 162 
 
 163 
 
 165 
 
 168 
 
 169 
 
 170 
 
 171 
 
 174 
 
 176 
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 Vll 
 
 8 for 
 
 
 read 
 
 
 12 
 
 a 
 
 c 
 
 a 
 
 jfi 
 
 14 
 
 a 
 
 y 
 
 a 
 
 <// 
 
 12 
 
 a 
 
 
 a 
 
 y» 
 
 22 
 
 a 
 
 iM 
 
 a 
 
 
 5 
 
 )> 
 
 
 >j 
 
 
 13 
 
 a 
 
 * + 
 J* * 
 
 a 
 
 //* ^ 
 j* * 
 
 7 
 
 )) 
 
 
 a 
 
 Lsy*±i~*j 
 
 2 
 
 a 
 
 & 
 
 a 
 
 1<L 
 
 1 O V 
 
 l 
 
 12 
 
 a 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 3 
 
 » 
 
 isy° 
 
 a 
 
 A 
 
 LSj* 
 
 y 
 
 20 
 
 a 
 
 Aj 
 
 a 
 
 &J 
 
 11 
 
 ji 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 10 
 
 a 
 
 *bt 
 
 a 
 
 w 
 
 10 
 
 a 
 
 > 
 
 <S*J* 
 
 a 
 
 
 15 
 
 a 
 
 confused and confounded, read confused an 
 
 23 
 
 a 
 
 yard. 
 
 a 
 
 yards. 
 
 23 
 
 a 
 
 j 
 
 a 
 
 9 
 
 8 
 
 a 
 
 i JG lsjS 
 
 a 
 
 t K >jy 
 / 
 
 13 
 
 a 
 
 9-3 
 
 a 
 
 »9> 
 
 10 
 
 a 
 
 1 A 
 vy* 
 
 a 
 
 
 24 
 
 a 
 
 9 
 
 j 
 
 a 
 
 9 
 
 J 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 / / / 
 
 a 
 
 / /• 
 
viii 
 
 179 
 
 ISO 
 
 ii 
 
 181 
 
 185 
 
 190 
 
 191 
 
 193 
 
 194 
 
 196 
 
 199 
 
 211 
 
 212 
 
 a 
 
 214 
 
 a 
 
 215 
 
 217 
 
 221 
 
 225 
 
 226 
 
 228 
 
 230 
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 6 for 
 
 
 read 
 
 1 » 
 
 
 a 
 
 V 
 
 aJUij 
 
 13 „ 
 
 9 . 
 
 JrnSk. 
 
 55 
 
 9, 
 
 6 „ 
 
 s 
 
 Mr* 
 
 if 
 
 
 8 „ 
 
 9 * 
 
 if 
 
 Jp 
 
 7 „ 
 
 hath assigned 
 
 if 
 
 HATH ASSIGNED, 
 
 12 „ 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 if 
 
 yy 
 
 s 
 
 22 „ 
 
 y* * 
 
 » 
 
 
 11 „ 
 
 
 a 
 
 e^dLxj jf <i£jjg 
 
 16 „ 
 
 <sp 
 
 a 
 
 <sp 
 
 13 „ besides the regular ones ^ and read besides the re- 
 
 gular ones — ^ and K — 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 7 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 12 
 
 15 
 
 3 
 
 9 
 ■ 7 
 19 
 
 
 a 
 
 • 9 9 
 a 
 
 a 4# 
 
 s 
 
 a * 
 
 • 9 9 
 
 „ of the fragrant zephyr , etc. 
 
 V <5** 
 
 „ P y 
 „ PP 
 „ 4 &'j 
 
 „ P’j 
 
 ✓ A ^ 
 
 « dr" 
 
 read Oh ! fragrant zephyr , etc . 
 if Iff 
 
 A A I 
 
 „ y ^~y 
 
 „ 4 P'b 
 
 * 
 
 a J *1 and tfi 
 
 *j$ j *t and tj)) & 
 
 22 
 
233 
 
 235 
 
 236 
 
 237 
 
 239 
 
 242 
 
 245 
 
 247 
 
 249 
 
 250 
 
 251 
 
 252 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 253 
 
 93 
 
 254 
 
 255 
 
 33 
 
 33 
 
 256 
 
 33 
 
 265 
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 IX 
 
 11 for 
 
 
 read 
 
 
 13 
 
 33 
 
 JJ-” 
 
 33 
 
 P a 
 
 8 
 
 33 
 
 
 33 
 
 C5'*’ Q 
 
 7 
 
 33 
 
 c 
 
 "S' 
 
 33 
 
 " S 
 
 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 7 
 
 33 
 
 
 33 
 
 V 
 
 11 
 
 33 
 
 
 33 
 
 S' 
 
 4 
 
 33 
 
 or for ascending . 
 
 33 
 
 of or for ascending. 
 
 
 
 
 
 •%* 
 
 12 
 
 33 
 
 SMji 
 
 33 
 
 <JFji 
 
 12 
 
 33 
 
 
 33 
 
 S' 
 
 18 
 
 33 
 
 A 
 
 1 5^ 
 
 39 
 
 A 
 
 S' 
 
 8 
 
 33 
 
 
 33 
 
 ifjtrt 
 
 
 33 
 
 last line for Page 170— 
 
 -177. „ 
 
 Page 214—222. 
 
 15 
 
 39 
 
 
 33 
 
 
 16 
 
 93 
 
 JU&Lwe 
 
 Second Future Tense <J^ 
 
 22 
 
 33 
 
 A 
 
 is"** 
 
 33 
 
 A 
 
 V 
 
 6 
 
 33 
 
 
 33 
 
 
 18 
 
 
 
 
 „s 
 
 33 
 
 
 93 
 
 
 23 
 
 93 
 
 p, ' p 
 
 C U j i 
 
 39 
 
 &3 
 
 ,3 
 
 33 
 
 r. ' 
 
 J 
 
 33 
 
 J/j 9 
 
 5 
 
 33 
 
 
 33 
 
 4*5 J 
 
 8 
 
 33 
 
 
 33 
 
 ^ i 
 
 7 
 
 33 
 
 x’ >* 
 
 39 
 
 d*i^pj 
 
 S' 
 
 last 
 
 line is**£*j 
 • * 
 
 33 
 
 
 12 
 
 33 
 
 4/ 
 
 93 
 
 4? 
 
X 
 
 267 
 
 280 
 
 283 
 
 286 
 
 289 
 
 300 
 
 304 
 
 308 
 
 313 
 
 317 
 
 324 
 
 331 
 
 335 
 
 336 
 
 338 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 
 339 
 
 340 
 
 343 
 
 344 
 
 345 
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 10 and 11 or «i 
 
 read 
 
 
 12 for !_}"• > 
 
 99 
 
 ^ J 
 
 s 
 
 18 » / 
 
 99 
 
 j 
 
 22 „ <s} 
 
 99 
 
 <£r 
 
 22 „ ji* 
 
 99 
 
 y.4 
 
 7 „ J? 
 
 99 
 
 J/ 
 
 or 
 
 / 
 
 » j s 
 
 99 
 
 SJpf 
 
 i9 AjjjJi) ixlij Aj j „ expunge the and 
 
 „ page 176) 
 
 read Aj j or 
 
 & a~oJ f 
 
 page 317.) 
 
 a . ? 
 
 AAmaIJ) 
 
 .. 9 
 
 » 
 
 ^ v- 
 
 oo^ 
 
 « 
 
 » 
 
 « y 
 
 ^xJ 
 
 99 & 
 
 99 *jW 
 
 o>^ 
 
 99 
 
 „ “ manner of being inclefi- „ manner of being, indefi- 
 
 nite, as to, etc.” 
 
 9 ' 
 
 99 e»* 
 
 „ of note, for „ i>l 1/f 
 
 » / « ?/ 
 
 nite as to, etc. 
 „ «>*? 
 
 \© 
 
ERRATA. 
 
 XI 
 
 351 
 
 8 for 
 
 “ The imperatives of verbs” 
 
 read 
 
 “ The imperative of verbs” 
 
 354 
 
 2 
 
 a 
 
 Ji 
 
 
 a 
 
 Ji 
 
 357 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 “ the Afghan 
 
 year. The 
 
 3) 
 
 “the Afghan year — The 
 
 
 
 
 Second Sister — ” 
 
 
 Second Sister — ” 
 
 366 
 
 10 
 
 3) 
 
 &S r *Q 
 
 
 33 
 
 A/,* 
 
 371 
 
 21 
 
 33 
 
 r 
 
 Jj x3 
 
 
 33 
 
 d? 
 
 373 
 
 4 
 
 if 
 
 LS ^ 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 33 
 
 
 i 
 
 10 
 
 a 
 
 Ls/y 
 
 
 33 
 
 Lfjj 
 
 )* 
 
 15 
 
 a 
 
 jj 
 
 
 33 
 
 9 . 
 
 jy 
 
 iv 
 
 16 
 
 a 
 
 P rZ 
 
 
 33 
 
 9 9. .9 
 
 vi 
 
 23 
 
 a 
 
 ✓ 
 
 
 33 
 
 
 vii 
 
 16 
 
 a 
 
 99' 
 
 d£>J 
 
 
 33 
 
 t 9f 
 
 duj! 
 
 ix 
 
 8 
 
 a 
 
 A*“^ 
 
 
 33 
 
 
 X 
 
 22 
 
 a 
 
 A 
 
 J* 
 
 
 33 
 
 hi 
 
 xi 
 
 6 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 33 
 
 && iSji f 
 
 xii 
 
 16 
 
 33 
 
 LS& ji 
 
 
 33 
 
 ** ✓ 
 
 if 
 
 20 
 
 33 
 
 . a. 
 
 C5-?^ 
 
 
 33 
 
 A , A # 
 
 xiii 
 
 14 
 
 33 
 
 V v 
 
 
 33 
 
 
 a 
 
 16 
 
 33 
 
 * 
 
 
 33 
 
 1* 
 
■ v ;« 
 
 <s 
 
 .. V 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •c.. 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ »' 
 
 
 
 
 


 
 
 
 
 Mif, 
 
 
 *